Volvo 2017 V60CC Owner Manual

User Manual: Volvo 2017 Volvo V60 Cross Country Owners Manual Pdf | Owner's Manual Pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 406 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Contents
INTRODUCTION
SAFETY
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
CLIMATE
LOADING AND STORAGE
LOCKS AND ALARM
DRIVER SUPPORT
STARTING AND DRIVING
WHEELS AND TIRES
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
SPECIFICATIONS

OWNER'S MANUAL

VÄLKOMMEN!

We trust that you will enjoy many years of safe driving in your Volvo, an

automobile designed with your safety and comfort in mind. To help get

the most from your Volvo, we urge you to familiarize yourself with the

instructions and maintenance information in this owner’s manual. The

owner’s manual can also be found in a mobile app (Volvo manual) and

on Volvo Car’s support site at support.volvocars.com.

We also urge you and your passengers to wear seat belts at all times in

this (or any other) vehicle. And, of course, please do not operate a vehi-

cle if you may be affected by alcohol, medication or any impairment that

could hinder your ability to drive.

Your Volvo is designed to meet all applicable federal safety and emis-

sion standards. If you have any questions regarding your vehicle, please

contact your Volvo retailer or see the article "Contacting Volvo" for infor-

mation on getting in touch with Volvo in the United States and Canada.

2
INTRODUCTION
On-board owner's manual 12
Owner's information 14
Contacting Volvo 15
About this manual 15
Change of ownership 19
Crash event data 19
Volvo Structural Parts Statement 20
Information on the Internet 21
Volvo ID 22
Open Source Software Notice 22
Volvo and the environment 23
Important warnings 24
Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance 25
Technician certification 25
SAFETY
Occupant safety 28
Recall information 28
Reporting safety defects 29
Seat belts – general 30
Seat belts – buckling/unbuckling 31
Seat belt reminder 32
Seat belts – pregnancy 33
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) 33
Front airbags 35
Occupant Weight Sensor 38
Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags 41
Inflatable Curtain (IC) 42
Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS) 43
Crash mode – general information 45
Crash mode – starting the vehicle 46
Crash mode – moving the vehicle 47
Child safety 47
Child restraints 49
Infant seats 51
Convertible seats 53
Booster cushions 55
ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors 56
Top tether anchors 58
Integrated booster cushion – general
information 59
 
Integrated booster cushion – using 61
Integrated booster cushion – stowing 62
Child safety locks 63
CONTENTS

3
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Instrument overview  66
Information displays – introduction 69
Eco Guide* and Power Meter*72
Information displays – indicator symbols 73
Information displays – warning symbols 75
My Car – introduction 77
Information displays – ambient tem-
perature sensor 78
Information displays – trip odometer
and clock 79
Inserting/removing remote key 79
Ignition modes 80
Front seats 81
Front seats – folding backrest*82
Front seats – power seat 82
Key memory – power driver's seat*
and door mirrors 84
Rear seats – head restraints 85
Rear seats – folding backrest 87
Steering wheel 89
Electrically heated* steering wheel 90
Lighting panel 90
High/low beam headlights 91
Active high beams (AHB)*92
Tunnel detection (models with the
rain sensor* only) 93
 
Active Bending Lights (ABL)*93
Auxiliary lights*94
Instrument and "theater" lighting 95
Parking lights 95
Rear fog lights 96
Hazard warning flashers 96
Turn signals 97
Front interior lighting 98
Rear interior lighting 99
Home safe lighting 99
Approach lighting 99
Windshield wipers 100
Rain sensor*101
Windshield washer 101
Tailgate wiper/washer 102
Power windows 103
Power door mirrors 104
Power door mirrors – automatic tilt-
ing/retraction 105
Heated windshield*, rear window and
door mirror defrosters 106
Interior rearview mirror 106
Digital compass*107
Power moonroof* – introduction 108
Power moonroof* – operation 109
 
HomeLink® Wireless Control Sys-
tem* – introduction
110
HomeLink® Wireless Control Sys-
tem* – programming
111
Volvo Sensus 113
Information display – menu controls 114
Information display – menu overview 115
Information display – messages 115
Trip computer – introduction  116
Trip computer – functions, analog
instrument panel 118
Trip computer – functions, digital
instrument panel 121
Trip computer – Supplementary
information 123
Trip computer – Trip statistics 124

4
CLIMATE
Climate – general information 126
Climate – sensors 126
Air quality 127
Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)*128
Climate – menu settings 128
Air distribution – general 129
Electronic climate control (ECC) 130
Heated seats 131
Temperature and blower control 132
Automatic climate control 132
Air conditioning 133
Max. defroster and electrically heated
windshield*133
Air distribution – function 134
Air distribution – recirculation 135
Air distribution – table 136
LOADING AND STORAGE
Storage spaces 140
Tunnel console 142
Tunnel console – 12-volt sockets 142
Glove compartment 143
Vanity mirror 143
12-volt socket in the cargo area*143
Loading – general 144
Loading – roof load carriers 144
Load anchoring eyelets 145
Grocery bag holder 146
Cargo net – mounting/removing 146
Cargo area cover 147
Steel cargo grid 148
LOCKS AND ALARM
Remote key and key blade 150
Remote key – loss 150
Key memory 151
Locking/unlocking confirmation 152
Immobilizer (start inhibitor) 152
Remote key – functions 153
Remote key – range 154
Detachable key blade – general
information 155
Detachable key blade – detaching/
reinserting 155
Detachable key blade – unlocking 156
Private locking 156
Remote key – replacing the battery 157
Keyless drive*– locking/unlocking 159
Keyless drive* – unlocking with key blade 160
Keyless drive* – key memory 161
Keyless drive* – messages 161
Keyless drive* – antenna locations 162
Locking/unlocking – from the outside 163
Manual locking 164
Locking/unlocking – from inside 164
Locking/unlocking – glove compartment 166
Locking/unlocking – tailgate 166
Alarm – general information 168

5
 
Alarm indicator 168
Alarm – arming/disarming 169
Alarm signal 169
Alarm – turning off 170
Alarm-related functions 170
DRIVER SUPPORT
Active chassis* (Four C) 172
Stability system – introduction 172
Stability system – operation 173
Stability system – symbols and messages 175
Adjustable steering force*177
Road Sign Information (RSI)* – intro-
duction 177
Road Sign Information (RSI) – operation 178
Road Sign Information (RSI) – limitations 178
Cruise control (CC) – introduction 179
Cruise control (CC) – engaging and
setting speed 179
Toggling between ACC and CC
(standard Cruise Control) 180
Cruise control (CC) – deactivating 181
Adaptive Cruise Control – introduction 182
Adaptive Cruise Control – function 183
Adaptive Cruise Control – engaging 185
Adaptive Cruise Control – setting speed 186
Adaptive Cruise Control – setting
time interval 187
Adaptive Cruise Control – deactivating 187
Adaptive Cruise Control – passing
another vehicle 189
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) –
Queue Assist 189
 
Radar sensor 191
Adaptive Cruise Control – limitations 192
Adaptive Cruise Control – symbols
and messages 194
Adaptive Cruise Control – trouble-
shooting 196
Distance Alert – introduction 197
Distance Alert – operation 197
Distance Alert – limitations 198
Distance Alert – symbols and messages 200
City Safety – introduction 201
City Safety – function 202
City Safety – operation 203
City Safety – limitations 203
City Safety – troubleshooting 204
City Safety – symbols and messages 206
City Safety – Laser sensor 207
Collision warning – introduction 208
Collision warning* – function 210
Collision warning* – operation 211
Collision warning* – Cyclist detection 212
Collision warning* – Pedestrian detection 213
Collision warning* – limitations 214
The camera’s limitations 216
Collision warning – troubleshooting 217

6
 
Collision warning – symbols and
messages 219
Driver Alert System 221
Driver Alert Control (DAC) – introduction 221
Driver Alert Control (DAC) – operation 222
Driver Alert Control (DAC) – function 223
Driver Alert Control (DAC) – limitations 223
Driver Alert Control (DAC) – symbols
and messages 225
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) –
introduction 227
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) –
operation 228
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) -
limitations 229
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) –
symbols and messages 230
Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – introduction 232
Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – operation 233
Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – limitations 235
Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – symbols
and messages 236
Park assist – introduction 237
Park assist – function 237
Park assist – operation 239
Park assist – limitations 240
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – introduction 241
 
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – function 241
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – operation 242
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – limitations 244
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – symbols
and messages 245
Park assist – troubleshooting 245
Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) –
introduction 246
Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) –
function 246
Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) –
operation 247
Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) –
guiding and marker lines 248
Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) –
limitations 250
BLIS* – introduction 250
BLIS* – function 251
BLIS* – operation 252
BLIS* – Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) 253
BLIS* – limitations 254
BLIS* – messages 255
STARTING AND DRIVING
Starting the engine 258
Switching off the engine 259
Engine Remote Start (ERS)* – intro-
duction 260
Engine Remote Start (ERS)* – star-
ting the engine 260
Engine Remote Start (ERS)* –
switching off the engine 261
Jump starting 261
Transmission – general information 262
Transmission – positions 263
Transmission – Geartronic 264
Transmission – shiftlock override 267
Start/Stop – Hill Start Assist (HSA) 267
Start/Stop – introduction 268
Start/Stop – function 268
Start/Stop – Auto-stop exceptions 269
Start/Stop – Auto-start exceptions 270
Start/Stop – settings 271
Start/Stop – symbols and messages 272
ECO*273
All Wheel Drive (AWD) 275
Hill Descent Control (HDC) – intro-
duction 275
Hill Descent Control (HDC) – operation 276
Brakes – general 277

7
 
Brakes – symbols  279
Anti-lock braking system (ABS) 279
Brake lights 279
Emergency Brake Assistance (EBA) 280
Parking brake – general information 280
Parking brake – applying 281
Parking brake – releasing 282
Parking brake – symbols and messages 283
Driving through water 284
Engine and cooling system 284
Conserving electrical current 285
Before a long distance trip 285
Driving in cold weather 286
Refueling – fuel requirements 286
Refueling – octane rating 287
Refueling – opening/closing fuel
filler door 289
Refueling – opening/closing fuel cap 290
Emission controls 290
Economical driving 291
Towing a trailer 292
Trailer Stability Assist (TSA) 294
Towing the vehicle 295
Towing eyelet 295
Towing by tow truck 296
WHEELS AND TIRES
Tires – general information 300
Tires – storage and age 301
Tires – tread wear indicator 302
Tires – tire economy 302
Changing a wheel – direction of rotation 303
Changing a wheel – removing wheel 303
Changing a wheel – spare wheel 306
Changing a wheel – accessing the
spare wheel 307
Changing a wheel – installing a wheel 307
Tire inflation – general information 308
Tire inflation – checking pressure 309
Tire specifications 310
Loading specifications 312
Loading specifications – load limit 312
Tire specifications – terminology 313
Tire specifications – Uniform Tire
Quality Grading 314
Snow chains 315
Snow tires/studded tires 316
Tire pressure monitoring - overview 316
Tire Monitor - introduction 317
Calibrating Tire Monitor 318
Tire Monitor status information 319
Tire Monitor – messages 319
 
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) – general information 320
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) – changing wheels 321
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) – recalibrating 322
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) – activating/deactivating 322
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) – messages 323
Tire sealing system* – general infor-
mation 324
Tire sealing system* – overview 325
Tire sealing system* – sealing a hole 327
Tire sealing system – checking infla-
tion pressure 329
Tire sealing system* – inflating tires 329
Tire sealing system* – sealing com-
pound container 330

8
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Maintenance – introduction 332
Maintenance – owner maintenance 333
Maintenance – hoisting 334
Onboard Diagnostic System 335
Booking service and repairs  335
Maintenance – opening/closing hood 337
Engine compartment – overview 338
Engine compartment – engine oil 339
Engine compartment – coolant 341
Engine compartment – brake fluid 342
Engine compartment – power steer-
ing fluid 343
Bulbs – introduction 344
Bulbs – headlight housing 345
Bulbs – cover 346
Bulbs – low beam, Halogen 347
Bulbs – high beam, Halogen 347
Bulbs – extra high beam 348
Bulbs – front turn signals 348
Bulbs – taillight housing 349
Bulbs – license plate lighting 350
Bulbs – cargo area lighting 350
Bulbs – vanity mirror lighting 350
Bulbs – specifications 351
Wiper blades – service position 351
 
Wiper blades – windshield 352
Wiper blades – tailgate 353
Engine compartment – washer fluid 354
Battery – symbols 354
Battery – handling 355
Battery – maintenance 356
Battery – changing 357
Fuses – introduction 359
Fuses – engine compartment 360
Fuses – glove compartment 363
Fuses – cargo area/trunk 366
Fuses – engine compartment cold
zone (Start/Stop only) 367
Washing the car 369
Automatic car wash 370
Polishing and waxing 371
Cleaning the interior 371
Touching up paintwork 373
SPECIFICATIONS
Label information 376
Dimensions 379
Weights 381
Engine specifications 382
Oil specifications 383
Oil volume 384
Coolant – specification and volume 385
Transmission oil – specification and
volumes 385
Brake fluid – specification and volume 385
Power steering – specification 386
Fuel tank volume – specification and
volume 386
Tire inflation – pressure table 387
Air conditioning – specification and
volume 388
Battery specifications 389
Symbols – general information 390
Warning symbols 390
Indicator symbols 391
Information symbols 392
Information symbols – ceiling console 393
Information symbols – center console 393

INDEX

Index 395

INTRODUCTION

On-board owner's manual

The owner's manual can be displayed on the

center console screen and you can carry out

searches for the information that you require.

To open the owner's manual, press the MY CAR

button on the center console, press OK/MENU

and select Owner's manual.

For basic information, see "Infotainment - operat-

ing the system." The following sections also pro-

vide more detailed information.

The on-board owner's manual start page

There are four ways of finding information articles

in the on-board owner's manual:

•Searching: search for an article.

•Categories: All of the articles are sorted by

category.

•Favorites: Quick access to frequently read

articles.

•Quick Guide: A selection of articles cover-

ing commonly used functions.

Select the symbol in the lower right-hand corner

for additional information about the on-board

owner's manual.

NOTE

•The on-board owner's manual cannot be

accessed while the vehicle is moving.

•Specifications regarding your vehicle are

not found in the on-board information.

This information is listed in the printed

owner's manual.

Searching for information

Searching using the text wheel

List of characters

Switching between character entry modes

(see the following table)

Surf history

Use the text wheel to enter a web address.

1. Turn TUNE to the desired letter and press

OK/MENU to confirm. The number/letter

keys on the center console can also be used.

2. Continue to the next letter, etc. The results of

the search will be displayed in the phone

book.

INTRODUCTION

}}

3. To switch from letter entry mode to the entry

mode for numbers or special characters, or

to go view surf history, turn TUNE to one of

the selections (see the explanation in the fol-

lowing table) in the list for switching charac-

ter entry mode (2) and press OK/MENU.

123/A

Toggle between letters and num-

bers by pressing OK/MENU.

=> This leads to surf history. Turn

TUNE to select a web address and

press OK/MENU to go to the web-

site.

Go Go to the website by pressing OK/

MENU.

a|A Toggle between upper and lower

case letters by pressing OK/MENU.

| | }Switch from the text wheel to the

Address: field. Use TUNE to move

the cursor and erase characters by

pressing EXIT. Press OK/MENU to

return to the text wheel.

The number/letter keys on the cen-

ter console can also be used to edit

the Address: field.

Press EXIT briefly to erase a single character.

Press and hold EXIT to erase all characters.

Pressing a number key on the center console

while the text wheel is displayed (see the previ-

ous illustration) will display a list of characters.

Press the desired key repeatedly to enter the

desired letter and continue to the next letter, etc.

To enter a number, press and hold the button.

Categories

The articles in the on-board owner's manual are

divided into main categories and sub-categories.

The same article may be listed in several applica-

ble categories to help make searches easier.

Turn TUNE to navigate in the category structure

and press OK/MENU to open a category (indi-

cated by the symbol) or an article (indicated

by the symbol). Press EXIT to return to the

previous view.

Favorites

Articles that have been marked as favorites can

be found here. For information about marking an

article as a favorite, see "Navigating in an article"

below.

Turn TUNE to navigate in the list of favorites and

press OK/MENU to open an article. Press EXIT

to return to the previous view.

Quick Guide

This is a selection of articles that will help you

become familiar with some of the vehicle's most

common functions. These articles can also be

found in their respective categories but are listed

here for quick access.

Turn TUNE to navigate in the Quick Guide and

press OK/MENU to open an article. Press EXIT

to return to the previous view.

Navigating in an article

Home: Returns you to the owner's manual

start page.

Favorites: Add/remove an article from the

list of favorites. This can also be done by

pressing the FAV button on the center con-

sole keypad.

Highlighted link: takes you to the linked

article.

Important information: if the article con-

tains warnings, cautions or notes, symbols for

these types of information and the number of

INTRODUCTION

such texts in the article will be displayed

here.

Turn TUNE to navigate among the links or scroll

in an article. When you have scrolled to the

beginning/end of an article, you can return to the

start page or a favorite by scrolling one additional

step up/down. Press OK/MENU to activate a

selection or highlighted link. Press EXIT to return

to the previous view.

Related information

•Information on the Internet (p. 21)

Owner's information

Your vehicle is equipped with a screen on which

you can display information about your vehicle's

features and functions. The printed owner's

manual supplements the on-board information

and contains important texts, the latest updates

and instructions that can be useful in situations

when it is not practical to read the information on

the screen.

Changing the language used for the on-board

information could mean that some of the infor-

mation displayed may not comply with national

or local statutes and regulations.

NOTE

•Do not export your Volvo to another

country before investigating that coun-

try's applicable safety and exhaust emis-

sion requirements. In some cases it may

be difficult or impossible to comply with

these requirements. Modifications to the

emission control system(s) may render

your Volvo not certifiable for legal opera-

tion in the U.S., Canada and other coun-

tries.

•All information, illustrations and specifica-

tions contained in this manual are based

on the latest product information availa-

ble at the time of publication. Please note

that some vehicles may be equipped dif-

ferently, depending on market-specific

adaptations or special legal requirements.

Optional equipment described in this

manual may not be available in all mar-

kets.

•Some of the illustrations shown are

generic and are intended as examples

only, and may not depict the exact model

for which this owner's information is

intended.

•Volvo reserves the right to make model

and product changes at any time, or to

change specifications or design without

notice and without incurring obligation.

INTRODUCTION

}}

WARNING

The driver is always responsible for operating

the vehicle in a safe manner and for comply-

ing with current statutes and regulations.

It is also essential to maintain and service the

vehicle according to Volvo's recommendations

as stated in the owner's information and the

service and warranty booklet.

If the on-board information differs from the

printed owner's manual, the printed informa-

tion always takes precedence.

Contacting Volvo

In the USA:

Volvo Cars of North America, LLC

Customer Care Center

1 Volvo Drive,

P.O. Box 914

Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647

1-800-458-1552

www.volvocars.com/us

In Canada:

Volvo Cars of Canada

National Customer Service

9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101

Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9

1-800-663-8255

www.volvocars.com/ca

Related information

•About this manual (p. 15)

•Important warnings (p. 24)

•Crash event data (p. 19)

•Volvo Structural Parts Statement (p. 20)

About this manual

Reading your owner's manual is a good way to

familiarize yourself with the features and systems

in your vehicle.

•Before you operate your vehicle for the first

time, we recommend that you look through

the information found in the chapters "Your

Driving Environment" and "During Your Trip."

•Information contained in the balance of the

manual is extremely useful and should be

read after operating the vehicle for the first

time.

•The manual is structured so that it can be

used for reference. For this reason, it should

be kept in the vehicle for ready access.

On-board owner's manual

When the printed manual refers to the on-board

owner's manual, this pertains to the information

displayed on the center console screen.

The language used on the center console screen

and instrument panel can be changed in the MY

CAR system settings menu.

NOTE

Please be aware that changing languages to

one that you do not understand may make it

difficult to change back to the original lan-

guage.

INTRODUCTION

There are four ways of finding information articles

in the on-board owner's manual:

•Searching: search for an article.

•Categories: All of the articles are sorted by

category.

•Favorites: Quick access to frequently read

articles.

•Quick Guide: A selection of articles cover-

ing commonly used functions.

Select the symbol in the lower right-hand corner

for additional information about the on-board

owner's manual.

NOTE

•The on-board owner's manual cannot be

accessed while the vehicle is moving.

•Specifications regarding your vehicle are

not found in the on-board information.

This information is listed in the printed

owner's manual.

The owner's manual in mobile devices

NOTE

The owner's manual mobile app can be down-

loaded at www.volvocars.com.

The mobile app also contains videos and

searchable content, and provides easy naviga-

tion between the various articles.

Footnotes

Certain pages of this manual contain information

in the form of footnotes at the bottom of the

page. This information supplements the text that

the footnote number refers to (a letter is used if

the footnote refers to text in a table).

Display texts

There are several displays in the driver’s field of

vision that show messages generated by various

systems and functions in the vehicle. These texts

are indicated in the Owner’s Manual by being in

slightly larger type than the surrounding text and

are printed in gray, (for example: Change doors

unlock setting).

Decals

There are various types of decals in the vehicle

whose purpose is to provide important informa-

tion in a clear and concise way. The importance

of these decals is explained as follows, in

descending order of importance.

Risk of injury

G031590

Black ISO symbols on a yellow warning back-

ground, white text/image on a black background.

Decals of this type are used to indicate potential

danger. Ignoring a warning of this type could

result in serious injury or death.

INTRODUCTION

}}

Risk of damage to the vehicle

G031592

White ISO symbols and white text/image on a

black or blue warning background and space for

a message. If the information on decals of this

type is ignored, damage to the vehicle could

result.

Information

G031593

White ISO symbols and white text/image on a

black background. These decals provide general

information.

NOTE

The decals shown in the Owner’s Manual are

examples only and are not intended to be

reproductions of the decals actually used in

the vehicle. The purpose is to give an indica-

tion of how they look and their approximate

location in the vehicle. The applicable infor-

mation for your particular vehicle can be

found on the respective decals in the vehicle.

Types of lists used in the owner's

information

Procedures

Procedures (step-by-step instructions), or actions

that must be carried out in a certain order, are

arranged in numbered lists in this manual.

If there is a series of illustrations associated

with step-by-step instructions, each step in

the procedure is numbered in the same way

as the corresponding illustration.

Lists in which letters are used can be found

with series of illustrations in cases where the

order in which the instructions are carried out

is not important.

Arrows with or without numbers are used to

indicate the direction of a movement.

Arrows containing letters are used to indi-

cate movement.

If there are no illustrations associated with a

step-by-step list, the steps in the procedure are

indicated by ordinary numbers.

Position lists

Red circles containing a number are used in

general overview illustrations in which certain

components are pointed out. The corres-

ponding number is also used in the position

list's description of the various components.

INTRODUCTION

Bullet lists

Bullets are used to differentiate a number of

components/functions/points of information that

can be listed in random order.

For example:

•Coolant

•Engine oil

Continues on next page

} }This symbol can be found at the lower right

corner to indicate that the current topic continues

on the following page.

Continuation from previous page

|| This symbol can be found at the upper left

corner to indicate that the current topic is a con-

tinuation from the previous page.

Options and accessories

Optional or accessory equipment described in

this manual is indicated by an asterisk.

Optional or accessory equipment may not be

available in all countries or markets. Please note

that some vehicles may be equipped differently,

depending on special legal requirements.

Contact your Volvo retailer for additional informa-

tion.

WARNING

If your vehicle is involved in an accident,

unseen damage may affect its drivability and

safety.

WARNING

CALIFORNIA proposition 65

Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and

certain vehicle components contain or emit

chemicals known to the state of California to

cause cancer, and birth defects or other

reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids

contained in vehicles and certain products of

component wear contain or emit chemicals

known to the State of California to cause can-

cer, and birth defects or other reproductive

harm.

WARNING

Certain components of this vehicle such as air

bag modules, seat belt pretensioners, adap-

tive steering columns, and button cell batter-

ies may contain Perchlorate material. Special

handling may apply for service or vehicle end

of life disposal.

See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/

perchlorate.

Shiftlock

When your vehicle is parked, the gear selector is

locked in the P (Park) position. To release the

selector from this position, the ignition must be in

mode II (p. 80) or the engine must be running.

Depress the brake pedal, press the button on the

front side of the gear selector and move the

selector from P (Park).

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)

The ABS system performs a brief self-diagnostic

test when the engine has been started and driver

releases the brake pedal. Another automatic test

may be performed when the vehicle first reaches

a speed of approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). The

brake pedal will pulsate several times and a

sound may be audible from the ABS control

module. This is normal.

Fuel filler door

Press the button on the light switch panel (see

the illustration in Refueling – opening/closing

fuel filler door (p. 289)) when the vehicle is at a

standstill to unlock the fuel filler door. It will

relock when closed and there will be an audible

click.

Points to keep in mind

•Do not export your Volvo to another country

before investigating that country's applicable

safety and exhaust emission requirements. In

some cases it may be difficult or impossible

to comply with these requirements. Modifica-

tions to the emission control system(s) may

render your Volvo not certifiable for legal

INTRODUCTION

}}

operation in the U.S., Canada and other

countries.

•All information, illustrations and specifica-

tions contained in this manual are based on

the latest product information available at the

time of publication. Please note that some

vehicles may be equipped differently,

depending on special legal requirements.

Optional equipment described in this manual

may not be available in all markets.

•Some of the illustrations shown are generic

and may not depict the exact model for

which this manual is intended.

•Volvo reserves the right to make model

changes at any time, or to change specifica-

tions or design without notice and without

incurring obligation.

Related information

•Information on the Internet (p. 21)

•Volvo and the environment (p. 23)

•Important warnings (p. 24)

Change of ownership

When the vehicle changes owners, all personal

settings should be reset to the factory defaults.

To reset, press the MY CAR button in the center

console followed by OK/MENU and select

Settings Reset to factory settings.

User data e.g., for apps, the web browser and for

personal settings in menus such as the climate

system and vehicle settings should be reset to

factory defaults.

For vehicles equipped with the optional Volvo On

Call with Sensus Connect (VOC), personal set-

tings stored in the vehicle should be deleted, see

Changing ownership of a vehicle with Volvo On

Call.

Related information

•Volvo ID (p. 22)

Crash event data

This vehicle is equipped with an event data

recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is

to record, in certain crash or near crash-like sit-

uations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting

a road obstacle, data that will assist in under-

standing how a vehicle's systems performed.

The EDR is designed to record data related to

vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short

period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The

EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such

data as:

•How various systems in your vehicle were

operating;

•Whether or not the driver and passenger

safety belts were buckled/fastened;

•How far (if at all) the driver was depressing

the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

•How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better understand-

ing of the circumstances in which crashes and

injuries occur.

EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a

non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are

recorded by the EDR under normal driving condi-

tions and the EDR never registers who is driving

the vehicle or the location of a crash or a near

crash-like situation. However, other parties, such

as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data

with the type of personally identifying data rou-

INTRODUCTION

tinely acquired during a crash investigation. To

read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment

is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR

is needed.

Furthermore, your vehicle is equipped with a

number of computers whose task is to continu-

ously control and monitor the vehicle’s operation.

They can also register some of this information

during normal driving conditions, most importantly

if they detect a fault relating to the vehicle’s oper-

ation and functionality or upon activation of the

vehicle’s active safety systems (e.g. City Safety

and the auto-brake function). Some of the regis-

tered information is required by technicians when

carrying out service and maintenance to enable

them to diagnose and rectify any faults that have

occurred in the vehicle and to enable Volvo to ful-

fill legal and other regulatory requirements. Infor-

mation thus registered in the vehicle is registered

in the vehicle’s computers until the vehicle is

serviced or repaired. In addition to the above, the

registered information may – on an aggregated

basis – be used for research and product devel-

opment purposes in order to continuously

improve the safety and quality of Volvo vehicles.

For additional information, contact:

In the United States

Volvo Cars of North America, LLC

Customer Care Center

1 Volvo Drive, P.O. box 914

Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647

1-800-458-1552

www.volvocars.com/us

In Canada

Volvo Cars of Canada

National Customer Service

9130 Leslie Street

Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9

1-800-663-8255

www.volvocars.com/ca

Related information

•Information on the Internet (p. 21)

•Contacting Volvo (p. 15)

Volvo Structural Parts Statement

Volvo has always been and continues to be a

leader in automotive safety.

Volvo engineers and manufactures vehicles

designed to help protect vehicle occupants in the

event of a collision.

Volvos are designed to absorb the impact of a

collision. This energy absorption system including,

but not limited to, structural components such as

bumper reinforcement bars, bumper energy

absorbers, frames, rails, fender aprons, A-pillars,

B-pillars and body panels must work together to

maintain cabin integrity and protect the vehicle

occupants.

The supplemental restraint system including but

not limited to air bags, side curtain air bags, and

deployment sensors work together with the

above components to provide proper timing for

air bag deployment.

Due to the above, Volvo Cars of North America

does not support the use of aftermarket, alterna-

tive or anything other than original Volvo parts for

collision repair.

In addition Volvo does not support the use or re-

use of structural components from an existing

vehicle that has been previously damaged.

Although these parts may appear equivalent, it is

difficult to tell if the parts have been previously

replaced with non-OE parts or if the part has

been damaged as a result of a prior collision. The

INTRODUCTION

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 21

quality of these used parts may also have been

affected due to environmental exposure.

Related information

•Important warnings (p. 24)

•Information on the Internet (p. 21)

•Contacting Volvo (p. 15)

Information on the Internet

Additional information regarding your vehicle can

be found at www.volvocars.com.

Support on the Internet

Go to support.volvocars.com or use the QR code

below to visit the site, which is available in most

markets.

QR code to the support site

The information on the support site is searchable

and is grouped into different categories. It

includes support for e.g., Internet-based services

and functions, Volvo On Call (VOC), the naviga-

tion system* and apps. Video and step-by-step

instructions explain various procedures such as

how to connect the vehicle to the Internet via a

cell phone.

Downloadable information

Maps

Sensus Navigation system* maps can be down-

loaded from the support site.

Mobile apps

For certain model year 2014 and 2015 Volvos,

the owner's manual is available in the form of an

app. The VOC* app can also be found here.

Owner's manuals for earlier model Volvos

Owner's manuals for earlier model Volvos are

available in PDF format. Quick Guides and sup-

plements can also be found on the support site.

Select a model and a model year and download

the desired information.

Contact

Contact information for customer support and the

nearest Volvo retailer are available on the site.

Related information

•About this manual (p. 15)

•Contacting Volvo (p. 15)

INTRODUCTION
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
22
Volvo ID
This is your personal ID that can be used to
access a number of services1
Creating a Volvo ID
To create a Volvo ID, provide your personal email
address and then follow the instructions provided
in the email that you will receive from Volvo. This
can be done from:
•From an Internet-connected vehicle: Enter
your email address in the app that requires a
Volvo ID and follow the instructions provides
or press the Internet connect ( ) button on
the center console and select Apps,
Settings and follow the instructions provi-
ded.
•Volvo On Call (VOC*): download the latest
version of the VOC app and create a Volvo ID
on the start page.
Open Source Software Notice
The systems in your Volvo contain certain free/
open source and other software.
This product uses certain free / open source and
other software originating from third parties, that
is subject to the GNU General Public License
version 2 and 3 (GPLv2/GPLv3), GNU Lesser
General Public License version 3 (LGPLv3), The
FreeType Project License (“FreeType License”)
and other different and/or additional copyright
licenses, disclaimers and notices. The links how
to access the exact terms of GPLv2, GPLv3,
LGPLv3, and the other open source software
licenses, disclaimers, acknowledgements and
notices are provided to you below. Please refer to
the exact terms of the relevant License, regarding
your rights under said licenses. Volvo Car
Corporation (VCC) offers to provide the source
code of said free/open source software to you
for a charge covering the cost of performing such
distribution, such as the cost of media, shipping
and handling, upon written request. Please
contact your nearest Volvo retailer.
This offer is valid for a period of at least three (3)
years from the date of the distribution of this
product by VCC / or for as long as VCC offers
spare parts or customer support.
Portions of this product uses software
copyrighted © v2.4.3/2010 The FreeTypeProject
(www.freetype.org). All rights reserved.
This product includes software under
following licenses:
GPL v2 : http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-
licenses/gpl-2.0.html
•Linux kernel (merge between MontaVista
2.6.31 kernel and kernel from
L2.6.31_MX51_ER_1007 BSP)
•uBoot (based on v2009.08)
•busybox (based on version 1.13.2.)
GCC runtime library exception: http://
www.gnu.org/licenses/gcc-exception.html
•libgcc_s.so.1
LGPL v3: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/lgpl.html
•Libc.so.6, libpthread.so.0, Librt.so.1
The FreeType Project License: http://
www.freetype.org/FTL.TXT
•libfreetype.so.6 (version 2.4.3)
Related information
•About this manual (p. 15)
1These services vary and may be subject to change. Consult your Volvo retailer.

INTRODUCTION

Volvo and the environment

Volvo is committed to the well being of its cus-

tomers. As a natural part of this commitment, we

care about the environment in which we all live.

Concern for the environment means an everyday

involvement in reducing our environmental

impact.

Volvo's environmental activities are based on a

holistic view, which means we consider the over-

all environmental impact of a product throughout

its complete life cycle. In this context, design, pro-

duction, product use, and recycling are all impor-

tant considerations. In production, Volvo has

partly or completely phased out several chemicals

including CFCs, lead chromates, asbestos, and

cadmium; and reduced the number of chemicals

used in our plants 50% since 1991.

Volvo was the first in the world to introduce into

production a three-way catalytic converter with a

Lambda sond, now called the heated oxygen sen-

sor, in 1976. The current version of this highly

efficient system reduces emissions of harmful

substances (CO, HC, NOx) from the exhaust pipe

by approximately 95 – 99% and the search to

eliminate the remaining emissions continues.

Volvo is the only automobile manufacturer to

offer CFC-free retrofit kits for the air conditioning

system of all models as far back as the 1975

model 240. Advanced electronic engine controls

and cleaner fuels are bringing us closer to our

goal. In addition to continuous environmental

refinement of conventional gasoline-powered

internal combustion engines, Volvo is actively

looking at advanced technology alternative-fuel

vehicles.

When you drive a Volvo, you become our partner

in the work to lessen the car's impact on the

environment. To reduce your vehicle's environ-

mental impact, you can:

•Maintain proper air pressure in your tires.

Tests have shown decreased fuel economy

with improperly inflated tires.

•Follow the recommended maintenance

schedule in your Warranty and Service

Records Information booklet.

•Drive at a constant speed whenever possible.

•See a trained and qualified Volvo service

technician as soon as possible for inspection

if the check engine (malfunction indicator)

light illuminates, or stays on after the vehicle

has started.

•Properly dispose of any vehicle-related waste

such as used motor oil, used batteries, brake

pads, etc.

•When cleaning your vehicle, please use gen-

uine Volvo car care products. All Volvo car

care products are formulated to be environ-

mentally friendly.

FSC®

The FSC® (Forest Stewardship Council®) symbol

indicates that the wood pulp used in this publica-

tion comes from FSC® certified forests and other

responsible sources.

Related information

•Economical driving (p. 291)

•Tires – tire economy (p. 302)

INTRODUCTION

Important warnings

Please keep the following warnings in mind

when operating/servicing your vehicle.

Driver distraction

A driver has a responsibility to do everything pos-

sible to ensure his or her own safety and the

safety of passengers in the vehicle and others

sharing the roadway. Avoiding distractions is part

of that responsibility.

Driver distraction results from driver activities that

are not directly related to controlling the vehicle

in the driving environment. Your new Volvo is, or

can be, equipped with many feature-rich enter-

tainment and communication systems. These

include hands-free cellular telephones, navigation

systems, and multipurpose audio systems. You

may also own other portable electronic devices

for your own convenience. When used properly

and safely, they enrich the driving experience.

Improperly used, any of these could cause a dis-

traction.

For all of these systems, we want to provide the

following warning that reflects the strong Volvo

concern for your safety. Never use these devices

or any feature of your vehicle in a way that dis-

tracts you from the task of driving safely. Distrac-

tion can lead to a serious accident. In addition to

this general warning, we offer the following guid-

ance regarding specific newer features that may

be found in your vehicle:

WARNING

•Never use a hand-held cellular telephone

while driving. Some jurisdictions prohibit

cellular telephone use by a driver while

the vehicle is moving.

•If your vehicle is equipped with a naviga-

tion system, set and make changes to

your travel itinerary only with the vehicle

parked.

•Never program your audio system while

the vehicle is moving. Program radio pre-

sets with the vehicle parked, and use your

programmed presets to make radio use

quicker and simpler.

•Never use portable computers or per-

sonal digital assistants while the vehicle

is moving.

Accessory installation

•We strongly recommend that Volvo owners

install only genuine, Volvo-approved acces-

sories, and that accessory installations be

performed only by a trained and qualified

Volvo service technician.

•Genuine Volvo accessories are tested to

ensure compatibility with the performance,

safety, and emission systems in your vehicle.

Additionally, a trained and qualified Volvo

service technician knows where accessories

may and may not be safely installed in your

Volvo. In all cases, please consult a trained

and qualified Volvo service technician before

installing any accessory in or on your vehicle.

•Accessories that have not been approved by

Volvo may or may not be specifically tested

for compatibility with your vehicle. Addition-

ally, an inexperienced installer may not be

familiar with some of your car's systems.

•Any of your car's performance and safety

systems could be adversely affected if you

install accessories that Volvo has not tested,

or if you allow accessories to be installed by

someone unfamiliar with your vehicle.

•Damage caused by unapproved or improperly

installed accessories may not be covered by

your new vehicle warranty. See your Warranty

and Service Records Information booklet for

more warranty information. Volvo assumes no

responsibility for death, injury, or expenses

that may result from the installation of non-

genuine accessories.

Related information

•About this manual (p. 15)

•Volvo Structural Parts Statement (p. 20)

INTRODUCTION

Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance

Your new Volvo comes with a four year ON

CALL roadside assistance.

Additional information, features, and benefits of

this program are described in a separate informa-

tion package in your glove compartment.

If you require assistance, dial:

In the U.S. 1-800-638-6586 (1-800-63-

VOLVO)

In Canada 1-800-263-0475

NOTE

Some vehicles may be equipped with

Volvo On Call with Sensus Connect, which

will allow access to the call center and addi-

tional features directly from the vehicle. This

is in addition to the Volvo On Call Roadside

Assistance program mentioned above.

Volvo On Call with Sensus Connect will be

a customer pay subscription offer after an ini-

tial complimentary trial period.

Related information

•Information on the Internet (p. 21)

Technician certification

In addition to Volvo factory training, Volvo sup-

ports certification by the National Institute for

Automotive Service Excellence (A.S.E.).

Certified technicians have demonstrated a high

degree of competence in specific areas. Besides

passing exams, each technician must also have

worked in the field for two or more years before a

certificate is issued. These professional techni-

cians are best able to analyze vehicle problems

and perform the necessary maintenance proce-

dures to keep your Volvo at peak operating con-

dition.

SAFETY

SAFETY
28
Occupant safety
Safety is Volvo's cornerstone.
Volvo's concern for safety
Our concern for safety dates back to 1927 when
the first Volvo rolled off the production line.
Three-point seat belts (a Volvo invention), safety
cages, and energy-absorbing impact zones were
designed into Volvo vehicles long before it was
fashionable or required by government regulation.
We will not compromise our commitment to
safety. We continue to seek out new safety fea-
tures and to refine those already in our vehicles.
You can help. We would appreciate hearing your
suggestions about improving automobile safety.
We also want to know if you ever have a safety
concern with your vehicle. Call us in the U.S. at:
1-800-458-1552 or in Canada at:
1-800-663-8255.
Occupant safety reminders
How safely you drive doesn't depend on how old
you are but rather on:
•How well you see.
•Your ability to concentrate.
•How quickly you make decisions under
stress to avoid an accident.
The following suggestions are intended to help
you cope with the ever changing traffic environ-
ment.
•Never drink and drive.
•If you are taking any medication, consult your
physician about its potential effects on your
driving abilities.
•Take a driver-retraining course.
•Have your eyes checked regularly.
•Keep your windshield and headlights clean.
•Replace wiper blades when they start to
leave streaks.
•Take into account the traffic, road, and
weather conditions, particularly with regard to
stopping distance.
•Never send text messages while driving.
•Refrain from using or minimize the use of a
cell phone while driving.
Related information
•Recall information (p. 28)
•Reporting safety defects (p. 29)
Recall information
Information regarding recalls or other service
campaigns is available on our website at
www.volvocars.com/us/.
On our website, select the tab YOUR VOLVO and
the heading RECALL INFORMATION will be dis-
played at the lower left side of the screen. Enter
your Vehicle Identification Number for your vehi-
cle (found at the base of the windshield). If your
vehicle has any open Recalls, they will be dis-
played on this page.
Volvo customers in Canada
For any questions regarding open recalls for your
vehicle, please contact your authorized Volvo
retailer. If your retailer is unable to answer your
questions, please contact Volvo Customer Rela-
tions at 905 695-9626, Monday through Friday,
8:30 A.M. to 5:00 P.M. EST or by e-mail at
vclcust@volvocars.com. You may also write us at:
Volvo Cars of Canada
National Customer Service
9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101
Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9
Related information
•Occupant safety (p. 28)
•Reporting safety defects (p. 29)

SAFETY
29
Reporting safety defects
The following information will help you report any
perceived safety-related defects in your vehicle.
Reporting safety defects in the U.S.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National High-
way Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Volvo
Cars of North America, LLC. If NHTSA
receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of vehi-
cles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems
between you, your retailer, or Volvo
Cars of North America, LLC. To contact
NHTSA, you may either call the Auto
Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transpor-
tation, Washington D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other information
about motor vehicle safety from http://
www.safercar.gov, where you can also
enter your vehicle's VIN (Vehicle Identi-
fication Number) to see if it has any
open recalls.
Volvo strongly recommends that if your
vehicle is covered under a service cam-
paign, safety or emission recall or simi-
lar action, it should be completed as
soon as possible. Please check with
your local retailer or Volvo Cars of
North America, LLC if your vehicle is
covered under these conditions.
NHTSA can be reached at:
Internet:
http://www.nhtsa.gov
Telephone:
1-888-DASH-2-DOT
(1-888-327-4236).
Reporting safety defects in Canada
If you believe your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform Transport Canada in
addition to notifying Volvo Cars of Canada Corp.
Transport Canada can be contacted at:
1-800-333-0510
Teletypewriter (TTY): 613 990-4500
Fax: 1-819-994-3372
Mailing Address: Transport Canada - Road
Safety, 80 rue Noël, Gatineau, (Quebec) J8Z 0A1
Related information
•Occupant safety (p. 28)
•Recall information (p. 28)

SAFETY

Seat belts – general

Seat belts should always be worn by all occu-

pants of your vehicle. Children should be prop-

erly restrained, using an infant, car, or booster

seat determined by age, weight and height.

Volvo also believes no child should sit in the

front seat of a vehicle.

Adjusting the seat belt

Most states and provinces make it mandatory for

occupants of a vehicle to use seat belts.

Seat belt pretensioners

All seat belts are equipped with pretensioners

that reduce slack in the belts. These pretension-

ers are triggered in situations where the front or

side impact airbags deploy, and in certain impacts

from the rear. The front seat belts also include a

tension reducing device which, in the event of a

collision, limits the peak forces exerted by the

seat belt on the occupant.

Seat belt maintenance

Check periodically that the seat belts are in good

condition. Use water and a mild detergent for

cleaning. Check seat belt mechanism function as

follows: attach the seat belt and pull rapidly on

the strap.

WARNING

Never use a seat belt for more than one

occupant. Never wear the shoulder portion of

the belt under the arm, behind the back or

otherwise out of position. Such use could

cause injury in the event of an accident. As

seat belts lose much of their strength when

exposed to violent stretching, they should be

replaced after any collision, even if they

appear to be undamaged.

WARNING

•Never repair the belt yourself; have this

work done by a trained and qualified

Volvo service technician only.

•Any device used to induce slack into the

shoulder belt portion of the three-point

belt system will have a detrimental effect

on the amount of protection available to

you in the event of a collision.

•The seat back should not be tilted too far

back. The shoulder belt must be taut in

order to function properly.

•Do not use child safety seats or child

booster cushions/backrests in the front

passenger's seat. We also recommend

that children who have outgrown these

devices sit in the rear seat with the seat

belt properly fastened.

Related information

•Seat belts – buckling/unbuckling (p. 31)

•Seat belt reminder (p. 32)

•Seat belts – pregnancy (p. 33)

SAFETY

}}

Seat belts – buckling/unbuckling

Seat belts should be used by all occupants in

the vehicle when it is in motion.

Buckling a seat belt

Pull the belt out far enough to insert the latch

plate into the receptacle until a distinct click is

heard. The seat belt retractor is normally

"unlocked" and you can move freely, provided

that the shoulder belt is not pulled out too far.

Adjusting seat belt height (front seat belts

only)

Adjusting seat belt height

The height of the shoulder section of the seat

belt must be correctly adjusted. Press the button

and move the upper seat belt anchor to position

it as high as possible so that the shoulder section

of the belt is across the seat occupant's collar-

bone and not across the throat.

Correct height adjustment

Incorrect height adjustment

Seat belt retractor

The seat belt retractor will lock up in the fol-

lowing situations:

•if the belt is pulled out rapidly

•during braking and acceleration

•if the vehicle is leaning excessively

•when driving in turns

•if the Automatic Locking Retractor/Emer-

gency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) is acti-

vated

NOTE

Each seat belt (except for the driver's belt) is

equipped with the ALR/ELR function, which

is designed to help keep the seat belt taut.

ALR/ELR activates if the seat belt is pulled

out as far as possible. If this is done, a sound

from the seat belt retractor will be audible,

which is normal, and the seat belt will be

pulled taut and locked in place. This function

is automatically disabled when the seat belt is

unbuckled and fully retracted.

See also Child restraints (p. 49) for information

about using a seat belt's ALR/ELR function to

anchor a child seat.

When wearing the seat belt remember:

•The belt should not be twisted or turned.

•The lap section of the belt must be posi-

tioned low on the hips (not pressing against

the abdomen).

•Make sure that the shoulder belt is rolled up

into its retractor and that the shoulder and

lap belts are taut.

SAFETY

Unbuckling the seat belt

To remove the seat belt, press the red section on

the seat belt receptacle. Before exiting the vehi-

cle, check that the seat belt retracts fully after

being unbuckled. If necessary, guide the belt

back into the retractor slot.

Related information

•Seat belt reminder (p. 32)

•Seat belts – pregnancy (p. 33)

Seat belt reminder

The seat belt reminder is intended to alert all

occupants of the vehicle that their seat belts

should be fastened before the vehicle begins to

move.

G017726

Seat belt reminder light in ceiling console

The seat belt reminder consists of an audible sig-

nal, an indicator light near the rearview mirror and

a symbol in the instrument panel that alert all

occupants of the vehicle to fasten their seat

belts (p. 30). The indicator light will be on for sev-

eral seconds from the time the ignition is

switched on. There will also be an audible signal

if the driver's seat belt is not fastened.

If the front seat belts are unbuckled while the

vehicle is in motion, the audible signal and warn-

ing light will be active for a several seconds.

Rear seats

The seat belt reminder in the rear seat has two

additional functions:

•It provides information about which seat belts

are fastened in the rear seat. A message will

appear in the information display when a belt

is being used. This message will disappear

after several seconds or can be erased by

pressing the OK button on the left steering

wheel lever.

•It also provides a reminder if one of the

occupants of the rear seat has unbuckled

his/her seat belt while the vehicle is in

motion. A visual and audible signal will be

given. These signals will stop when the seat

belt has been re-buckled or can be stopped

by pressing the OK button.

•The message Unbelted in rear seat will

appear in the information display if one of the

rear doors has been opened.

The message in the information display can

always be accessed, even if it has been erased,

by pressing the OK button to display stored mes-

sages.

Related information

•Seat belts – pregnancy (p. 33)

SAFETY

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 33

Seat belts – pregnancy

The seat belt should always be worn during

pregnancy. However, it is crucial that it be worn

correctly.

G020998

The diagonal section should wrap over the shoul-

der then be routed between the breasts and to

the side of the belly. The lap section should lay

flat over the thighs and as low as possible under

the belly. It must never be allowed to ride upward.

Remove all slack from the belt and ensure that it

fits close to the body without any twists.

As a pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers

should adjust their seats and steering wheel such

that they can easily maintain control of the vehi-

cle as they drive (which means they must be able

to easily operate the foot pedals and steering

wheel). Within this context, they should strive to

position the seat with as large a distance as pos-

sible between their belly and the steering wheel.

Related information

•Seat belts – buckling/unbuckling (p. 31)

•Seat belt reminder (p. 32)

•Child restraints (p. 49)

Supplemental Restraint System

(SRS)

As an enhancement to the three-point seat

belts (p. 30), your Volvo is equipped with a

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS).

Models with an analog instrument panel

Models with an digital instrument panel*

||
SAFETY
34
Volvo's SRS consists of seat belt pretensioners,
front airbags (p. 35), side impact air-
bags (p. 41), a front passenger occupant
weight sensor (p. 38), and inflatable cur-
tains (p. 42). All of these systems are moni-
tored by the SRS control module. An SRS warn-
ing light in the instrument panel (see the illustra-
tion) illuminates when the ignition is in modes I
or II, and will normally go out after approximately
6 seconds if no faults are detected in the system.
Where applicable, a text message will also be
displayed when the SRS warning light illuminates.
If this warning symbol is not functioning properly,
the general warning symbol illuminates and a text
message will be displayed.
See also Information displays – indicator symbols
(p. 73) and Information displays – warning sym-
bols (p. 75) for more information about indica-
tor and warning lights.
WARNING
•If the SRS warning light stays on after the
engine has started or if it illuminates
while you are driving, have the vehicle
inspected by a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician as soon as possible.
•Never try to repair any component or part
of the SRS yourself. Any interference in
the system could cause malfunction and
serious injury. All work on these systems
should be performed by a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician.
WARNING
If your vehicle has become flood-damaged in
any way (e.g., soaked carpeting/standing
water on the floor of the vehicle), do not
attempt to start the vehicle or insert the
remote key into the ignition slot before dis-
connecting the battery (see below). This may
cause airbag deployment which could result in
serious injury. Have the vehicle towed to a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician
for repairs.
Before attempting to tow the vehicle:
1. Switch off the ignition for at least
10 minutes and disconnect the battery.
2. Follow the instructions for manually over-
riding the shiftlock system Transmission –
shiftlock override (p. 267).
Related information
•Crash mode – general information (p. 45)

SAFETY

}}

Front airbags

The front airbags supplement the three-point

seat belts (p. 30). For these airbags to provide

the protection intended, seat belts must be worn

at all times.

G018665

The front airbag system

The front airbag system includes gas generators

surrounded by the airbags, and deceleration sen-

sors that activate the gas generators, causing the

airbags to be inflated with nitrogen gas.

Location of the passenger's side front airbag

As the movement of the seats' occupants com-

presses the airbags, some of the gas is expelled

at a controlled rate to provide better cushioning.

Both seat belt pretensioners also deploy, mini-

mizing seat belt slack. The entire process, includ-

ing inflation and deflation of the airbags, takes

approximately one fifth of a second.

The location of the front airbags is indicated by

SRS AIRBAG embossed on the steering wheel

pad and above the glove compartment, and by

decals on both sun visors and on the front and

far right side of the dash.

The driver's side front airbag is folded and

located in the steering wheel hub.

The passenger's side front airbag is folded

behind a panel located above the glove compart-

ment.

WARNING

•The airbags in the vehicle are designed to

be a SUPPLEMENT to–not a replace-

ment for–the three-point seat belts. For

maximum protection, wear seat belts at all

times. Be aware that no system can pre-

vent all possible injuries that may occur in

an accident.

•Never drive with your hands on the steer-

ing wheel pad/airbag housing.

•The front airbags are designed to help

prevent serious injury. Deployment occurs

very quickly and with considerable force.

During normal deployment and depend-

ing on variables such as seating position,

one may experience abrasions, bruises,

swellings, or other injuries as a result

from deployment of one or both of the

airbags.

•When installing any accessory equipment,

make sure that the front airbag system is

not damaged. Any interference in the sys-

tem could cause malfunction.

Front airbag deployment

•The front airbags are designed to deploy dur-

ing certain frontal or front-angular collisions,

impacts, or decelerations, depending on the

crash severity, angle, speed and object

impacted. The airbags may also deploy in

SAFETY

certain non-frontal collisions where rapid

deceleration occurs.

•The SRS (p. 33) sensors, which trigger the

front airbags, are designed to react to both

the impact of the collision and the inertial

forces generated by it, and to determine if

the intensity of the collision is sufficient for

the seat belt pretensioners and/or airbags to

be deployed.

However, not all frontal collisions activate the

front airbags.

•If the collision involves a nonrigid object (e.g.,

a snow drift or bush), or a rigid, fixed object

at a low speed, the front airbags will not nec-

essarily deploy.

•Front airbags do not normally deploy in a

side impact collision, in a collision from the

rear or in a rollover situation.

•The amount of damage to the bodywork

does not reliably indicate if the airbags

should have deployed or not.

WARNING

If any of the airbags have deployed:

•Do not attempt to drive the vehicle. Have

it towed to a qualified repair facility.

•If necessary seek medical attentIon.

WARNING

•Do not use child safety seats or child

booster cushions/backrests in the front

passenger's seat. We also recommend

that occupants under 4 feet 7 inches

(140 cm) in height who have outgrown

these devices sit in the rear seat with the

seat belt fastened1.

•Never drive with the airbags deployed.

The fact that they hang out can impair the

steering of your vehicle. Other safety sys-

tems can also be damaged.

•The smoke and dust formed when the

airbags are deployed can cause skin and

eye irritation in the event of prolonged

exposure.

Should you have questions about any component

in the SRS system, please contact a trained and

qualified Volvo service technician or Volvo cus-

tomer support:

In the USA

Volvo Cars of North America, LLC

Customer Care Center

1 Volvo Drive

P.O. Box 914

Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647

1-800-458-1552

www.volvocars.com/us

In Canada

Volvo Cars of Canada Corp.

National Customer Service

9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101

Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9

1-800-663-8255

www.volvocars.com/ca

1See also the Occupant Weight Sensor information, (p. 38).

SAFETY

}}

NOTE

•Deployment of front airbags occurs only

one time during an accident. In a collision

where deployment occurs, the airbags

and seat belt pretensioners activate.

Some noise occurs and a small amount

of powder is released. The release of the

powder may appear as smoke-like matter.

This is a normal characteristic and does

not indicate fire.

•Volvo's front airbags use special sensors

that are integrated with the front seat

buckles. The point at which the airbag

deploys is determined by whether or not

the seat belt is being used, as well as the

severity of the collision.

•Collisions can occur where only one of

the airbags deploys. If the impact is less

severe, but severe enough to present a

clear injury risk, the airbags are triggered

at partial capacity. If the impact is more

severe, the airbags are triggered at full

capacity.

Airbag decals

Airbag decal on the outside of both sun visors

Passenger's side airbag decal

WARNING

•Children must never be allowed in the

front passenger's seat.

•Occupants in the front passenger's seat

must never sit on the edge of the seat, sit

leaning toward the instrument panel or

otherwise sit out of position.

•The occupant's back must be as upright

as comfort allows and be against the seat

back with the seat belt properly fastened.

•Feet must be on the floor, e.g., not on the

dash, seat or out of the window.

WARNING

•No objects or accessory equipment, e.g.

dashboard covers, may be placed on,

attached to, or installed near the air bag

hatch (the area above the glove compart-

ment) or the area affected by airbag

deployment.

•There should be no loose articles, such

as coffee cups on the floor, seat, or dash-

board area.

•Never try to open the airbag cover on the

steering wheel or the passenger's side

dashboard. This should only be done by a

trained and qualified Volvo service techni-

cian.

•Failure to follow these instructions can

result in injury to the vehicle occupants.

SAFETY

Related information

•Occupant Weight Sensor (p. 38)

•Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags

(p. 41)

•Inflatable Curtain (IC) (p. 42)

•Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

(p. 33)

Occupant Weight Sensor

The Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) is

designed to meet the regulatory requirements of

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS)

208 and is designed to disable (will not inflate)

the passenger's side front airbag under certain

conditions.

G017724

Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) indicator light

Disabling the passenger's side front

airbag

Volvo recommends that ALL occupants (adults

and children) shorter than 4 feet 7 inches

(140 cm) be seated in the back seat of any vehi-

cle with a front passenger side airbag (p. 35), and

be properly restrained for their size and weight.

For child safety recommendations, see Child

safety (p. 47).

The OWS works with sensors that are part of the

front passenger's seat and seat belt (p. 30). The

sensors are designed to detect the presence of a

properly seated occupant and determine if the

passenger's side front airbag should be enabled

(may inflate) or disabled (will not inflate).

The OWS will disable (will not inflate) the pas-

senger's side front airbag when:

•the front passenger's seat is unoccupied, or

has small/medium objects in the front seat,

•the system determines that an infant is pres-

ent in a rear-facing infant seat that is instal-

led according to the manufacturer's instruc-

tions,

•the system determines that a small child is

present in a forward-facing child restraint

that is installed according to the manufactur-

er's instructions,

•the system determines that a small child is

present in a booster seat,

•a front passenger takes his/her weight off of

the seat for a period of time,

•a child or a small person occupies the front

passenger's seat.

The OWS uses a PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF

indicator lamp which will illuminate and stay on to

remind you that the passenger's side front airbag

is disabled. The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indi-

cator lamp is located in the overhead console,

near the base of the rearview mirror.

SAFETY

}}

NOTE

When the ignition is switched on, the OWS

indicator light will illuminate for several sec-

onds while the system performs a self-diag-

nostic test.

However, if a fault is detected in the system:

•The OWS indicator light will stay on

•The SRS warning light (p. 33) will come on

and stay on

•The message Pass. Airbag OFF Service

urgent will be displayed in the information

display.

WARNING

If a fault in the system is detected and indi-

cated as described, be aware that the pas-

senger's side front airbag will not deploy in

the event of a collision. In this case, the SRS

system and Occupant Weight Sensor should

be inspected by a trained and qualified Volvo

service technician as soon as possible.

WARNING

•Never try to open, remove, or repair any

components in the OWS system. This

could result in system malfunction. Main-

tenance or repairs should only be carried

out by an a trained and qualified Volvo

service technician.

•The front passenger's seat should not be

modified in any way. This could reduce

pressure on the seat cushion, which

might interfere with the OWS system's

function.

Passenger's

seat occu-

pancy status

OWS indi-

cator light

status

Passenger's

side front air-

bag status

Seat unoccu-

pied

OWS indi-

cator light

lights up.

Passenger's

side front air-

bag disabled

Seat occu-

pied by low

weight occu-

pant/objectA

OWS indi-

cator light

lights up

Passenger's

side front air-

bag disabled

Seat occu-

pied by heavy

occupant/

object

OWS indi-

cator light is

not lit

Passenger's

side front air-

bag enabled

AVolvo recommends that children always be properly restrained

in appropriate child restraints in the rear seats. Do not assume

that the passenger's side front airbag is disabled unless the

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is lit. Make sure the

child restraint is properly installed. If there is any doubt as to the

status of the passenger's side front airbag, move the child

restraint to the rear seat.

The OWS is designed to enable (may inflate) the

passenger's side front airbag in the event of a

collision anytime the system senses that a per-

son of adult size is sitting properly in the front

passenger's seat. The PASSENGER AIRBAG

OFF indicator lamp will be off and remain off.

If a person of adult size is sitting in the front pas-

senger's seat, but the PASSENGER AIRBAG

OFF indicator lamp is on, it is possible that the

person isn't sitting properly in the seat. If this

happens:

•Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to

place the seatback in an upright position.

•Have the person sit upright in the seat, cen-

tered on the seat cushion, with the person's

legs comfortably extended.

•Restart the vehicle and have the person

remain in this position for about two minutes.

This will allow the system to detect that per-

son and enable the passenger's frontal air-

bag.

•If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator

lamp remains on even after this, the person

should be advised to ride in the rear seat.

This condition reflects limitations of the OWS

classification capability. It does not indicate OWS

malfunction.

SAFETY

Modifications

If you are considering modifying your vehicle in

any way to accommodate a disability, for example

by altering or adapting the driver's or front pas-

senger's seat(s) and/or airbag systems, please

contact Volvo at:

In the USA

Volvo Cars of North America, LLC

Customer Care Center

1 Volvo Drive

P.O. Box 914

Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647

1-800-458-1552

In Canada

Volvo Cars of Canada Corp.

National Customer Service

9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101

Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9

1-800-663-8255

WARNING

•No objects that add to the total weight on

the seat should be placed on the front

passenger's seat. If a child is seated in

the front passenger's seat with any addi-

tional weight, this extra weight could

cause the OWS system to enable the air-

bag, which might cause it to deploy in the

event of a collision, thereby injuring the

child.

•The seat belt should never be wrapped

around an object on the front passeng-

er's seat. This could interfere with the

OWS system's function.

•The front passenger's seat belt should

never be used in a way that exerts more

pressure on the passenger than normal.

This could increase the pressure exerted

on the weight sensor by a child, and

could result in the airbag being enabled,

which might cause it to deploy in the

event of a collision, thereby injuring the

child.

WARNING

•Keep the following points in mind with

respect to the OWS system. Failure to

follow these instructions could adversely

affect the system's function and result in

serious injury to the occupant of the front

passenger's seat:

•The full weight of the front seat passen-

ger should always be on the seat cushion.

The passenger should never lift him/

herself off the seat cushion using the

armrest in the door or the center console,

by pressing the feet on the floor, by sit-

ting on the edge of the seat cushion, or

by pressing against the backrest in a way

that reduces pressure on the seat cush-

ion. This could cause OWS to disable the

front, passenger's side airbag.

WARNING

•Do not place any type of object on the

front passenger's seat in such a way that

jamming, pressing, or squeezing occurs

between the object and the front seat,

other than as a direct result of the correct

use of the Automatic Locking Retractor/

Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR)

seat belt (Child restraints (p. 49)).

•No objects should be placed under the

front passenger's seat. This could inter-

fere with the OWS system's function.

SAFETY

}}

Related information

•Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

(p. 33)

Side impact protection (SIPS)

airbags

As an enhancement to the structural side impact

protection built into your vehicle, it is also equip-

ped with Side Impact Protection System (SIPS)

airbags.

G032949

Location of the side impact (SIPS) airbags (front seats

only)

The SIPS airbag system is designed to help

increase occupant protection in the event of cer-

tain side impact collisions. The SIPS airbags are

designed to deploy only during certain side-

impact collisions, depending on the crash

severity, angle, speed and point of impact.

Driver's side SIPS airbag

Passenger's side SIPS airbag

SAFETY

NOTE

SIPS airbag deployment (one airbag) occurs

only on the side of the vehicle affected by the

impact. The airbags are not designed to

deploy in all side impact situations.

Components in the SIPS airbag system

This SIPS airbag system consists of a gas gener-

ator, the side airbag modules built into the out-

board sides of both front seat backrests, and

electronic sensors/wiring.

WARNING

•The SIPS airbag system is a supplement

to the structural Side Impact Protection

System and the three-point seat belt sys-

tem. It is not designed to deploy during

collisions from the front or rear of the

vehicle or in rollover situations.

•The use of seat covers on the front seats

may impede SIPS airbag deployment.

•No objects, accessory equipment or stick-

ers may be placed on, attached to or

installed near the SIPS airbag system or

in the area affected by SIPS airbag

deployment.

•Never try to open or repair any compo-

nents of the SIPS airbag system. This

should be done only by a trained and

qualified Volvo service technician.

•In order for the SIPS airbag to provide its

best protection, both front seat occupants

should sit in an upright position with the

seat belt properly fastened.

•Failure to follow these instructions can

result in injury to the occupants of the

vehicle in the event of an accident.

Related information

•Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

(p. 33)

•Front airbags (p. 35)

•Inflatable Curtain (IC) (p. 42)

Inflatable Curtain (IC)

The inflatable curtain is designed to help protect

the heads of the occupants of the front seats

and the occupant of the outboard rear seating

positions in certain side impact collisions.

This system consists of inflatable curtains located

along the sides of the roof liners, stretching from

the center of both front side windows to the rear

edge of the rear side door windows.

In certain side impacts, both the Inflatable Cur-

tain (IC) and the Side Impact Airbag Sys-

tem (p. 41) (SIPS airbag) will deploy. The IC and

the SIPS airbag deploy simultaneously.

NOTE

If the inflatable curtain deploys, it remains

inflated for approximately 6 seconds.

SAFETY

}}

WARNING

•The IC system is a supplement to the

Side Impact Protection System. It is not

designed to deploy during collisions from

the rear of the vehicle.

•Never try to open or repair any compo-

nents of the IC system. This should be

done only by a trained and qualified Volvo

service technician.

•Never hang heavy items from the ceiling

handles. This could impede deployment

of the Inflatable Curtain.

•The cargo area and rear seat should not

be loaded to a level higher than 2 in.

(5 cm) below the upper edge of the rear

side windows. Objects placed higher than

this level could impede the function of

the Inflatable Curtain.

WARNING

In order for the IC to provide its best protec-

tion, both front seat occupants and both out-

board rear seat occupants should sit in an

upright position with the seat belt properly

fastened; adults using the seat belt and chil-

dren using the proper child restraint system.

Failure to follow these instructions can result

in injury to the vehicle occupants in an acci-

dent.

Related information

•Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

(p. 33)

•Front airbags (p. 35)

•Child safety (p. 47)

Whiplash Protection System

(WHIPS)

The WHIPS system consists of specially

designed hinges and brackets on the front seat

backrests designed to help absorb some of the

energy generated in a collision from the rear

(when the vehicle is rear-ended).

SAFETY

In the event of a rear-end collision, the hinges

and brackets of the front seat backrests are

designed to change position slightly to allow the

backrest/head restraint to help support the occu-

pant's head before moving slightly rearward. This

movement helps absorb some of the forces that

could result in whiplash.

WARNING

•The WHIPS system is designed to sup-

plement the other safety systems in your

vehicle. For this system to function prop-

erly, the three-point seat belt must be

worn. Please be aware that no system

can prevent all possible injuries that may

occur in an accident.

•The WHIPS system is designed to func-

tion in certain collisions from the rear,

depending on the crash severity, angle

and speed.

WARNING

•Occupants in the front seats must never

sit out of position. The occupant's back

must be as upright as comfort allows and

be against the seat back with the seat

belt properly fastened.

•If your vehicle has been involved in a rear-

end collision, the front seat backrests

must be inspected by a trained and quali-

fied Volvo service technician, even if the

seats appear to be undamaged. Certain

components in the WHIPS system may

need to be replaced.

•Do not attempt to service any component

in the WHIPS system yourself.

SAFETY

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 45

WARNING

•Boxes, suitcases, etc. wedged behind the

front seats could impede the function of

the Whiplash Protection System.

•If the rear seat backrests are folded

down, cargo must be secured to prevent

it from sliding forward against the front

seat backrests in the event of a collision

from the rear. This could interfere with

the action of the Whiplash Protection

System.

WARNING

Any contact between the front seat backrests

and the folded rear seat or a rear-facing child

seat could impede the function of the WHIPS

system. If the rear seat is folded down, the

occupied front seats must be adjusted for-

ward so that they do not touch the folded rear

seat.

Related information

•Seat belts – general (p. 30)

Crash mode – general information

After a collision, the functionality of some of the

vehicle's systems may be reduced as a safety

precaution.

Warning symbol: analog instrument panel

Warning symbol: digital instrument panel*

||
SAFETY
46
If the vehicle has been involved in a collision, the
text Safety mode See manual may appear in
the information display.
NOTE
This text can only be shown if the display is
undamaged and the vehicle's electrical sys-
tem is intact.
Crash mode is a feature that is triggered if one or
more of the safety systems (e.g. front (p. 35) or
side airbags (p. 41), an inflatable curtain (p. 42),
or one or more of the seat belt pretensioners)
has deployed. The collision may have damaged
an important function in the vehicle, such as the
fuel lines, sensors for one of the safety systems,
the brake system, etc.
WARNING
•Never attempt to repair the vehicle your-
self or to reset the electrical system after
the vehicle has displayed Safety mode
See manual. This could result in injury or
improper system function.
•Restoring the vehicle to normal operating
status should only be done by a trained
and qualified Volvo service technician.
•After Safety mode See manual has
been displayed, if you detect the odor of
fuel vapor, or see any signs of fuel leak-
age, do not attempt to start the vehicle.
Leave the vehicle immediately.
Related information
•Crash mode – starting the vehicle (p. 46)
•Crash mode – moving the vehicle (p. 47)
Crash mode – starting the vehicle
If Crash mode has been set Crash
mode (p. 45)) and damage to the vehicle is
minor and there is no fuel leakage, you may
attempt to start the engine.
To do so:
1. Remove the remote key from the ignition slot
and open the driver's door. If a message is
displayed that the ignition is on, press the
start button.
2. Close the driver's door and reinsert the
remote key in the ignition slot.
3. Try to start the vehicle.
WARNING
If the message Safety mode See manual is
still displayed, the vehicle should not be driven
and must be towed. Concealed faults may
make the vehicle difficult to control.
Related information
•Crash mode – general information (p. 45)
•Crash mode – moving the vehicle (p. 47)

SAFETY

}}

Crash mode – moving the vehicle

If the message Normal mode appears after an

attempt has been made to start the engine, Star-

ting the vehicle after a crash (p. 46), the vehicle

may be moved carefully from its present position,

if for example, it is blocking traffic. It should,

however, not be moved farther than is absolutely

necessary.

WARNING

Even if the vehicle appears to be drivable after

Crash mode has been set, it should not be

driven or towed (pulled by another vehicle).

There may be concealed damage that could

make it difficult or impossible to control. The

vehicle should be transported on a flatbed

tow truck to a trained and qualified Volvo

service technician for inspection/repairs.

Related information

•Crash mode – general information (p. 45)

Child safety

Children should always be seated safely when

traveling in the vehicle.

General information

Volvo recommends the proper use of restraint

systems (p. 49) for all occupants including chil-

dren. Remember that, regardless of age and size,

a child should always be properly restrained in a

vehicle.

Your vehicle is also equipped with ISOFIX/

LATCH attachments (p. 56), which make it

more convenient to install child seats.

Some restraint systems for children are designed

to be secured in the vehicle by lap belts or the

lap portion of a lap-shoulder belt. Such child

restraint systems can help protect children in

vehicles in the event of an accident only if they

are used properly. However, children could be

endangered in a crash if the child restraints are

not properly secured in the vehicle. Failure to fol-

low the installation instructions for your child

restraint can result in your child striking the vehi-

cle's interior in a sudden stop.

Holding a child in your arms is NOT a suitable

substitute for a child restraint system. In an acci-

dent, a child held in a person's arms can be

crushed between the vehicle's interior and an

unrestrained person. The child could also be

injured by striking the interior, or by being ejected

from the vehicle during a sudden maneuver or

impact. The same can also happen if the infant or

child rides unrestrained on the seat. Other occu-

pants should also be properly restrained to help

reduce the chance of injuring or increasing the

injury of a child.

All states and provinces have legislation govern-

ing how and where children should be carried in

a vehicle. Find out the regulations existing in your

state or province. Recent accident statistics have

shown that children are safer in rear seating

positions than front seating positions when prop-

erly restrained. A child restraint system can help

protect a child in a vehicle. Here's what to look

for when selecting a child restraint system:

It should have a label certifying that it meets

applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stand-

ards (FMVSS 213) – or in Canada, CMVSS 213.

Make sure the child restraint system is approved

for the child's height, weight and development –

the label required by the standard or regulation,

or instructions for infant restraints, typically pro-

vide this information.

In using any child restraint system, we urge you

to carefully look over the instructions that are

provided with the restraint. Be sure you under-

stand them and can use the device properly and

safely in this vehicle. A misused child restraint

system can result in increased injuries for both

the infant or child and other occupants in the

vehicle.

||
SAFETY
48
When a child has outgrown the child safety seat,
you should use the rear seat with the standard
seat belt fastened. The best way to help protect
the child here is to place the child on a cushion
so that the seat belt is properly located on the
hips (see Booster cushions (p. 55) for illustra-
tion). Legislation in your state or province may
mandate the use of a child seat or cushion in
combination with the seat belt, depending on the
child's age and/or size. Please check local regu-
lations.
A specially designed and tested booster cushion
and backrest can be obtained from your Volvo
retailer. See also Booster cushions (p. 55)
WARNING
•Do not use child safety seats or child
booster cushions/backrests in the front
passenger's seat. We also recommend
that children under 4 feet 7 inches
(140 cm) in height who have outgrown
these devices sit in the rear seat with the
seat belt fastened.
•Sedan models: Keep vehicle doors and
trunk locked and keep remote controls
out of a child’s reach. Unsupervised chil-
dren could lock themselves in an open
trunk and risk injury. Children should be
taught not to play in vehicles.
•On hot days, the temperature in the vehi-
cle interior can rise very quickly. Exposure
to these high temperatures for even a
short period of time can cause heat-rela-
ted injury or death. Small children are par-
ticularly at risk.
Child seat should always be registered. See Child
restraints (p. 49) for more information.
Volvo's recommendations
Why does Volvo believe that no child should sit in
the front seat of a car? It's quite simple really. A
front airbag (p. 35) is a very powerful device
designed, by law, to help protect an adult.
Because of the size of the airbag and its speed
of inflation, a child should never be placed in the
front seat, even if he or she is properly belted or
strapped into a child safety seat. Volvo has been
an innovator in safety for over seventy-five years,
and we'll continue to do our part. But we need
your help. Please remember to put your children
in the back seat, and buckle them up.
Volvo has some very specific
recommendations:
•Always wear your seat belt (p. 30).
•Airbags are a SUPPLEMENTAL safety
device which, when used with a three-point
seat belt can help reduce serious injuries
during certain types of accidents. Volvo rec-
ommends that you do not disconnect the air-
bag system in your vehicle.
•Volvo strongly recommends that everyone in
the vehicle be properly restrained.
•Volvo recommends that ALL occupants
(adults and children) shorter than 4 feet
7 inches (140 cm) be seated in the back
seat of any vehicle with a front passenger
side airbag.
•Drive safely!
Related information
•Infant seats (p. 51)
•Convertible seats (p. 53)
•Booster cushions (p. 55)
•Integrated booster cushion – general infor-
mation (p. 59)
•Child safety locks (p. 63)
•Top tether anchors (p. 58)

SAFETY

}}

Child restraints

Suitable child restraints should always be used

when children travel in the vehicle.

Child restraint systems

G022840

Infant seat

There are three main types of child restraint sys-

tems: infant seats (p. 51), convertible

seats (p. 53), and booster cushions (p. 55).

They are classified according to the child's age

and size.

The following section provides general informa-

tion on securing a child restraint using a three-

point seat belt (p. 30). Refer to ISOFIX/LATCH

lower anchors (p. 56) and Top tether anchors

(p. 58) for information on securing a child

restraint using ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors

and/or top tether anchorages.

G022847

Convertible seat

WARNING

A child seat should never be used in the front

passenger seat of any vehicle with a front

passenger airbag – not even if the "Passen-

ger airbag off" symbol near the rear-view mir-

ror is illuminated (on vehicles equipped with

Occupant Weight Sensor). If the severity of an

accident were to cause the airbag to inflate,

this could lead to serious injury or death to a

child seated in this position.

G023269

Booster cushion

WARNING

Always refer to the child restraint manufactur-

er's instructions for detailed information on

securing the restraint.

SAFETY

WARNING

•When not in use, keep the child restraint

system secured or remove it from the

passenger compartment to help prevent it

from injuring passengers in the event of a

sudden stop or collision.

•A small child's head represents a consid-

erable part of its total weight and its neck

is still very weak. Volvo recommends that

children up to age 4 travel, properly

restrained, facing rearward. In addition,

Volvo recommends that children should

ride rearward facing, properly restrained,

as long as possible.

Automatic Locking Retractor/

Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/

ELR)

To make child seat installation easier, each seat

belt (except for the driver's belt) is equipped with

a locking mechanism to help keep the seat belt

taut.

When attaching the seat belt to a child seat:

1. Attach the seat belt to the child seat accord-

ing to the child seat manufacturer's instruc-

tions.

2. Pull the seat belt out as far as possible.

3. Insert the seat belt latch plate into the buckle

(lock) in the usual way.

4. Release the seat belt and pull it taut around

the child seat.

A sound from the seat belt retractor will be audi-

ble at this time and is normal. The belt will now

be locked in place. This function is automatically

disabled when the seat belt is unlocked and the

belt is fully retracted.

WARNING

Do not use child safety seats or child booster

cushions/backrests in the front passenger's

seat. We also recommend that children who

have outgrown these devices sit in the rear

seat with the seat belt properly fastened.

Child restraint registration and recalls

Child restraints could be recalled for safety rea-

sons. You must register your child restraint to be

reached in a recall. To stay informed about child

safety seat recalls, be sure to fill out and return

the registration card that comes with new child

restraints.

Child restraint recall information is readily availa-

ble in both the U.S. and Canada. For recall infor-

mation in the U.S., call the U.S. Government's

Auto Safety Hotline at 1-800-424-9393 or go to

http://www-odi.nhtsa.dot.gov/cars/problems/

recalls/register/childseat/index.cfm. In Canada,

visit Transport Canada's Child Safety website at

http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/childsafety/

menu.htm.

Related information

•Child safety locks (p. 63)

•Integrated booster cushion – general infor-

mation (p. 59)

SAFETY

}}

Infant seats

Suitable child restraints should always be used

when children (depending on their age/size) are

seated in the vehicle.

Securing an infant seat with a seat belt

G022844

Do not place the infant seat in the front passenger's

seat

NOTE

Refer to (p. 56) and (p. 58) for informa-

tion on securing a child restraint using ISO-

FIX/LATCH lower anchors and/or top tether

anchorages.

1. Place the infant seat in the rear seat of the

vehicle.

2. Attach the seat belt to the infant seat

according to the manufacturer's instructions.

G023270

Positioning the seat belt through the infant seat

WARNING

•An infant seat must be in the rear-facing

position only.

•The infant seat should not be positioned

behind the driver's seat unless there is

adequate space for safe installation.

SAFETY

WARNING

A child seat should never be used in the front

passenger seat of any vehicle with a front

passenger airbag – not even if the "Passen-

ger airbag off" symbol near the rear-view mir-

ror is illuminated (on vehicles equipped with

Occupant Weight Sensor). If the severity of an

accident were to cause the airbag to inflate,

this could lead to serious injury or death to a

child seated in this position.

3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch

plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct

click is audible.

G023271

Fasten the seat belt

G022846

Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt

4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat belt out

as far as possible to activate the belt's auto-

matic locking function.

NOTE

The locking retractor will automatically

release when the seat belt is unbuckled and

allowed to retract fully.

5. Press the infant seat firmly in place, let the

seat belt retract and pull it taut. A sound from

the seat belt retractor's automatic locking

function will be audible at this time and is

normal. The seat belt should now be locked

in place.

G022850

Ensure that the seat is securely in place

6. Push and pull the infant seat along the seat

belt path to ensure that it is held securely in

place by the seat belt.

SAFETY

}}

WARNING

It should not be possible to move the child

restraint (child seat) more than 1 in. (2.5 cm)

in any direction along the seat belt path.

The infant seat can be removed by unbuckling

the seat belt and letting it retract completely.

Related information

•Child safety (p. 47)

•Child restraints (p. 49)

•Convertible seats (p. 53)

•Integrated booster cushion – general infor-

mation (p. 59)

•ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 56)

•Top tether anchors (p. 58)

Convertible seats

Suitable child restraints should always be used

when children (depending on their age/size) are

seated in the vehicle.

Securing a convertible seat with a seat

belt

G018630

Do not place the convertible seat in the front passeng-

er's seat

NOTE

Refer to (p. 56) and (p. 58) for information

on securing a child restraint using ISOFIX/

LATCH lower anchors and/or top tether

anchorages.

Convertible seats can be used in either a forward

or rearward-facing position, depending on the

age and size of the child.

G022847

Route the seat belt through the convertible seat

WARNING

Always use a convertible seat that is suitable

for the child's age and size. See the converti-

ble seat manufacturer's recommendations.

1. Place the convertible seat in the rear seat of

the vehicle.

SAFETY

WARNING

•A small child's head represents a consider-

able part of its total weight and its neck is

still very weak. Volvo recommends that

children up to age 4 travel, properly

restrained, facing rearward. In addition,

Volvo recommends that children should

ride rearward facing, properly restrained, as

long as possible.

•Convertible child seats should be installed

in the rear seat only.

•A rear-facing convertible seat should not

be positioned behind the driver's seat

unless there is adequate space for safe

installation.

2. Attach the seat belt to the convertible seat

according to the manufacturer's instructions.

G022848

Fasten the seat belt

3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch

plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct

click is audible.

4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat belt out

as far as possible to activate the belt's auto-

matic locking function.

NOTE

The locking retractor will automatically

release when the seat belt is unbuckled and

allowed to retract fully.

5. Press the convertible seat firmly in place, let

the seat belt retract and pull it taut. A sound

from the seat belt retractor's automatic lock-

ing function will be audible at this time and is

normal. The seat belt should now be locked

in place.

G022849

Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt

6. Push and pull the convertible seat along the

seat belt path to ensure that it is held

securely in place by the seat belt.

SAFETY

}}

WARNING

It should not be possible to move the child

restraint (child seat) more than 1 in. (2.5 cm)

in any direction along the seat belt path.

The convertible seat can be removed by unbuck-

ling the seat belt and letting it retract completely.

G022850

Ensure that the seat is securely in place

WARNING

A child seat should never be used in the front

passenger seat of any vehicle with a front

passenger airbag – not even if the "Passen-

ger airbag off" symbol near the rear-view mir-

ror is illuminated. If the severity of an accident

were to cause the airbag to inflate, this could

lead to serious injury or death to a child

seated in this position.

Related information

•Child safety (p. 47)

•Child restraints (p. 49)

•Infant seats (p. 51)

•Integrated booster cushion – general infor-

mation (p. 59)

•ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 56)

•Top tether anchors (p. 58)

Booster cushions

Booster cushions should be properly positioned

in the vehicle.

Securing a booster cushion

G022851

Position the child correctly on the booster cushion

Booster cushions are recommended for children

who have outgrown convertible seats (p. 53).

1. Place the booster cushion in the rear seat of

the vehicle.

2. With the child properly seated on the booster

cushion, attach the seat belt to or around the

cushion according to the manufacturer's

instructions.

SAFETY

3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch

plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct

click is audible.

G022852

Positioning the seat belt

4. Ensure that the seat belt is pulled taut and

fits snugly around the child.

WARNING

•The hip section of the three-point seat

belt must fit snugly across the child's

hips, not across the stomach.

•The shoulder section of the three-point

seat belt should be positioned across the

chest and shoulder.

•The shoulder belt must never be placed

behind the child's back or under the arm.

Related information

•Child safety (p. 47)

•Child restraints (p. 49)

•Infant seats (p. 51)

•Convertible seats (p. 53)

•ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 56)

•Top tether anchors (p. 58)

ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors

Lower anchors for ISOFIX/LATCH-equipped

child seats are located in the rear, outboard

seats, hidden below the backrest cushions.

Using the ISOFIX/LATCH lower child

seat anchors

Symbols on the seat back upholstery mark the

ISOFIX/LATCH anchor positions as shown. To

access the anchors, kneel on the seat cushion

and locate the anchors by feel. Always follow your

child seat manufacturer's installation instructions,

and use both ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors and

top tethers (p. 58) whenever possible.

SAFETY

To access the anchors

1. Put the child restraint in position.

2. Kneel on the child restraint to press down

the seat cushion and locate the anchors by

feel.

3. Fasten the attachment on the child

restraint's lower straps to the ISOFIX/

LATCH/LATCH lower anchors.

4. Firmly tension the lower child seat straps

according to the manufacturer's instructions.

WARNING

Volvo's ISOFIX/LATCH anchors conform to

FMVSS/CMVSS standards. Always refer to

the child restraint system's manual for weight

and size ratings.

NOTE

•The rear seat's center position is not

equipped with ISOFIX/LATCH lower

anchors. When installing a child restraint

in this position, attach the restraint's top

tether strap (if it is so equipped) to the

top tether anchorage point and secure

the restraint with the vehicle's center seat

belt.

•Always follow your child seat manufactur-

er's installation instructions, and use both

ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors and top

tethers whenever possible.

G018631

Fasten the attachment correctly to the ISOFIX/LATCH

lower anchors

WARNING

•Be sure to fasten the attachment cor-

rectly to the anchor (see the illustration).

If the attachment is not correctly fas-

tened, the child restraint may not be

properly secured in the event of a colli-

sion.

•The ISOFIX/LATCH lower child restraint

anchors are only intended for use with

child seats positioned in the outboard

seating positions. These anchors are not

certified for use with any child restraint

that is positioned in the center seating

position. When securing a child restraint

in the center seating position, use only

the vehicle's center seat belt.

Related information

•Child safety (p. 47)

•Infant seats (p. 51)

•Convertible seats (p. 53)

•Integrated booster cushion – general infor-

mation (p. 59)

SAFETY

Top tether anchors

Your Volvo is equipped with child restraint top

tether anchorages in the rear seat. They are

located on the rear side of the backrests.

Child restraint anchorages

Securing a child seat

1. Place the child restraint on the rear seat.

2. Route the top tether strap under the head

restraint and attach it to the anchor.

3. Attach lower tether straps to the lower ISO-

FIX/LATCH anchors. If the child restraint is

not equipped with lower tether straps, or the

restraint is used in the center seating posi-

tion, follow instructions for securing a child

restraint using the Automatic Locking

Retractor seat belt (see Child restraints

(p. 49)).

4. Firmly tension all straps.

Refer also to the child seat manufacturer's

instructions for information on securing the child

seat.

NOTE

On models equipped with the optional cargo

area cover, this cover should be removed

before a child seat is attached to the child

restraint anchors.

WARNING

•Always refer to the recommendations

made by the child restraint manufacturer.

•Volvo recommends that the top tether

anchors be used when installing a for-

ward-facing child restraint.

•Never route a top tether strap over the

top of the head restraint. The strap

should be routed beneath the head

restraint.

•Child restraint anchorages are designed

to withstand only those loads imposed by

correctly fitted child restraints. Under no

circumstances are they to be used for

adult seat belts or harnesses. The ancho-

rages are not able to withstand excessive

forces on them in the event of collision if

full harness seat belts or adult seat belts

are installed to them. An adult who uses a

belt anchored in a child restraint anchor-

age runs a great risk of suffering severe

injuries should a collision occur.

•Do not install rear speakers that require

the removal of the top tether anchors or

interfere with the proper use of the top

tether strap.

Related information

•Child safety (p. 47)

•Infant seats (p. 51)

•Convertible seats (p. 53)

SAFETY

}}

•Integrated booster cushion – general infor-

mation (p. 59)

•ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 56)

Integrated booster cushion –

general information

The booster cushions are designed to raise the

child higher so that the shoulder strap crosses

over the child's collarbone, not over the neck.

Integrated two-stage booster cushion2

Volvo's optional integrated booster cushions are

located in the outboard seating positions. These

booster cushions have been specially designed

to help safeguard children in the rear seat. They

should be stowed (p. 62) (folded down into the

seat cushion) when not in use. When using an

integrated booster cushion (p. 61), the child

must be secured with the vehicle's three-point

seat belt.

If using a booster cushion does not result in

proper positioning of the shoulder strap, then the

child should be placed in a properly secured child

restraint (see (p. 49) ). The shoulder belt must

never be placed behind the child's back or under

the arm.

Correct seating position: the shoulder belt is across the

collarbone

Incorrect seating position: the child's head is above the

head restraint and the shoulder belt is not across the

collarbone

Before driving, check that:

2Canada only: This cushion may be referred to as a built-in booster cushion.

SAFETY

•The integrated two-stage booster cushion is

set in the correct position according to the

child's height and weight (see the table

below) and is locked in position.

•That the seat belt (p. 30) is properly posi-

tioned and is taut.

•The shoulder section of the seat belt is

across the child's collarbone, not over the

neck.

•The lap section of the seat belt is across the

child's hips and not the abdomen.

•The head restraint is set to same height as

the child’s head so that, if possible, the entire

back of the child's head is covered.

US models

Stage 1 Stage 2

Weight 50 – 80 lbs

22 – 36 kg

35 – 55 lbs

15 – 25 kg

Height 45 – 55 in.

115 – 140 cm

37 – 47 in.

95 – 120 cm

Canadian models

Stage 1 Stage 2

Weight 22 – 36 kg

50 – 80 lbs

18 – 25 kg

40 – 55 lbs

Height 115 – 140 cm

45 – 55 in.

102 – 120 cm

40 – 47 in.

18 kg (40 lbs) is the minimum weight require-

ment for a child using booster seats according to

the Canadian regulation CMVSS 213.4.

WARNING

DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY can

occur

•Follow all instructions on this

child restraint and in the vehicle’s

owner’s manual.

•Make sure the booster cushion is

securely locked before the child

is seated.

•Use this booster cushion only with chil-

dren whose height and weight are within

the permitted limits shown in the table.

•Use only the vehicle’s lap and shoulder

belt system when restraining the child in

this booster seat.

•In the event of a collision while the inte-

grated booster cushion was occupied, the

entire booster cushion and seat belt must

be replaced. The booster cushion should

also be replaced if it is badly worn or

damaged in any way. This work should be

performed by a trained and qualified

Volvo service technician only.

Related information

•Child safety (p. 47)

•Infant seats (p. 51)

•Convertible seats (p. 53)

•Booster cushions (p. 55)

•Seat belts – general (p. 30)

SAFETY

}}

Integrated booster cushion – using

The Integrated booster cushion (p. 59) in the

rear seat can be folded up in two stages,

depending on the child's height and weight.

Stage 1

Pull the handle (1) forward and upward (2) to

release the booster cushion.

Press the booster cushion rearward to lock it

in position.

Stage 2

With the booster cushion in the stage 1 posi-

tion, press the button (see the arrow in illus-

tration 1).

Lift the front edge of the booster cushion

and press it rearward toward the backrest to

lock it in position.

WARNING

DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY can

occur

•Follow all instructions on this

child restraint and in the vehicle’s

owner’s manual.

•Make sure the booster cushion is

securely locked before the child

is seated.

•Use this booster cushion only with chil-

dren whose height and weight are within

the permitted limits shown in the table.

•Use only the vehicle’s lap and shoulder

belt system when restraining the child in

this booster seat.

•In the event of a collision while the inte-

grated booster cushion was occupied, the

entire booster cushion and seat belt must

be replaced. The booster cushion should

also be replaced if it is badly worn or

damaged in any way. This work should be

performed by a trained and qualified

Volvo service technician only.

SAFETY

The table showing the permitted heights and

weights can be found in the article "Integrated

booster cushion – general information."

Related information

•Integrated booster cushion – stowing

(p. 62)

•Integrated booster cushion – general infor-

mation (p. 59)

Integrated booster cushion –

stowing

The integrated booster cushion (p. 59) can be

folded down completely (stowed) from either the

stage 1 or stage 2 positions.

NOTE

The booster cushion cannot be moved from

the stage 2 (upper) position to the stage 1

(lower) position. It must first be folded down

completely to the stowed position, and then

adjusted to stage 1.

Pull the handle forward to release the

booster cushion.

Press down on the center of the booster

cushion to return it to the stowed position.

NOTE

The booster cushion must be in the stowed

position before the rear seat backrests are

folded down.

CAUTION

Be sure there are no loose objects under the

booster cushion before it is stowed.

SAFETY

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 63

WARNING

DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY can

occur

•Follow all instructions on this

child restraint and in the vehicle’s

owner’s manual.

•Make sure the booster cushion is

securely locked before the child

is seated.

•Use this booster cushion only with chil-

dren whose height and weight are within

the permitted limits shown in the table.

•Use only the vehicle’s lap and shoulder

belt system when restraining the child in

this booster seat.

•In the event of a collision while the inte-

grated booster cushion was occupied, the

entire booster cushion and seat belt must

be replaced. The booster cushion should

also be replaced if it is badly worn or

damaged in any way. This work should be

performed by a trained and qualified

Volvo service technician only.

The table showing the permitted heights and

weights can be found in the article "Integrated

booster cushion – general information."

Related information

•Integrated booster cushion – using (p. 61)

•Integrated booster cushion – general infor-

mation (p. 59)

Child safety locks

Power child safety locks* help prevent children

from inadvertently opening one of the rear doors

or windows from inside the vehicle.

Manual child safety locks

Child safety locks – rear doors

The controls are located on the rear door jambs.

Use the remote control's key blade or a screw-

driver to adjust these controls.

The rear doors can only be opened from the

outside when the slot is in the horizontal

position.

The rear doors can be opened from the

inside when the slot is in the vertical position.

SAFETY

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Power child safety locks and

disengaging rear door windows*

Driver's door control panel

The power child safety locks can be activated/

deactivated when the remote key is in

mode I (p. 80) or higher. Activation/deactivation

can be done up to 2 minutes after the engine

has been switched off (if no door has been

opened).

To activate the child safety locks:

1. Put the ignition in mode I or higher, or start

the engine.

2. Press the button on the driver's door control

panel (see the illustration).

>Rear child locks Activated will be dis-

played in the instrument panel and the

indicator light in the button will illuminate

when the function is activated.

When the child safety locks are activated:

•The rear door windows can only be opened

from the driver's door control panel

•The rear doors cannot be opened from the

inside

The child safety locks' current setting is stored

when the engine is switched off. If these locks

were activated when the engine was switched off,

they will also be active when the engine is restar-

ted.

Related information

•Detachable key blade – general information

(p. 155)

•Locking/unlocking – from inside (p. 164)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Instrument overview

This overview shows the location of the instru-

ment panel and center console displays, and

controls/buttons/switches.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
68
Function See
Controls for menus and
messages, turn signals,
high/low beams, trip
computer
(p. 77),
(p. 97),
(p. 90),
(p. 116)
Paddles for manually
shifting gears*
(p. 264)
Cruise control (p. 179)
Horn, airbag (p. 89),
(p. 35)
Main instrument panel (p. 69)
Infotainment system/
Bluetooth hands-free
controls
Sensus Info-
tainment sup-
plement
START/STOP ENGINE
button
(p. 79)
Ignition slot (p. 79)
Display for infotainment
system functions and
menus
(p. 114), Sen-
sus Infotain-
ment supple-
ment
Door handle -
Function See
In-door control panels
(power windows, mir-
rors, central locking but-
ton)
(p. 103),
(p. 104),
(p. 164)
Hazard warning flashers (p. 96)
Controls for the info-
tainment system and
menus
(p. 77),
(p. 130), Sen-
sus Infotain-
ment supple-
ment
Climate system controls (p. 130)
Gear selector (p. 262)
Controls for active chas-
sis (Four-C)*
(p. 172)
Wipers and washers (p. 100),
(p. 101)
Steering wheel adjust-
ment
(p. 89)
Hood opening control (p. 337)
Parking brake (p. 280)
Function See
Power seat* adjustment
controls
(p. 82)
Lighting panel, buttons
for opening fuel filler
door and unlocking the
tailgate
(p. 90),
(p. 289),
(p. 166)
Related information
•Information displays – ambient temperature
sensor (p. 78)
•Information displays – trip odometer and
clock (p. 79)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 69

Information displays – introduction

The displays show information on some of the

vehicle's functions, such as cruise control, the

trip computer and messages. The information is

shown with text and symbols.

Information displays: analog instrument panel

Information displays: digital instrument panel*

More detailed information can be found in the

descriptions of the functions that use the infor-

mation displays.

Gauges and indicators: analog

instrument panel

Fuel gauge: When the indicator shows one

white marking1, a yellow indicator light will

illuminate to indicate a low fuel level. See

also Trip computer – introduction (p. 116)

and Refueling – fuel requirements (p. 286)

for additional information.

Eco meter: Indicates how economically the

vehicle is being driven. The higher the needle

moves on the scale, the more economically

the vehicle is being driven.

Speedometer

Tachometer: Shows engine speed in thou-

sands of revolutions per minute (rpm)

Gear indicator: Shows the currently selected

gear

1When the message Distance to empty fuel tank: shows "----", the marker turns red

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Gauges and indicators: digital

instrument panel*

Different themes (display alternatives) can be

selected for the digital instrument panel:

•Elegance

•Eco

•Performance

To change themes, press the OK button on the

left steering wheel lever and use the thumb

wheel to scroll to Themes. Press OK to confirm

your choice.

Theme Elegance: gauges and indicators

Fuel gauge. When the indicator shows one

white marking, a yellow indicator light will illu-

minate to indicate a low fuel level. See also

Trip computer – introduction (p. 116) and

Refueling – fuel requirements (p. 286) for

additional information.

Coolant temperature gauge

Speedometer

Tachometer (engine speed in thousands of

revolutions per minute (rpm))

Gear indicator: Shows the currently selected

gear

Theme Eco: gauges and indicators

Fuel gauge. When the indicator shows a

white marking, a yellow indicator light will illu-

minate to indicate a low fuel level. See also

Trip computer – introduction (p. 116) and

Refueling – fuel requirements (p. 286) for

additional information.

Eco Guide (see Eco Guide* and Power

Meter* (p. 72))

Speedometer

Tachometer (engine speed in thousands of

revolutions per minute (rpm))

Gear indicator: Shows the currently selected

gear

Theme Performance: gauges and indicators

Fuel gauge. When the indicator shows a

white marking, a yellow indicator light will illu-

minate to indicate a low fuel level. See also

Trip computer – introduction (p. 116) and

Refueling – fuel requirements (p. 286) for

additional information.

Coolant temperature gauge

Speedometer

Tachometer (shows engine speed in thou-

sands of revolutions per minute (rpm))

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 71

Power Meter (see Eco Guide* and Power

Meter* (p. 72)).

Gear indicator: Shows the currently selected

gear

Indicator and warning symbols

Indicator and warning symbols: analog instrument panel

Indicator symbols

Indicator and warning symbols

Warning symbols

Indicator and warning symbols: digital instrument panel

Indicator symbols

Indicator and warning symbols

Warning symbols

Function check

All indicator and warning symbols light up in igni-

tion mode II or when the engine is started. When

the engine has started, all the symbols should go

out except the parking brake symbol, which only

goes out when the brake is disengaged.

If the engine does not start or if the function

check is carried out in ignition mode II, all sym-

bols go out after 5 seconds except the malfunc-

tion indicator light, which may indicate a fault in

the vehicle's emissions system, and the symbol

for low oil pressure.

Some of the symbols shown may not be available

in all markets or models.

Related information

•Instrument overview (p. 66)

•Information displays – indicator symbols

(p. 73)

•Information displays – warning symbols

(p. 75)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Eco Guide* and Power Meter*

Eco guide and Power guide are two gauges in

the instrument panel that help improve driving

economy.

The vehicle also stores driving-related statistics

in the form of a bar graph, see Trip computer –

Trip statistics (p. 124).

Introduction

To display or remove these functions from the

instrument panel, select the "Eco" theme (see

Information displays – introduction (p. 69)).

Driving statistics are also stored and can be dis-

played in the form of a bar chart (see Trip com-

puter – Trip statistics (p. 124)).

Eco Guide

This gauge gives an indication of how economi-

cally the vehicle is being driven.

Current (instantaneous) reading

Average

Current (instantaneous) reading

This is the current level of economical driving; the

higher the reading, the more economically the

vehicle is being driven.

This value is calculated based on the vehicle's

speed, engine speed (rpm), engine load and

brake use.

The optimal speed range is between approxi-

mately 30–50 mph (50–80 km/h), preferably at

as low rpm as possible. The markers fall when

the brake or accelerator pedal is pressed.

If the current reading is very low, the red field in

the gauge will illuminate after a slight delay, indi-

cating low driving economy.

Average

The average reading changes gradually accord-

ing to changes in the current reading to indicate

how economically the vehicle has been driven

recently. The higher the average reading, the

more economically the vehicle has been driven.

Power Meter

This gauge indicates the engine power that has

been utilized and the amount of power remaining.

Available power

Utilized power

Available power

The smaller, upper indicator shows the engine's

available power2. The higher the reading on the

scale, the greater the amount of power remaining

in the current gear.

2Depending on rpm

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 73

Utilized power

The larger, lower indicator shows the amount of

engine power that has been utilized2. The higher

the reading on the scale, the greater the amount

of power that is being utilized.

The larger the gap between the two indicators,

the greater the amount of power remaining.

Information displays – indicator

symbols

The indicator symbols alert the driver when cer-

tain functions are activated, that a system is

actively working or that a fault may have occur-

red in a system or function.

Symbol Description

Fault in the Active Bending Light

(ABL)*system

Malfunction indicator light

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)

Rear fog lights on

Stability system

The stability system's Sport mode is

activated

Low fuel level

Information symbol, read the text

displayed in the instrument panel

High beam indicator

Symbol Description

Left turn signal indicator

Right turn signal indicator

Tire pressure monitoring sensor

(TPMS)A

The Eco function is on.

TheStart/Stop function is active

(the engine has auto-stopped)

AOption in Canada

Fault in the Active Bending Light (ABL)

system

This symbol will illuminate if there is a fault in the

ABL system. See Active Bending Lights (ABL)*

(p. 93) for more information about this system.

2Depending on rpm

||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
74
Malfunction Indicator Light
As you drive, a computer called On-Board Diag-
nostics II (OBDII) monitors your vehicle's engine,
transmission, electrical and emission systems.
The malfunction indicator light will illuminate if
the computer senses a condition that potentially
may need correcting. When this happens, please
have your vehicle checked by a trained and quali-
fied Volvo service technician as soon as possible.
A malfunction indicator light may have many cau-
ses. Sometimes, you may not notice a change in
your car's behavior. Even so, an uncorrected con-
dition could hurt fuel economy, emission controls,
and drivability. Extended driving without correct-
ing the cause could even damage other compo-
nents in your vehicle.
This light may illuminate if the fuel filler cap is not
closed tightly or if the engine was running while
the vehicle was refueled.
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
If the warning light comes on, there may be a
malfunction in the ABS system (the standard
braking system will still function). Check the sys-
tem by:
1. Stopping in a safe place and switching off
the ignition.
2. Restart the engine.
3. If the warning light goes off, no further action
is required.
If the indicator light remains on, the vehicle
should be driven to a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician for inspection, see Brakes –
general (p. 277) for additional information.
Rear fog lights
This symbol indicates that the rear fog lights are
on.
Stability system
This indicator symbol flashes when the stability
system is actively working to stabilize the vehicle,
see Stability system – introduction (p. 172) for
more detailed information.
Stability system - Sport mode
This symbol illuminates to indicate that the stabil-
ity system's Sport mode has been activated to
help provide maximum tractive force, for example
when driving with snow chains, or driving in deep
snow or loose sand.
Low fuel level
When this light comes on, the vehicle should be
refueled as soon as possible. See Refueling –
fuel requirements (p. 286) for information about
fuel and refueling.
Information symbol
The information symbol lights up and a text mes-
sage is displayed to provide the driver with nec-
essary information about one of the vehicle's sys-
tems. The message can be erased and the sym-
bol can be turned off by pressing the OK button
(see Information display – menu controls
(p. 114) for information) or this will take place
automatically after a short time (the length of
time varies, depending on the function affected).
The information symbol may also illuminate
together with other symbols.
High beam indicator
This symbol illuminates when the high beam
headlights are on, or if the high beam flash func-
tion is used.
Left turn signal indicator
Right turn signal indicator
NOTE
•Both turn signal indicators will flash when
the hazard warning flashers are used.
•If either of these indicators flash faster
than normal, the direction indicators are
not functioning properly.
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)*
This symbol illuminates to indicate that tire pres-
sure in one or more tires is low, see Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) – general information
(p. 320) for detailed information.
Eco* function on
The symbol will illuminate when the Eco function
is activated.
Start/stop*
The symbol illuminates when the engine has
auto-stopped.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

Related information

•Information displays – introduction (p. 69)

•Information displays – warning symbols

(p. 75)

Information displays – warning

symbols

The warning lights alert the driver that an impor-

tant function is activated or that a serious fault

has occurred.

Symbol Description

Low oil pressureA

Parking brake appliedB

SRS airbags

Seat belt reminder

Generator not charging

Fault in the brake system

Warning symbol, read the text dis-

played in the instrument panel

ACertain engines do not use this symbol to indicate low oil pres-

sure. On these models, a text message will be displayed on the

instrument panel instead, see Engine compartment – engine oil

(p. 339).

BThe symbol is Park only on models with the optional digital

instrument panel.

Low oil pressure

If the light comes on while driving, stop the vehi-

cle, stop the engine immediately, and check the

engine oil level. Add oil if necessary. If the oil

level is normal and the light stays on after restart,

have the vehicle towed to the nearest trained and

qualified Volvo service technician.

Parking brake applied

This symbol flashes while the brake is being

applied and then glows steadily when the parking

brake has been set.

See Parking brake – general information (p. 280)

for more information about using the parking

brake.

Airbags – SRS

If this light comes on while the vehicle is being

driven, or remains on for longer than approxi-

mately 10 seconds after the vehicle has been

started, the SRS system's diagnostic functions

have detected a fault in a seat belt lock or pre-

tensioner, a front airbag, side impact airbag,

and/or an inflatable curtain. Have the system(s)

inspected by a trained and qualified Volvo service

technician as soon as possible.

See Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

(p. 33) for more information about the airbag sys-

tem.

Seat belt reminder

This symbol comes on for approximately 6 sec-

onds if the driver has not fastened his or her seat

belt.

Generator not charging

This symbol comes on during driving if a fault has

occurred in the electrical system. Contact an

authorized Volvo workshop.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Engine temperature

Engine overheating can result from low oil or

coolant levels, towing or hard driving at high heat

and altitude, or mechanical malfunction. Engine

overheating will be signaled with text and a red

warning triangle in the middle of the instrument

display. The exact text will depend on the degree

of overheating. It may range from High engine

temp Reduce speed to High engine temp

Stop engine. If appropriate, other messages,

such as Coolant level low, Stop safely will

also be displayed. If your engine does overheat

so that you must stop the engine, always allow

the engine to cool before attempting to check oil

and coolant levels.

See Engine compartment – coolant (p. 341) for

more information.

Fault in brake system

If this symbol lights, the brake fluid level may be

too low. Stop the vehicle in a safe place and

check the level in the brake fluid reservoir, see

Engine compartment – brake fluid (p. 342). If the

level in the reservoir is below MIN, the vehicle

should be transported to an authorized Volvo

workshop to have the brake system checked.

If the and symbols come on at

the same time, there may be a fault in the brake

force distribution system.

1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off

the engine.

2. Restart the engine.

•If both symbols extinguish, continue driving.

•If the symbols remain on, check the level in

the brake fluid reservoir, see Engine com-

partment – brake fluid (p. 342). If the brake

fluid level is normal but the symbols are still

lit, the vehicle can be driven, with great care,

to an authorized Volvo workshop to have the

brake system checked.

•If the level in the reservoir is below MIN, the

vehicle should be transported to an author-

ized Volvo workshop to have the brake sys-

tem checked.

WARNING

•If the fluid level is below the MIN mark in

the reservoir or if a warning message is

displayed in the text window: DO NOT

DRIVE. Have the vehicle towed to a

trained and qualified Volvo service techni-

cian and have the brake system inspec-

ted.

•If the and symbols are

on at the same time, there is a risk of

reduced vehicle stability.

Warning symbol

The red warning symbol lights up to indicate a

problem related to safety and/or drivability. A

message will also appear in the instrument panel.

The symbol remains visible until the fault has

been rectified but the text message can be

cleared with the OK button, see Information dis-

play – menu controls (p. 114). The warning sym-

bol can also come on in conjunction with other

symbols.

Action:

1. Stop in a safe place. Do not drive the vehicle

further.

2. Read the information on the display. Imple-

ment the action in accordance with the mes-

sage in the display. Clear the message using

OK.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

Reminder – doors not closed

If one of the doors is not closed properly, the

information or warning symbol illuminates

(depending on the vehicle's speed), a graphic will

be displayed in instrument panel and an explana-

tory text message3 will also be displayed in the

instrument panel. Stop the vehicle in a safe place

as soon as possible and close the door.

If the vehicle is driven at a speed lower

than approximately 5 mph (7 km/h),

the information symbol illuminates.

If the vehicle is driven at a speed

higher than approximately 5 mph

(7 km/h), the warning symbol illumi-

nates.

If the hood is not closed properly, the warning

symbol illuminates, a graphic will be displayed in

instrument panel and an explanatory text mes-

sage3 will also be displayed in the instrument

panel. Stop the vehicle in a safe place as soon as

possible and close the hood.

If the tailgate is not closed properly, the infor-

mation symbol illuminates and a graphic will be

displayed in instrument panel. Stop the vehicle in

a safe place as soon as possible and close the

tailgate.

Related information

•Information displays – introduction (p. 69)

•Information displays – indicator symbols

(p. 73)

My Car – introduction

The MY CAR menu system provides access to

menus for operating many of the vehicle's func-

tions, such as setting the clock, door mirrors,

lock and alarm settings, etc.

Some of the features or functions are standard;

others are optional and vary according to model/

market.

Operation

Use the buttons on the center console or the

steering wheel keypad to navigate in the menus.

3Text message applies only to models with the optional digital instrument panel

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

The center console control panel and the steering wheel

keypad. The illustration is generic and the appearance/

location of the buttons may vary.

MY CAR: opens the MY CAR menu system.

OK/MENU: Press the button on the center

console or the thumb wheel on the steering

wheel keypad to select a menu alternative or

to store a selected function in the system's

memory.

TUNE: Turn this control on the center con-

sole or the thumb wheel on the steering

wheel keypad to navigate up/down in a

menu.

EXIT

EXIT functions

Depending on which function the cursor is point-

ing to and the menu level, briefly pressing EXIT

will result in:

•An in-coming phone call will be rejected

•The current function will be cancelled

•Characters entered will be erased

•The most recent selection will be cancelled

•Go back/up in the menu system

Pressing and holding EXIT takes you to the nor-

mal view for MY CAR. If you are already in normal

view, this will take you to the main source menu.

Menu selections and paths

Please consult your Sensus Infotainment supple-

ment for a description of the MY CAR menu

selections and paths.

Information displays – ambient

temperature sensor

Location of the ambient temperature sensor, A: digital

instrument panel*, B: analog instrument panel

NOTE

When the ambient temperature is between

23° and 36 °F (–5° and +2 °C), a snowflake

symbol will be displayed next to the tempera-

ture. This symbol serves as a warning for pos-

sible slippery road surfaces. Please note that

this symbol does not indicate a fault with your

vehicle.

At low speeds or when the vehicle is not mov-

ing, the temperature readings may be slightly

higher than the actual ambient temperature.

Related information

•Information displays – introduction (p. 69)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 79

Information displays – trip odometer

and clock

The trip odometers T1 and T2 and clock are dis-

played in the instrument panel.

Trip odometers

Trip odometer4

Odometer display

Turn the thumb wheel on the left steering wheel

lever to display the desired trip odometer.

Press and hold the RESET button on the left

steering wheel lever for at least 1 second to

reset the selected trip odometer5.

Clock

Clock, digital instrument panel*

Display6

Setting the clock

The clock can be set in the MY CAR menu sys-

tem. See My Car – introduction (p. 77) for addi-

tional information about these menus.

Go to Settings System options Time

settings. Set Auto time to ON (check the box)

and select the correct time zone under Location.

Related information

•Information displays – introduction (p. 69)

Inserting/removing remote key

The remote key is used to start the engine or to

use various electrical functions without starting

the engine.

Inserting and removing the remote key

Ignition slot with remote key and START/STOP

ENGINE button.

Inserting the remote key7

Holding the end of the remote key with the base

of the key blade, insert the remote key into the

ignition slot as shown in the illustration and press

it in as far as possible.

4The trip odometer will be displayed differently in analog and digital instrument panels

5Models with a digital information panel: press and hold RESET for more than approximately 4 seconds to reset all trip computer information

6Models with an analog instrument panel: the time will be displayed in the center of the instrument panel

7Not necessary in vehicles with the optional keyless drive.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

CAUTION

Foreign objects in the ignition slot can impair

function or cause damage.

Removing the remote key

The remote key can be removed from the ignition

slot by pulling it out.

Related information

•Ignition modes (p. 80)

Ignition modes

The vehicle's ignition has 3 modes: 0, I, and II

that can be used without starting the engine.

The following table shows examples of which

functions are available in the respective modes.

NOTE

To access ignition modes I or II without star-

ting the engine, the brake pedal must not be

depressed.

Mode Function

0The odometer, clock and temperature

gauge are illuminated. Power seats*

can be adjusted and the infotainment

system can be used for a limited time

(to minimize battery drain, see the

Sensus Infotainment Supplement).

IThe Moonroof*, power windows,12-

volt sockets in the passenger com-

partment, navigation system*, climate

system blower, windshield wipers can

be used.

II The headlights/taillights illuminate.

Warning/indicator lights illuminate for

5 seconds. Other systems are acti-

vated. However, the heated seats* and

heated rear window function can only

be activated when the engine is run-

ning. Mode II should only be used

for very short periods to help avoid

draining the battery.

Ignition modes

Ignition mode 0

–The vehicle is unlocked.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 81
Ignition mode I
–With the remote key fully pressed into the
ignition slot8, press START/STOP ENGINE
briefly.
Ignition mode II
–With the remote key fully pressed into the
ignition slot8, press START/STOP ENGINE
for approximately 2 seconds.
Returning to mode 0
To return to mode 0 from mode II or I, press
START/STOP ENGINE briefly.
Starting and stopping the engine
See Starting the engine (p. 258) and Switching
off the engine (p. 259) for information on star-
ting the engine and switching it off.
Emergency towing
See Towing the vehicle (p. 295) for important
information about the remote key when the vehi-
cle is being towed.
Related information
•Inserting/removing remote key (p. 79)
Front seats
The front seats can be adjusted in a number of
ways to help provide the most comfortable seat-
ing position.
Raise/lower the seat, pump up/down.
Front-rear adjustment: lift the bar and move
the seat to the position of your choice.
Raise/lower front edge of seat cushion,
pump up/down.
Backrest tilt: turn the control to adjust the
angle of the backrest.
Electronic lumbar support*. Press the button
to adjust.
Control panel for power seat*, see Front
seats – power seat (p. 82).
WARNING
•Do not adjust the seat while driving. The
seat should be adjusted so that the brake
pedal can be depressed fully. In addition,
position the seat as far rearward as com-
fort and control allow.
•Check that the seat is securely locked
into position after adjusting.
Related information
•Front seats – power seat (p. 82)
•Rear seats – folding backrest (p. 87)
•Rear seats – head restraints (p. 85)
8Not necessary in vehicles with the optional keyless drive.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Front seats – folding backrest*10

The front passenger's seat backrest can be

folded down to make it easier to transport long

objects.

The front passenger seat backrest can be folded

to a horizontal position to make room for a long

load. Fold the backrest as follows:

Move the seat as far back and down as pos-

sible.

Adjust the backrest to an upright position.

Lift the catches on the rear of the backrest.

Without releasing the catches, push the

backrest forward.

Move the seat as far forward as possible so

that the head restraint slides under the glove

compartment.

Return the seat to its upright position in the

reverse order.

WARNING

•When transporting long objects, cover

sharp edges on the load to help prevent

injury to occupants. Secure the load to

help prevent shifting during sudden stops.

•When the seat's backrest is returned to

the upright position, push and pull it to be

sure that it is securely locked in this posi-

tion.

Related information

•Front seats (p. 81)

•Front seats – power seat (p. 82)

•Rear seats – folding backrest (p. 87)

•Rear seats – head restraints (p. 85)

Front seats – power seat12

The power seat(s) can be adjusted for a short

period after unlocking the door with the remote

control without the key in the ignition slot. Seat

adjustment is normally made when the ignition is

on and can always be made when the engine is

running.

Power seat

Power seat adjustment controls

Front edge of seat cushion up/down

Raise/lower the seat

Seat forward/rearward

Backrest tilt

Electronic lumbar support*

10 The front passenger's seat backrest on models equipped with the optional sport seat cannot be folded down

12 Optional on certain models

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 83

Operation

NOTE

•Only one of the power seat's controls can

be used at the same time.

•The power seats have an overload pro-

tector that activates if a seat is blocked

by any object. If this occurs, switch off the

ignition (key in position 0) and wait for a

short period before operating the seat

again.

Power seat memory function

Power seat memory buttons

Button for storing a position

M (memory) button

Programming the seat's memory

Three different seating and door mirror positions

can be stored in the driver seat's memory.

The following example explains how button (1)

can be programmed. Buttons (2) and (3) are pro-

grammed in the same way.

To program (store) a seat and door mirror posi-

tion in button (1):

1. Move the seat (and door mirrors) to the

desired positions using the seat and mirror

adjustment controls.

2. Press and hold down the M (memory) button

(4).

3. With the memory button depressed, press

button (1) briefly to store the current position

for the seat/mirrors.

To move the seat and mirrors to the position

that they were in when a button was pro-

grammed:

–Press and hold down button (1) until the

seat and mirrors stop moving.

NOTE

As a safety precaution, the seat will stop

automatically if the button is released before

the seat has reached the preset position.

Heated seats*

See Heated seats (p. 131).

Related information

•Front seats (p. 81)

•Rear seats – folding backrest (p. 87)

•Rear seats – head restraints (p. 85)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Key memory – power driver's seat*

and door mirrors

Each remote key has a memory that enables it to

store (remember) the position of the power driv-

er's seat and door mirrors when the vehicle is

locked with that remote key.

Remote key memory and the power

driver's seat* and door mirrors13

The key memory has to be activated for each of

the remote keys used in the vehicle as fol-

lows:

1. Insert a remote key in the ignition slot.

2. Go into the MY CAR menu and go to

Settings Car settings Car key

memory

3. To activate the remote key memory feature,

press ENTER (check the box).

> The remote key is now ready to store the

position of the power driver's seat and

door mirrors.

Repeat this procedure for each of the vehicle's

remote keys.

See My Car – introduction (p. 77) for a descrip-

tion of the menu system.

Storing the positions of the power driver's

seat/mirrors in the remote key

1. Move the seat and door mirrors to the

desired position using the seat and mirror

adjustment controls.

2. Exit the vehicle and lock the doors with the

remote key (or close the driver's door and

press the lock button on the door handle

with the remote key in your possession on

vehicles with the optional keyless drive).

> The positions of the power driver's seat

and door mirrors are now stored in the

remote key's memory.

NOTE

The remote key's memory feature and the

power driver's seat memory function (the set-

tings made using the buttons on the side of

the seat, see the section "Power seat mem-

ory function" in Front seats – power seat

(p. 82)) work independently of each other.

13 This information also applies to vehicles with the optional keyless drive.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

Returning the seat/mirrors to the stored

positions

To move the seat and door mirrors to the position

stored in the remote key:

1. Unlock the driver's door with the same

remote key (the one used to lock the doors).

For models equipped with the optional key-

less drive, you must have the same remote

key in your possession.

2. Open the driver's door within 2 minutes.

The driver's seat and door mirrors will automati-

cally move to the position in which you left them

(if the vehicle has been unlocked with one of the

other keys and new seat/mirror adjustments have

been made).

NOTE

•The seat will move to this position even if

someone else has moved it to a different

position and locked the vehicle with a dif-

ferent remote key.

•This feature will work in the same way

with all of the remote keys that you use

with your vehicle.

Emergency stop

WARNING

•Because the driver's seat can be adjusted

with the ignition off, children should never

be left unattended in the vehicle.

•Movement of the seat can be STOPPED

at any time by pressing any button on the

power seat control panel.

•Do not adjust the seat while driving. The

seat should be adjusted so that the brake

pedal can be depressed fully. In addition,

position the seat as far rearward as com-

fort and control allow.

•The seat rails on the floor must not be

obstructed in any way when the seat is in

motion.

Related information

•Remote key – functions (p. 153)

Rear seats – head restraints

The rear seat head restraints can be folded

down. The center head restraint can be raised/

lowered according to the passenger's height.

Rear center head restraint

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

The center head restraint should be adjusted

according to the passenger's height. The

restraint should be carefully adjusted to support

the occupant's head.

•Pull the head restraint up as required.

•To lower, press and hold the button (located

at the center, between the backrest and the

head restraint) while pressing the head

restrain down carefully.

WARNING

The center rear seat head restraint should

only be in its lowest position when this seat is

NOT occupied. When the center seat is occu-

pied, the head restraint must be correctly

adjusted to the passenger’s height so that, if

possible, the entire back of the head is cov-

ered.

Manually folding down the rear seat's

outboard head restraints

•Pull the handle closest to the head restraint

to fold it down.

•To return the head restraint to the upright

position, push it up until it clicks into place.

NOTE

•The head restraint must be returned to

the upright position manually.

•The outboard head restraints cannot be

folded down on models that are not

equipped with this button.

CAUTION

The rear head restraints should not be kept

folded down for prolonged periods. This could

result in pressure marks in leather upholstery.

WARNING

For safety reasons, no one should be allowed

to sit in the outboard rear seat positions if the

head restraints are folded down. If these posi-

tions are occupied, the head restraints should

be in the upright (fixed) position.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

Automatically folding down the rear

seat’s outboard head restraints

1. The ignition must be in mode II.

2. Press the button to lower the rear head

restraints for improved visibility.

NOTE

•The head restraint must be returned to

the upright position manually.

•The outboard head restraints cannot be

folded down on models that are not

equipped with this button.

CAUTION

The rear head restraints should not be kept

folded down for prolonged periods. This could

result in pressure marks in leather upholstery.

WARNING

For safety reasons, no one should be allowed

to sit in the outboard rear seat positions if the

head restraints are folded down. If these posi-

tions are occupied, the head restraints should

be in the upright (fixed) position.

Related information

•Front seats (p. 81)

•Front seats – power seat (p. 82)

•Rear seats – head restraints (p. 85)

Rear seats – folding backrest

The rear seat head restraints and backrests can

be folded down. The center head restraint can

be raised/lowered according to the passenger's

height.

Folding down the rear seat backrests

The three sections of the rear seat backrest can

be folded down in different combinations to make

it easier to transport long objects.

•The left (driver's side) section can be folded

down separately.

•The center section can be folded down sepa-

rately.

•The right (passenger's side) section can only

be folded down together with the center sec-

tion.

•All three sections can be folded down

together.

CAUTION

To help avoid damage to the upholstery, there

should be no objects on the rear seat and the

seat belt should not be buckled when the

backrest is folded down.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Release and lower the center head restraint

(see Rear seats – head restraints (p. 85)) if

the center and/or right section of the back-

rest is to be lowered. The outboard head

restraints fold down automatically.

Pull up the backrest release control on the

respective section(s) ( ) and fold the sec-

tion(s) down. A red indicator ( ) shows that

the backrest is not locked in the upright

position.

NOTE

It may be necessary to move the front seats

forward or put their backrests in a more

upright position before folding down the rear

seat backrests.

WARNING

•When one or more sections of the back-

rest is returned to the upright position,

check that it is properly locked in place by

pushing and pulling it. The red indicators

should also not be visible.

•Return the outboard head restraints to

the upright position.

•Long loads should always be securely

anchored to help avoid injury in the event

of a sudden stop.

•Always turn the engine off and apply the

parking brake when loading/unloading

the vehicle.

•Place the transmission in the Park (P)

position to help prevent inadvertent

movement of the gear selector.

•On hot days, the temperature in the vehi-

cle interior can rise very quickly. Exposure

of people to these high temperatures for

even a short period of time can cause

heat-related injury or death. Small chil-

dren are particularly at risk.

Related information

•Front seats (p. 81)

•Front seats – power seat (p. 82)

•Rear seats – head restraints (p. 85)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 89

Steering wheel

The steering wheel can be adjusted to various

positions and has controls for the horn, cruise

control*, menus, the infotainment system and

Bluetooth®-connected cell phone.

Adjusting

G021138

Adjusting the steering wheel

Lever for releasing/locking the steering

wheel

Possible positions

To adjust the steering wheel's height and reach:

1. Pull the lever toward you to release the

steering wheel.

2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position that

suits you.

3. Push back the lever to lock the steering

wheel in place. If the lever is difficult to push

into place, press the steering wheel lightly at

the same time as you push the lever.

WARNING

Never adjust the steering wheel while driving.

With the optional speed-dependent power steer-

ing the level of steering force can be adjusted,

see Active chassis* (Four C) (p. 172).

Keypads and steering wheel paddles*

Steering wheel keypads and paddles*

Cruise control, see Cruise control (CC) –

introduction (p. 179). Adaptive cruise con-

trol*, see Adaptive Cruise Control – introduc-

tion (p. 182).

Paddles for manually shifting gears (Gear-

tronic), see Transmission – Geartronic

(p. 264).

Infotainment system controls, see Sensus

Infotainment supplement.

Horn

–Press the steering wheel hub to sound the

horn.

Related information

•Electrically heated* steering wheel (p. 90)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Electrically heated* steering wheel

The steering wheel can be heated electrically.

Button for steering wheel heating

With the engine running, press this button once

to begin warming the steering wheel (press again

to switch off). The indicator light in the button will

illuminate when the function is active.

This function can also be started automatically

(the setting can be activated/deactivated in the

MY CAR menu) if the vehicle is cold and the

ambient temperature is below approximately 50°

F (10° C).

Lighting panel

The lighting panel is used to control the daytime

running lights, parking lights, etc., and to adjust

the instrument panel lighting and "theater" light-

ing (p. 95).

Lighting panel overview

Thumb wheel for adjusting display, instru-

ment and "theater" lighting (see Instrument

and "theater" lighting (p. 95))

Rear fog lights (see Rear fog lights (p. 96))

Headlight switch

Volvo recommends using the position

whenever possible.

Headlight switch positions

Daytime running lights function as follows:

With the headlight switch in the posi-

tion:

•In the US: the daytime running lights will be

off

•In Canada: the daytime running lights will be

With the headlight switch in the 16 posi-

tion and the ignition in mode II or if the

engine is running (see Ignition modes (p. 80))

•In the US: the daytime running lights will be

off

•In Canada: the daytime running lights will be

With the headlight switch in the posi-

tion:

•The daytime running lights will be on (the

low beam headlights will automatically switch

on in dark conditions)

US models only: The daytime running lights in

mode can be switched on or off in the

MY CAR menu system under Settings Car

settings Light settings Daytime running

lights.

16 The parking lights will be on in this position, even if the ignition is switched off.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 91

NOTE

Volvo recommends the use of Daytime Run-

ning Lights in the United States. The use of

these lights is mandatory in Canada.

With the headlight switch in the posi-

tion:

•The daytime running lights will be off and the

low beam headlights will be on

High/low beam headlights

When the engine is started, the low beams are

activated automatically if the headlight control is

in position .

Headlight switch and steering wheel lever

High beam flash

Toggle between high and low beams

Continuous high beam headlights

With the headlight switch in the (in dark

conditions only, when the daytime running lights

have automatically switched off and the low beam

headlights have switched on) or position:

•Pull the lever toward the steering wheel to

position 2 and release it to toggle between

low and high beams.

High beam flash

Pull the lever toward the steering wheel to posi-

tion 1. The high beams come on until the lever is

released.

Related information

•Active Bending Lights (ABL)* (p. 93)

•Active high beams (AHB)* (p. 92)

•Lighting panel (p. 90)

•Tunnel detection (models with the rain sen-

sor* only) (p. 93)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Active high beams (AHB)*

AHB uses a camera at the upper edge of the

windshield to detect the headlights of oncoming

vehicles or the taillights of a vehicle directly

ahead. When this happens, the headlights will

automatically switch from high beams to low

beams. When the camera no longer detects the

headlights/taillights of other vehicles, your head-

lights will switch back to high beams after sev-

eral seconds.

To activate AHB:

•Turn the headlight control to the posi-

tion.

The feature will begin functioning if the engine

has been running for at least 20 seconds and the

vehicle's speed is at least 12 mph (20 km/h).

Headlight switch in the AUTO position

Switch AHB on or off by pulling the left steering

wheel lever rearward (toward the steering wheel)

as far as possible and releasing it. If AHB is

switched off while the high beams are on, the

headlights will change to low beams.

Models with an analog instrument panel

When AHB is activated, the symbol will

illuminate in the instrument panel. The high beam

indicator ( ) in the instrument panel will also

illuminate when the high beams are on.

Models with a digital instrument panel

When AHB is activated, will illuminate as a

white symbol in the instrument panel. When the

high beams are on, the symbol will change to

blue.

NOTE

•Keep the windshield in front of the cam-

era free of ice, snow, dirt, etc.

•Do not mount or in any way attach any-

thing on the windshield that could

obstruct the camera.

If Active high beam Temporary unavailable

Switch manually is displayed in the instrument

panel, switching between high and low beams will

have to be done manually. However, the light

switch can remain in the position. The

same applies if Windscreen Sensors blocked

is displayed and the symbol is displayed.

The symbol will go out when these mes-

sages are displayed.

AHB may be temporarily unavailable (e.g., in

heavy fog or rain). When AHB becomes active

again or if the sensors in the windshield are no

longer obscured, the messages will disappear

and the symbol will illuminate.

CAUTION

In the following situations, it may be neces-

sary to switch between high and low beams

manually:

•In heavy fog or rain

•In blowing snow or slush

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 93

•In bright moonlight

•In freezing rain

•In areas with dim street lighting

•When oncoming vehicles have dim front

lighting

•If there are pedestrians on or near the

road

•If there are reflective objects, such as

signs, near the road

•When oncoming vehicles' lights are

obscured by e.g., fences, bushes, etc.

•When there are vehicles on connecting

roads

•At the top of hills or in dips in the road

•In sharp curves

See The camera’s limitations (p. 216) for more

information about the camera's limitations.

Related information

•High/low beam headlights (p. 91)

•Lighting panel (p. 90)

Tunnel detection (models with the

rain sensor* only)

For models without automatic low beams, tunnel

detection activates the low beams when the

vehicle enters a tunnel. The low beams are

switched off approx. 20 seconds after the vehi-

cle leaves the tunnel.

The rain sensor reacts to the change in lighting

conditions when, for example, the vehicle enters

a tunnel and the tunnel detection feature will

then activate the low beam headlights. The low

beams will be switched off approx. 20 seconds

after the vehicle leaves the tunnel.

The rain sensor does not have to be activated for

tunnel detection to function.

Related information

•Lighting panel (p. 90)

•High/low beam headlights (p. 91)

Active Bending Lights (ABL)*

With ABL activated, the headlight beams adjust

laterally to help light up a curve according to

movements of the steering wheel (see the right-

pointing beam in the following illustration).

Headlight pattern with the Active Bending Light function

deactivated (left) and activated (right)

ABL is activated automatically17 when the engine

is started.

The function can be deactivated/reactivated in

the MY CAR menu system under My V60

Active Bending Lights or under Settings

Car settings Light settings Active

Bending Lights.

See My Car – introduction (p. 77) for a descrip-

tion of the menu system.

17 The factory default setting is on.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

NOTE

This function is only active in twilight or dark

conditions, and only when the vehicle is in

motion.

If a fault should occur in the system, the symbol

will illuminate and a message will be displayed as

shown in the table.

Symbol Display Explanation

Headlamp

failure

Service

required

The system is not

functioning properly

and should be

inspected/repaired

by a trained and

qualified Volvo serv-

ice technician.

Cornering lights18

Models equipped with ABL also have front cor-

nering lights that temporarily provide extra light to

the front left or right of the vehicle at low speeds

when making a sharp turn (for example, when

turning into a parking space) or when the turn

signals are used.

This feature is activated when:

•High or low beam headlights are on

and

•The vehicle's speed is below 20 mph

(30 km/h)

The feature is also activated when the vehicle is

backing up.

The cornering lights are deactivated when the

vehicle's speed exceeds approx. 25 mph

(40 km/h).

Related information

•Lighting panel (p. 90)

•High/low beam headlights (p. 91)

•Active high beams (AHB)* (p. 92)

Auxiliary lights*

If the vehicle is fitted with auxiliary lights, the

driver can use the MY CAR menu system to

choose to deactivate and turn these lights on

and off along with the high beam headlights.

The auxiliary lights must be connected to the

vehicle's electrical system, which should only be

done by a trained and authorized Volvo service

technician. See My Car – introduction (p. 77) for

more information about the menu system.

18 Certain models only

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Instrument and "theater" lighting

Instrument lighting

Illumination of the display and instrument lights

will vary, depending on ignition mode.

The display lighting is automatically subdued in

darkness and the sensitivity is set with the thumb

wheel.

The intensity of the instrument lighting is

adjusted with the thumb wheel.

"Theater" lighting

When the overhead courtesy lighting has gone

out and the engine is running, several LEDs

located near the roof console illuminate to pro-

vide faint lighting for the occupants of the front

seats. This lighting goes out just after the over-

head courtesy lighting when the vehicle is locked.

Related information

•Lighting panel (p. 90)

•Front interior lighting (p. 98)

•Rear interior lighting (p. 99)

•Ignition modes (p. 80)

Parking lights

Turn the headlight switch to the position

(the license plate lighting comes on at the same

time).

Headlight switch in the parking light position

Canadian models: If the ignition is in position II

or the engine is running, the daytime running

lights will also be on.

With the headlight switch in this position, the

parking lights will remain on even when the igni-

tion is switched off.

In dark ambient lighting conditions, the rear park-

ing lights also illuminate when the tailgate is

opened to alert anyone traveling behind your

vehicle. This happens regardless of the position

that the headlight control is in or which mode the

ignition is in.

Related information

•Lighting panel (p. 90)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Rear fog lights

The rear fog lights are considerably brighter than

the normal taillights and should be used only

when conditions such as fog, rain, snow, smoke

or dust reduce visibility for other vehicles to less

than 500 ft. (150 meters).

The rear fog lights will only function in combina-

tion with the high/low beam headlights.

–Press the button to switch the rear fog lights

on/off.

>The rear fog light indicator symbol

on the instrument panel and the light in

the button illuminate when the rear fog

lights are switched on.

NOTE

•The rear fog lights are considerably

brighter than the normal taillights and

should be used only when conditions

such as fog, rain, snow, smoke or dust

reduce visibility for other vehicles to less

than 500 ft. (150 meters).

•Condensation may form temporarily on

the inside of the lenses of exterior lights

such as headlights, fog lights, or taillights.

This is normal and the lights are

designed to withstand moisture. Normally,

condensation will dissipate after the

lights have been on for a short time.

Related information

•Lighting panel (p. 90)

Hazard warning flashers

The hazard warning flasher should be used to

indicate that the vehicle has become a traffic

hazard.

When the function is activated, both turn signal

indicators in the instrument panel will flash.

Location of the hazard warning flasher button

–To activate the flashers, press the button in

the center dash. Press the button again to

turn off the flashers.

NOTE

•Regulations regarding the use of the haz-

ard warning flasher may vary, depending

on where you live.

•The hazard warning flashers will be acti-

vated automatically if an airbag deploys.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Related information

•Turn signals (p. 97)

Turn signals

The turn signals are controlled by the left steer-

ing wheel lever.

Turn signals

When changing lanes

The driver can automatically flash the turn

signals 3 times by moving the turn signal lever up

or down to the first position and releasing it.

NOTE

•This automatic flashing sequence can be

interrupted by immediately moving the

lever in the opposite direction.

•If the turn signal indicator flashes faster

than normal, check for a burned-out turn

signal bulb.

When turning

Move the lever as far up or down as possible

to start the turn signals. The turn signals will be

cancelled automatically by the movement of the

steering wheel, or the lever can be returned to its

initial position by hand.

Related information

•Hazard warning flashers (p. 96)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Front interior lighting

The lighting in the front part of the passenger

compartment is controlled with the buttons in

the ceiling console.

G021149

Light switches, front roof lighting

Drivers side front reading light, on/off

Passenger's side front reading light, on/off

Overhead courtesy lighting.

Switch (3) has three positions for all passenger

compartment lighting:

•Off: right side depressed, automatic lighting

off.

•Neutral position: automatic lighting is on.

•On – left side depressed, passenger com-

partment lighting on.

Overhead courtesy lighting

The passenger compartment lighting is switched

on and off automatically when button (3) is in the

neutral position.

The lighting comes on and remains on for

30 seconds if:

•the vehicle is unlocked from the outside with

the key or remote control

•the engine is switched off and the ignition is

in mode 0.

The lighting switches off when:

•the engine is started

•the vehicle is locked from the outside.

The lighting comes on and remains on for two

minutes if one of the doors is open.

The passenger compartment lighting can be

switched on and off manually within 30 minutes

after the vehicle has been unlocked.

If the lighting is switched on manually and the

vehicle is locked, the courtesy lighting will switch

off automatically after one minute.

Courtesy lights/door step lighting*

The courtesy lights/door step lighting switch

on/off automatically when one of the front doors

is opened/closed.

Glove compartment lighting

The glove compartment lighting switches on/off

automatically when the lid is opened/closed.

Related information

•Rear interior lighting (p. 99)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Rear interior lighting

The lights are switched on or off by pressing

each respective button.

G021150

Rear reading lights

Cargo area lighting

The cargo area lighting comes on automatically

when the tailgate is opened.

Related information

•Front interior lighting (p. 98)

Home safe lighting

When you leave your vehicle at night, you can

make use of the home safe lighting function to

illuminate the area in front of the vehicle.

This function illuminates the headlights, parking

lights, lights in the door mirrors, license plate

lights, front ceiling lighting and footwell lighting.

These lights will remain on for 30 19, 60 or

90 seconds. The time interval can be set in

MY CAR under Settings Car settings

Light settings Home safe light duration.

See My Car – introduction (p. 77) for a descrip-

tion of the menu system.

1. Remove the key from the ignition slot to put

the ignition in mode 0 (see Ignition modes

(p. 80) for information about the ignition

modes).

2. Pull the turn signal lever as far as possible

towards the steering wheel and release it.

3. Exit the vehicle and lock the doors.

Related information

•Approach lighting (p. 99)

Approach lighting

Approach lighting activates the parking lights,

door mirror lights, license plate lighting, dome

lighting and door step lighting when you

approach the vehicle.

This function is activated by pressing the

approach light button on the remote key (see the

illustration in Remote key – functions (p. 153)).

The time interval for this lighting can be set by

pressing MY CAR and going to Car settings

Light settings Approach light duration. See

My Car – introduction (p. 77) for a description of

the menu system.

Related information

•Home safe lighting (p. 99)

19 Factory setting

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

100

Windshield wipers

Move the lever toward the steering wheel to start

the windshield and headlight washers. After the

lever is released the wipers make several extra

sweeps.

Windshield wipers and washers

Rain sensor* on/off

Thumb wheel sensitivity/frequency

CAUTION

•Use ample washer fluid when washing

the windshield. The windshield should be

thoroughly wet when the wipers are in

operation.

•Before using the wipers, ice and snow

should be removed from the windshield/

rear window. Be sure the wiper blades

are not frozen in place.

Windshield wipers off

Move the lever to position 0 to switch

off the windshield wipers.

Single sweep

Move the lever upward from position 0

to sweep the windshield one stroke at

a time for as long as the lever is held

up.

Intermittent wiping

With the lever in this position, you can

set the wiper interval by twisting the

thumb wheel upward to increase wiper

speed or downward to decrease the speed.

Continuous wiping

The wipers operate at normal speed.

The wipers operate at high speed.

Windshield wiper service position

The windshield wipers must be in the service

position before the wiper blades can be cleaned

or replaced. See Wiper blades – service position

(p. 351) for additional information.

Related information

•Engine compartment – washer fluid (p. 354)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 101

Rain sensor*

The rain sensor automatically regulates wiper

speed according to the amount of water on the

windshield.

The sensitivity of the rain sensor can be adjusted

moving the thumb wheel up (the wipers will

sweep the windshield more frequently) or down

(the wipers will sweep the windshield less fre-

quently).

NOTE

The wipers will make an extra sweep each

time the thumb wheel is adjusted upward.

When the rain sensor is activated, the symbol

will illuminate in the instrument panel.

Activating and setting the sensitivity

When activating the rain sensor, the vehicle must

be running or in ignition mode II and the wind-

shield wiper lever must be in position 0 or in the

single sweep position.

Activate the rain sensor by pressing the button

. The windshield wipers will make one

sweep.

Press the lever up for the wipers to make an

extra sweep. The rain sensor returns to active

mode when the stalk is released back to position

Deactivating

Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the button

or press the lever down to another wiper

position.

The rain sensor is automatically deactivated when

the key is removed from the ignition slot or five

minutes after the ignition has been switched off.

CAUTION

The rain sensor should be deactivated when

washing the car in an automatic car wash, etc.

If the rain sensor function is left on, the wip-

ers will start inadvertently in the car wash and

could be damaged.

Windshield washer

Move the lever toward the steering wheel to start

the windshield and headlight washers. After the

lever is released the wipers make several extra

sweeps.

Washing function

Heated washer nozzles*

The washer nozzles are heated automatically in

cold weather to help prevent the washer fluid

from freezing.

High-pressure headlight washing*

High-pressure headlight washing consumes a

large quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid, the

headlights are washed using two alternatives:

•Low/high beam headlights on. The head-

lights will be washed the first time the wind-

shield is washed. Thereafter, the headlights

will only be washed once for every five times

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

102

the windshield is washed within a 10-minute

period.

•Parking lights on. Optional Active Bending

Lights will be washed once for every five

times the windshield is washed. Normal halo-

gen headlights will not be washed.

CAUTION

•Use ample washer fluid when washing

the windshield. The windshield should be

thoroughly wet when the wipers are in

operation.

•When approx. 1 US quart (1 liter) of

washer fluid remains in the reservoir, the

headlights will no longer be washed. A

text message will also be displayed to

remind the driver to fill the washer fluid

reservoir.

Related information

•Engine compartment – washer fluid (p. 354)

Tailgate wiper/washer

The tailgate wiper operates at two speeds: inter-

mittent and continuous.

Move the lever forward to start the tailgate washer.

Intermittent wiping

Normal (continuous) wiping

NOTE

The rear wiper is equipped with a cut-off

function, which means that it will not operate

if its electric motor overheats. The wiper will

function again after a cool-down period

(30 seconds or longer, depending on the heat

of the motor and ambient temperature condi-

tions).

Tailgate wiper and reverse gear

If the windshield wipers are on and the transmis-

sion is put into reverse gear, the tailgate wiper

will go into intermittent wiping function20. This

function is deactivated when a different gear is

selected.

NOTE

On vehicles with the optional rain sensor, the

tailgate wiper will be activated when reverse

is selected, if the rain sensor is activated and

it is raining.

If the tailgate wiper is in the normal (continuous)

wiping mode, selecting different gears will not

affect its function.

Related information

•Engine compartment – washer fluid (p. 354)

20 Consult your Volvo retailer if you would like to have this function deactivated.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

103

Power windows

All power windows can be operated using the

control panel in the driver's door. The control

panels in the other doors only operate the win-

dow in the respective doors.

Driver's door control panel

Switch for disengaging rear door power win-

dow buttons

Rear door window controls

Front door window controls.

WARNING

•Always remove the ignition key when the

vehicle is unattended to put the ignition in

mode 0 (see Ignition modes (p. 80) for

information about the ignition modes).

•Never leave children unattended in the

vehicle.

•Make sure that the windows are com-

pletely unobstructed before they are

operated.

Operating

Operating the power windows

Manual up/down

Auto up/down.

For the power windows to function, the ignition

must be in at least mode I. When the vehicle has

been running, the power windows can be oper-

ated for several minutes after the remote key has

been removed from the ignition slot, or until a

door has been opened.

NOTE

•Movement of the windows will stop if they

are obstructed in any way.

•To reduce buffeting wind noise if the rear

windows are opened, also open the front

windows slightly.

Manual up/down

–Move one of the controls up/down slightly.

> The power windows move up/down as

long as the control is held in position.

Auto up/down

–Move one of the controls up/down as far as

possible and release it.

> The window will open or close completely.

Resetting

If the battery has been disconnected, the auto

open function must be reset so that it will work

properly.

1. Gently raise the front section of the button to

close the window and hold it for one second.

2. Release the button briefly.

3. Raise the front section of the button again

for one second.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

104

Power door mirrors

The control on the driver's door is used to adjust

the position of the door mirrors.

Door mirror controls

Adjusting

1. Press the L button for the left door mirror or

the R button for the right door mirror. The

light in the button comes on.

2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the

center.

3. Press the L or R button again. The light

should no longer be on.

WARNING

Objects seen in the mirrors may appear fur-

ther away than they actually are.

Retractable power door mirrors*

The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driving

in narrow spaces:

1. Press down the L and R buttons at the same

time.

2. Release them after approximately one sec-

ond. The mirrors automatically stop in the

fully retracted position.

Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L and

R buttons at the same time. The mirrors automat-

ically stop in the fully extended position.

Storing the position*

The mirror positions are stored in the key mem-

ory when the vehicle has been locked with the

remote key. When the vehicle is unlocked with

the same remote control the mirrors and the driv-

er's seat adopt the stored positions when the

driver's door is opened.

The function can be activated/deactivated in

MY CAR under Settings Car settings Car

key memory Personal settings in key

memory. See My Car – introduction (p. 77) for a

description of the menu system.

Tilting the door mirrors when parking*

The door mirrors can be tilted down to help give

the driver a better view along the sides of the

vehicle, for example when parallel parking.

To activate this function, select reverse gear and

press the L or R mirror control button to tilt the

mirror down.

The function can be activated/deactivated in

MY CAR under Settings Car settings

Side mirror settings Tilt left mirror or Tilt

right mirror. See My Car – introduction (p. 77)

for a description of the menu system.

The door mirror will reset to its normal position:

•after 10 seconds when reverse is disen-

gaged and the car remains stopped.

•immediately when reverse is disengaged and

the vehicle's forward speed exceeds approxi-

mately 6 mph (10 km/h).

•immediately if you press the corresponding L

or R button again.

•when the engine is turned off.

•when the side mirrors are folded in.

NOTE

Only one mirror can be tilted down at a time.

Home safe and approach lighting

The light on the door mirrors comes on when

approach lighting or home safe lighting is

selected, see Approach lighting (p. 99) and

Home safe lighting (p. 99).

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 105
Related information
•Interior rearview mirror (p. 106)
•Heated windshield*, rear window and door
mirror defrosters (p. 106)
•Power door mirrors – automatic tilting/
retraction (p. 105)
Power door mirrors – automatic
tilting/retraction
The control on the driver's door is used to adjust
the position of the door mirrors.
Automatically tilting the door mirrors
when parking
The door mirrors can tilt down automatically to
help give the driver a better view along the sides
of the vehicle, for example when parallel parking.
When the transmission is no longer in reverse,
the mirrors will automatically return to their origi-
nal position.
This function can be activated/deactivated in MY
CAR under Settings Car settings Side
mirror settings In reverse gear tilt left
mirror or In reverse gear tilt right mirror. See
My Car – introduction (p. 77) for information
about the MY CAR menu system.
Automatic retraction when locking
When the vehicle is locked/unlocked with the
remote key the door mirrors are automatically
retracted/extended.
The function can be activated/deactivated in
MY CAR under Settings Car settings
Side mirror settings Retract side mirrors
when locking. See My Car – introduction (p. 77)
for a description of the menu system.
Resetting to neutral
Mirrors that have been moved out of position by
an external force must be electrically reset to the
neutral position for electric retracting/extending
to work.
•Retract the mirrors with the L and R buttons.
•Fold them out again with the L and R but-
tons.
The mirrors are now reset in neutral position.
Related information
•Interior rearview mirror (p. 106)
•Heated windshield*, rear window and door
mirror defrosters (p. 106)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

106

Heated windshield*, rear window

and door mirror defrosters

The heating function is used to defrost/de-ice

the windshield and/or the rear window and door

mirrors.

Heated windshield

Heated rear window and door mirrors

Press button (1) to defrost/de-ice the windshield

and/or button (2) to defrost the rear window and

door mirrors. The indicator lights in the respective

buttons indicate that the function is active. Switch

the function off when then windshield/rear win-

dow/mirrors have cleared to help avoid battery

drain. The heating function will also switch off

automatically after a certain amount of time.

Auto-defrosting for the rear window and door

mirrors (if the vehicle is started when the ambient

temperature is below 45 °F (7 °C) can be

selected in MY CAR under Settings Climate

settings Automatic rear defroster.

If the Engine Remote Start (ERS)* function is

used, the electrically heated windshield function

will be activated automatically at temperatures

below approx. 40 °F (+5 °C) if auto-defrosting

has been selected in the MY CAR menu.

See My Car – introduction (p. 77) for a descrip-

tion of the menu system.

Interior rearview mirror

The interior rearview mirror has an auto-dim

function that helps reduce glare from following

vehicle's headlights.

Auto-dim function

The interior rearview mirror’s auto-dim function is

controlled by two sensors: one pointing forward

(located on the forward-facing side of the mirror,

which monitors the amount of ambient light) and

one pointing rearward (located on the side of the

mirror facing the driver at the upper edge, which

senses the strength of following vehicles' head-

lights), and work together to help eliminate glare.

NOTE

Obstructing the forward sensor with e.g.,

parking stickers, transponders, etc., or the rear

sensor by loading the cargo area or the rear

seat in such a way that light is prevented from

reaching the sensor will reduce the auto-dim

function in the interior rearview mirror and

optional auto-dim function in the door mirrors.

Related information

•Power door mirrors (p. 104)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 107

Digital compass*

The rear-view mirror has an integrated display

that shows the compass direction in which the

vehicle is traveling.

Operation

Rearview mirror with compass.

Eight different directions are shown with the

abbreviations: N (north), NE (north east), E (east),

SE (southeast), S (south), SW (southwest), W

(west) and NW (northwest).

The compass is displayed automatically when the

vehicle is started or in ignition mode II. To switch

the compass on/off use a pen, paperclip or simi-

lar object and press in the button on the under-

side of the mirror.

Calibration

North America is divided into 15 magnetic zones

and the compass will need to be calibrated if the

vehicle is driven into a new one (see the mag-

netic zones on the map in the following section

"Selecting a magnetic zone"). To do so:

1. Stop the vehicle in a large open area, safely

out of traffic and away from steel structures

and high-tension electrical wires.

2. Start the vehicle.

NOTE

•For best calibration results, switch off all

electrical equipment in the vehicle (climate

system, windshield wipers, audio system,

etc.) and make sure that all doors are

closed.

•Calibration may not succeed or be incor-

rect if the vehicle's electrical equipment is

not switched off.

3. Using a pen, paperclip or similar object, press

and hold the button on the underside of mir-

ror for approx. 6 seconds until C is displayed

in the mirror.

4. Press and hold the button for 3 seconds until

the number of the current magnetic zone is

displayed.

5. Press the button repeatedly until the number

of the desired magnetic zone (1-15) is dis-

played. See the magnetic zones on the map

in the following section "Selecting a mag-

netic zone").

6. Wait until C is again displayed in the mirror.

7. Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no more

than 6 mph (10 km/h) until a direction is dis-

played. This indicates that calibration is com-

plete.

8. Drive around in a circle an additional two

times to fine-tune the calibration.

9. Vehicles with an electrically heated wind-

shield:* if C is displayed when the heating

function is activated, perform step 7 with the

heating function on. See also Max. defroster

and electrically heated windshield* (p. 133)

for additional information about the heated

windshield.

Repeat the calibration procedure if necessary.

21 The auto-dim function is also available as an option on the door mirrors.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

108

Selecting a magnetic zone

G018632

Magnetic zones.

The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones. The

correct zone must be selected for the compass

to work correctly.

1. Put the ignition in mode II.

2. Using a pen or similar object, press and hold

the button on the rear side of mirror for at

least 3 seconds. The number for the current

area will be shown.

3. Press the button repeatedly until the number

for the required geographic area (1 – 15) is

shown.

4. The display will revert to showing the com-

pass direction after several seconds.

Power moonroof* – introduction

The moonroof controls are located in the ceiling

console near the rearview mirror.

The moonroof's sun visor opens automatically

but has to be closed manually.

There is a wind blocker in the moonroof's front

edge.

The moonroof controls are located in the ceiling

console near the rearview mirror. The moonroof

can be opened vertically and horizontally. The

vehicle's ignition must be in mode I or II for the

moonroof to be operated.

CAUTION

•Remove ice and snow before opening the

moonroof.

•Do not operate the moonroof if it is fro-

zen closed.

•Never place heavy objects on the moon-

roof.

Visor

The moonroof features a sliding visor. The visor

slides open automatically when the moonroof is

opened, and must be closed manually.

Wind blocker

The moonroof is equipped with a wind blocker

that folds up when the moonroof is open.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 109

Power moonroof* – operation

The moonroof controls are located in the ceiling

console near the rearview mirror.

The moonroof's sun visor opens automatically

but has to be closed manually.

There is a wind blocker in the moonroof's front

edge.

Sliding moonroof

G017823

Sliding moonroof, forward/rearward

Opening, automatic

Opening, manual

Closing, manual

Closing, automatic

Automatic opening

–Pull the switch as far back as possible (to

the position for automatic opening) and

release it to open the moon roof to a position

that helps reduce wind noise while driving.

Pull the switch again to slide open the moon-

roof completely.

Manual opening

–Pull the switch back to the first stop (the

position for manual opening) and hold it until

the moonroof has opened to the position of

your choice.

Manual closing

–Push the switch forward to the first stop (the

position for manual closing) and hold it until

the moonroof has closed to the position of

your choice, or has closed completely.

Automatic closing

–Push the switch as far forward as possible

(the position for automatic closing) and

release it to automatically close the moon-

roof.

WARNING

•During manual closing, if the moonroof is

obstructed, immediately open it again.

•Never open or close the moonroof if it is

obstructed in any way.

•Never allow a child to operate the moon-

roof.

•Never leave a child alone in a vehicle.

•When leaving the vehicle, ensure that the

ignition is in mode 0 (see Ignition modes

(p. 80) for information about the various

ignition modes) to disable the moonroof.

Never leave the remote key in the vehicle.

•Never extend any object or body part

though the open moonroof, even if the

vehicle's ignition is completely switched

off.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

110

Tilt position

G028900

Tilt position, raised at the rear edge

Open by pressing the rear edge of the con-

trol upward.

Close by pulling the rear edge of the control

downward and hold it until the moonroof has

closed completely.

HomeLink® Wireless Control

System* – introduction

HomeLink® can be used to open garage doors,

gates, etc.

WARNING

•If you use HomeLink® to open a garage

door or gate, be sure no one is near the

gate or door while it is in motion.

•When programming a garage door

opener, it is advised to park outside of the

garage.

•Do not use HomeLink® with any garage

door opener that lacks safety stop and

reverse features as required by U.S. fed-

eral safety standards (this includes any

garage door opener model manufactured

before April 1, 1982). A garage door that

cannot detect an object - signaling the

door to stop and reverse - does not meet

current U.S. federal safety standards. For

more information, contact HomeLink at:

www.homelink.com.

The HomeLink®22 Wireless Control System pro-

vides a convenient way to replace up to three

hand-held radio-frequency (RF) transmitters used

to activate devices such as gate operators,

garage door openers, entry door locks, security

systems, even home lighting. Additional informa-

tion can be found on the Internet at,

www.homelink.com/www.youtube.com/

HomeLinkGentex or by phoning the hotline at 1–

800–355–3515.

Retain the original transmitter of the RF device

you are programming for use in other vehicles as

22 HomeLink and the HomeLink house are registered trademarks of Gentex Corporation.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 111
well as for future HomeLink programming. It is
also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle,
the programmed HomeLink buttons be erased
for security purposes. Refer to “Resetting Home-
Link Buttons” in HomeLink® Wireless Control
System* – programming (p. 111).
Using HomeLink
To operate, simply press and hold the pro-
grammed HomeLink button until the trained
device begins to operate (this may take several
seconds). Activation will now occur for the trained
device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator,
security system, entry door lock, home/office
lighting, etc.). For convenience, the hand-held
transmitter of the device may also be used at any
time. In the event that there are still programming
difficulties or questions, contact HomeLink at:
www.homelink.com/www.youtube.com/
HomeLinkGentex or by phoning the hotline at 1–
800–355–3515.
NOTE
If the ignition is switched off, HomeLink will
function for 30 minutes after the driver's door
has been opened.
HomeLink® Wireless Control
System* – programming
The HomeLink Wireless Control System pro-
vides a convenient way to replace up to three
hand-held radio-frequency (RF) transmitters
used to activate devices such as gate operators,
garage door openers, entry door locks, security
systems, even home lighting. Additional informa-
tion can be found on the Internet
atwww.homelink.com/www.youtube.com/
HomeLinkGentex or by phoning the hotline at 1–
800–355–3515.
NOTE
Some vehicles may require the ignition to be
switched on or be in the “accessories” posi-
tion for programming and/or operation of
HomeLink. It is also recommended that a new
battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter
of the device being programmed to Home-
Link for quicker training and accurate trans-
mission of the radio-frequency signal. The
HomeLink buttons must be reset first. When
this has been completed, Homelink is in
learning mode so that you can perform pro-
gramming.
1. Position the end of your hand-held transmit-
ter 1–3 inches (5–14 cm) away from the
HomeLink button you wish to program while
keeping the indicator light in view.
2. Simultaneously press and hold both the
chosen HomeLink and hand-held transmitter
buttons until the HomeLink indicator light
changes from a slow to a rapidly blinking
light. Now you may release both the Home-
Link and hand-held transmitter buttons.
NOTE
Some devices may require you to replace this
Programming Step 2 with procedures noted
in the “Gate Operator / Canadian Program-
ming” section. If the HomeLink indicator light
does not change to a rapidly blinking light
after performing these steps, contact Home-
Link at www.homelink.com/
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or by
phoning the hotline at 1–800–355–3515.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

112

3. Firmly press, hold for five seconds and

release the programmed HomeLink button

up to two separate times to activate the door.

If the door does not activate, press and hold

the just-trained HomeLink button and

observe the indicator light.

•If the indicator light stays on constantly,

programming is complete and your

device should activate when the Home-

Link button is pressed and released.

•If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two

seconds and then turns to a constant

light continue with “Programming”

steps 4-6 to complete the programming

of a rolling code equipped device (most

commonly a garage door opener).

4. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-

head unit) in the garage, locate the “learn” or

“smart” button. This can usually be found

where the hanging antenna wire is attached

to the motor-head unit.

5. Firmly press and release the “learn” or

“smart” button. (The name and color of the

button may vary by manufacturer.) There are

30 seconds to initiate step 6.

6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold

for two seconds and release the pro-

grammed HomeLink button. Repeat the

“press/hold/release” sequence a second

time, and, depending on the brand of the

garage door opener (or other rolling code

equipped device), repeat this sequence a

third time to complete the programming

process.

HomeLink should now activate your rolling code

equipped device.

Gate Operator/Canadian Programming

Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmit-

ter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after several

seconds of transmission – which may not be long

enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal dur-

ing programming. Similar to this Canadian law,

some U.S. gate operators are designed to “time-

out” in the same manner.

If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties

programming a gate operator or garage door

opener by using the “Programming” procedures,

replace “Programming HomeLink” step 2

with the following:

•Continue to press and hold the HomeLink

button while you press and release - every

two seconds (“cycle”) your hand-held trans-

mitter until the HomeLink indicator light

changes from a slow to a rapidly blinking

light. Now you may release both the Home-

Link and hand-held transmitter buttons.

Proceed with “Programming” step 3 to complete.

Resetting HomeLink Buttons

Use the following procedure to reset (erase pro-

gramming) from the three HomeLink buttons

(individual buttons cannot be reset but can be

“reprogrammed” as outlined in the following sec-

tion):

1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink but-

tons until the indicator light begins to flash.

2. Release both buttons.

> HomeLink is now in the training (or learn-

ing) mode and can be programmed at any

time beginning with “Programming” - step

Reprogramming a Single HomeLink

Button

To program a device to HomeLink using a Home-

Link button previously trained, follow these steps:

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink but-

ton. DO NOT release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20

seconds. Without releasing the HomeLink

button, proceed with “Programming” - step 1.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 113

For questions or comments, contact HomeLink

at: www.homelink.com/www.youtube.com/

HomeLinkGentex or by phoning the hotline at 1–

800–355–3515.

This device complies with FCC rules part 15 and

Industry Canada (IC) RSS-210. Operation is sub-

ject to the following two conditions: (1) This

device may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) This device must accept any interference that

may be received including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

NOTE

The transmitter has been tested and complies

with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifica-

tions not expressly approved by the party

responsible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the device.23

Volvo Sensus

Volvo Sensus is the core of the contact interface

with your vehicle. Sensus provides information,

entertainment and offers access to functions

that make owning and operating a Volvo easier.

Volvo Sensus is the operating system in your

vehicle and it enables you to interact intuitively

with the vehicle’s various features and functions,

including accessing the Internet, when it suits

you.

Volvo Sensus uses the center console screen to

display information and menus, and to offer a

user interface that enables you to make person-

alized settings for e.g., vehicle, infotainment and

climate system functions.

The buttons on the center console or the steer-

ing wheel keypad are used to activate/deactivate

functions and change numerous settings.

Pressing the MY CAR button on the center con-

sole displays all of the settings related to driving

and operating the vehicle, such as City Safety,

lock and alarm functions, automatic blower

speed, setting the clock, etc.

Pressing the source buttons on the center con-

sole (RADIO, MEDIA, TEL, , NAV* and CAM*,

etc.) make it possible to select e.g., AM or FM

radio, play a CD or DVD, use the Bluetooth®

hands-free feature, the navigation system* or the

park assist camera*.

See your on-board owner’s manual or the sepa-

rate printed supplements for detailed information

about the functionality offered by Volvo Sensus.

23 The term “IC:” before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.

||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
114
Center console control panel
Volvo Navigation System (VNS)* – NAV: see
the separate VNS manual for operating
instructions.
Infotainment (RADIO, MEDIA, TEL)
Vehicle-related settings - MY CAR.
Internet connected vehicle.
Climate system.
Park assist camera - CAM*.
Related information
•My Car – introduction (p. 77)
•Climate – general information (p. 126)
•Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – introduc-
tion (p. 246)
Information display – menu controls
The controls on the left steering wheel lever are
used to access the menus (p. 115) that are dis-
played in the instrument panel (p. 69). The
menus displayed depend on the current ignition
mode (p. 80).
Analog Instrument panel and menu controls
Digital Instrument panel* and menu controls
OK: access to the list of messages (p. 115)
and message confirmation.
Thumb wheel: browse among menus and
options in the list of functions.
RESET: reset the active function. Used in
certain cases to select/activate a function,
see the explanation under each respective
function.
The menus shown on the information displays in
the instrument panel are controlled with the left
lever. The menus displayed depend on ignition
mode. Press OK to erase a message and return
to the menus.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 115

Information display – menu

overview

The menus displayed depend on the current

ignition mode (p. 80).

The following menu alternatives may vary,

depending on the equipment installed in the vehi-

cle.

Analog instrument panel

Digital speed

Trip comp. opt.

Service status

Messages (##)24

Digital instrument panel*

Settings

Themes

Contrast mode/Color mode

Service status

Messages

Trip computer reset

Related information

•Information displays – introduction (p. 69)

•Information display – menu controls (p. 114)

•Information display – messages (p. 115)

Information display – messages

The controls on the left steering wheel lever are

used to scroll among messages displayed in the

instrument panel and to confirm selections.

When information, indicator or warning symbols

illuminate, an explanatory message will be dis-

played in the instrument panel.

When a warning (p. 75), information (p. 73) or

indicator symbol (p. 73) comes on, a correspond-

ing message appears in the information panel. An

error message is stored in a memory list until the

fault is rectified.

Press OK to acknowledge and scroll among the

messages.

NOTE

If a warning message appears while you are

using the trip computer, the message must be

read and confirmed by pressing OK before

the previous activity can be resumed.

Message Description

Stop engineAStop and switch off the

engine as soon as possible.

Serious risk of damage. Con-

tact an authorized Volvo

workshop.

Stop safelyAStop and switch off the

engine. Serious risk of dam-

age. Contact an authorized

Volvo workshop.

Service

urgentA

Have the vehicle checked by

an authorized Volvo work-

shop immediately.

Service

requiredA

Have the vehicle checked by

an authorized Volvo work-

shop as soon as possible.

See manualARead the owner's manual.

Book time

for mainte-

nance

Time to book service at an

authorized Volvo retailer.

24 Number of messages in parentheses

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

116

Message Description

Time for reg-

ular mainte-

nance

Time for regular service at an

authorized Volvo workshop.

The timing is determined by

the number of miles driven,

number of months since the

last service, engine running

time.

Maintenance

overdue

If the service intervals are not

followed, the warranty does

not cover any damaged parts.

Contact an authorized Volvo

workshop for service.

Temporarily

OFFA

A function has been tempo-

rarily switched off and is

reset automatically while driv-

ing or after starting again.

Low battery

Power save

mode

The audio system is switched

off to save current. Charge

the battery.

AThere will also be a system-specific part of this message

Related information

•Information displays – introduction (p. 69)

•Information display – menu overview (p. 115)

•Information display – menu controls (p. 114)

Trip computer – introduction

The content and appearance of the trip com-

puter varies depending on whether the vehicle is

equipped with an Analog or Digital instrument

panel.

Analog information display and controls

Digital information displays and controls

The instrument panel illuminates as soon as the

vehicle is unlocked and trip computer settings

can be made. If none of the trip computer's con-

trols are used within 30 seconds after the driver's

door has been opened, the instrument panel

lighting will go out and the trip computer cannot

be used again until:

•the ignition is put in mode II25

•the engine is started

NOTE

If a warning message appears while you are

using the trip computer, this message must

be acknowledged in order to return to the trip

computer function. Acknowledge a message

by pressing OK.

25 See Ignition modes (p. 80) for information about the various ignition modes.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
117
Related information
•Trip computer – functions, analog instrument
panel (p. 118)
•Trip computer – functions, digital instrument
panel (p. 121)
•Trip computer – Supplementary information
(p. 123)
•Trip computer – Trip statistics (p. 124)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

118

Trip computer – functions, analog

instrument panel

Information display and controls

OK–press to access the trip computer's

functions or acknowledge/confirm/erase a

message

Thumb wheel–turn to access the list of trip

computer information headings and to

scroll among the alternatives

RESET–press to cancel/reset/exit a function

after a selection has been made

The trip computer has two different menu groups:

•Trip computer functions

•Trip computer information headings in the

instrument panel

Functions

To open and make settings in the trip computer

functions:

1. Ensure that none of the trip computer con-

trols are being used in a command

sequence; reset them by pressing RESET

twice.

2. Press OK to open the list of functions.

3. Use the thumb wheel to scroll among the

functions and select/confirm your choice by

pressing OK.

4. After completing your selection, exit by

pressing RESET twice.

The following table lists the analog trip comput-

er's functions:

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

119

Function Description

Digital speed

– km/h

– mph

– None

This displays the vehicle's speed digitally in the center of the instrument panel

•Open by pressing OK, scroll using the thumb wheel, confirm by pressing OK and exit by pressing ENTER.

Trip comp. opt.

– Distance to empty

– Fuel consumption

– Average speed

– Trip odometer T1 and total dist.

– Trip odometer T2 and total dist.

Selections among the trip computer information headings are made here. The symbols that have already been

selected have a check mark and are displayed in white. Those not selected are not checked and are displayed in

gray:

1. Open the function by pressing OK and scroll to the desired heading using the thumb wheel.

2. Confirm by pressing OK. The symbol will change colors from gray to white and will be checked.

3. Continue this procedure or exit by pressing RESET.

Service status Shows the number of months and mileage until the next scheduled service.

Messages (##) For additional information, see Information display – menu controls (p. 114).

Information headings

Any of the information headings in the following

table can be displayed. To do so:

1. Ensure that none of the trip computer con-

trols are being used in a command

sequence; reset them by pressing RESET

twice.

2. Turn the thumb wheel to begin displaying

the information headings. Stop on the

desired heading.

3. See the table for an explanation of the head-

ing or the actions that can be taken.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

120

Information headings in the instrument panel Description

Trip odometer T1 and total dist. •Press and hold RESET to reset trip odometer T1.

Trip odometer T2 and total dist. •Press and hold RESET to reset trip odometer T2.

Distance to empty See Distance to empty in Trip computer – Supplementary information (p. 123).

Fuel consumption Current fuel consumption.

Average speed Press and hold RESET to reset Average speed.

- No information will be displayed. This also indicates the beginning/end of the list of information headings.

Scroll among the trip computer information head-

ings at any time by turning the thumb wheel

until the desired heading is displayed.

Related information

•Trip computer – introduction (p. 116)

•Trip computer – functions, digital instrument

panel (p. 121)

•Trip computer – Supplementary information

(p. 123)

•Trip computer – Trip statistics (p. 124)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 121

Trip computer – functions, digital

instrument panel

Information displays and controls

OK–press to access the trip computer's

functions or to activate a selection

Thumb wheel–turn to access the list of trip

computer information headings and to

scroll among the alternatives

RESET–press to cancel/reset/exit a function

after a selection has been made

The trip computer has two different menu groups:

•Trip computer functions

•Trip computer information headings in the

instrument panel

Functions

To open and make settings in the trip computer

functions:

1. Ensure that none of the trip computer con-

trols are being used in a command

sequence; reset them by pressing RESET

twice.

2. Press OK to open the list of functions.

3. Use the thumb wheel to scroll among the

functions and select/confirm your choice by

pressing OK.

4. After completing your selection, exit by

pressing RESET twice.

The following table lists the digital trip computer's

functions:

Function Description

Trip computer reset

– Average fuel consumption

– Average speed

NOTE: This function does not reset the trip odometers, see Trip computer – Supplementary information (p. 123)

for a description of how this is done.

Messages For additional information, see Information display – menu controls (p. 114).

Themes Set the way in which information is displayed in the instrument panel, see Information displays – introduction

(p. 69).

Settings*Select Auto On or Off.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

122

Function Description

Contrast mode/Color mode Adjust the instrument panel's contrast and color.

Service status Shows the number of months and mileage until the next scheduled service.

Information headings

Three trip computer headings can be displayed at

the same time; one in each of the displays (see

the previous illustration). One of the combinations

of information headings in the following table can

be displayed. To do so:

1. Ensure that none of the trip computer con-

trols are being used in a command

sequence; reset them by pressing RESET

twice.

2. Turn the thumb wheel to begin displaying

the combinations of information headings.

Stop on the desired combination.

3. See the table for an explanation of the head-

ing or the actions that can be taken.

Scroll among the combinations of trip computer

information headings at any time by turning the

thumb wheel until the desired combination is

displayed.

Heading combinations Description

Average fuel consumption Trip odometer T1 + mileage Average speed •Press and hold RESET to reset trip odometer T1.

Current fuel consumption Trip odometer T2 + mileage Distance to empty •Press and hold RESET to reset trip odometer T2.

Current fuel consumption Mileage mph<>km/h Change between mph<>km/h – see "Digital speed display" in Trip com-

puter – Supplementary information (p. 123).

- No trip computer information

displayed

- No information will be displayed. This also indicates the beginning/end

of the list of information headings.

Scroll among the trip computer information head-

ings at any time by turning the thumb wheel

until the desired heading is displayed.

Related information

•Trip computer – introduction (p. 116)

•Trip computer – functions, analog instrument

panel (p. 118)

•Trip computer – Supplementary information

(p. 123)

•Trip computer – Trip statistics (p. 124)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 123

Trip computer – Supplementary

information

General information for both Analog and Digital

trip computer functions.

Average fuel consumption

Fuel consumption since the last time this func-

tion was reset.

Average speed

The vehicle's average speed since the last time

this function was reset.

Current fuel consumption

Current fuel consumption is calculated approxi-

mately once a second. When the vehicle is mov-

ing at low speed, fuel consumption is displayed

per unit of time. At higher speeds, it is displayed

in terms of distance.

Miles or kilometers can be displayed, see the

heading "Changing units".

Distance to empty

This function shows the approximate distance

that can be driven on the fuel remaining in the

tank. When Distance to empty shows "----",

there is very little useable fuel remaining in that

tank; refuel as soon as possible. The calculation

is based on average fuel consumption during the

last 20 miles (30 km) of driving and the amount

of fuel remaining in the tank (the accuracy of this

figure may vary if your driving style changes). An

economical driving style will generally increase

this distance.

See Economical driving (p. 291) for information

about driving economically.

Digital speed display*

Speed is expressed in the unit not used by the

instrument panel's speedometer e.g., if the nor-

mal speedometer is in mph, the trip computer will

display in the speed in km/h and vice versa.

Resetting an analog instrument panel

Trip odometer(s) and average speed

1. Display trip odometer T1 or T1, or Average

speed.

2. Press and hold RESET until selected func-

tion is reset.

Each trip computer heading must be reset indi-

vidually.

Resetting a digital instrument panel

Trip odometer

1. Turn the thumb wheel to select the combi-

nation of headings containing the trip odom-

eter to be reset.

2. Press and hold RESET until selected trip

odometer is reset.

Average speed and fuel consumption

1. Select Trip computer reset and press OK.

2. Select one of the following alternatives using

the thumb wheel and press OK:

•mpg

•mph

•Reset both

3. Finish by pressing RESET.

Changing units

To change the unit (miles/km) used to measure

distance and speed, go to MY CAR Settings

System options Distance and fuel units.

NOTE

In addition to changing units in the trip com-

puter, this also changes the units used in the

Volvo Navigation System (VNS)*.

Related information

•Trip computer – introduction (p. 116)

•Trip computer – functions, analog instrument

panel (p. 118)

•Trip computer – functions, digital instrument

panel (p. 121)

•Trip computer – Trip statistics (p. 124)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
124
Trip computer – Trip statistics
Trip information from previous trips regarding
average fuel consumption and average speed is
stored and can be displayed in the form of a bar
chart.
Function
Trip statistics26
Each bar represents a driving distance of 1 mile
or 10 miles, depending on the current scale; the
bar at the far right shows the value for the cur-
rent mile/10 miles.
Use TUNE to change between 1 mile and
10 miles; the marker at the right will also change
according to the scale selected.
Settings
Settings can be made in the MY CAR menu sys-
tem as follows:
MY CAR My V60 Trip statistics:
•Start new trip: press ENTER to erase all
pervious statistics. Exit the menu by pressing
EXIT.
•Reset for every driving cycle: select by
pressing ENTER. Exit the menu by pressing
EXIT.
Selecting Reset for every driving cycle erases
all trip statistics automatically if the ignition is
switched off for at least 4 hours. When the
engine is restarted, new statistics will be stored.
To get new statistics if the engine is restarted
before 4 hours have elapsed, the existing ones
have to be erased manually by selecting Start
new trip.
For additional information, see Information display
– menu controls (p. 114).
See also the information about Eco Guide in Eco
Guide* and Power Meter* (p. 72).
Related information
•Trip computer – introduction (p. 116)
•Trip computer – functions, analog instrument
panel (p. 118)
•Trip computer – functions, digital instrument
panel (p. 121)
•Trip computer – Supplementary information
(p. 123)
26 The illustration is generic; certain details may vary from model to model

CLIMATE

CLIMATE
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
126
Climate – general information
The vehicle is equipped with Electronic Climate
Control (ECC) (p. 130) that cools, heats or
dehumidifies the air in the passenger compart-
ment.
Air conditioning
NOTE
•The air conditioning can be switched off,
but to ensure the best possible climate
comfort in the passenger compartment
and to prevent the windows from misting,
it should always be on.
•In warm weather, a small amount of water
may accumulate under the car when it
has been parked. This water is condensa-
tion from the A/C system and is normal.
Side windows and moonroof
To ensure that the air conditioning works opti-
mally, the side windows, and the optional moon-
roof should be closed.
Fog on the inside of the windows
The defroster function (p. 133) should be used
to remove fog or mist from the inside of the win-
dows. Keeping the windows clean with a com-
mercially available window washing spray will also
help prevent fogging or misting.
Temporary shut-off of the air
conditioning
The air conditioning (p. 133) is momentarily dis-
engaged during full acceleration or when driving
uphill with a trailer. This may result in a temporary
increase in cabin temperature.
Ice and snow
Always keep the air intake grille at the base of
the windshield free of snow.
Climate system maintenance
Special tools and equipment are required to
maintain and carry out repairs on the climate sys-
tem. Work of this type should only be done by a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
Refrigerant
Volvo cares about the environment. The air condi-
tioning system in your car contains a CFC-free
refrigerant – R134a. This substance will not
deplete the ozone layer. The air conditioning sys-
tem contains 1.76 lbs (800 g) of R134a. The
systems uses PAG oil.
Related information
•Climate – sensors (p. 126)
•Climate – menu settings (p. 128)
Climate – sensors
The climate system utilizes a number of sensors
to help regulate the temperature and humidity
level in the passenger compartment.
Sensor location
•The sunlight sensor is located on the top
side of the dashboard.
NOTE
The sunlight sensor monitors which side of
the car that is most exposed to sunlight. This
can mean that the temperature may differ
between the right and left-side air vents, even
if the temperatures set for both sides of the
passenger compartment are the same.
•The temperature sensor for the passenger
compartment is located below the climate
control panel.
•The outside (ambient) temperature sensor is
located on the door mirror.
•The humidity sensor* is located in the interior
rearview mirror.
NOTE
Do not cover or block the sensors with cloth-
ing or other objects.

CLIMATE

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 127

Related information

•Climate – general information (p. 126)

Air quality

The passenger compartment has been designed

to be pleasant and comfortable, even for people

with asthma and contact allergies.

Passenger compartment filter

Replace the cabin air filter with a new one at the

recommended intervals. Please refer to your War-

ranty and Service Records Information booklet, or

consult a trained and qualified Volvo service tech-

nician for these intervals. The filter should be

replaced more often when driving under dirty and

dusty conditions. The filter cannot be cleaned

and therefore should always be replaced with a

new one.

NOTE

There are different types of cabin air filters.

Ensure that the correct type is installed.

Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)

A multifilter helps reduce gases and particles in

the incoming air, thereby reducing the levels of

odors and contaminants entering the vehicle. The

air quality sensor detects increased levels of con-

taminants in the outside air. When the air quality

sensor detects contaminated outside air, the air

intake closes and the air inside the passenger

compartment is recirculated, i.e., no outside air

enters the vehicle. The filter also cleans recircula-

ted passenger compartment air.

NOTE

Contact your Volvo retailer for IAQS air filter

replacement intervals.

Materials used in the cabin

The materials used in the cabin have been devel-

oped to help minimize the amount of dust and

make the cabin easier to keep clean. All floor

mats can be easily removed for cleaning. Use car

cleaning products recommended by Volvo. See

also the information in Cleaning the interior

(p. 371).

Related information

•Climate – general information (p. 126)

•Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)* (p. 128)

•Climate – menu settings (p. 128)

CLIMATE
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
128
Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)*
The Air Quality System (IAQS) consists of a mul-
tifilter and an air quality sensor. The filter helps
remove gases and particles from the incoming
air, thereby reducing the amounts of odors and
contaminants entering the vehicle.
The air quality (p. 127) sensor detects increased
levels of contaminants in the outside air. When
the air quality sensor detects contaminated out-
side air, the air intake closes and the air inside
the passenger compartment is recirculated, i.e.,
no outside air enters the vehicle. The filter also
cleans recirculated passenger compartment air.
When the AUTO (p. 132) button is depressed
the air quality sensor is always engaged.
Activate or deactivate this function in Climate
settings Interior air quality system.
NOTE
•The air quality sensor should always be
engaged in order to obtain the best air in
the passenger compartment.
•Recirculation is limited in cold weather to
avoid fogging.
•If the insides of the windows start fog-
ging, disengage the air quality sensor.
Use the defroster function to increase
airflow to the front, side, and rear win-
dows.
Related information
•Climate – general information (p. 126)
•Max. defroster and electrically heated wind-
shield* (p. 133)
Climate – menu settings
The default settings for four of the climate sys-
tem's (p. 126) functions can be changed in the
menu system.
•Blower speed (p. 132) in automatic
mode (p. 132).
•Recirculation timer (p. 135) for passenger
compartment air.
•Automatic rear window defrosting (p. 106).
•The optional Interior Air Quality Sys-
tem (p. 128) (IAQS).
The functions can also be returned to factory set-
tings in the menu system.
See My Car – introduction (p. 77) for a descrip-
tion of the menu system.
Related information
•Electronic climate control (ECC) (p. 130)

CLIMATE

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 129

Air distribution – general

The incoming air is distributed through a number

of different vents in the passenger compartment.

Air distribution is fully automatic in AUTO

mode (p. 132).

If desired, air distribution can be controlled man-

ually, see Air distribution – function (p. 134).

Air vents in the dashboard

Open

Closed

Horizontal airflow

Vertical airflow

Direct the outer air vents toward the side win-

dows to defrost.

Air vents in the door pillars

Closed

Open

Horizontal airflow

Vertical airflow

Direct the outer air vents toward the side win-

dows to defrost.

Direct the vents into the passenger compartment

to help maintain the desired temperature in the

rear seat.

Related information

•Climate – general information (p. 126)

•Air distribution – table (p. 136)

•Air distribution – recirculation (p. 135)

•Max. defroster and electrically heated wind-

shield* (p. 133)

CLIMATE
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
130
Electronic climate control (ECC)
ECC (Electronic Climate Control) helps maintain
the selected temperature in the passenger com-
partment and the temperature can be set sepa-
rately on the driver's and passenger's sides.
The AUTO function (p. 132) automatically regu-
lates the temperature, air conditioning, blower
speed, recirculation and air distribution.
Temperature control (p. 132), driver's side
Heated driver's seat* (p. 131)
Defroster (maximum effect), electrically
heated windshield* (p. 133)
Blower (p. 132)
Manual air distribution (p. 129)—floor
Manual air distribution—dashboard air vents
Manual air distribution—defroster
Heated rear window and door mir-
rors (p. 106)
Heated front passenger's seat* (p. 131)
Temperature control (p. 132), passenger's
side
Recirculation (p. 135)
AUTO (p. 132)
A/C (p. 133) on/off
Related information
•Climate – general information (p. 126)

CLIMATE

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 131

Heated seats

The front seat heating has three levels to

increase comfort for the driver and passenger in

cold weather.

The rear outboard seat heating has three levels

to increase comfort for the passengers in cold

weather.

Heated front seats*

The current seat temperature setting is shown in the

center console display

Press the lower section of the

button repeatedly until the

desired number of indicator

lights illuminate:

Highest heat level – three indi-

cator lights.

Medium heat level – two indicator lights.

Lowest heat level – one indicator light.

If no indicator lights are illuminated, the seat

heating is switched off.

Seat heating will automatically switch off when

the engine is switched off.

Starting the seat heating automatically

This setting starts heating the driver's seat (at the

highest level) automatically when the engine is

started if the ambient temperature is below

approx. 50° F (10° C).

Activate/deactivate this function in the MY CAR

menu system, under Settings Climate

settings Auto start driver seat heater.

Heated rear seats*

Heat control for the outboard seating positions is

done in the same way as for the front seats.

Related information

•Climate – general information (p. 126)

•Electronic climate control (ECC) (p. 130)

CLIMATE
132
Temperature and blower control
When the vehicle is started, the most recent set-
ting is resumed.
The blower should always be activated to help
avoid condensation and fogging on the win-
dows.
Temperature control
The temperatures on the driver
and passenger sides can be
set separately.
NOTE
Heating or cooling cannot be speeded up by
selecting a higher/lower temperature than
the actual temperature required.
Blower control
Turn the control clockwise to
increase or counterclockwise to
decrease the blower speed. If
AUTO (p. 132) is selected,
blower speed will be regulated
automatically and this will over-
ride manual adjustment.
NOTE
If the blower is turned off completely, the air
conditioning is disengaged, which may result
in fogging on the windows.
Related information
•Climate – general information (p. 126)
•Electronic climate control (ECC) (p. 130)
•Air conditioning (p. 133)
•Climate – sensors (p. 126)
Automatic climate control
The Auto function automatically controls tem-
perature (p. 132), air conditioning (p. 133),
blower speed (p. 132), recirculation (p. 135)
and air distribution (p. 129).
If you select one or more man-
ual functions, the other func-
tions continue to be controlled
automatically. The air qual-
ity (p. 127) sensor is engaged
and all manual settings are
switched off when AUTO is
pressed. The display shows AUTO CLIMATE.
Blower speed in automatic mode can be set
under Climate settings Automatic blower
adjustment. Choose between Low, Normal or
High.
NOTE
Selecting the lowest blower speed may
increases the risk of fog forming on the win-
dows.
Related information
•Climate – general information (p. 126)

CLIMATE

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 133

Air conditioning

The air conditioning function cools and dehu-

midifies the air in the passenger compartment.

When the indicator light in the

button is on, the air condition-

ing is controlled automatically.

This cools/heats and dehu-

midifies the incoming air. When

the indicator light in the button

is off, the air conditioning is

disengaged. Other functions are still controlled

automatically. When maximum defroster (p. 133)

is selected, the air conditioning system is set for

maximum blower speed and dehumidifies the

cabin as quickly as possible.

Related information

•Climate – general information (p. 126)

•Automatic climate control (p. 132)

Max. defroster and electrically

heated windshield*

The heated windshield and max. defroster func-

tions are used to clear the windshield and front

side windows of condensation and ice as

quickly as possible.

The selected settings are shown in the center console

display

Electrical heating*

Max. defroster

Models without an electrically heated windshield

•Press the button once to start defrosting/de-

icing the windshield and front side windows.

The indicator light (2) in the defroster button

illuminates when the function is active.

•Press the button twice to switch off the

defroster (the indicator light will switch off).

Models with an electrically heated windshield*

•If this feature is switched off, press the but-

ton once to start heating the windshield1.

Symbol (1) will illuminate in the center con-

sole display.

•Press the button twice to start both the

defroster and the windshield heating. Sym-

bols (1) and (2) will illuminate in the center

console display.

•If these features are on, press the button to

switch them off. The symbols will no longer

be displayed.

1If a "C" appears in the rear-view mirror when the button is pressed, the compass* has to be recalibrated, see Digital compass* (p. 107).

||
CLIMATE
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
134
NOTE
•Triangular areas at the far sides of the
windshield are not heated electrically and
will take slightly longer to defrost/de-ice.
•The heated windshield may affect the
performance/range of e.g., transponders
used to automatically pay highway tolls or
other communication equipment.
The following occurs when the defroster/wind-
shield heating functions have been activated:
•Blower speed increases automatically and
the air conditioning (p. 133) will switch on (if
not already on and if the passenger compart-
ment blower is not turned off) to dehumidify
the air in the passenger compartment. Air
conditioning can be switched off by pressing
the AC button.
•Recirculation (p. 135) will not function while
defrost is engaged.
The climate system will return to its previous set-
tings when the defroster/windshield heating
function is switched off.
See also Heated windshield*, rear window and
door mirror defrosters (p. 106) for additional
information.
Related information
•Climate – general information (p. 126)
•Automatic climate control (p. 132)
Air distribution – function
The air distribution function consists of three
buttons.
Manual air distribution—defroster
Manual air distribution—dashboard air vents
Manual air distribution—floor
When a button is pressed, the corresponding fig-
ure will appear in the display with an arrow indi-
cating which manual air flow has been selected
(see the following illustration). See also the air
distribution chart (p. 136).
Air distribution is shown in the center console display
Related information
•Climate – general information (p. 126)
•Air distribution – general (p. 129)
•Air distribution – recirculation (p. 135)

CLIMATE

135

Air distribution – recirculation

Recirculation can be used to shut out exhaust

fumes, smoke, etc., from the passenger com-

partment.

The air in the passenger com-

partment is then recirculated,

i.e., no air from outside the car

is taken into the car when this

function is activated. The indi-

cator light in the button will illu-

minate when recirculation is

selected.

If the air in the car recirculates for too long, there

is a risk of condensation forming on the insides

of the windows, especially in winter.

Timer

The timer function minimizes the risk of fogging,

or stale air when the recirculation function is

selected by automatically switching off the func-

tion after a certain length of time, depending on

the ambient temperature. Activate/deactivate the

function under Climate settings

Recirculation timer. See My Car – introduction

(p. 77) for a description of the menu system.

NOTE

When Defroster is selected, recirculation is

always deactivated.

Related information

•Climate – general information (p. 126)

•Air distribution – general (p. 129)

•Air distribution – function (p. 134)

•Air distribution – table (p. 136)

CLIMATE

136

Air distribution – table

Air distribution (p. 129) is selected using the

buttons in the center console climate panel.

Air distribution Use Air distribution Use

Air to windows. Some air flows

from the dashboard air vents. The

air is not recirculated. Air condi-

tioning is always engaged.

To remove de-fog/de-

ice the front side win-

dows and windshield

quickly.

Air to the floor and win-

dows. Some air flows

from the dashboard air

vents.

To ensure comfortable

conditions and good de-

fogging in cold or humid

weather.

Air to windshield and side win-

dows. Some air flows from the air

dashboard vents.

In cold or humid

weather (blower speed

should be moderate to

high).

Air to floor and from

dashboard air vents.

In sunny weather with cool

outside temperatures.

Airflow to windows and from

dashboard air vents.

To ensure good comfort

in warm, dry weather.

Air to floor. Some air

flows to the dashboard

air vents and windows.

To warm or cool the feet.

Airflow to the head and chest

from the dashboard air vents.

To ensure efficient cool-

ing in warm weather.

Airflow to windows, from

dashboard air vents and

to the floor.

To cool the feet or provide

warmer air to the upper

body in cold weather or

hot, dry weather.

CLIMATE

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 137

Related information

•Climate – general information (p. 126)

•Air distribution – function (p. 134)

•Max. defroster and electrically heated wind-

shield* (p. 133)

LOADING AND STORAGE

140

Storage spaces

The following is an overview of the storage com-

partments in the passenger compartment.

LOADING AND STORAGE

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 141

Compartment in door panel

Storage pocket on the front edge of the front

seat cushions

Glove compartment (p. 143)

Storage compartment

Storage compartment (p. 142), 12-volt

socket (p. 142) and AUX input/USB con-

nector

Rear seat cup holders

Storage pocket

Related information

•Vanity mirror (p. 143)

•12-volt socket in the cargo area* (p. 143)

LOADING AND STORAGE

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

142

Tunnel console

The tunnel console is located between the front

seats.

Storage compartment (for CDs, etc.) under

armrest, AUX input/USB connector.

Includes cup holder for driver and passenger,

12-volt socket (p. 142) and a small storage

compartment.

Related information

•Storage spaces (p. 140)

Tunnel console – 12-volt sockets

The electrical sockets can be used for 12-volt

accessories such as cell phone chargers and

coolers. For the socket to supply current, the

ignition must be in at least mode I (p. 80). The

sockets are located between the cup holders in

the tunnel console and on the rear side of the

tunnel console (p. 142) for rear seat passen-

gers.

12-volt socket in the front tunnel console

12-volt socket in the rear center console

The maximum current consumption is 10A

(120W) if only one of the 12-volt sockets in the

passenger compartment is in use. If both the

front and rear sockets are used at the same time,

the maximum current consumption per socket is

7.5A (90W).

The auxiliary sockets can also be used to power a

cigarette lighter. Accessory cigarette lighters and

ashtrays can be purchased from your Volvo

retailer.

WARNING

Always keep the sockets covered when not in

use.

Related information

•Storage spaces (p. 140)

•12-volt socket in the cargo area* (p. 143)

LOADING AND STORAGE

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 143

Glove compartment

The glove compartment provides a lockable stor-

age compartment for small items.

The owner's manual and maps can be kept here.

There are also holders for pens and fuel cards.

The glove compartment can be locked manually

with the key blade, see Locking/unlocking –

glove compartment (p. 166).

Related information

•Storage spaces (p. 140)

Vanity mirror

The vanity mirrors are located on the upper side

of the sun visors.

Vanity mirror with lighting

The light comes on automatically when the cover

is lifted.

Related information

•Storage spaces (p. 140)

•Bulbs – vanity mirror lighting (p. 350)

12-volt socket in the cargo area*

The 12-volt socket can be used e.g., to connect

the tire sealing system's compressor (certain

models) and other 12-volt accessories.

Fold down the cover to access the electrical

socket.

NOTE

Related information

•Storage spaces (p. 140)

•Tunnel console – 12-volt sockets (p. 142)

LOADING AND STORAGE

144

Loading – general

The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is

determined by factors such as the number of

passengers, the amount of cargo, the weight of

any accessories that may be installed, etc.

To increase loading space, the rear seat back-

rests can be folded down, see Rear seats – fold-

ing backrest (p. 87).

When loading the cargo area, keep the following

in mind:

•Load objects in the cargo area against the

backrest whenever possible.

•Unstable loads can be secured to the load

anchoring eyelets with straps or web lash-

ings to help keep them from shifting.

•Stop the engine and apply the parking brake

when loading or unloading long objects. The

gear selector can be knocked out of position

by long loads, which could set the vehicle in

motion.

WARNING

•Stop the engine, put the gear selector in

P, and apply the parking brake when

loading or unloading long objects.

•The vehicle's driving characteristics may

change depending on the weight and dis-

tribution of the load.

•A 44-pound (20 kg) object produces a

force of 2,200 pounds (1,000 kg) in a

head-on collision at 30 mph (50 km/h).

•The cargo area and rear seat should not

be loaded to a level higher than 2 in.

(5 cm) below the upper edge of the rear

side windows. Objects placed higher than

this level could impede the function of

the Inflatable Curtain.

Related information

•Load anchoring eyelets (p. 145)

•Steel cargo grid (p. 148)

•Loading – roof load carriers (p. 144)

Loading – roof load carriers

Using load carriers

Load carriers are available as Volvo accessories.

Observe the following points when in use:

•To avoid damaging your vehicle and to

achieve maximum safety when driving, we

recommend using the load carriers that Volvo

has developed especially for your vehicle.

•Volvo-approved removable roof racks are

designed to carry the maximum allowable

roof load for this vehicle: 220 lbs (100 kg).

For non-Volvo roof racks, check the manu-

facturer's weight limits for the rack.

•Never exceed the rack manufacturer's weigh

limits and never exceed the maximum rated

roof load of 220 lbs (100 kg).

•Avoid single-point loads. Distribute loads

evenly.

•Place heavier cargo at the bottom of the

load.

•Secure the cargo correctly with appropriate

tie-down equipment.

•Check periodically that the load carriers and

load are properly secured.

•Remember that the vehicle's center of gravity

and handling change when you carry a load

on the roof.

LOADING AND STORAGE

145

•The vehicle's wind resistance and fuel con-

sumption will increase with the size of the

load.

•Drive smoothly. Avoid rapid starts, fast cor-

nering and hard braking.

Related information

•Loading – general (p. 144)

•Load anchoring eyelets (p. 145)

Load anchoring eyelets

The load anchoring eyelets on both sides of the

vehicle are used to fasten straps, etc., to help

anchor items in the cargo area.

WARNING

The two upper hooks shown in the illustration

are for holding grocery bags only. They are

not intended for anchoring heavy objects.

WARNING

•Cover sharp edges on long loads to help

prevent injury to occupants. Secure the

load to help prevent shifting during sud-

den stops.

•Always secure large and heavy objects

with a seat belt or cargo retaining straps.

•Always secure the load to help prevent it

from moving in the event of sudden stops.

•Switch off the engine, apply the parking

brake and put the gear selector in P

when loading and unloading the vehicle.

Related information

•Loading – general (p. 144)

LOADING AND STORAGE

146

Grocery bag holder

The grocery bag holder holds shopping bags in

place.

Grocery bag holder under the floor of the cargo area

The grocery bag holder holds shopping bags in

place.

1. Open the hatch in the floor of the cargo area.

2. Secure the shopping bags with the strap.

Related information

•Loading – general (p. 144)

Cargo net – mounting/removing

Using the cargo net

The net can be attached in two positions in the

vehicle:

•Rear position: behind the rear seat's backrest

•Front position: Behind the front seats' back-

rests

WARNING

When in use, the cargo net must always be

attached correctly in order to function prop-

erly.

All objects in the cargo area should be

securely lashed down.

A damaged cargo net should never be used.

The easiest way to mount the cargo net is

through one of the rear doors.

Mounting in the rear position

1. Fold out the cargo net. Be sure the net's

storage pockets are facing rearward.

2. Insert one of the net's upper attachments

into one of the rear brackets near the roof

liner.

3. Insert the net's other attachment into the

bracket on the opposite side of the vehicle.

Be sure to press the hooks as far forward

into the brackets as possible.

4. Attach the lower hooks to the forward-most

floor eyelets in the cargo area. Tighten the

camlock by pressing down its tongue and

tightening the strap.

Mounting in the front position

1. Fold out the cargo net. Be sure the net's

storage pockets are facing rearward.

2. Attaching the net is easier if the front seats

are moved as far forward as possible.

3. Insert one of the net's upper attachments

into one of the front brackets near the roof

liner.

4. Insert the net's other attachment into the

bracket on the opposite side of the vehicle.

Be sure to press the hooks as far forward

into the brackets as possible.

5. Attach the lower hooks to the eyelets on the

front seat floor rails. Tighten the camlock by

pressing down its tongue and tightening the

strap.

If the front seats are moved rearward, they should

not press hard against the net.

CAUTION

Pressure from the front seats against the

cargo net could damage the net and/or its

brackets.

LOADING AND STORAGE

147

Removing and storing the cargo net

1. Release the lower hooks.

2. Remove the net's upper attachments from

the ceiling brackets.

3. Fold the net.

When not in use, the cargo net can be stored

under floor of the cargo area.

Related information

•Loading – general (p. 144)

•Steel cargo grid (p. 148)

Cargo area cover

The cargo area cover can be used to conceal

objects in the cargo area.

Use

•Pull the cover over the cargo and hook it into

the holes in the rear cargo area pillars.

•To retract (roll up) the cover, release it from

the holes and guide it toward the rear seat

backrest.

Installing the cover

1. Press the end piece on one side of the cargo

area cover into the retaining bracket in the

side panel of the cargo area .

2. Do the same on the opposite side .

3. Press both sides of the cover until they click

into place . The red mark will no longer be

visible.

4. Check that both ends of the cover are

securely locked in place.

Removing the cover

1. Press one of the end pieces of the cover

inward.

2. Pull the cover carefully upward and outward.

The other end will release automatically from

its retaining bracket.

Folding down the cargo area cover's

rear flap

The cargo area cover's rear flap points horizon-

tally when the cover is retracted (rolled up). To

fold it down:

–Pull the flap slightly rearward past its sup-

ports and fold it down.

NOTE

On models equipped with this cover, it should

be removed before a child seat is attached to

the child restraint anchors.

Related information

•Loading – general (p. 144)

LOADING AND STORAGE

148

Steel cargo grid

Your vehicle can be equipped with a steel grid

that helps prevent objects in the cargo area from

moving forward into the passenger compart-

ment.

Folding the grid up/down

Grasp the lowering edge of the grid and pull it

rearward/upward, or push it downward/forward.

NOTE

If the steel grid is to be used with the optional

cargo area cover, the grid must be folded

down before the cargo area cover is put in

place.

Installing the steel cargo grid

For information about the necessary tools and

procedures for installing/removing the steel

cargo grid, please refer to the assembly instruc-

tions1 that were included when the grid was pur-

chased.

Related information

•Cargo area cover (p. 147)

1Assembly instruction no. 30756681.

LOCKS AND ALARM

150

Remote key and key blade

Two remote keys are provided with your vehicle.

They enable you to unlock the doors and tail-

gate, and also function as ignition keys to start

the vehicle or operate electrical components.

The remote keys contain detachable metal key

blades for manually locking or unlocking the driv-

er's door and the glove compartment. The visible

ends of these key blades are unique to make it

easier to identify "your" remote key. Up to six

remotes can be programmed for use on the

same vehicle.

WARNING

Never leave the remote key in the ignition slot

if children are to remain in the vehicle.

For more information on the various ignition

modes, see Ignition modes (p. 80).

Related information

•Remote key – functions (p. 153)

•Remote key – range (p. 154)

Remote key – loss

If either of the remote keys (p. 150) is lost, the

other should be taken with the vehicle to a Volvo

retailer. As an anti-theft measure, the code of the

lost remote key must be erased from the system.

NOTE

Additional or duplicate remote control keys

can be obtained from any authorized Volvo

retailer.

You can also obtain additional or duplicate

remote control keys from certain independent

repair facilities and locksmiths that are quali-

fied to make remote control keys. Each key

must be programmed to work with your vehi-

cle.

California Only:

A list of independent repair facilities and/or

locksmiths known to Volvo that can cut and

code replacement keys can be found:

•on the Volvo website at

http://www.volvocars.com/us/keys

•by calling Volvo Customer Care at

1-800-458-1552

The number of registered keys for the vehicle can

be found by pressing MY CAR and going into

Settings Information Number of keys.

For a description of the menu system, see My Car

– introduction (p. 77).

USA-5WK49264

FCC ID:KR55WK49264 + Siemens VDO

5WK49236

FCC ID:KR55WK49236, 5WK49266

FCC ID:KR55WK49266 + Siemens VDO

5WK49233

FCC ID:KR55WK49233

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC

rules and RSS-210. Operation is subject to the

following conditions: (1) This device may not

cause harmful interference, and (2) this device

must accept any interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired operation.

Canada-5WK49264

IC:267T-5WK49264 + Siemens VDO

5WK49236

IC:267T-5WK49236, 5WK49266

IC:267T-5WK49266 + Siemens VDO

5WK49233

IC:267T-5WK49233

Operation is subject to the following conditions:

(1) this device may not cause interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference,

including interference that may cause undesired

operation of the device.

LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 151

Related information

•Remote key – functions (p. 153)

Key memory

The memory in the remote key makes it possible

to store certain personal settings.

The position of the side door mirrors, power driv-

er's seat* and the selected instrument panel

theme1 are stored in the remote keys when the

vehicle is locked. The next time the driver's door

is unlocked with the same remote key and the

door is opened within 2 minutes, the power driv-

er's seat and side door mirrors will automatically

move to the position that they were in when the

doors were most recently locked with the same

remote key. If the seat/mirrors have not been

readjusted since the vehicle was locked, they will

already be in the position stored in that particular

remote key and will not move. For more informa-

tion on this feature, see Front seats – power seat

(p. 82).

This feature can be activated or deactivated in

the vehicle's menu by pressing MY CAR and

going into Settings Car settings Car key

memory. For a description of the menu system,

see My Car – introduction (p. 77).

NOTE

If the vehicle is locked with the remote key or

is left unlocked for more than 30 minutes, the

key memory function will be deactivated.

To reactivate the key's memory:

•Press the unlock button on the remote

key.

For information regarding vehicles with the

optional keyless drive, see Keyless drive*– lock-

ing/unlocking (p. 159).

Related information

•Locking/unlocking confirmation (p. 152)

1Optional digital instrument panel only

LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

152

Locking/unlocking confirmation

Settings can be made in the menu system for

audible and visual confirmation when the vehicle

has been locked or unlocked. With these func-

tions activated, the following will occur when the

vehicle is locked/unlocked:

Locking confirmation

•The turn signals flash once, an audible signal

sounds and the door mirrors will fold* in.

Confirmation will only be given when all doors

and the tailgate are properly closed and locked.

NOTE

If you do not receive confirmation when lock-

ing the vehicle, check whether a door or the

tailgate is ajar, or if this feature has been

turned off in the menu.

Unlocking confirmation

•The turn signals will flash twice and the door

mirrors will fold* out.

Making a setting

Different alternatives for locking/unlocking con-

firmation can be selected in the menus by press-

ing MY CAR on the center console control panel.

•To activate visual confirmation: go to

Settings Car settings Light settings

and select Door lock confirmation light

and/or Unlock confirmation light by

pressing OK/MENU.

•To activate audible confirmation: go to

Settings Car settings Lock settings

and select Audible confirmation by press-

ing OK/MENU.

For a description of the menu system, see My Car

– introduction (p. 77).

Lock indicator

Lock/alarm indicator light

A flashing indicator light at the base of the wind-

shield verifies that the vehicle is locked.

Related information

•Locking/unlocking – from the outside

(p. 163)

•Locking/unlocking – from inside (p. 164)

•Locking/unlocking – tailgate (p. 166)

Immobilizer (start inhibitor)

The immobilizer is a start inhibitor that helps pre-

vent unauthorized persons from starting the

engine.

Each of the keys supplied with your vehicle con-

tains a coded transponder. The code in the key

is transmitted to an antenna in the ignition slot

where it is compared to the code stored in the

start inhibitor module. The vehicle will start only

with a properly coded key. If you misplace a key,

take the other keys to a trained and qualified

Volvo service technician for reprogramming as

an anti-theft measure. The following messages

(which may appear in the instrument panel dis-

play) are related to the immobilizer:

LOCKS AND ALARM

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 153

Message Meaning

Insert car

key

Remote key not recognized dur-

ing start. Try to start the vehicle

again.

Car key

not found

Vehicles with keyless drive*

only. Remote key not recog-

nized during start. Try to start

the vehicle again.

If the problem continues, insert

the remote key into the ignition

slot and try to start the vehicle

again.

Immobil-

izer Try

start again

Remote key fault during start.

Contact an authorized Volvo

workshop.

CAUTION

Never use force when inserting the remote

key in the ignition slot. The vehicle cannot be

started if the transponder is damaged.

USA–FCC ID: LTQWFS 125VO

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC

rules. Operation is subject to the following condi-

tion: (1) This device may not cause harmful inter-

ference, and (2) this device must accept any

interference received, including interference that

may cause undesired operation.

Canada–IC: 3659A-WFS125VO

Operation is subject to the following conditions:

(1) this device may not cause interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference,

including interference that may cause undesired

operation of the device.

For information on starting the vehicle, see Star-

ting the engine (p. 258).

Remote key – functions

The remote key is used e.g., to unlock the doors

and start the engine.

Remote key

Lock

Unlock

Approach lighting

Tailgate unlock

Panic alarm

Buttons on the remote

Lock – Press the Lock button on the remote

once to lock all doors and the tailgate. The turn

signals will flash once to confirm locking.

||
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
154
 Unlock – Press the Unlock button on the
remote once to unlock the driver's door.
After a short pause, press the Unlock button a
second time within 10 seconds to unlock the
other doors and the tailgate.
This function can be changed so that all doors
unlock at the same time by pressing My Car and
going to Settings Car settings Lock
settings Change doors unlock setting. For
a description of the menu system, see My Car –
introduction (p. 77).
 Approach lighting – As you approach the
vehicle, press the button on the remote key to
light the interior lighting, parking lights, license
plate lighting and the lights in the door mirrors*.
These lights will switch off automatically after 30,
60 or 90 seconds. For a description of the menu
system, see My Car – introduction (p. 77).
 Unlock tailgate – Press the button twice
within several seconds to disarm the alarm sys-
tem (the alarm indicator light on the dashboard
will go out), and unlock only the tailgate.
NOTE
As an added safety precaution, the parking
lights will come on automatically for a short
period when the tailgate has been opened.
After closing, the tailgate will not automatically
relock. Press Lock to relock it and rearm the
alarm.
For information on opening the tailgate from the
passenger compartment, see Locking/unlocking
– tailgate (p. 166)
 Panic alarm – This button can be used to
attract attention during emergency situations.
To activate the panic alarm, press and hold this
button for at least 3 seconds or press it twice
within 3 seconds. The turn signals and horn will
be activated. The panic alarm will stop automati-
cally after 2 minutes and 45 seconds.
To deactivate, wait approximately 5 seconds and
press the button again.
The Panic alarm button will not unlock the vehi-
cle.
Related information
•Locking/unlocking – from inside (p. 164)
•Locking/unlocking – from the outside
(p. 163)
•Locking/unlocking confirmation (p. 152)
Remote key – range
The remote key has a range of approximately
60 ft. (20 m) from the vehicle.
NOTE
Buildings or other obstacles may interfere
with the function of the remote key. The vehi-
cle can also be locked or unlocked with the
key blade, see Alarm-related functions
(p. 170).
If the remote key is removed from the vehicle
while the engine is running or if the ignition is in
mode I or II and all of the doors are closed, a
message will appear in the instrument panel dis-
play and there will be an audible signal.
When the remote key is returned to the vehicle,
the message will be erased and the audible sig-
nal will stop after one of the following has been
done:
•The remote key is inserted in the ignition slot
•The vehicle's speed exceeds 20 mph
(30 km/h)
•The OK button on the left steering wheel
lever is pressed
Related information
•Remote key – functions (p. 153)

LOCKS AND ALARM
155
Detachable key blade – general
information
Each remote key contains a detachable metal
key blade (p. 150) for mechanically locking or
unlocking the driver's door and the glove com-
partment, and to enable the private lock-
ing(p. 156) function. For more information on
the key blade. The key blades have a unique
code, which is used if new ones need to be pro-
duced. This code is available at an authorized
Volvo retailer.
The visible ends of these key blades are unique
to make it easier to identify "your" remote key.
Related information
•Detachable key blade – unlocking (p. 156)
•Detachable key blade – detaching/reinsert-
ing (p. 155)
Detachable key blade – detaching/
reinserting
The detachable key blade (p. 155) can be
removed or reinserted in the remote key as fol-
lows:
Removing the key blade
Slide the spring loaded catch to the side.
Pull the key blade straight out of the remote
key.
Reinserting the blade
1. Hold the remote key with the slot for the key
blade up.
2. Carefully slide the key blade into its groove.
3. Gently press the key blade in the groove until
it clicks into place.
Related information
•Detachable key blade – unlocking (p. 156)
•Child safety locks (p. 63)

LOCKS AND ALARM

156

Detachable key blade – unlocking

Your vehicle's remote key (p. 150) contains a

metal, detachable key blade that can be used to

unlock the driver's door, lock the glove compart-

ment, etc.

Driver's door keyhole cover

If the remote key does not function normally

(weak battery, etc.), the vehicle can be unlocked

with the detachable key blade.

1. Remove the detachable key blade (p. 155)

from the remote key.

2. Press the key blade approx. 0.5 in. (1 cm)

straight up in the hole on the underside of

the keyhole cover.

> The cover will come off due to the pres-

sure exerted when the key blade is

pushed upward.

3. Insert the key blade as far as possible in the

driver's door lock. Turn the key blade to

unlock the driver's door. This will trigger the

alarm.

4. To turn off the alarm, insert the remote key

in the ignition slot. This also applies to vehi-

cles equipped with the optional keyless drive.

5. Press the cover back into place after the

door has been unlocked.

Related information

•Remote key and key blade (p. 150)

•Remote key – replacing the battery (p. 157)

Private locking

By utilizing the remote key with the key blade

removed, the private locking feature enables you

to block access to the glove compartment and

disconnect the tailgate from the central locking

system for e.g., valet parking or when the vehicle

is brought to the retailer for service.

G017869

Normal locking/unlocking points

LOCKS AND ALARM

}}

157

G017870

Locking/unlocking points with private locking activated.

With the private locking function activated:

•The vehicle's doors can be locked or

unlocked with the remote

•The engine can be started

•The glove compartment cannot be unlocked

•The tailgate cannot be unlocked or opened

with the remote

•The rear floor hatch cannot be opened

NOTE

The floor hatch must be closed completely

before the tailgate can be closed.

Activating the private locking function

Insert the key blade in the glove compart-

ment lock.

Turn the key blade180 degrees clockwise.

Remove the key blade from the lock. A mes-

sage will appear in the instrument panel dis-

play.

Deactivating the private locking

function

Turn the key blade 180 degrees counterclock-

wise in the glove compartment lock to deactivate

private locking.

For information on locking the glove compart-

ment normally, without activating the private lock-

ing function, see Locking/unlocking the glove

compartment (p. 166).

Remote key – replacing the battery

The remote key can be opened if the battery

needs to be replaced.

The battery should be replaced if:

•The information symbol illuminates and Low

battery in remote control. Please change

batteries. is shown in the display and/or

•if the locks do not react after several

attempts to unlock or lock the vehicle.

NOTE

The remote key's range is normally approxi-

mately 60 ft (20 m) from the vehicle.

LOCKS AND ALARM

158

Opening the remote key

The remote key has one CR 2430, 3V battery only

To open the remote key

Slide the spring loaded catch to the side.

Pull the key blade straight out of the

remote key.

Insert a small screwdriver in the hole

behind the spring loaded catch and carefully

pry up the cover. Turn the remote key with

the buttons upward so that the battery does

not fall out when the cover is removed.

Inserting a new battery

CAUTION

When handling batteries, avoid touching their

contact surfaces as this could result in poor

battery function in the remote key.

Note the position of the battery's (+) or (–) sides.

1. Use a screwdriver to pry out the old battery.

2. Insert a new one with the (+) side downward.

Closing the remote key

1. Press the remote key's cover into place.

2. Hold the remote key with the slot for the key

blade up.

3. Carefully slide the key blade into its groove.

4. Gently press the key blade in the groove until

it clicks into place.

NOTE

Volvo recommends that the batteries used in

the remote control meet the UN Manual of

Test and Criteria, Part III, sub-section 38.3.

Batteries installed in the key from the factory

and batteries exchanged by an authorized

Volvo workshop fulfill the above criteria.

Old batteries should be disposed of properly

at a recycling center or at your Volvo retailer.

Related information

•Remote key – functions (p. 153)

LOCKS AND ALARM

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 159

Keyless drive*– locking/unlocking

This system makes it possible to unlock and lock

the vehicle without having to press any buttons

on the remote key. It is only necessary to have a

keyless drive remote key in your possession to

operate the central locking system.

Range of the keyless drive remote key–5 ft (1.5 meters)

NOTE

•The gear selector must in the P position

before the vehicle can be locked and the

alarm can be armed.

•The buttons on the keyless drive remote

key can also be used to lock and unlock

the vehicle. For more information, see

Remote key and key blade (p. 150).

Both of the remote keys provided with the vehicle

have the keyless function, and additional ones

can be ordered. The system can accommodate

up to six remote keys.

The red rings in the illustration indicate the area

around the vehicle that is within range of the key-

less drive antennas.

Locking the vehicle

Models with keyless drive have a pressure-sensitive area

on the outside door handles and a rubber-covered but-

ton next to the tailgate opening control

The doors and the tailgate can be locked by

pressing the pressure-sensitive area on each of

the outside door handles or the rubber-covered

button next to the tailgate opening control. The

lock indicator on the dash will begin to flash.

NOTE

On keyless drive vehicles, the gear selector

must be in the Park (P) position, all doors and

the tailgate must be closed and the ignition

must be switched off before the vehicle can

be locked.

Unlocking the vehicle

•A keyless drive remote key must be on the

same side of the vehicle as the door to be

opened, and be within 5 feet (1.5 meters) of

the door's lock or the tailgate (see the sha-

ded areas in the illustration).

•Pull a door handle to unlock and open the

door or pull the tailgate opening control.

The number of doors that are unlocked at the

same time can be set in the vehicle's menu sys-

tem. Press MY CAR and go to Car settings

Lock settings Keyless entry. For a descrip-

tion of the menu system, see My Car – introduc-

tion (p. 77).

NOTE

In some cases, wearing thick gloves or pulling

the door handle too quickly may affect the

unlocking function. If this occurs, try pulling

the door handle again or pull it after taking off

the glove.

LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

160

Related information

•Alarm indicator (p. 168)

Keyless drive* – unlocking with key

blade

If the remote key does not function normally

(weak battery, etc.), the vehicle can be unlocked

with the detachable key blade.

Driver's door keyhole cover

1. Remove the key blade from the remote key

(see Detachable key blade – detaching/rein-

serting (p. 155) for instructions).

2. Press the key blade approx. 0.5 in. (1 cm)

straight up in the hole on the underside of

the keyhole cover.

> The cover will come off due to the pres-

sure exerted when the key blade is

pushed upward.

3. Insert the key blade as far as possible in the

driver's door lock. Turn the key blade to

unlock the driver's door. This will trigger the

alarm.

4. To turn off the alarm, insert the remote key

in the ignition slot. This also applies to vehi-

cles equipped with the optional keyless drive.

5. Press the cover back into place after the

door has been unlocked.

Related information

•Keyless drive*– locking/unlocking (p. 159)

•Alarm – general information (p. 168)

LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 161
Keyless drive* – key memory
When you leave the vehicle with a remote key in
your possession and lock any door, the position
of the driver's seat2 and door mirrors will be
stored in the remote key's memory.
The next time a door is opened by a person with
the same remote key in his/her possession, the
driver's seat and door mirrors will automatically
move to the position that they were in when the
door was most recently locked.
NOTE
If several people carrying remote keys
approach the vehicle at the same time, the
driver's seat and door mirrors will assume the
positions they were in for the person who
opens the driver's door.
See also power seats (p. 82) for information on
adjusting and storing the seat's position in the
seat memory.
NOTE
If the vehicle is locked by pressing the button
on one of the door handles or by pressing the
lock button on the remote key, or if it is left
unlocked for more than 30 minutes, the key
memory function will be deactivated.
To reactivate the key's memory:
•Unlock the vehicle by pulling a door han-
dle with the remote key in your posses-
sion or by pressing the unlock button on
the remote key.
Related information
•Keyless drive*– locking/unlocking (p. 159)
•Remote key – functions (p. 153)
Keyless drive* – messages
If all of the remote keys are removed from the
vehicle while the engine is running or if the igni-
tion modes (p. 80) is in mode II and all of the
doors are closed, a message will appear in the
instrument panel display and an audible signal
will sound.
When at least one remote key has been returned
to the car, the message will be erased in the dis-
play and the audible signal will stop when:
•A door has been opened and closed
•The remote key has been inserted in the
ignition slot
•The OK button has been pressed. For the
location of this button, see Information dis-
play – menu controls (p. 114)
2Power seats only

LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

162

CAUTION

•Keyless drive remote keys should never

be left in the vehicle. In the event of a

break-in, a remote found in the vehicle

could make it possible to start the

engine.

•Electromagnetic fields or metal obstruc-

tions can interfere with the keyless drive

system. The remote key should never be

placed closer than approximately 4-6 in.

(10-15 cm) to cell phones, metallic

objects or e.g., stored in a metal brief-

case.

USA – FCC ID:KR55WK48952, KR55WK48964

NOTE

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC

Rules. Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful

interference, and (2) this device must accept

interference received, including interference that

may cause undesired operation.

CAUTION

Changes or modifications not expressly approved

by the manufacturer could void the user's author-

ity to operate the equipment.

Siemens VDO

5WK48891

Tested To Comply With FCC Standards

For Automobile Use

Canada – IC:267T-5WK48952,

267T-5WK48964, 267T-5WK48891

NOTE

This device complies with RSS -210 of Industry

Canada. Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful

interference, and (2) this device must accept

interference received, including interference that

may cause undesired operation.

CAUTION

Changes or modifications not expressly approved

by the manufacturer could void the user's author-

ity to operate the equipment.

Keyless drive* – antenna locations

The keyless drive system has a number of anten-

nas located at various points in the vehicle.

On the inside center of the rear bumper

Left rear door handle

Under the floor of the cargo area, near the

rear seat

Right rear door handle

Under the rear section of the center console

Under the front section of the center console

LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 163
WARNING
People with implanted pacemakers should not
allow the pacemaker to come closer than
9 inches (22 cm) to any of the keyless drive
system's antennas. This is to help prevent
interference between the pacemaker and the
keyless drive system.
Related information
•Keyless drive*– locking/unlocking (p. 159)
Locking/unlocking – from the
outside
The remote key (p. 150) is used to lock/unlock
all of the doors and the tailgate at the same time.
Different settings for unlocking the vehicle can
be selected, see Remote key – functions
(p. 153).
Before the vehicle can be locked from the out-
side with the remote key, the driver's door must
be closed. If the tailgate or any other door is
open, it will be locked and the alarm will be
armed.
NOTE
Be sure the remote key is outside of the vehi-
cle before the other doors/tailgate are closed
to help avoid locking the remote inside the
vehicle.
If the vehicle is equipped with the optional key-
less drive system, all doors/tailgate must be
closed before the vehicle can be locked.
The first press on the unlock button unlocks the
driver's door and a second press unlocks the
other doors and the tailgate (see also remote key
and key blade (p. 150)). This setting can be
changed in the menu system. See MY
CAR (p. 77) for a description.
If the locks repeatedly do not react when the
unlock button is pressed, it may be necessary to
replace the battery in the remote, see Remote
key – replacing the battery (p. 157). In this case
the vehicle can be unlocked with the detachable
key blade (p. 156).
Related information
•Locking/unlocking – from inside (p. 164)

LOCKS AND ALARM

164

Manual locking

In certain situations (e.g., if there is no electrical

current in the vehicle), the doors can be locked

manually.

The detachable key blade (p. 155) can be used

in the lock cylinder in the driver's door to lock

that door.

The other doors do not have lock cylinders and

the slot on the rear edge of each door has to be

used to lock it. This will lock the door from the

outside but it can still be opened from inside the

vehicle. To do so:

Manually locking a door

–Insert the key blade into the slot and turn it

90 degrees to lock that door (the slot in a

particular door locks that door only).

In the horizontal position, the door cannot be

opened from the outside.

In the vertical position, the door can be

opened from the inside and the outside.

NOTE

If the manual child safety lock (p. 63) is acti-

vated for a rear side door and that door is

also locked manually, the door cannot be

opened from the outside or inside. The door

can only be unlocked with the remote key or

the central locking button.

Related information

•Remote key – replacing the battery (p. 157)

Locking/unlocking – from inside

The lock buttons on the door panel can be used

to lock or unlock all doors and the tailgate at the

same time. Press to lock and to

unlock.

From inside the vehicle (central locking

button)

Central locking button

The lock buttons on the door panel can be used

to lock or unlock all doors and the tailgate at the

same time. Press to lock and to unlock.

LOCKS AND ALARM

165

Unlocking

The vehicle can be unlocked from inside the vehi-

cle in two ways:

•By pressing the unlock button .

•The front doors can be unlocked and

opened by pulling the door handle once. The

rear doors can be unlocked by pulling the

door handle once and opened by pulling the

handle again.

Locking

•Press the lock button after the front

doors have been closed.

•Press the lock button : all of the doors

that are closed will lock.

•Each door can be locked individually with the

lock button on the respective doors. The door

must be closed first.

Indicator light in the lock buttons

There are two versions of the central locking sys-

tem that affect the indicator light in the driver's

door central locking button.

If only the driver's door has a central locking but-

ton:

•If the light is on, this indicates that all of the

doors are locked.

If there are central locking buttons in both front

doors and electric lock buttons in the rear side

doors:

•If a light is on in one of the buttons, this

means that only that door is locked. When

the lights are on in all of the buttons, all of

the doors are locked.

Lock buttons in the rear side doors

The indicator light in the button is on when the door is

locked

The button in each of the rear side doors locks

that door only.

To unlock the door:

•The door can be unlocked by pulling the door

handle once and opened by pulling the han-

dle again.

Automatic relocking

If the doors are unlocked, the locks will automati-

cally reengage (re-lock) and the alarm will re-arm

after 2 minutes unless a door or the tailgate has

been opened.

Automatic locking

When the vehicle starts to move, the doors and

tailgate can be locked automatically. This feature

can be turned on or off by pressing MY CAR and

going to Car settings Lock settings

Automatic door locking.

Related information

•Locking/unlocking – from the outside

(p. 163)

•Alarm – general information (p. 168)

•Remote key – functions (p. 153)

LOCKS AND ALARM

166

Locking/unlocking – glove

compartment

The glove compartment can only be locked and

unlocked using the detachable key blade in the

remote key. For information on removing the key

blade from the remote key, see Detachable key

blade – detaching/reinserting (p. 155).

Insert the key blade in the glove compart-

ment lock.

Turn the key blade 90 degrees clockwise.

Remove the key blade from the lock.

Locking/unlocking – tailgate

The tailgate can be opened, locked and

unlocked in several ways.

Tailgate unlock button on the remote key

Unlocking the tailgate with the remote key

–Press the tailgate unlock button on the

remote key to unlock (but not open) the tail-

gate. See Remote key and key blade (p. 150)

for more information.

> The alarm indicator light on the dashboard

will go out to indicate that the alarm is not

monitoring the entire vehicle.

NOTE

•If the doors are locked while the tailgate

is open, the tailgate will remain unlocked

until the vehicle is relocked by pressing

the Lock button on the remote key.

•On keyless drive vehicles, the gear selec-

tor must be in the Park (P) position, all

doors and the tailgate must be closed

and the ignition must be switched off

before the vehicle can be locked.

LOCKS AND ALARM

167

Unlocking the tailgate from the driver's seat

–Press the button on the lighting panel (1) to

unlock (but not open) the tailgate.

NOTE

The taillights will illuminate automatically for a

short period when the tailgate has been

opened.

Locking the tailgate with the remote key

Press the lock button ( ) on the remote. See

also (p. 150).

The alarm indicator on the dashboard will begin

flashing to show that the vehicle is locked and

that the alarm has been armed.

Opening that tailgate manually

The tailgate is held closed by an electronic lock-

ing mechanism. To open:

1. Press lightly on the wider rubberized plate

under the handle to release the lock.

2. Lift the handle to open the tailgate.

CAUTION

•When pressing the rubberized plate, only

light pressure is necessary to release the

tailgate's electronic locking mechanism.

•When opening the tailgate, pull it up

using the handle. Too much pressure on

the rubberized plate can damage its elec-

trical connections.

Related information

•Locking/unlocking – from inside (p. 164)

•Locking/unlocking – from the outside

(p. 163)

LOCKS AND ALARM
168
Alarm – general information
The alarm system provides a warning if an
attempt is made to break into the vehicle.
The alarm is automatically armed (p. 169)
whenever the vehicle is locked with the remote
key.
When armed, the alarm continuously monitors a
number of points on the vehicle. The following
conditions will trigger the alarm:
•The hood is forced open.
•The tailgate is forced open.
•A door is forced open.
•The ignition slot is tampered with.
•An attempt is made to start the vehicle with a
non-approved key (a key not coded to the
car's ignition).
•The battery is disconnected (while the alarm
is armed).
•The siren is disconnected when the alarm is
disarmed.
A message will appear in the information display
if a fault should occur in the alarm system. Con-
tact a trained and qualified Volvo service techni-
cian.
NOTE
Do not attempt to repair any of the compo-
nents in the alarm system yourself. This could
affect the insurance policy on the vehicle.
Related information
•Alarm – turning off (p. 170)
•Alarm signal (p. 169)
•Alarm indicator (p. 168)
Alarm indicator
The status of the alarm system is indicated by
the red indicator light on the dashboard (see
illustration):
•Indicator light off: the alarm is not
armed (p. 169)
•The indicator light flashes at one-second
intervals: the alarm is armed
•The indicator light flashes rapidly before the
remote key is inserted in the ignition slot and
the ignition is put in mode I: the alarm has
been triggered.
Related information
•Alarm – general information (p. 168)
•Alarm – turning off (p. 170)
•Alarm signal (p. 169)

LOCKS AND ALARM
169
Alarm – arming/disarming
The alarm system provides a warning if an
attempt is made to break into the vehicle.
Arming the alarm
–Press the Lock button on the remote key.
One long flash of the turn signals will confirm
that the alarm (p. 168) is armed.
Alarm confirmation settings can be changed in
MY CAR, under Car settings Lock settings
Keyless entry. For a description of the menu
system, see My Car – introduction (p. 77).
USA FCC ID: MAYDA 5823(3)
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
rules. Operation is subject to the following condi-
tions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
 Canada IC: 4405A-DA 5823(3)
This device is subject to the following conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Disarming the alarm
–Press the Unlock button on the remote key.
> Two short flashes from the car's direction
indicators confirm that the alarm has been
deactivated and that all doors are
unlocked.
Related information
•Alarm indicator (p. 168)
•Alarm signal (p. 169)
•Alarm – turning off (p. 170)
•Alarm-related functions (p. 170)
Alarm signal
An audible (p. 168) signal is given by a battery
powered siren. The alarm cycle lasts for 30 sec-
onds.
The visual alarm signal is given by flashing all
turn signals for approximately 5 minutes or until
the alarm is turned off.
Related information
•Alarm indicator (p. 168)
•Alarm – arming/disarming (p. 169)
•Alarm – turning off (p. 170)

LOCKS AND ALARM

170

Alarm – turning off

The alarm system provides a warning if an

attempt is made to break into the vehicle.

If the alarm is sounding, it can be stopped by

pressing the Unlock button on the remote key or

by inserting the remote key in the ignition slot.

Two short flashes from the car's turn signals con-

firm that the alarm has been turned off.

Related information

•Alarm indicator (p. 168)

•Alarm – arming/disarming (p. 169)

•Remote key – replacing the battery (p. 157)

Alarm-related functions

The following is general information regarding

the alarm system in your vehicle.

Automatic re-arming

If the doors are unlocked, the locks will automati-

cally re-engage (re-lock) and the alarm will re-

arm after 2 minutes unless a door or the tailgate

has been opened.

Remote key not functioning

If the remote key is not functioning properly, the

alarm can be turned off and the vehicle can be

started as follows:

1. Open the driver's door with the key blade.

>This will trigger the alarm.

2. To turn off the alarm, insert the remote key

into the ignition slot (also on vehicles with

the optional keyless drive).

3. Start the engine.

Related information

•Detachable key blade – unlocking (p. 156)

•Detachable key blade – general information

(p. 155)

•Starting the engine (p. 258)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

172

Active chassis* (Four C)

Active chassis, Four-C (Continuously Controlled

Chassis Concept), regulates the characteristics

of the shock absorbers so that the vehicle's driv-

ing characteristics can be adjusted. There are

three settings: Comfort, Sport and Advanced.

Operation

Chassis settings

Use the buttons in the center console to change

setting. The setting in use when the engine is

switched off is activated the next time the engine

is started.

Comfort

Comfort mode offers a somewhat softer ride and

the transmission shifts gears at lower rpm. This

mode is particularly suitable for long-distance

highway driving. The indicator light in the button

will be on when this mode is selected.

Sport

In this mode, the vehicle's body sway is reduced

during cornering and steering response is more

immediate. The transmission shifts up at higher

rpm for sportier driving. The indicator light in the

button will be on to indicate that Sport mode has

been selected.

Advanced

In this mode, body sway in curves is minimal and

steering response is very direct. Gear shifting is

done at high rpm in each gear for dynamic and

active driving.

Related information

•Adjustable steering force* (p. 177)

Stability system – introduction

The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system

consists of a number of functions designed to

help reduce wheel spin, counteract skidding and

to generally help improve directional stability.

A pulsating sound will be audible when

the system is actively operating and is

normal. Acceleration will also be

slightly slower than normal.

WARNING

ESC is a supplementary aid and cannot deal

with all situations or road conditions.

The driver is always responsible for operating

the vehicle in a safe manner in accordance

with current traffic regulations.

ESC consists of the following functions:

•Traction control

•Spin control

•Active Yaw Control

•Engine Drag Control

•Corner Traction Control

Traction Control (TC)

This function is designed to help reduce wheel

spin at low speeds by transferring power from a

drive wheel that begins to lose traction to the

wheel on the opposite side of the vehicle (on the

same axle).

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

173

Spin Control (SC)

The SC function is designed to help prevent the

drive wheels from spinning while the vehicle is

accelerating.

Active Yaw Control (AYC)

This function helps maintain directional stability,

for example when cornering, by braking one or

more of the wheels if the vehicle shows a ten-

dency to skid or slide laterally.

Corner Traction Control (CTC)

CTC compensates for understeering and helps

provide additional stability when accelerating

through a curve by preventing the inside wheel

from spinning. This is particularly useful when

accelerating on a curving highway on-ramp.

CTC is most effective if the stability system's

Sport mode is selected. See the section about

Sport mode.

Engine Drag Control (EDC)

EDC helps keep the engine running if the wheels

show a tendency to lock, e.g., when shifting down

in the Geartronic manual shifting mode or while

using the engine's braking function on a slippery

surface. If the engine were to stop, power steer-

ing would not function, making the vehicle more

difficult to steer.

Trailer Stability Assist (TSA)

The TSA helps stabilize a vehicle that is towing a

trailer when the vehicle and trailer have begun to

sway. See Trailer Stability Assist (TSA) (p. 294)

for more information.

This system is automatically deactivated if the

driver selects Sport mode.

Related information

•Stability system – operation (p. 173)

•Stability system – symbols and messages

(p. 175)

•Trailer Stability Assist (TSA) (p. 294)

Stability system – operation

Operation

Sport mode

The stability system is always activated and can-

not be switched off.

However, the driver can select

Sport mode, which offers more

active driving characteristics.

Sport mode can be selected in

the MY CAR menus, see My

Car – introduction (p. 77).

In Sport mode, the engine management system

monitors movement of the accelerator pedal and

steering wheel for sportier driving by allowing

more lateral movement of the rear wheels before

ESC is activated.

Under certain circumstances, such as when driv-

ing with snow chains, or driving in deep snow or

loose sand, it may be advisable to temporarily use

Sport mode for maximum tractive force.

If the driver releases pressure on the accelerator

pedal, ETC will also activate to help stabilize the

vehicle.

To switch to Sport mode:

Sport mode remains active until the driver

switches it off in the menu or until the engine is

switched off. ETC will return to normal mode

when the engine is restarted.

DRIVER SUPPORT

174

Related information

•Stability system – introduction (p. 172)

•Stability system – symbols and messages

(p. 175)

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

175

Stability system – symbols and

messages

Symbols and messages in the main

instrument panel

A text message can be erased by pressing briefly

the OK button on the turn signal lever.

Symbol Message Description

ESC Temporarily OFF The ESC system function has been temporarily reduced due to high brake disc temperature. The function reacti-

vates automatically when the brakes have cooled.

ESC Service required The ESC system is not functioning properly.

•Stop the vehicle in a safe place, turn off the engine and restart it.

•If the message is still displayed when the engine has restarted, drive to an authorized Volvo workshop to have

the system inspected.

and

"Message" Read the message in the instrument panel.

Steady glow for

2 seconds.

The system is performing a self-diagnostic test.

DRIVER SUPPORT

176

Symbol Message Description

Flashing symbol. ESC is actively functioning to help counteract wheel spin and/or a skid.

Steady glow. Sport mode has been activated.

Please note that ESC is not deactivated at this time but its functionality is reduced.

WARNING

The stability system is intended to help

improve driving safety. It supplements, but can

never replace, the driver's judgment and

responsibility when operating the vehicle.

Speed and driving style should always be

adapted to traffic and road conditions.

Related information

•Stability system – introduction (p. 172)

•Stability system – operation (p. 173)

DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 177
Adjustable steering force*
Steering force increases with the speed of the
vehicle to give the driver enhanced sense of
control and stability. At low speed the vehicle is
easy to steer in order to facilitate parking, etc.
Adjustable steering force*
Steering force can be changed under MY CAR
Car settings Steering wheel force.
Select Low, Medium or High. For a description
of the menu system, My Car – introduction
(p. 77).
NOTE
This steering force level menu function can-
not be accessed when the vehicle is in
motion.
NOTE
In certain situations, the power steering may
become too warm and will have to be tempo-
rarily cooled down. While this is happening,
the power steering effect will be reduced
slightly and somewhat more effort may be
required to turn the steering wheel.
If this occurs, a message will be displayed in
the instrument panel.
Related information
•Active chassis* (Four C) (p. 172)
Road Sign Information (RSI)* –
introduction
RSI is a feature that helps the driver see road
signs with the posted speed limit.
Introduction
Examples of readable road signs
If the vehicle passes a sign showing the speed
limit, this will be displayed in the center console.
WARNING
RSI does not function in all situations and is
only intended to provide supplementary infor-
mation.
The driver is always responsible for operating
the vehicle safely.
Related information
•Road Sign Information (RSI) – operation
(p. 178)
•Road Sign Information (RSI) – limitations
(p. 178)

DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
178
Road Sign Information (RSI) –
operation
Speed limit information
When RSI registers a road sign showing the
speed limit, this sign is displayed as a symbol on
the instrument panel.
Settings in MY CAR
Possible settings in MY CAR
Displaying the speed limit indication can be
deactivated. To do so:
•Deselect the alternative in MY CAR Settings
Car settings Road Sign Information
or cancel by pressing EXIT.
Speed alert
The driver can opt to be alerted if the vehicle
exceeds the posted speed limit by more than
3 mph (5 km/h). The alert is given when the sym-
bol with the posted speed limit in the instrument
panel begins to flash.
To activate speed alert:
•Check the Speed alert box in MY CAR
Settings Car settings Speed alert or
cancel by pressing EXIT.
Sensus Navigation
If the vehicle is equipped with Sensus Navigation,
speed-related information is gathered from this
system if:
•The speed limit previously detected by RSI is
no longer considered valid and no new speed
limit sign has been detected.
Related information
•Road Sign Information (RSI)* – introduction
(p. 177)
•Road Sign Information (RSI) – limitations
(p. 178)
•My Car – introduction (p. 77)
Road Sign Information (RSI) –
limitations
RSI's camera has the same limitations as the
human eye. See The camera’s limitations
(p. 216) for more information about the camera's
limitations.
Signs that indirectly indicate the speed limit
(such as a sign with a town's name and the per-
mitted speed limit) will not be registered by RSI.
Other factors that may interfere with RSI include:
•Faded signs
•Signs located in a curve
•Twisted or damaged signs
•Obstructed signs
•Signs that are partially covered by snow, ice,
etc.
Related information
•Road Sign Information (RSI)* – introduction
(p. 177)
•Road Sign Information (RSI) – operation
(p. 178)
•The camera’s limitations (p. 216)

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

179

Cruise control (CC) – introduction

Cruise control is designed to assist the driver by

maintaining a set speed. It is primarily intended

for use on long straight roads in steady traffic,

such as on highways and other main roads.

Operation

Steering wheel-mounted controls and display

Standby mode

Resume set speed

Deactivating

Activate/set speed

Selected speed (gray symbol indicates

standby mode)

Cruise control active: white symbol (gray

symbol indicates standby mode)

Related information

•Cruise control (CC) – engaging and setting

speed (p. 179)

•Cruise control (CC) – deactivating (p. 181)

Cruise control (CC) – engaging and

setting speed

Cruise control is designed to assist the driver by

maintaining a set speed. It is primarily intended

for use on long straight roads in steady traffic,

such as on highways and other main roads.

Engaging the cruise control function

Steering wheel-mounted controls and display

Standby mode

Resume set speed

Deactivating

Activate/set speed

Selected speed (gray symbol indicates

standby mode)

Cruise control active: white symbol (gray

symbol indicates standby mode)

||
DRIVER SUPPORT
180
Before a speed can be set, the cruise control
system must be engaged (put in standby mode).
–Press the CRUISE button (1).
>The symbol   illuminates and the text
(---) mph (5) indicates that cruise control
is in standby mode.
NOTE
Putting cruise control in standby mode does
not set a cruising speed.
Setting a speed
Use the   or   buttons set the vehicle's cur-
rent speed. The set speed is shown in the display.
NOTE
Cruise control cannot be engaged at speeds
below 20 mph (30 km/h).
Adjusting the set speed
After a speed has been set, it can be increased
or decreased by using the   or   buttons.
1. Press   or   briefly and release the but-
ton to increase or decrease vehicle speed by
approximately 1 mph or 1 km/h.
> This will become the set speed when the
button is released.
2. Press and hold one of these buttons to
increase/decrease the speed in 1-mph or 1-
km/h increments. Release the button when
you have reached the desired speed.
NOTE
•A temporary increase in speed by press-
ing the accelerator pedal, for less than
1 minute (e.g. when passing another car),
does not affect the current cruise control
setting. The vehicle will automatically
return to the previously set speed when
the accelerator pedal is released.
•If one of the cruise control buttons is
kept depressed for more than approx.
1 minute cruise control is disengaged.
The engine must then be switched off in
order to reset cruise control.
Related information
•Cruise control (CC) – introduction (p. 179)
•Cruise control (CC) – deactivating (p. 181)
Toggling between ACC and CC
(standard Cruise Control)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) helps the driver
maintain a safe distance/time interval to the vehi-
cle ahead.
Switching from ACC to CC
This may be useful if, for example, the radar sen-
sor is obstructed in some way. See Adaptive
Cruise Control – limitations (p. 192) for addi-
tional information.
•Press and hold the   button; the symbol in
the instrument panel will switch from   to
.
> This activates the standard cruise control
function (see Cruise control (CC) – introduc-
tion (p. 179)).
WARNING
Switching from ACC to CC means that:
•Your vehicle will no longer automatically
maintain a set distance to a vehicle
ahead.
•Only the set speed will be maintained and
the driver will have to apply the brakes
when needed.
Switching from CC to ACC
Switch off cruise control by pressing   once or
twice as needed according to the instructions in

DRIVER SUPPORT

181

the previous section "Turning ACC off com-

pletely." The next time the system is switched on,

ACC will be reactivated.

Related information

•Adaptive Cruise Control – introduction

(p. 182)

•Adaptive Cruise Control – function (p. 183)

Cruise control (CC) – deactivating

Cruise control is designed to assist the driver by

maintaining a set speed. It is primarily intended

for use on long straight roads in steady traffic,

such as on highways and other main roads.

Automatic deactivation

The cruise control is automatically deactivated

temporarily if one of the following occurs:

•If the speed drops below approximately

20 mph (30 km/h).

•When the brake pedal is depressed.

•If the gear selector is moved to position N.

•During wheel spin or wheel lock-up.

•If the vehicle's speed is increased by using

the accelerator pedal for more than 1 minute.

•Engine speed (rpm) is too high or too low.

The currently set speed will be saved in the sys-

tem's memory.

Temporary deactivation

The driver can temporarily deactivate the cruise

control by pressing 0. The saved speed is shown

in brackets in the information display.

Resume set speed

If the cruise control has been deactivated tempo-

rarily, it can be reactivated by pressing . The

vehicle's speed returns to the most recently set

speed.

WARNING

There may be a significant increase in speed

after the button has been pressed.

Deactivation

The Cruise control is disengaged by pressing

or by switching off the engine. The set speed is

cleared.

WARNING

Cruise control should not be used in heavy

traffic or when driving on wet or slippery

roads. Cruise control may not maintain set

speed on steep downgrades.

Related information

•Cruise control (CC) – introduction (p. 179)

•Cruise control (CC) – engaging and setting

speed (p. 179)

DRIVER SUPPORT

182

Adaptive Cruise Control –

introduction

ACC is an optional system designed to assist

the driver by maintaining a set speed or a set

time interval to the vehicle ahead. It is primarily

intended for use on long straight roads in steady

traffic, such as on highways and other main

roads.

When the driver has set the desired speed and

the time interval to the vehicle ahead, ACC func-

tions as follows:

•If there are no other vehicles in the lane

ahead of you, your vehicle will travel at the

set speed.

•If ACC's radar sensor detects a slower mov-

ing vehicle in the lane ahead, the system will

adapt your vehicle's speed to help maintain

the set time interval to the vehicle ahead.

When there are no longer slower moving

vehicles ahead, your vehicle will accelerate to

resume the set speed.

If ACC is switched off completely or in standby

mode and your vehicle comes too close to

another vehicle ahead, the driver will be warned

by the Distance Alert system (see Distance Alert

– introduction (p. 197)).

WARNING

•Adaptive Cruise Control cannot cover all

driving situations and traffic, weather and

road conditions. The "Function" section

provides information about limitations that

the driver must be aware of before using

this feature.

•This system is designed to be a supple-

mentary driving aid. It is not, however,

intended to replace the driver's attention

and judgement. The driver is responsible

for maintaining a safe distance and speed

and must intervene if Adaptive Cruise

Control does not maintain a suitable

speed or suitable distance to the vehicle

ahead.

•Maintenance of ACC components may

only be performed by a trained and quali-

fied Volvo technician.

Operation

Controls and display

Resume previous settings.

Off/On/Standby mode

Decrease/increase time interval

Put in active mode and set a speed (each

additional press increases/decreases speed

by 1 mph (approximately 2 km/h))

Set speed (shown in green when active,

shown in white when in standby mode)

Time interval

ACC active (green symbol) or in standby

mode (white symbol)

DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
183
Radar sensor type approval
USA
FCC ID: L2C0038TR
Canada
IC: 3432A-0038TR
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) This device
must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
The term “IC:” before the radio certification num-
ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressively
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user's authority to oper-
ate the equipment.
Related information
•Toggling between ACC and CC (standard
Cruise Control) (p. 180)
•Cruise control (CC) – introduction (p. 179)
•Adaptive Cruise Control – troubleshooting
(p. 196)
•Adaptive Cruise Control – symbols and mes-
sages (p. 194)
•Adaptive Cruise Control – setting time inter-
val (p. 187)
•Adaptive Cruise Control – setting speed
(p. 186)
•Radar sensor (p. 191)
•Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) – Queue
Assist (p. 189)
•Adaptive Cruise Control – passing another
vehicle (p. 189)
•Adaptive Cruise Control – limitations
(p. 192)
•Adaptive Cruise Control – function (p. 183)
•Adaptive Cruise Control – engaging (p. 185)
•Adaptive Cruise Control – deactivating
(p. 187)
Adaptive Cruise Control – function
Function
Function overview1
Warning light, braking by driver required
Controls in steering wheel
Radar sensor in front grille
Adaptive Cruise Control consists of:
•A cruise control system to maintain a set
speed
•A system to maintain a set distance to the
vehicle ahead, which is expressed as a time
interval. For example, you can choose to
remain approximately 2 seconds behind the
vehicle ahead. The actual distance required
1The illustration is generic; details will vary, depending on the model

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

184

to maintain a 2-second interval will vary

according the speed of the vehicles.

WARNING

•Adaptive Cruise Control is not a collision

avoidance system. The driver is always

responsible for applying the brakes if the

system does not detect another vehicle.

•Adaptive Cruise Control does not react to

people or animals, or small vehicles such

as bicycles and motorcycles. It also does

not react to slow moving, parked or

approaching vehicles, or stationary

objects.

•Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control in

demanding driving conditions such as city

driving or other heavy traffic situations, in

slippery conditions, when there is a great

deal of water or slush on the road, during

heavy rain or snow, in poor visibility, on

winding roads or on highway on- or off-

ramps.

The distance to the vehicle ahead (in the same

lane) is monitored by a radar sensor. Your vehi-

cle's speed is regulated by accelerating and

braking. The brakes may emit a sound when they

are being modulated by the adaptive cruise con-

trol system. This is normal.

WARNING

The brake pedal moves when the adaptive

cruise control system modulates the brakes.

Do not rest your foot under the brake pedal.

The ACC system is designed to smoothly regu-

late speed. However, the driver must apply the

brakes in situations that require immediate brak-

ing. This applies when there are great differences

in speed between vehicles, or if the vehicle ahead

brakes suddenly.

WARNING

Due to limitations in the radar sensor, braking

may occur unexpectedly or not at all, see

Adaptive Cruise Control – limitations (p. 192).

Adaptive Cruise Control can be put in active

mode at any permitted speed. However, if the

vehicle's speed falls below 18 mph (30 km/h) or

if engine speed (rpm) becomes too low, ACC dis-

engages (goes into standby mode) and will no

longer modulate the brakes. The driver will then

have to maintain a safe distance to the vehicle

ahead.

WARNING

When Adaptive Cruise Control is in standby

mode or is switched off completely, the

brakes will not be modulated automatically.

The driver must assume full control over the

vehicle.

Warning light—driver braking required

Adaptive Cruise Control can exert brake force

that is equivalent to approximately 40% of the

vehicle's total braking capacity. In situations

requiring more brake force than ACC can provide

and if the driver does not apply the brakes, an

audible signal from the Collision Warning system

will sound and warning light will illuminate (see

Collision warning* – function (p. 210)) in the

windshield to alert the driver to react.

NOTE

Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light con-

trasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the driver is

not looking straight ahead may make the vis-

ual warning signal in the windshield difficult to

see.

DRIVER SUPPORT

185

WARNING

Adaptive Cruise Control only warns of vehicles

detected by the radar sensor, see Adaptive

Cruise Control – limitations (p. 192). In some

cases there may be no warning or the warn-

ing may be delayed. The driver should always

apply the brakes when necessary.

Steep inclines and/or heavy loads

ACC is primarily intended for use on fairly level

roads. The system may have difficulty maintaining

the correct distance to a vehicle ahead on steep

inclines, if the vehicle is carrying a heavy load or

is towing a trailer. In these situations, the driver

should always be prepared to apply the brakes if

necessary.

Related information

•Adaptive Cruise Control – introduction

(p. 182)

Adaptive Cruise Control – engaging

Putting ACC in standby mode

Before ACC can be used to regulate speed

and/or the distance to a vehicle ahead, it must

first be put in standby mode.

To do so:

Controls and display

Off/On/Standby mode

•Press (2).

>The same symbol (7) appears (in white) in

the instrument panel to indicate that ACC is

in standby mode.

NOTE

The driver's door must be closed and the driv-

er's seat belt must be fastened before ACC

can be put in active mode. If the driver's seat

belt is taken off or if the driver's door is

opened, ACC will return to standby mode.

Related information

•Adaptive Cruise Control – introduction

(p. 182)

DRIVER SUPPORT

186

Adaptive Cruise Control – setting

speed

Setting a speed

Once ACC has been put in standby mode:

Controls and display

Put in active mode and set a speed (each

additional press increases/decreases speed

by 1 mph (approximately 2 km/h))

•Press or (4).

> The set speed, for example 60 mph (5), will

be magnified for several seconds and the

frame around the speed will change colors

from white to green to indicate that this

speed has been stored (set).

When this symbol has changed colors

from white to green, ACC is in active

mode and the vehicle will maintain the

set speed.

This symbol indicates that you

are approaching a vehicle

ahead.

ACC will switch from maintain-

ing a set speed to maintaining

a set distance from that vehi-

cle.

When this happens, a speed

range will be indicated on the

speedometer:

The higher speed (the cur-

rently set speed (5)) will be

marked in green.

The lower speed in the range is the speed of the

vehicle ahead.

Changing the set speed

•After a speed has been set, it can be

increased or decreased by briefly pressing

the or buttons. Each time one of

these buttons is pressed, the vehicle's speed

changes by 5 mph or 5 km/h. If the speed is

increased by pressing the accelerator pedal,

the vehicle's speed when the button is

pressed will be set.

•Press and hold one of these buttons to

increase/decrease the speed in 1-mph or 1-

km/h increments. Release the button when

you have reached the desired speed.

NOTE

•If one of the Adaptive Cruise Control but-

tons is pressed for more than approxi-

mately one minute, ACC will be deacti-

vated. The engine must then be switched

off and restarted to reset ACC.

•In some situations Adaptive Cruise Con-

trol cannot be put in active mode. Cruise

control Unavailable is shown in the dis-

play, see Adaptive Cruise Control – sym-

bols and messages (p. 194).

Related information

•Adaptive Cruise Control – introduction

(p. 182)

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

187

Adaptive Cruise Control – setting

time interval

Setting a time interval

Controls and display

Decrease/increase time interval

The set time interval to vehicles ahead can be

increased by pressing and decreased by

pressing . The current time interval is shown

briefly in the display following adjustment.

Different time intervals can be

selected and are shown in the

instrument panel2 as 1–5 hori-

zontal bars. The greater the

number of bars, the longer the

time interval. One bar repre-

sents a time interval of approxi-

mately 1 second; 5 bars is approximately

3 seconds.

To set/change a time interval:

•Press the / buttons (3).

At low speeds, when the distance to the vehicle

ahead is short, ACC increases the time interval

slightly. In order to follow the vehicle ahead as

smoothly as possible, ACC allows the time inter-

val to vary considerably in certain situations.

WARNING

•Only use a time interval that is suitable in

current traffic conditions.

•A short time interval gives the driver lim-

ited reaction time if an unexpected situa-

tion occurs in traffic.

Related information

•Adaptive Cruise Control – introduction

(p. 182)

Adaptive Cruise Control –

deactivating

Standby mode (temporary deactivation)

To temporarily deactivate ACC (put it in standby

mode):

Controls and display

Resume previous settings.

Off/On/Standby mode

•Press (2).

This symbol and the marking for the set speed

with change colors from green to white.

The previously set speed and time interval are

resumed by pressing (1).

2The same symbol appears if Distance Alert (see Distance Alert – introduction (p. 197)) is activated

DRIVER SUPPORT

188

WARNING

The vehicle may accelerate quickly after

has been pressed if its current speed is con-

siderably lower than the set speed.

Standby mode due to action by the

driver

ACC is temporarily deactivated and put in

standby mode:

•if the brakes are applied

•if the gear selector is moved to N

•if the driver drives faster than the set speed

for more than 1 minute.

In this happens, the driver will have to regulate

the vehicle's speed.

NOTE

If the accelerator pedal is only depressed for

a short time, such as when passing another

vehicle, ACC is deactivated temporarily and is

reactivated when the pedal is released.

Automatic standby mode

ACC is linked to other systems such as the sta-

bility system. If this system is not functioning

properly, ACC will switch off automatically.

In the event of automatic deactivation, an audible

signal will sound and the message Cruise

control Cancelled is shown in the instrument

panel. The driver must then intervene and adapt

the vehicle's speed to the surrounding traffic and

regulate the distance to the vehicle ahead.

An automatic switch to standby mode may be

caused if:

•engine speed (rpm) is too high/low

•The driver's door is opened

•The driver unbuckles his/her seat belt

•the vehicle's speed goes below 18 mph

(30 km/h)

•the wheels lose traction

•brake temperature is high

•the radar sensor is obstructed by, for exam-

ple, wet snow or rain.

Resuming the set speed

If ACC is in standby mode, it can be reactivated

by pressing the button on the steering wheel

keypad. The vehicle will return to the most

recently set speed.

WARNING

The vehicle may accelerate quickly after

has been pressed if its current speed is con-

siderably lower than the set speed.

Turning ACC off completely

Controls and display

Resume previous settings.

Off/On/Standby mode

•From standby mode, press (2) once.

•From active mode, press (2) twice.

The set speed and time interval are then cleared

from the system's memory and cannot be

resumed by pressing (1) .

Related information

•Adaptive Cruise Control – introduction

(p. 182)

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

189

Adaptive Cruise Control – passing

another vehicle

Passing another vehicle

If your vehicle’s speed is being regulated by ACC

and the driver indicates that he/she would like to

pass the vehicle ahead by using the left turn sig-

nal, ACC can assist by accelerating briefly.

This function is active at speeds above approxi-

mately 45 mph (70 km/h).

WARNING

Please be aware that this function will also

cause the vehicle to accelerate briefly in cer-

tain situations other than passing another

vehicle, for example using the left turn signal

to indicate a lane change or a turn toward a

highway exit at speeds above approximately

45 mph (70 km/h).

Related information

•Adaptive Cruise Control – introduction

(p. 182)

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) –

Queue Assist

Queue Assist is an added ACC feature that is

linked to your vehicle's automatic transmission.

Introduction

Queue Assist is an added ACC feature that is

linked to your vehicle's automatic transmission.

Queue Assist consists of the following functions:

•Enhanced speed interval (including when the

vehicle is at a complete stop or is moving at

speed below 18 mph (30 km/h))

•Automatic standby mode when ACC changes

target vehicles

•No automatic braking when at a standstill

•The parking brake is applied automatically

Please note that the lowest speed that can be

set is 18 mph (30 km/h), although ACC can

maintain a set speed/distance to a vehicle ahead

down to a standstill. Queue Assist consists of the

following features:

Enhanced speed interval

NOTE

The driver's door must be closed and the driv-

er's seat belt must be fastened before ACC

can be put in active mode. If the driver's seat

belt is taken off or if the driver's door is

opened, ACC will return to standby mode.

Your vehicle can maintain the set time interval to

the vehicle ahead at any permissible speed,

including a complete stop.

In order to activate ACC at speeds below 18 mph

(30 km/h):

•The vehicle ahead must be within a reasona-

ble distance (not farther away than approx.

100 ft/30 meters)

•The lowest speed that can be selected is

18 mph (30 km/h), although ACC will also

help maintain the set time interval to the

vehicle ahead at lower speeds, including a

complete stop.

During short stops (less than approximately

3 seconds) in slow-moving traffic, your vehicle

will begin moving again automatically as soon as

the vehicle ahead begins to move.

If it takes more than 3 seconds for the vehicle

ahead to begin moving, ACC will be automatically

go into standby mode.

DRIVER SUPPORT

190

The driver will then have to reactivate ACC in one

of the following ways:

•By pressing

•By accelerating up to at least 3 mph

(4 km/h). ACC will then resume following the

vehicle ahead.

Your vehicle will then resume following the vehi-

cle ahead at the set time interval.

NOTE

ACC can remain active and keep your vehicle

at a standstill for up to 4 minutes. After

4 minutes have elapsed, the parking brake

will be engaged and ACC will go into standby

mode.

To reactivate ACC, the driver must release the

parking brake (see Parking brake – general

information (p. 280)).

Automatic standby mode when ACC

changes target vehicles

If the vehicle ahead turns suddenly, there may be a sta-

tionary vehicle ahead

The following only applies at speeds below

approximately 18 mph (30 km/h):

If ACC changes target vehicles (the vehicle that

the radar sensor has detected) from a moving

vehicle to a stationary one, the system will apply

the brakes in your vehicle.

WARNING

At speeds above 18 mph (30 km/h), ACC

will not react to a stationary vehicle and apply

the brakes but will instead accelerate to the

previously set speed. The driver must actively

apply the brakes to stop the vehicle.

ACC disengages and goes into standby mode if:

•Your vehicle's speed goes below 10 mph

(15 km/h) and ACC cannot determine if the

target object is a stationary vehicle or some

other type of object such as e.g., a speed

bump.

•Your vehicle's speed goes below 10 mph

(15 km/h) and the vehicle ahead turns so

that ACC no longer has a target vehicle to

follow.

No automatic braking when at a

standstill

In certain situations, ACC will no longer apply the

brakes and go into standby mode while the vehi-

cle is not moving. This means that the driver will

have to apply the brakes.

This happens if:

•The driver presses the brake pedal

•The parking brake is activated

•The gear selected is moved to P, N or R

•The driver presses the button to put ACC

in standby mode

The parking brake is applied

automatically

In certain situations, ACC will apply the parking

brake in order to continue keeping the vehicle at

a standstill.

This happens if:

•The driver opens the door or takes off

his/her seat belt

•The stability system is put in Sport mode

(see Stability system – operation (p. 173))

DRIVER SUPPORT
191
•ACC has kept the vehicle at a standstill for
more than 2 minutes
•The engine has been switched off
•The brakes have overheated
Related information
•Adaptive Cruise Control – introduction
(p. 182)
Radar sensor
The radar sensor is designed to help detect cars
or larger vehicles driving in the same direction as
your vehicle, in the same lane.
The radar sensor and its limitations
In addition to being used by the Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC), the radar sensor is also used by
Distance Alert (see Distance Alert – introduction
(p. 197)) and Collision Warning with Full Auto-
brake and Pedestrian Detection (see Collision
warning – introduction (p. 208)).
WARNING
•If there is visible damage to the front
grille or you suspect that the radar sensor
may be damaged in any way, contact a
trained and qualified Volvo service techni-
cian as soon as possible. The radar sen-
sor may only function partially (or not at
all) if it is damaged or is not securely fas-
tened in place.
•Accessories or other objects, such as
extra headlights, must not be installed in
front of the grille.
•Modification of the radar sensor could
make its use illegal.
The radar sensor's capacity to detect vehicles
ahead is impeded:
•if the radar sensor is obstructed and cannot
detect other vehicles, for example in heavy
rain, or if snow or other objects are obscuring
the radar sensor.
NOTE
Keep the area in front of the radar sensor
clean.
•if the speed of vehicles ahead is significantly
different from your own speed.
Related information
•Adaptive Cruise Control – introduction
(p. 182)
•Collision warning – introduction (p. 208)
•Distance Alert – introduction (p. 197)

DRIVER SUPPORT

192

Adaptive Cruise Control –

limitations

The ACC cannot cover all driving situations and

traffic, weather and road conditions.

Situations where ACC may not function

optimally

WARNING

•The radar sensor has a limited field of

vision. In some situations it may detect a

vehicle later than expected or not detect

other vehicles at all.

•If ACC is not functioning properly, cruise

control will also be disabled.

Radar sensor's field of vision (shown in pink)

In certain situations, the radar sensor cannot

detect vehicles at close quarters, for example

a vehicle that suddenly enters the lane

between your vehicle and the target vehicle.

Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or vehi-

cles not driving in the center of the lane may

remain undetected.

In curves, the radar sensor may detect the

wrong vehicle or lose sight of the target vehi-

cle.

WARNING

•Adaptive Cruise Control cannot cover all

driving situations and traffic, weather and

road conditions. The "Function" section

provides information about limitations that

the driver must be aware of before using

this feature.

•This system is designed to be a supple-

mentary driving aid. It is not, however,

intended to replace the driver's attention

and judgement. The driver is responsible

for maintaining a safe distance and speed

and must intervene if Adaptive Cruise

Control does not maintain a suitable

speed or suitable distance to the vehicle

ahead.

•Maintenance of ACC components may

only be performed by a trained and quali-

fied Volvo technician.

DRIVER SUPPORT

193

WARNING

•Adaptive Cruise Control is not a collision

avoidance system. The driver is always

responsible for applying the brakes if the

system does not detect another vehicle.

•Adaptive Cruise Control does not react to

people or animals, or small vehicles such

as bicycles and motorcycles. It also does

not react to slow moving, parked or

approaching vehicles, or stationary

objects.

•Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control in

demanding driving conditions such as city

driving or other heavy traffic situations, in

slippery conditions, when there is a great

deal of water or slush on the road, during

heavy rain or snow, in poor visibility, on

winding roads or on highway on- or off-

ramps.

Related information

•Adaptive Cruise Control – introduction

(p. 182)

DRIVER SUPPORT

194

Adaptive Cruise Control – symbols

and messages

Symbols and messages in the display

A text message can be erased by pressing briefly

on the OK button on the turn signal lever.

Symbol Message Description

Green symbol A speed has been set.

White symbol ACC is in standby mode but no speed has been set.

- Standard cruise control has been selected manually.

-Set ESC to Normal to

enable Cruise

ACC cannot be put in active mode until the stability system is switched normal operating mode, see Stability sys-

tem – introduction (p. 172) for more information.

-Cruise control Cancelled ACC has been automatically switched off. The driver has to regulate the vehicle’s speed/distance to the vehicle

ahead.

-Cruise control Unavaila-

ble

ACC cannot be put in active mode. This may be due to:

•high brake temperature

•the radar sensor is obstructed (by heavy rain, snow, etc.)

Radar blocked See

manual

ACC has been temporarily disconnected because the radar is obstructed in some way and cannot detect other

vehicles.

In this situation, the driver can switch to standard cruise control, see Toggling between ACC and CC (standard

Cruise Control) (p. 180)

See Adaptive Cruise Control – limitations (p. 192) for information on the radar sensor’s limitations.

DRIVER SUPPORT

195

Symbol Message Description

-Cruise control Service

required

ACC is not functioning.

Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

-Press Brake To hold +

an audible signal

The vehicle is at a standstill and ACC will release the brakes before the parking brake engages to keep the vehicle

stopped but a problem with the parking brake means that the vehicle may begin to roll.

The driver will have to apply the brakes. The message will remain in the display and the audible signal will continue

until the driver applies the brakes or presses the accelerator pedal.

-Below 30 km/h Only fol-

lowing

This is displayed if you try to activate ACC at speeds below approx. 18 mph (30 km/h) without a vehicle ahead

within range (approx. 100 ft/30 meters).

Related information

•Adaptive Cruise Control – introduction

(p. 182)

DRIVER SUPPORT

196

Adaptive Cruise Control –

troubleshooting

If the message Radar blocked See manual is

displayed, this means that the radar signals from

the sensor have been obstructed and that a vehi-

cle ahead cannot be detected.

This, in turn, means that the functions of the

ACC, Distance Alert, and Collision Warning Sys-

tem with Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection

will not function.

The table lists possible causes for this message

being displayed, and suitable actions.

Cause Action

The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty or obstructed in some way. Clean the radar surface, or remove the object causing the obstruction.

Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the radar signals. No action possible. Heavy precipitation may affect the function of the radar.

Swirling water or snow from the surface of the road may interfere with

the radar signals.

No action possible. A very wet or snow-covered road surface may affect the

function of the radar.

The surface of the radar is clean but the message remains in the display. Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the radar to detect that it is no

longer obstructed.

Related information

•Adaptive Cruise Control – introduction

(p. 182)

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

197

Distance Alert – introduction

Distance Alert is part of Adaptive Cruise Control

and is a function that provides information about

the time interval to the vehicle ahead.

Introduction

Distance Alert is active at speeds above approxi-

mately 18 mph (30 km/h). Time interval informa-

tion is only given for a vehicle that is driving

ahead of your vehicle in the same direction. No

information is provided for vehicles driving toward

you, moving very slowly, or at a standstill.

Amber warning light3.

An amber warning light in the windshield glows

steadily if your vehicle is closer to the one ahead

than the set time interval.

NOTE

Distance Alert only monitors distance to the

vehicle ahead while Adaptive Cruise Control is

in standby mode or off.

WARNING

Distance Alert only indicates the distance to

the vehicle ahead. It does not affect the

speed of your vehicle.

Related information

•Distance Alert – operation (p. 197)

•Distance Alert – limitations (p. 198)

•Distance Alert – symbols and messages

(p. 200)

Distance Alert – operation

Distance Alert is part of Adaptive Cruise Control

and is a function that provides information about

the time interval to the vehicle ahead.

Press the button in the center instrument panel

to switch this function on or off. The indicator

light in the button illuminates when the function

is on.

Depending on the optional equipment selected,

there may not be room for a Distance Alert but-

ton in the center console. In this case, the func-

tion is controlled through the menu system. Press

MY CAR and go to Settings Car settings

Distance alert On/Off.

3The illustration is generic; certain details may vary from model to model

||
DRIVER SUPPORT
198
Setting a time interval
Controls and display
Time interval: Increase/decrease
Time interval On
Press   to increase the interval or   to
decrease it.
Five different time intervals can
be selected and are shown in
the display as 1–5 horizontal
bars. The greater the number of
bars, the longer the time inter-
val. One bar represents approx-
imately 1 second to the vehicle
ahead; 5 bars is approximately 3 seconds.
NOTE
•The higher your vehicle’s speed, the
greater the distance to the vehicle ahead,
measured in feet (meters), for a given
time interval.
•The set time interval is also used by
Adaptive Cruise Control, see Adaptive
Cruise Control – setting speed (p. 186).
WARNING
Only use a time interval that is suitable in cur-
rent traffic conditions.
Related information
•Distance Alert – introduction (p. 197)
•Distance Alert – limitations (p. 198)
•Distance Alert – symbols and messages
(p. 200)
Distance Alert – limitations
Distance Alert is part of Adaptive Cruise Control
and is a function that provides information about
the time interval to the vehicle ahead.
Limitations
Distance Alert uses the same radar sensor used
by Adaptive Cruise Control and the Collision
Warning system. See Adaptive Cruise Control –
limitations (p. 192) for more information on the
radar sensor’s limitations.
NOTE
Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light con-
trasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the driver is
not looking straight ahead may make the vis-
ual warning signal in the windshield difficult to
see.
WARNING
•Bad weather or winding roads may affect
the radar sensor’s capacity to detect vehi-
cles ahead.
•The size of the vehicle ahead, such as a
motorcycle, may also make it difficult to
detect. This may result in the warning
light illuminating at a shorter distance
than the one that has been set, or that
the light will not come on at all.

DRIVER SUPPORT

199

Related information

•Distance Alert – introduction (p. 197)

•Distance Alert – operation (p. 197)

•Distance Alert – symbols and messages

(p. 200)

DRIVER SUPPORT

200

Distance Alert – symbols and

messages

Distance Alert is part of Adaptive Cruise Control

and is a function that provides information about

the time interval to the vehicle ahead.

Symbols and text messages

A text message can be erased by pressing briefly

on the OK button on the turn signal lever.

Symbol Message Description

Radar blocked See

manual

Distance Alert has been temporarily disconnected because the radar is obstructed in some way and cannot detect

other vehicles. See Adaptive Cruise Control – limitations (p. 192) for information on the radar sensor’s limitations.

Collision warn. Service

required

Distance Alert or Collision Warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection is not functioning properly. Con-

tact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

Related information

•Distance Alert – introduction (p. 197)

•Distance Alert – operation (p. 197)

•Distance Alert – limitations (p. 198)

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

201

City Safety – introduction

City Safety™4 is a support system designed to

help the driver avoid low speed collisions when

driving in slow-moving, stop-and-go traffic.

City Safety™ is not active if your vehicle’s speed

is below approximately 2 mph (4 km/h). This

means that City Safety™ will not react if your

vehicle approaches another vehicle at very low

speed, for example, when parking.

The function is active at speeds up to approxi-

mately 30 mph (50 km/h) and assists the driver

by applying the brakes automatically, thereby

avoiding or helping to reduce the effects of a col-

lision.

City Safety™ is designed to intervene as late as

possible to help avoid unnecessary activation.

City Safety™ triggers brief, forceful braking if a

low-speed collision is imminent. However, the

system will not intervene in situations where the

driver actively steers the vehicle or applies the

brakes, even if a collision cannot be avoided. This

is done in order to always give the driver’s actions

highest priority.

City Safety™ activates in situations where the

driver has not applied the brakes in time, which

means that the system cannot help the driver in

all situations.

City Safety™ should not be used to alter the way

in which the driver operates the vehicle. The

driver should never rely solely on this system to

safely stop the vehicle.

Normally, the occupants of the vehicle will not be

aware of City Safety™ except when the system

intervenes when a low-speed collision is immi-

nent.

If the vehicle is also equipped with the optional

Collision Warning with Full Auto-brake and

Pedestrian Detection system, the two systems

interact. For more information about the Collision

Warning with Auto-brake system, see Collision

warning – introduction (p. 208) .

WARNING

•City Safety™ is a supplemental aid to the

driver. It can never replace the driver’s

attention to traffic conditions or his/her

responsibility for operating the vehicle in

a safe manner.

•City Safety™ does not function in all driv-

ing situations or in all traffic, weather or

road conditions.

WARNING

•City Safety™ only reacts to vehicles trav-

eling in the same direction as your vehicle

and does not react to small vehicles or

motorcycles or to people or animals.

•City Safety™ is not activated when your

vehicle is backing up.

•City Safety™ functions at speeds up to

30 mph (50 km/h). This system can help

prevent a collision if the difference in

speed between your vehicle and the

vehicle ahead is less than 9 mph

(15 km/h). If the difference in speed is

greater, a collision cannot be avoided but

the speed at which the collision occurs

can be reduced. The driver must apply the

vehicle’s brakes for full braking effect.

•City Safety™ will not intervene in a

potential collision situation if the vehicle

is being driven actively. The driver is

always responsible for maintaining a safe

distance to a vehicle or object ahead.

Related information

•City Safety – function (p. 202)

•City Safety – operation (p. 203)

•City Safety – limitations (p. 203)

•City Safety – troubleshooting (p. 204)

4City Safety is a registered trademark of the Volvo Car Corporation

DRIVER SUPPORT
202
•City Safety – symbols and messages
(p. 206)
•City Safety – Laser sensor (p. 207)
City Safety – function
Function
Location of the laser sensor in the windshield5
City Safety™ monitors traffic ahead of you using
a laser sensor mounted in the upper section of
the windshield. If a collision is imminent, City
Safety™ will automatically apply the brakes,
which may feel like hard braking.
If the difference in speed between your vehicle
and the vehicle ahead is more than approximately
9 mph (15 km/h), City Safety™ alone cannot
prevent a collision from taking place. The driver
must apply the brakes to help avoid a collision or
reduce its effect.
When the function activates and applies the
brakes, a message will appear in the information
display to indicate that the system is/has been
active.
NOTE
•When City Safety™ applies the brakes,
the brake lights will illuminate.
•In cases where City Safety™ has stopped
the vehicle, the system will then release
the brakes. The driver must apply the
brakes to keep the vehicle at a standstill.
Related information
•City Safety – introduction (p. 201)
•City Safety – operation (p. 203)
•City Safety – limitations (p. 203)
•City Safety – troubleshooting (p. 204)
•City Safety – symbols and messages
(p. 206)
•City Safety – Laser sensor (p. 207)
5The illustration is generic; certain details may vary from model to model

DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
203
City Safety – operation
Using City Safety™
NOTE
The City Safety™ function is activated auto-
matically each time the engine has been
switched off and restarted.
On and Off
In certain situations, it may be desirable to switch
City Safety™ off, such as when driving in close
quarters where leaves, branches, etc. may
obscure the hood and windshield.
When the engine is running, City Safety™ can be
switched off as follows:
Press My Car in the center console control panel
and go to Settings Car settings Driver
support systems City Safety. Select Off.
If the engine is switched off, City Safety™ will
reactivate when the engine is restarted.
WARNING
The laser sensor emits light when the ignition
is in mode II or higher, even if City Safety™
has been switched off.
To switch City Safety™ on again:
•Follow the same procedure as for switching
City Safety™ off but select On.
Related information
•City Safety – introduction (p. 201)
•City Safety – function (p. 202)
•City Safety – limitations (p. 203)
•City Safety – troubleshooting (p. 204)
•City Safety – symbols and messages
(p. 206)
•City Safety – Laser sensor (p. 207)
•My Car – introduction (p. 77)
City Safety – limitations
Limitations
WARNING
The laser sensor has certain limitations and
its function may be reduced (or it may not
function at all) in conditions such as heavy
rain or snowfall, or by dense fog or thick,
blowing dust or snow. Condensation, dirt, ice
or snow on the windshield may also interfere
with the sensor’s function.
The sensor used by City Safety™ is designed to
detect cars and other larger motor vehicles
ahead of your vehicle in both daylight and dark-
ness.
Objects such as warning flags hanging from long
objects on the roof or accessories such as auxili-
ary lights or protective arches on the front of the
vehicle that are higher than the hood may also
impede the sensor’s function.
Braking distance to the vehicle ahead increases
on slippery road surfaces, which may reduce City
Safety’s capacity to avoid a collision. In situations
like this, the stability system (see Stability system
– introduction (p. 172)) will help provide the best
possible braking capacity and stability.
City Safety™ emits a laser beam and measures
the way in which the light is reflected. Therefore,
vehicles or objects with low-reflective surfaces

||
DRIVER SUPPORT
204
may not be detected. Normally, the license plate
and taillight reflectors give the rear section of a
vehicle ahead sufficient reflective surfaces to be
detected.
NOTE
•Keep the windshield in front of the laser
sensor free of ice, snow, dirt, etc., see City
Safety – function (p. 202).
•Snow or ice on the hood deeper than
2 inches (5 cm) may obstruct the sensor.
Keep the hood free of ice and snow.
•Do not mount or in any way attach any-
thing on the windshield that could
obstruct the laser sensor.
Related information
•City Safety – introduction (p. 201)
•City Safety – function (p. 202)
•City Safety – operation (p. 203)
•City Safety – troubleshooting (p. 204)
•City Safety – symbols and messages
(p. 206)
•City Safety – Laser sensor (p. 207)
City Safety – troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
If Windscreen Sensors blocked appears in the
information display, this indicates that the City
Safety™ laser sensor is obstructed in some way
and cannot detect vehicles ahead of you, which
means that the system is not functioning.
However, this message will not be displayed in all
situations in which the sensor is obstructed. For
this reason, the driver must ensure that the area
of the windshield in front of the sensor is always
kept clean.
The following table shows some of the situations
that can cause the message to be displayed and
suggested actions.
Cause Action
The area of the windshield
in front of the sensor is
dirty or covered by ice or
snow.
Clean the wind-
shield or remove
the ice/snow.
The laser sensor's field of
view is obstructed.
Remove the
obstruction.
NOTE
If a crack, scratch or stone chip should occur
in the section of the windshield in front the
laser sensor, contact a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician to repair or replace
the windshield (see the illustration showing
the location of the sensor in City Safety –
function (p. 202)). Failing to do so may result
in reduced City Safety™ functionality.
To help prevent limited or reduced functional-
ity, please also observe the following:
•Volvo recommends that cracks, scratches
or stone chips on the windshield in front
of the laser sensor should not be
repaired; in such cases, the entire wind-
shield should be replaced.
•Before the windshield is replaced, con-
tact a Volvo retailer to ensure that the
correct windshield is ordered and instal-
led. If the wrong type of windshield is
used, this may cause City Safety™ to
function improperly or not at all. Volvo
recommends the use of only Genuine
Volvo Replacement Windshields.
•When replacing windshield wipers, use
the same type or ones approved by Volvo.
Related information
•City Safety – introduction (p. 201)
•City Safety – function (p. 202)

DRIVER SUPPORT
205
•City Safety – operation (p. 203)
•City Safety – limitations (p. 203)
•City Safety – symbols and messages
(p. 206)
•City Safety – Laser sensor (p. 207)

DRIVER SUPPORT

206

City Safety – symbols and

messages

Symbols and messages in the display

When City Safety™ automatically applies the

brakes, one or more of the symbols in the main

instrument panel may illuminate and its associ-

ated message will be displayed.

A text message can be erased by pressing briefly

on the OK button on the turn signal lever.

Symbol Message Meaning/action required

Auto braking by City

Safety

City Safety™ is applying/has applied the brakes automatically.

Windscreen Sensors

blocked

The laser sensor is temporarily not functioning due to an obstruction.

•Remove the obstruction and/or clean the windshield in front of the sensor(s).

For more information on the sensor’s limitations, see City Safety – limitations (p. 203).

City Safety Service

required

City Safety™ is not functioning.

•If this message remains in the display, have the system checked by a trained and qualified Volvo service techni-

cian.

Related information

•City Safety – introduction (p. 201)

•City Safety – function (p. 202)

•City Safety – operation (p. 203)

•City Safety – limitations (p. 203)

•City Safety – troubleshooting (p. 204)

•City Safety – Laser sensor (p. 207)

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

207

City Safety – Laser sensor

The laser sensor

The upper decal describes the laser beam's clas-

sification and contains the following text:

Invisible Laser radiation – Do not view directly

with optical instruments (magnifiers) – Class 1M

laser product.

The lower decal describes the laser beam's phys-

ical data and contains the text:

IEC 60825-1:1993 + A2:2001. Complies with

FDA performance standards for laser products

except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice

No. 50, dated July 26th, 2001

The laser beam's physical data is listed in the fol-

lowing table:

Maximum pulse energy 2.64 μJ

Maximum average output 45 mW

Pulse length 33 ns

Divergence (horizontal × vertical) 28° × 12°

NOTE

The function of aftermarket laser detectors

may be affected by City Safety's laser sensor.

WARNING

The laser sensor emits light when the ignition

is in mode II or higher, even if City Safety™

has been switched off.

WARNING

Eye injury may occur if any of the following

points are not followed:

•It is essential that all pertinent instruc-

tions be followed when handling laser

instruments. Testing, repairing, removing,

adjusting and/or replacing any compo-

nents in the laser sensor may only be

done by a trained and qualified Volvo

service technician.

•Do not remove the laser sensor (including

removal of the lenses). A laser sensor

that has been removed belongs to laser

class 3B according to standard IEC

60825-1. Devices in laser class 3B pres-

ent a risk of injury to the eyes.

•The laser sensor’s connector must be dis-

connected before the sensor is removed

from the windshield.

•The laser sensor must be mounted in

place on the windshield before connect-

ing the sensor’s connector.

•Do not view the laser sensor (which emits

spreading, invisible laser beams) with

optical instruments from a distance of

less than 4 inches (100 mm).

Related information

•City Safety – introduction (p. 201)

•City Safety – function (p. 202)

•City Safety – operation (p. 203)

•City Safety – limitations (p. 203)

DRIVER SUPPORT

208

•City Safety – troubleshooting (p. 204)

•City Safety – symbols and messages (p. 206)

Collision warning – introduction

Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full Auto

Brake is designed to assist the driver if there is a

risk of a collision with a pedestrian, a cyclist, a

vehicle ahead that is at a standstill or one that is

moving in the same direction as your vehicle.

This system consists of the following three func-

tions:

•Collision Warning warns the driver of a

potential collision situation.

•Brake Support helps the driver brake effi-

ciently in a critical situation.

•Auto-brake brakes the vehicle automatically

if a collision with a pedestrian, a cyclist or

another vehicle cannot be avoided and the

driver does not apply the brakes in time or

steer around the person/vehicle. Auto-brake

can help prevent a collision or reduce the

speed at which a collision occurs.

Since Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full

Auto Brake is activated in circumstances where

the driver should have begun braking much

sooner, the system will not be able to assist the

driver in all situations.

This system is designed to activate as late as

possible to help avoid unnecessary intervention.

The system should not be used in such a way

that the driver changes his/her way of operating

the vehicle. If the driver relies entirely on the sys-

tem, the chances of an accident eventually occur-

ring increase considerably.

The Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full

Auto Brake and City Safety™ systems supple-

ment each other. See City Safety – introduction

(p. 201) for detailed information about City

Safety™.

WARNING

No automatic system can be guaranteed to

function 100% correctly in all situations. For

that reason, never test the Auto-brake system

by driving toward a person or object. This

could result in serious injury or death.

DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 209
WARNING
•Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full
Auto Brake does not work in all driving,
traffic, weather and road conditions. It
does not react to vehicles not traveling in
the same direction as your vehicle.
•Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full
Auto Brake does not react to animals.
•Warnings are only provided when the risk
of collision is high. The "Function" section
provides information about limitations that
the driver must be aware of before using
Collision Warning.
•Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full
Auto Brake will not provide a warning or
brake the vehicle for pedestrians or
cyclists at speeds above 50 mph
(80 km/h).
WARNING
•Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full
Auto Brake will not provide a warning or
brake the vehicle for pedestrians in dark-
ness or in tunnels, even if there is street
lighting in the area.
•The auto-brake function can help prevent
a collision or reduce the speed at impact
but the driver should always apply the
brakes for the best possible braking
effect, even if auto-brake is actively apply-
ing the brakes.
•Never wait for a collision warning. This
system is designed to be a supplemen-
tary driving aid. It is not, however,
intended to replace the driver's attention
and judgement. The driver is responsible
for maintaining a safe distance and
speed, even when the collision warning
system is in use.
•Maintenance of the Pedestrian and
Cyclist Detection with Full Auto Brake
system's components must only be per-
formed by a trained and qualified Volvo
technician.
Related information
•Collision warning* – function (p. 210)
•Collision warning* – operation (p. 211)
•Collision warning* – Pedestrian detection
(p. 213)
•Collision warning* – Cyclist detection
(p. 212)
•Collision warning* – limitations (p. 214)
•The camera’s limitations (p. 216)
•The camera’s limitations (p. 216)
•Collision warning – troubleshooting (p. 217)
•Collision warning – symbols and messages
(p. 219)

DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
210
Collision warning* – function
Function overview
Audio-visual warning signals, collision risk
Radar sensor
Camera
Collision Warning
The radar sensor and the camera work together
to detect a pedestrian, a cyclist, stationary vehi-
cles and vehicles that are moving in the same
direction as your vehicle. If there is a risk of colli-
sion with a vehicle, a cyclist or a pedestrian, the
driver is alerted by a flashing red warning light
and an audible warning signal. The system is
active at speeds above 3 mph (4 km/h).
Brake Support
If the risk of collision continues to increase after
the collision warning has been given, Brake Sup-
port is activated. Brake Support prepares the
brake system to react quickly, and the brakes are
applied slightly. This may be experienced as a
light tug.
If the brakes are applied quickly, full braking
effect will be provided. Brake Support also
increases brake force if the system determines
that the driver has not applied adequate pressure
on the brake pedal.
Auto-brake
If a collision is imminent and the driver has not
applied the brakes or begun to steer around the
vehicle, pedestrian or a cyclist, the auto-brake
function is activated without the driver pressing
the brake pedal. Full brake force is applied to
help reduce the vehicle’s speed when the colli-
sion occurs or limited brake force is applied if this
is sufficient to avoid the collision.
NOTE
The auto-brake and brake support functions
are always on and cannot be turned off.
Related information
•Collision warning – introduction (p. 208)
•Collision warning* – operation (p. 211)
•Collision warning* – Pedestrian detection
(p. 213)
•Collision warning* – Cyclist detection
(p. 212)
•Collision warning* – limitations (p. 214)
•Collision warning – troubleshooting (p. 217)
•Collision warning – symbols and messages
(p. 219)

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 211

Collision warning* – operation

Settings are made by pressing MY CAR on the

center console control panel and using the

menus displayed.

Activating/deactivating both warning

signals

To switch the system's audible and visual sig-

nals on or off at the same time, press MY CAR

on the center console control panel and go to

Settings Car settings Driver support

systems Collision Warning. If Pedestrian

and Cyclist Detection with Full Auto Brake is on,

the system will perform a self-test each time the

engine is started by briefly illuminating the warn-

ing light. See My Car – introduction (p. 77) for a

description of the menu system.

When the engine is switched on, the system set-

ting that was being used when it was switched

off will be the default setting.

NOTE

The auto-brake and pedestrian/cyclist detec-

tion features are always on, even if the audi-

ble and visual warning signals have been

deactivated.

Activating/deactivating the audible

warning signal only

The audible warning signal can be activated/

deactivated by pressing MY CAR on the center

console control panel and going to Settings

Car settings Driver support systems

Warning sound if risk of collision.

Setting a warning distance

This setting determines the distance at which the

visual and audible warnings are triggered. Select

Long, Normal or Short by pressing MY CAR on

the center console control panel and going to

Settings Car settings Driver support

systems Collision Warning Warning

distance.

The warning distance determines the level of

sensitivity used by the system. The warning dis-

tance Long provides an earlier warning. Begin by

using Long and if the system gives too many

warnings, try changing to Normal.

WARNING

•The setting Short should only be used in

situations where traffic is light and mov-

ing at low speeds.

•Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full

Auto Brake alerts the driver to the risk of

a collision but this function cannot reduce

the driver’s reaction time.

•For the system to be as effective as pos-

sible, it is recommended that Distance

Alert be set to 4 or 5, see Distance Alert

– operation (p. 197).

NOTE

•When Adaptive Cruise Control is used,

the warning light and signal will be used

by that function, even if the warnings pro-

vided by Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection

with Full Auto Brake have been deacti-

vated by the driver.

•In situations where traffic is moving at

considerably different speeds, or if the

vehicle ahead brakes suddenly, warnings

may be considered to be late, even if the

setting Long has been selected.

Checking settings

The current system settings can be checked by

pressing MY CAR on the center console control

panel and going to Settings Car settings

Driver support systems Collision Warning.

||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
212
Related information
•Collision warning – introduction (p. 208)
•Collision warning* – function (p. 210)
•Collision warning* – Pedestrian detection
(p. 213)
•Collision warning* – Cyclist detection
(p. 212)
•Collision warning* – limitations (p. 214)
•The camera’s limitations (p. 216)
•Collision warning – symbols and messages
(p. 219)
•Collision warning – troubleshooting (p. 217)
Collision warning* – Cyclist
detection
The system can detect a cyclist and auto-brake if
certain parameters are fulfilled.
Optimal example of what the system considers to be a
cyclist: clear body/bike contours, straight from behind
and directly in front of the vehicle
In order to help detect a cyclist, the system has to
receive clear information about the contours of
the cyclist's body and the bike. It has to able to
clearly detect the bike, the cyclist's head, arms,
shoulders, legs and upper and lower body com-
bined with the person's pattern of movement
when cycling.
The function only detects cyclists from behind who are
moving in the same direction as your vehicle
The Cyclist Detection feature requires the follow-
ing in order to function:
•The cyclist must be an adult riding an "adult-
size" bike
•The bike must be equipped with an approved
and clearly visible rear-facing red reflector
that is mounted at least 27 in. (70 cm) above
the road surface
•The feature can only detect a cyclist straight
from behind and who is moving in the same
direction as your vehicle
•A cyclist who is to the left or right of your
vehicle may be detected late or not at all.
•The camera's capacity to see a cyclist at
dawn or dusk is limited, much as it is for the
human eye.

DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 213
•The camera's function is deactivated and will
not detect a cyclist in darkness or in tunnels,
even if there is street lighting in the area.
•For optimal cyclist detection, City Safety™
must be activated.
WARNING
Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full
Auto Brake is designed to be a supplemen-
tary driving aid. It is not, however, intended to
replace the driver's attention and judgement.
The driver is always responsible for operating
the vehicle in a safe manner.
The system cannot detect a bike/cyclist if:
•He/she is wearing loose-fitting clothing
that may obscure body contours
•The bike is approaching your vehicle from
the side
•The bike is not equipped with a rear-fac-
ing red reflector
•The bike is carrying large objects
•Most of the cyclist's body or the bike
itself cannot be "seen" by the system's
camera
Related information
•Collision warning – introduction (p. 208)
•Collision warning* – function (p. 210)
•Collision warning* – operation (p. 211)
•Collision warning* – Pedestrian detection
(p. 213)
•Collision warning* – limitations (p. 214)
•Collision warning – troubleshooting (p. 217)
•Collision warning – symbols and messages
(p. 219)
Collision warning* – Pedestrian
detection
The system cannot identify all pedestrians
The Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full
Auto Brake system can only identify and detect a
pedestrian who is standing upright. This person
can be standing still, walking or running.
This means that the system has to be able to
identify a person's head, arms, shoulders, legs,
the upper and lower parts of the body and a per-
son's pattern of movement when walking or run-
ning.
If parts of the body are not visible to the camera,
the system cannot detect the pedestrian.
The following conditions apply:
•In order to detect a pedestrian, the system
must have a full view of the person's entire

||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
214
body and the person must be at least 32 in.
(80 cm) tall.
•The system cannot detect a pedestrian carry-
ing a large object.
•The camera's capacity to see a pedestrian at
dawn or dusk is limited, much as it is for the
human eye.
•The camera's function is deactivated and will
not detect a pedestrian in darkness or in tun-
nels, even if there is street lighting in the
area.
WARNING
•Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full
Auto Brake is designed to be a supple-
mentary driving aid. It is not, however,
intended to replace the driver's attention
and judgement. The driver is always
responsible for operating the vehicle in a
safe manner.
•The system cannot detect all pedestrians
in all situations, such as in darkness/at
night and cannot detect partially hidden
pedestrians, people who are less than
approx. 32 in. (80 cm) tall, or people
wearing clothing that obscures the con-
tours of their bodies.
Related information
•Collision warning – introduction (p. 208)
•Collision warning* – function (p. 210)
•Collision warning* – operation (p. 211)
•Collision warning* – Cyclist detection
(p. 212)
•Collision warning* – limitations (p. 214)
•Collision warning – troubleshooting (p. 217)
•Collision warning – symbols and messages
(p. 219)
Collision warning* – limitations
Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light con-
trasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the driver is not
looking straight ahead may make the visual warn-
ing signal in the windshield difficult to see. For
this reason, always activate the audible warning
signal.
Slippery driving conditions increase braking dis-
tance, which can reduce the system's capacity to
avoid a collision. In these conditions, the ABS and
stability systems provide the best possible brak-
ing effect while helping to maintain stability.
NOTE
The visual warning signal may be temporarily
disengaged in the event of high passenger
compartment temperature due to strong sun-
light, etc. If this occurs, the audible warning
signal will be used, even if it has been deacti-
vated in the menu system.

DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 215
WARNING
•In certain situations, the system cannot
provide warnings or warnings may be
delayed if traffic conditions or other exter-
nal factors make it impossible for the
radar sensor or camera to detect a
pedestrian, a cyclist or a vehicle ahead.
•Warnings may not be provided if the dis-
tance to the vehicle ahead is short, or if
movements of the steering wheel/brake
pedal are great, such as during active
driving.
•The sensor system has a limited range for
pedestrians/cyclists and provides warn-
ings and braking effect most effectively at
speeds up to 30 mph (50 km/h). For sta-
tionary or slow-moving vehicles, the sys-
tem functions best if your vehicle’s speed
is below approximately 45 mph
(70 km/h).
•Warnings for stationary or slow-moving
vehicles may not be provided in dark con-
ditions or in poor visibility.
The Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full
Auto Brake system uses the same radar sensors
as Adaptive Cruise Control. For more information
on the radar sensor and its limitations, see
Adaptive Cruise Control – limitations (p. 192).
NOTE
If warnings are given too frequently, the warn-
ing distance can be reduced (see Collision
warning* – operation (p. 211)). This causes
the system to provide later warnings, which
decreases the total number of warnings provi-
ded.
WARNING
•The system is not activated at speeds
under approx. 2 mph (4 km/h). Therefore,
it will not brake your vehicle if you
approach a vehicle ahead at very low
speed, such as when parking.
•The driver's actions always have highest
priority and override the Pedestrian and
Cyclist Detection with Full Auto Brake
system. This means that the system will
not intervene in situations where the
driver is actively steering, braking or
pressing the accelerator pedal, even if a
collision is imminent.
•When Auto-brake has prevented a colli-
sion with a stationary object, your vehicle
will remain at a standstill for approx.
1.5 seconds. If your vehicle has been
braked for a moving vehicle ahead, your
vehicle's speed will be reduced to the
same speed as that vehicle's.
Related information
•Collision warning – introduction (p. 208)
•Collision warning* – operation (p. 211)
•Collision warning* – function (p. 210)
•Collision warning* – Pedestrian detection
(p. 213)
•Collision warning* – Cyclist detection
(p. 212)
•The camera’s limitations (p. 216)
•Collision warning – symbols and messages
(p. 219)
•Collision warning – troubleshooting (p. 217)

DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
216
The camera’s limitations
The camera has the same limitations as the
human eye.
The camera is used by Pedestrian and Cyclist
Detection with Full Auto Brake Collision warning
– introduction (p. 208), Active High Beams
(Active high beams (AHB)* (p. 92)), Road Sign
Information (Road Sign Information (RSI)* – intro-
duction (p. 177)) and Driver Alert System (Driver
Alert System (p. 221)) with Lane Departure
Warning or Lane Keeping Aid.
NOTE
•To help protect the camera in very hot
conditions, it may be temporarily switched
off for approximately 15 minutes after the
engine has been started.
•Keep the section of the windshield in
front of the camera clean and free of ice,
snow, or condensation.
WARNING
•The camera has the same type of limita-
tions as the human eye, i.e., it cannot see
as well in heavy snowfall or rain, thick fog
or in heavy blowing dust or snow. In such
conditions, systems depending on the
camera may experience greatly reduced
functionality or may be temporarily deacti-
vated.
•Never place any objects, decals, etc., on
the windshield in front of the camera. This
could reduce or block the camera’s func-
tion, and could cause one or more of the
systems that utilize the camera to stop
functioning.
•Strong sunlight, reflections from the road
surface, ice or snow covering the road, a
dirty road surface, or unclear lane marker
lines may drastically reduce the camera’s
capacity to detect the side of a lane, a
pedestrian, a cyclist or another vehicle.
Related information
•Collision warning – introduction (p. 208)
•Collision warning* – function (p. 210)
•Collision warning* – operation (p. 211)
•Collision warning* – Pedestrian detection
(p. 213)
•Collision warning* – Cyclist detection
(p. 212)
•Collision warning* – limitations (p. 214)
•Collision warning – troubleshooting (p. 217)
•Collision warning – symbols and messages
(p. 219)
•Road Sign Information (RSI)* – introduction
(p. 177)
•Driver Alert System (p. 221)
•Active high beams (AHB)* (p. 92)

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

217

Collision warning – troubleshooting

Fault tracing and actions

If the message Windscreen Sensors blocked

is displayed, this means that the camera is

obscured and cannot detect pedestrians, cyclists,

vehicles or road marker lines in front of the vehi-

cle.

This, in turn, means that Pedestrian and Cyclist

Detection with Full Auto Brake, Driver Alert Con-

trol, Lane Departure Warning or Lane Keeping

Aid will not have full functionality.

The table lists possible causes for this message

being displayed, and suitable actions.

Cause Action

The surface of the windshield in front of the camera is dirty or covered with

ice or snow.

Clean or clear the section of the windshield in front of the camera.

Fog, heavy rain or snow is interfering with the function of the camera. No action possible. Heavy precipitation may affect the function of the cam-

era.

The surface of the windshield is clean but the message remains in the display. Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the camera to register vis-

ibility.

The surface between the inside of the windshield and the camera is dirty. Contact an authorized Volvo retailer or service technician to have this sur-

face cleaned.

||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
218
Maintenance
Camera and radar sensor6.
In order to function properly, the camera and
radar sensor must be kept clean. Dirt, ice, snow,
etc., will reduce the function of these compo-
nents.
Remove ice and snow when necessary and wash
these areas regularly with a suitable car washing
liquid.
Related information
•Collision warning – introduction (p. 208)
•Collision warning* – function (p. 210)
•Collision warning* – operation (p. 211)
•Collision warning* – Pedestrian detection
(p. 213)
•Collision warning* – Cyclist detection
(p. 212)
•Collision warning* – limitations (p. 214)
•The camera’s limitations (p. 216)
•Collision warning – symbols and messages
(p. 219)
6The illustration is generic; details will vary, depending on the model

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

219

Collision warning – symbols and

messages

The table lists possible causes for collision

warning-related messages being displayed, and

suitable actions.

A text message can be erased by pressing briefly

on the OK button on the turn signal lever.

Symbol Message Description

Collis'n warning

OFF

Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full Auto Brake is switched off. This message is displayed when the engine is

started and will disappear after approx. 5 seconds. It can also be erased by pressing the OK button.

Collision Warning

Unavailable

Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full Auto Brake cannot be activated. This message is displayed when the driver

attempts to activate the function. It will disappear after approx. 5 seconds or can be erased by pressing the OK button.

Auto braking was

activated

Auto-braking has been active. This message can be erased by pressing the OK button.

Windscreen Sen-

sors blocked

The camera is temporarily not functioning. This message is displayed if the camera is obstructed by snow, ice, dirt, etc.,

on the windshield. Clean the area of the windshield in front of the camera, see The camera’s limitations (p. 216) for

more information on the camera’s limitations.

Radar blocked See

manual

Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full Auto Brake is temporarily not functioning. The radar sensor is blocked, for

example by heavy rain or snow that has accumulated in front of the sensor, and cannot detect other vehicles, see

Adaptive Cruise Control – limitations (p. 192) for more information on the radar sensor’s limitations.

Collision warn.

Service required

Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full Auto Brake is partially or completely not functioning.

Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician if the message remains in the display.

||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
220
Related information
•Collision warning – introduction (p. 208)
•Collision warning* – function (p. 210)
•Collision warning* – operation (p. 211)
•Collision warning* – Pedestrian detection
(p. 213)
•Collision warning* – Cyclist detection
(p. 212)
•Collision warning* – limitations (p. 214)
•Collision warning – troubleshooting (p. 217)

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

221

Driver Alert System

The Driver Alert System is designed to help a

driver who may be becoming fatigued or who is

inadvertently leaving the lane.

Introduction

The Driver Alert System consists of two different

functions that can be switched on together or

separately.

•Driver Alert Control (DAC), see Driver Alert

Control (DAC) – introduction (p. 221)

•Lane Departure Warning (LDW)7, see Lane

Departure Warning (LDW) – introduction

(p. 227)

•Lane Keeping Aid (LKA)8, see Lane Keep-

ing Aid (LKA) – introduction (p. 232)

When one or both of the functions has been

switched on, it is in standby mode and is acti-

vated when the vehicle exceeds a speed of

40 mph (65 km/h).

The function deactivates if the vehicle's speed

goes under 37 mph (60 km/h).

Both functions use a camera that is dependent

on the road/lane being clearly marked by painted

lines on each side.

WARNING

The Driver Alert System does not function in

all situations and is designed to be a supple-

mentary aid. It is not, however, intended to

replace the driver’s attention and judgement.

Driver Alert Control (DAC) –

introduction

DAC is intended to alert the driver if his/her driv-

ing becomes erratic, such as if the driver is dis-

tracted or fatigued.

DAC is designed to help detect a slowly chang-

ing driving pattern. It is primarily intended to be

used on main roads and is not meant for use in

city traffic.

A camera monitors the painted lines marking the

lane in which the vehicle is traveling and com-

pares the direction of the road with the driver’s

movements of the steering wheel. The driver is

alerted if the vehicle does not follow the lane

smoothly.

7Models with 5- or 6-cylinder engines only.

8Models with 4-cylinder engines only.

||
DRIVER SUPPORT
222
NOTE
The camera has certain limitations, see
Adaptive Cruise Control – limitations (p. 192).
WARNING
•DAC is not intended to extend the dura-
tion of driving. Always plan breaks at reg-
ular intervals to help remain alert.
•A warning from DAC should not be
ignored. A driver may not be aware of
how fatigued he/she has become.
•In certain cases, fatigue may not affect
the driver’s behavior. In situations of this
type, no warning will be provided. There-
fore, it is important to take breaks at reg-
ular intervals, regardless of whether or
not DAC has given a warning.
Related information
•Driver Alert Control (DAC) – function
(p. 223)
•Driver Alert Control (DAC) – operation
(p. 222)
•Driver Alert Control (DAC) – limitations
(p. 223)
•Driver Alert Control (DAC) – symbols and
messages (p. 225)
•Driver Alert System (p. 221)
•Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – introduc-
tion (p. 227)
•Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – introduction
(p. 232) Driver Alert Control (DAC) –
operation
Operating DAC
Settings are made using menu system and the
display in the center console. See My Car – intro-
duction (p. 77) for more information on the menu
system.
On/Off
To put Driver Alert in standby mode:
•In the MY CAR menu, scroll to Car settings
Driver support systems Driver Alert
and check the box. If the box is not checked,
the function is off.
Related information
•Driver Alert Control (DAC) – introduction
(p. 221)
•Driver Alert Control (DAC) – function
(p. 223)
•Driver Alert Control (DAC) – limitations
(p. 223)
•Driver Alert Control (DAC) – symbols and
messages (p. 225)
•Driver Alert Control (DAC) – introduction
(p. 221)
•Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – introduc-
tion (p. 227)
•Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – introduction
(p. 232)

DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
223
Driver Alert Control (DAC) – function
Function
Driver Alert is activated when the vehicle exceeds
a speed of 40 mph (65 km/h) and will remain
active as long as the speed is over approx.
37 mph (60 km/h).
If the vehicle is being driven erratically,
the driver will be alerted by an audible
signal and the message Driver Alert
Time for a break is displayed. The
warning will be repeated after a short time if the
driving pattern remains the same.
Press the OK button to erase a message.
WARNING
•An alert should be taken seriously since it
is sometimes difficult for a driver to real-
ize that he/she is fatigued.
•In the event of a warning or if the driver
feels fatigued, stop as soon as possible in
a safe place and rest.
Related information
•Driver Alert Control (DAC) – introduction
(p. 221)
•Driver Alert Control (DAC) – operation
(p. 222)
•Driver Alert Control (DAC) – limitations
(p. 223)
•Driver Alert Control (DAC) – symbols and
messages (p. 225)
•Driver Alert System (p. 221)
•Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – introduc-
tion (p. 227)
•Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – introduction
(p. 232)
Driver Alert Control (DAC) –
limitations
Limitations
In certain situations, DAC may provide warnings
even if the driver’s driving pattern has not
become erratic:
•in strong crosswinds
•on grooved road surfaces.
•if the driver is testing the LDW function, see
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – introduc-
tion (p. 227)
or
•if the driver is testing the LKA function, see
Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – introduction
(p. 232)
Related information
•Driver Alert Control (DAC) – introduction
(p. 221)
•Driver Alert Control (DAC) – function
(p. 223)
•Driver Alert Control (DAC) – operation
(p. 222)
•Driver Alert Control (DAC) – symbols and
messages (p. 225)
•Driver Alert System (p. 221)

DRIVER SUPPORT

224

•Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – introduc-

tion (p. 227)

•Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – introduction

(p. 232)

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

225

Driver Alert Control (DAC) –

symbols and messages

Depending on the situation, DAC may display

certain symbols and text messages in the instru-

ment panel or center console screen.

Symbols and messages

Instrument panel

Symbol Message Description

Driver Alert Time for a

break

The vehicle has been driven erratically. The driver receives an audible signal and a text message.

Windscreen Sensors

blocked

The camera is temporarily not functioning, due to snow, ice, or dirt on the windshield. Clean the area of the wind-

shield in front of the camera. See The camera’s limitations (p. 216) for information on the camera’s limitations.

Driver Alert Sys Service

required

The system is not functioning. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician if the message remains in

the display.

||
DRIVER SUPPORT
226
Center console display
Symbol Message Description
-Driver Alert OFF The function is not switched on.
-Driver Alert Available The function is active.
-Driver Alert Standby <65
km/h
The function has gone into standby mode because the vehicle's speed is below 40 mph (65 km/h).
-Driver Alert Unavailable The camera is temporarily not functioning, due to snow, ice, or dirt on the windshield. Clean the area of the
windshield in front of the camera. See The camera’s limitations (p. 216) for information on the camera’s limita-
tions.
Related information
•Driver Alert Control (DAC) – introduction
(p. 221)
•Driver Alert Control (DAC) – function
(p. 223)
•Driver Alert Control (DAC) – operation
(p. 222)
•Driver Alert Control (DAC) – limitations
(p. 223)
•Driver Alert System (p. 221)
•Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – introduc-
tion (p. 227)
•Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – introduction
(p. 232)

DRIVER SUPPORT
227
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) –
introduction
The LDW function is designed to help reduce
the risk of accidents in situations where the vehi-
cle unintentionally leaves its lane and there is a
risk of driving off the road or into the opposite
lane.
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)9
Your vehicle may be equipped with Lane
Departure Warning (LDW) or Lane Keeping
Aid (LKA), depending on your choice of
engine. If you are uncertain as to which of these
optional systems is in your vehicle:
•Press the MY CAR button on the center
console to open the menu system. Scroll to
Settings Driver support system. The
system in your vehicle (Lane Departure
Warning or Lane Keeping Aid) will be dis-
played there.
If your vehicle is equipped with Lane Keeping Aid
(LKA), see Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – introduc-
tion (p. 232) for detailed information.
The illustration is generic
LDW uses the camera located at the center,
upper edge of the windshield to monitor the
road's/lane’s side marker lines. If the vehicle
crosses a side marker line or the road’s center
dividing line, the driver will be alerted by an audi-
ble signal.
WARNING
Lane Keeping Aid is only intended to assist
the driver and does not function in all driving,
weather, traffic or road conditions.
As the driver, you have full responsibility for
operating the vehicle in a safe manner.
Related information
•Driver Alert System (p. 221)
•Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – symbols
and messages (p. 230)
•Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – operation
(p. 228)
•Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - limitations
(p. 229)
9Models with 5- or 6-cylinder engines only.

DRIVER SUPPORT

228

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) –

operation

Operation and function

LDW can be switched on or off by pressing the

button on the center console. A light in the but-

ton illuminates when the function is on. This is

supplemented by graphic displays in the instru-

ment panel, for example:

LDW displayed in the instrument panel

•The LDW symbol has white side marker

lines: – the function is active and "sees" one

or both of the road's side marker lines.

•The LDW symbol has gray side marker lines:

– the function is active but cannot "see" one

or both of the road's side marker lines.

•The LDW symbol has gray side marker lines:

– the function is in standby mode because

the vehicle's speed is below 40 mph

(65 km/h).

•The LDW symbol has no side marker lines: –

the function is deactivated.

WARNING

The driver will only be warned once for each

time the wheels cross a marker line. No alarm

will be given if a marker line is between the

wheels.

Settings

Settings for Lane Departure Warning can be

made in the menu system by pressing My Car.

Go to Settings Car settings Driver

support systems Lane Departure Warning.

There are two alternatives:

•On at start-up: This selection switches

LDW on each time the engine is started.

Otherwise, the system will be in the mode

that it was in when the engine was switched

off.

•Increased sensitivity: This selection increa-

ses the function’s sensitivity. Warnings will be

given at an earlier stage and fewer limitations

apply. When this setting is being used, the

system only needs to monitor lane marker

lines on one side of the vehicle to change

status to Lane Depart Warn Available.

Related information

•Driver Alert System (p. 221)

•Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – symbols

and messages (p. 230)

DRIVER SUPPORT
229
•Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – introduc-
tion (p. 227)
•Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - limitations
(p. 229)
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) -
limitations
Limitations
The camera used by LDW has the same limita-
tions as the human eye. See The camera’s limita-
tions (p. 216) for more information about the
camera's limitations.
NOTE
No warning signal will be given in the cer-
tain situations, such as:
•If the turn signal is being used
•The driver’s foot is on the brake pedal10
•The accelerator pedal is pressed
quickly10
•If the steering wheel is moved quickly10
•In sharp turns that cause the vehicle’s
body to sway
Related information
•Driver Alert System (p. 221)
•Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – symbols
and messages (p. 230)
•Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – operation
(p. 228)
•Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – introduc-
tion (p. 227)
10 When Increased sensitivity has been selected, a warning will be issued if a side marker line is crossed in this situation.

DRIVER SUPPORT

230

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) –

symbols and messages

Symbols and messages

A text message can be erased by pressing briefly

on the OK button on the turn signal lever.

Symbol Message Description

Lane departure warning ON/

Lane departure warning OFF

The function is switched on or off. The text disappears after 5 seconds.

-Lane Depart Warn Available The function is monitoring the road’s marker lines.

-Lane Depart. Warning Unavaila-

ble at this speed

The function has gone into standby mode because the vehicle's speed is below 40 mph (65 km/h).

-Lane Depart Warn Unavailable The road lacks clear marker lines or the camera is not functioning properly. See The camera’s limitations

(p. 216) for information on the camera’s limitations.

Windscreen Sensors blocked The camera is temporarily not functioning, due to snow, ice, or dirt on the windshield. Clean the area of the

windshield in front of the camera. See The camera’s limitations (p. 216) for information on the camera’s

limitations.

Driver Alert Sys Service

required

The system is not functioning. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician if the message

remains in the display.

DRIVER SUPPORT
231
Related information
•Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – operation
(p. 228)
•Driver Alert System (p. 221)
•Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – introduc-
tion (p. 227)
•Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - limitations
(p. 229)

DRIVER SUPPORT
232
Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) –
introduction
The LKA function is designed to help reduce the
risk of accidents in situations where the vehicle
unintentionally leaves its lane and there is a risk
of driving off the road or into the opposite lane.
LDW or LKA
Your vehicle may be equipped with Lane
Departure Warning (LDW) or Lane Keeping
Aid (LKA), depending on your choice of
engine. If you are uncertain as to which of these
optional systems is in your vehicle:
•Press the MY CAR button on the center
console to open the menu system. Scroll to
Settings Driver support system. The
system in your vehicle (Lane Departure
Warning or Lane Keeping Aid) will be dis-
played there.
If your vehicle is equipped with Lane Departure
Warning (LDW), see Lane Departure Warning
(LDW) – introduction (p. 227) for detailed infor-
mation.
LKA function
The LKA function is primarily intended for use on
highways or other major roads with clearly
marked side marker and center lines.
The illustration is generic
LKA uses the camera located at the center,
upper edge of the windshield to monitor the
road's/lane’s side marker lines.
If the vehicle crosses a side marker line or the
road’s center dividing line, LKA will provide active
steering assistance to help steer it back into the
lane.
The driver will also be alerted by vibrations in the
steering wheel.
WARNING
Lane Keeping Aid is only intended to assist
the driver and does not function in all driving,
weather, traffic or road conditions.
As the driver, you have full responsibility for
operating the vehicle in a safe manner.
Related information
•Driver Alert System (p. 221)
•Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – operation
(p. 233)
•Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – limitations
(p. 235)
•Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – symbols and mes-
sages (p. 236)
•The camera’s limitations (p. 216)

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

233

Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – operation

LKA is active at speeds above 40 mph (65 km/h)

on highways or other major roads with clearly

marked side/lane marker and center lines. On

narrow roads where the distance between side/

lane marker lines is less than approximately

8.5 feet ( 2.6 meters), LKA will be temporarily

deactivated.

LKA monitors and follows the marker lines (the red lines

in the illustration)

•White side marker lines: the function is

active and "sees" one or both of the road's

side marker lines.

•Gray side marker lines: the function is active

but cannot "see" one or both of the road's

side marker lines.

LKA intervening on the right side (the red line)

When LKA is working actively, this is indicated by:

•Red side marker line: the line being crossed.

On/Off

LKA can be switched on or off by pressing the

button on the center console. A light in the but-

ton illuminates when the function is on.

Depending on the number of optional features

installed in the vehicle, there may not be space

for the On/Off button on the center console. If

this is the case, LKA can be switched on or off in

the MY CAR menu system.

The following LKA-related settings can also be

made in MY CAR, under Settings Lane

Keeping Aid settings Assistance mode:

•Vibration only: Warning by vibrations in the

steering wheel On or Off.

•Steering assist only: Active steering On or

Off.

•Full function: Both vibrations and active

steering On or Off.

DRIVER SUPPORT

234

Steering assist

LKA attempts to keep the vehicle within the

lane's side marker lines.

LKA provides steering assistance

If the vehicle approaches one of the lane's side

marker lines and the turn signals are not

being used, LKA will attempt to steer the vehicle

back into the lane.

Vibration warnings

LKA provides vibrations in the steering wheel and steer-

ing assistance11.

If the vehicle crosses a marker line, LKA provides

a warning in the form of vibrations in the steering

wheel. This occurs even if the steering assist

function has been deactivated.

Dynamic cornering

LKA does not intervene in sharp left curves

In certain cases, LKA allows the vehicle to cross

marker lines without providing a vibration warning

or steering assistance, for example, during

dynamic cornering as shown in the illustration

where the driver's view of the road and traffic

conditions make this possible.

Related information

•Driver Alert System (p. 221)

•Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – introduction

(p. 232)

•Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – limitations

(p. 235)

•Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – symbols and mes-

sages (p. 236)

11 The illustration shows 3 vibration warnings when the vehicle crosses the marker line

DRIVER SUPPORT
235
Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – limitations
The camera used by LKA has the same limita-
tions as the human eye. See The camera’s limita-
tions (p. 216) for more information about the
camera's limitations.
NOTE
In certain cases, it may be difficult for LKA to
assist the driver correctly. In the following
conditions, it may be preferable to turn LKA
off:
•Road construction areas
•Winter road conditions
•Poor road surfaces
•A very sporty driving style
•Bad weather conditions with poor visibility
WARNING
Hands on the steering wheel: In order for
LKA to function correctly, the driver's hands
have to be on the steering wheel, which LKA
monitors steadily. If this is not the case, the
driver will be alerted by a text message to
actively steer the vehicle.
If this is not done, LKA will go into standby
mode and will remain disengaged until the
driver begins to actively steer the vehicle
again.
Related information
•Driver Alert System (p. 221)
•Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – introduction
(p. 232)
•Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – operation (p. 233)
•Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – symbols and mes-
sages (p. 236)

DRIVER SUPPORT
236
Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – symbols
and messages
A text message can be erased by pressing briefly
on the OK button on the turn signal lever.
Symbol Message Description
-Lane Keeping Aid Unavailable at
this speed
The function has gone into standby mode because the vehicle's speed is below 40 mph (65 km/h).
-Lane Keeping Aid Unavailable
for current markings
The road lacks clear marker lines or the camera is not functioning properly. See The camera’s limitations
(p. 216) for information on the camera’s limitations.
-Lane Keeping Aid Available The function is monitoring the road’s marker lines.
Windscreen sensors blocked
See manual
The camera is temporarily not functioning, due to snow, ice, or dirt on the windshield. Clean the area of the
windshield in front of the camera. See The camera’s limitations (p. 216) for information on the camera’s
limitations.
Lane Keeping Aid Service
required
The system is not functioning. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician if the message
remains in the display.
Lane Keeping Aid Interrupted The function has gone into standby mode. The lines in the LKA symbol in the instrument panel will indi-
cate when the function is active again.
Related information
•Driver Alert System (p. 221)
•Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – introduction
(p. 232)
•Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – operation (p. 233)
•Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – limitations
(p. 235)

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

237

Park assist – introduction

The park assist system is designed to assist you

when driving into parking spaces, garages, etc.

An audible signal and symbols in the audio sys-

tem’s display indicate the distance to the object.

The park assist system utilizes ultrasound sen-

sors in the front bumper and rear bumper(s) to

measure the distance to a vehicle or an object

that may be close to the front or rear of your

vehicle.

NOTE

A trailer hitch whose wiring is integrated with

the vehicle's electrical system will be taken

into account when measuring the available

space behind the vehicle.

WARNING

Park Assist is an information system, NOT a

safety system. This system is designed to be

a supplementary aid when parking the vehicle.

It is not, however, intended to replace the driv-

er's attention and judgement.

Related information

•Park assist – limitations (p. 240)

•Park assist – function (p. 237)

•Park assist – operation (p. 239)

•Park assist – troubleshooting (p. 245)

•Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – function

(p. 246) Park assist – function

Signals from the park assist system

View in the display (warning for objects front left/right

rear)

Visual indicator

The audio system’s display gives an overview of

the vehicle’s position in relation to a detected

object.

The marked sectors in the display indicate that

one or more of the sensors has detected an

object. The closer the car symbol comes to a sec-

tor, the closer the vehicle is to the object.

If the infotainment system is switched off, the

park assist system will not be able to provide a

visual indicator. An audible signal will still be pro-

vided.

DRIVER SUPPORT

238

Audible signal

The Park Assist system uses an intermittent tone

that pulses faster as you come close to an object,

and becomes constant when you are within

approximately 1 ft (30 cm) of an object in front of

or behind the vehicle. If there are objects within

this distance both behind and in front of the vehi-

cle, the tone alternates between front and rear

speakers.

NOTE

The level of the audible signal can be low-

ered/raised with the infotainment volume

control. The level can also be set in the MY

CAR menu system. See My Car – introduction

(p. 77) for a description of the menu system.

If the volume of another source from the audio

system is high, this will be automatically lowered.

Rear park assist

The distance monitored behind the vehicle is

approximately 5 ft (1.5 m). The audible signal

comes from the rear speakers.

The system must be deactivated when towing a

trailer, carrying bicycles in a rear-mounted carrier,

etc, which could trigger the rear park assist sys-

tem's sensors.

NOTE

•Rear park assist is deactivated automati-

cally when towing a trailer if Volvo genu-

ine trailer wiring is used. If a non-Volvo

trailer hitch is being used, it may be nec-

essary to switch off the system manually,

see Park assist – operation (p. 239).

•The system will not detect high objects,

such as a loading dock, etc.

•Objects such as chains, thin shiny poles

or low objects may temporarily not be

detected by the system. This may result

in the pulsing tone unexpectedly stopping

instead of changing to a constant tone as

the vehicle approaches the object. In

such cases, use caution when backing up

or stop the vehicle to help avoid damage.

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 239

Front park assist

The distance monitored in front of the vehicle is

approximately 2.5 ft (0.8 m). The audible signal

comes from the audio system's front speakers.

It may not be possible to combine auxiliary head-

lights and front park assist since these lights

could trigger the system's sensors.

NOTE

Front park assist is deactivated when the

parking brake is applied and or when the gear

selector is in the P position.

Related information

•Park assist – introduction (p. 237)

•Park assist – limitations (p. 240)

•Park assist – operation (p. 239)

•Park assist – troubleshooting (p. 245)

•Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – function

(p. 246) Park assist – operation

Function

Park assist and CTA* button

The system is activated automatically when the

vehicle is started. The indicator light in the button

in the center console illuminates when the sys-

tem is on.

•The front park assist system is active from

the time the engine is started until the vehi-

cle exceeds a speed of approximately 6 mph

(10 km/h). It is also active when the vehicle

is backing up.

•Rear park assist is active when the engine is

running and reverse gear has been selected.

||
DRIVER SUPPORT
240
Activating/deactivating
The system is activated automatically when the
vehicle is started.
–Press the Park assist button on the center
console to temporarily deactivate the sys-
tem(s).
> The indicator light in the button will go out
when the system has been deactivated.
Park assist will be automatically reactivated the
next time the engine is started, or if the button is
pressed (the indicator light in the button will illu-
minate).
NOTE
Park assist is disengaged automatically when
the parking brake is applied.
Related information
•Park assist – introduction (p. 237)
•Park assist – limitations (p. 240)
•Park assist – function (p. 237)
•Park assist – troubleshooting (p. 245)
•Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – function
(p. 246)
Park assist – limitations
Cleaning the sensors
The sensors must be cleaned regularly to ensure
that they work properly. Clean them with water
and a suitable car washing detergent.
Location of the front sensors
Location of the rear sensors
Ice and snow covering the sensors may cause
incorrect warning signals.
NOTE
If the sensors are obstructed by e.g., dirt,
snow, or ice, this could result in false warning
signals from the park assist system or the
system may not function at all.
Related information
•Park assist – introduction (p. 237)
•Park assist – function (p. 237)
•Park assist – operation (p. 239)
•Park assist – troubleshooting (p. 245)
•Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – function
(p. 246)

DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 241
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* –
introduction
The Park Assist Pilot provides assistance when
parallel parking by measuring the parking space
and turning the steering wheel.
Introduction
The off/on button shown is located on the center con-
sole
Park Assist Pilot (PAP) is a semi-automatic sys-
tem that provides assistance when parallel park-
ing by:
•Finding a parking space and determining if it
is big enough for the vehicle
•Helping to steer the vehicle into the parking
space
Information about the actions required of the
driver is provided in the instrument panel in the
form of symbols, images and text.
NOTE
If a trailer hitch is configured in the vehicle's
electrical system, PAP will take the trailer
hitch into consideration when determining the
necessary size of a parking space.
WARNING
•PAP does not function in all situations
and is only intended to assist the driver
when parallel parking.
•As the driver, you have full responsibility
for parking the vehicle in a safe manner.
Related information
•Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – function (p. 241)
•Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – operation (p. 242)
•Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – limitations
(p. 244)
•Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – symbols and mes-
sages (p. 245)
•Park assist – introduction (p. 237)
•Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – introduc-
tion (p. 246)
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – function
PAP's function is to measure the parking space
and to turn the steering wheel during the parallel
parking procedure. The driver is responsible for
following the instructions shown in the instru-
ment panel and for: shifting between R (Reverse)
and D (Drive) when required, regulating the vehi-
cle's speed, applying the brakes and stopping the
vehicle.
PAP can be activated in the following conditions:
•When the stability or ABS systems are not
working actively
•The vehicle is not towing a trailer
•The vehicle's speed is below 30 mph
(50 km/h)
How PAP works
PAP helps park the vehicle by:

||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
242
1. Searching for and measuring a parking
space. While this is taking place, the vehicle's
speed must be below 20 mph (30 km/h).
See also steps A and B in the illustration in
the section "1: Searching and measuring" in
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – operation
(p. 242).
2. Steering the vehicle as it backs into the park-
ing space. See also steps C and D in the
illustration in the section "2: Backing into the
parking space" in Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* –
operation (p. 242).
3. Adjusting the vehicle's position in the parking
space by moving forward and rearward. See
also steps E and F in the illustration in the
section "3: Adjusting the vehicle's position"
in Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – operation
(p. 242).
Related information
•Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – introduction
(p. 241)
•Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – limitations
(p. 244)
•Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – symbols and mes-
sages (p. 245)
•Park assist – introduction (p. 237)
•Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – introduc-
tion (p. 246)
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – operation
1: Searching and measuring
PAP searches for a potential parking space and
measures it to see if there is sufficient space for
your vehicle. To start this procedure:
1. Activate PAP by pressing
this button on the center con-
sole and if necessary slowing
down to a speed below 20 mph
(30 km/h).
2. Keep an eye on the instru-
ment panel and be prepared to stop the vehicle
when you are instructed by PAP to do so.
NOTE
PAP normally searches for available parking
spaces along the curb on the right (passeng-
er's) side of the vehicle. However, it can also
assist in finding and parking in spaces on the
driver's side. To do so:
•Activate the left turn signal. PAP will then
search for a parking space on the left
side of the vehicle.

DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 243
2: Backing into the parking space
When the vehicle is backing up, PAP will steer it
into the parking space.
1. Check that the area behind the vehicle is
clear and put the gear selector in R.
2. Back up slowly without moving the steering
wheel. The vehicle's speed must be below
approximately 4 mph 7 km/h.
3. Keep an eye on the instrument panel and be
prepared to stop the vehicle when you are
instructed by PAP to do so.
NOTE
•Release the wheel while PAP is steering
the vehicle.
•The steering wheel must be able to turn
freely.
•For PAP to function optimally, wait until
the steering wheel is no longer turning
before beginning the next phase of the
parking procedure.
3: Adjusting the vehicle's position
After the vehicle has backed into the parking
space, its position in the space has to be
adjusted by driving slightly forward and backing
up.
1. Put the gear selector in D, wait until the
steering wheel has turned and drive forward
slowly.
2. Stop the vehicle when you are instructed by
PAP to do so.
3. Put the gear selector in R, back up slowly
and stop when you are instructed by PAP to
do so.
When the parking procedure is finished (this will
be indicated by a text message and a graphic
image in the instrument panel) , PAP switches off
automatically. If necessary, the driver may need to
make minor adjustments to ensure that the vehi-
cle is parked correctly.
Related information
•Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – introduction
(p. 241)
•Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – function (p. 241)
•Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – limitations
(p. 244)
•Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – symbols and mes-
sages (p. 245)
•Park assist – introduction (p. 237)
•Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – introduc-
tion (p. 246)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

244

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – limitations

The PAP parking procedure will be cancelled if.

•The vehicle's speed goes above approxi-

mately 4 mph 7 km/h

•The driver moves the steering wheel

•If the stability or ABS systems are activated

(e.g., if a wheel starts to spin because of a

slippery road surface

If the system has been switched off, this will be

indicated by a text message in the instrument

panel.

NOTE

•PAP will not function correctly if its sen-

sors are obstructed by dirt, snow, etc.

•In certain situations, PAP may not be able

to measure a parking space. This could

be due to external sources of sound (e.g.,

a vehicle's horn, tires on wet asphalt,

pneumatic brakes, noise from a motorcy-

cle's exhaust, etc.) emitting ultrasound

using approximately the same frequen-

cies as PAP.

Information to keep in mind

PAP is only intended to provide parallel parking

assistance but may not be able to function fully in

all situations.

•PAP's function is based on the way that the

vehicles are parked behind and in front of

your parking space. If they are, for example,

parked too close to the curb, there is a risk

that your vehicle's tires or wheel rims could

be damaged by the curb during the parking

procedure.

•PAP is intended to provide parking assis-

tance on straight streets, not sections of

street with curved or irregular curbs. Be sure

that your vehicle is parallel to the curb when

PAP measures the parking space.

•PAP may not be able to provide parking

assistance on narrow streets due to lack of

space to maneuver the vehicle. In situations

like this, it may help to drive as close to the

side of the road as possible where the park-

ing space is located.

•Use only approved tires with the correct infla-

tion pressure because this affects PAP's

capacity to provide parking assistance.

Changing to a different approved tire size

may affect PAP's parameters. Consult a

trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

•Heavy rain or snow may inhibit PAP's

capacity to correctly measure a parking

space.

•Do not use PAP if snow chains or a tempo-

rary spare tire is being used.

•Do not use PAP if there are any objects pro-

truding from the vehicle.

WARNING

•The front end of your vehicle may turn out

toward oncoming traffic during the park-

ing procedure.

•Objects located above the parking sen-

sors' field of vision are not included when

PAP measures a parking space. For this

reason, PAP may turn into the parking

space too soon. Avoid parking spaces of

this type.

•The driver is always responsible for deter-

mining if PAP has selected a suitable

parking space.

Maintenance

Generic illustration. The PAP sensors are located in the

front and rear bumpers

PAP uses the same sensors as the Park assist

system, see Park assist – limitations (p. 240)).

DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 245
The sensors must be cleaned regularly to ensure
that they work properly. Clean them with water
and a suitable car washing detergent.
Related information
•Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – introduction
(p. 241)
•Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – function (p. 241)
•Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – operation (p. 242)
•Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – symbols and mes-
sages (p. 245)
•Park assist – introduction (p. 237)
•Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – introduc-
tion (p. 246)
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – symbols
and messages
Various PAP-related combinations of symbols,
graphics and text messages are displayed in the
instrument panel and sometimes also include
suitable actions.
A text message can be erased by pressing briefly
on the OK button on the turn signal lever.
Contact a Volvo retailer or a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician If a message indicating
that PAP is not functioning properly is displayed.
Related information
•Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – introduction
(p. 241)
•Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – function (p. 241)
•Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – operation (p. 242)
•Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – limitations (p. 244)
•Park assist – introduction (p. 237)
•Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – introduc-
tion (p. 246)
Park assist – troubleshooting
Faults in the system
If the information symbol illuminates and Park
assist syst Service required is shown on the
information display, this indicates that the system
is not functioning properly and has been disen-
gaged. Consult a trained and qualified Volvo serv-
ice technician.
CAUTION
In certain circumstances, the park assist sys-
tem may give unexpected warning signals
that can be caused by external sound sources
that use the same ultrasound frequencies as
the system. This may include such things as
the horns of other vehicles, wet tires on
asphalt, pneumatic brakes, motorcycle
exhaust pipes, etc. This does not indicate a
fault in the system.
Related information
•Park assist – introduction (p. 237)
•Park assist – limitations (p. 240)
•Park assist – function (p. 237)
•Park assist – operation (p. 239)
•Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – function
(p. 246)

DRIVER SUPPORT

246

Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) –

introduction

The Park Assist Camera is designed to provide

the driver with a view of the area behind the vehi-

cle when backing up.

Introduction

PAC uses the display in the center console to

show the area behind the car while you are back-

ing up.

PAC also shows guiding lines in the on-screen

image to indicate the direction that the vehicle

will take as it moves rearward, which helps sim-

plify parallel parking, backing into a tight space or

when attaching a trailer to the vehicle.

The images of vehicles in this section are generic

and may not depict your specific model.

NOTE

A trailer hitch whose wiring is integrated with

the vehicle's electrical system will be taken

into account when measuring the available

space behind the vehicle.

WARNING

•PAC is designed to be a supplementary

aid when parking the vehicle. It is not,

however, intended to replace the driver’s

attention and judgment.

•The camera has blind spots where it can-

not detect objects or people around or

near the vehicle.

•Pay particular attention to people or ani-

mals that are close to the vehicle.

•Objects seen on the screen may be

closer than they appear to be.

Related information

•Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – operation

(p. 247)

•Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – limitations

(p. 250)

Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) –

function

Function

The driver sees what is behind the vehicle and if

a person or animal should suddenly appear from

the side.

PAC is mounted on the tailgate, near the opening

handle.

The camera has built-in electronics that help

reduce the “fish-eye” effect so that the image

shown on the screen is as natural as possible.

This may cause some objects on the screen to

“lean,” which is normal.

DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
247
Ambient lighting conditions
The camera automatically monitors the ambient
lighting conditions behind the vehicle and con-
stantly adjusts sensitivity to light. This may cause
the brightness and quality of the image on the
screen to vary slightly. Sensitivity to light is
increased in dark conditions or in bad weather,
which may affect image quality.
If the image on the screen seems too dark,
brightness can be increased with the thumb
wheel on the lighting panel.
NOTE
In order to function properly, the camera lens
should always be kept clean. This is particu-
larly important in bad weather. Keep the lens
free of dirt, ice or snow.
Related information
•Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – introduc-
tion (p. 246)
•Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – operation
(p. 247)
•Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – limitations
(p. 250)
Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) –
operation
Activation
PAC is activated when the gear selector is moved
to R if the system is selected in the MY CAR
menu system or by pressing the CAM button in
the center console. See My Car – introduction
(p. 77) for a description of the menu system.
If PAC is not activated when the gear selector is
moved to R, press the CAM button on the center
console.
PAC will automatically override the view currently
on the screen and will display the camera's view
behind the vehicle.
Trailer hitches
The camera can be useful when attaching a
trailer. With the camera zoomed in on the trailer
hitch, a guiding line showing the hitch's path
toward the trailer will be projected.
The guiding lines for the wheels and for the
trailer hitch cannot be displayed at the same
time. To select a view:
1. Press OK/MENU when a camera view is dis-
played.
2. Turn TUNE to scroll to Tow bar trajectory
guide line.
3. Confirm by pressing OK/MENU and press
EXIT.
Zoom
When necessary, the camera view can be
zoomed:
•Press CAM or turn TUNE. Pressing or turn-
ing again returns you to normal view.
If there are additional alternatives, press/turn
until the desired camera view is displayed.
Automatic zoom
Automatic zoom is a feature that is available on
models equipped with a trailer hitch and the
optional (p. 237)Park assist system. With this
alternative selected, the camera will zoom in on
the trailer hitch automatically if the vehicle
approaches an object/trailer.
See also the "Settings" section below.

DRIVER SUPPORT

248

Deactivation

Move the gear selector from R to another gear.

The camera remains active for approx. 5 seconds

after the gear selector has been moved from R or

until the vehicle's forward speed exceeds

6 mph/10 km/h (21 mph/35 km/h in reverse).

The screen will then revert to the view that was

displayed before R was selected.

NOTE

If any button on the center console control

panel is pressed, the camera image will disap-

pear from the display. Pressing CAM will

return the camera image to the display.

Settings

By default, PAC is set to activate when the gear

selector is moved to R

To change PAC settings when a camera view is

displayed:

1. Press OK/MENU when a camera view is on

the screen. A menu will be displayed.

2. Turn TUNE to scroll to the desired setting.

3. Press OK/MENU to make the setting and

exit the menu by pressing EXIT.

Summary

•Pressing CAM will activate the camera even

if the gear selector is not in Reverse.

•Toggle between normal view and zoom by

pressing CAM or by turning TUNE.

Related information

•Park assist – introduction (p. 237)

•Park assist – function (p. 237)

•Park assist – troubleshooting (p. 245)

•Park assist – limitations (p. 240)

•Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – introduc-

tion (p. 246)

Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) –

guiding and marker lines

Guiding lines

The lines on the screen are projected as if they

were a path on the ground behind the vehicle

and are directly affected by the way in which the

steering wheel is turned. This enables the driver

to see path the vehicle will take, even if he/she

turns the steering wheel while backing up.

NOTE

When backing up with a trailer, the trajectory

lines show the path that the vehicle will take,

not the trailer.

Trajectory lines will not be displayed while

zooming in.

DRIVER SUPPORT

249

WARNING

Keep in mind that the image on the screen

only shows the area behind the vehicle. The

driver must always watch for people, animals,

other vehicles, etc., near the sides of the vehi-

cle when turning while backing up.

Marker lines

The PAC system's lines

The unobstructed area behind the vehicle

"Wheel tracks"

The dashed line (1) indicates the clear zone of

approximately 5 feet (1.5 m) behind the bumper.

These lines also indicate the outermost limits that

any object (door mirrors, corners of the body, etc.)

extends out from the vehicle, even when it turns.

The "wheel tracks" (2) show where the wheels

will roll and can extend up to approximately

10.5 ft (3.2 m) behind the bumper if there are no

objects in the way.

Vehicles equipped with Park Assist

Colored markers (one for each sensor) indicate distance

If the vehicle is equipped with the optional Park

Assist system (see Park assist – introduction

(p. 237)), the distance to an object will be indi-

cated more exactly and colored markers in the

display indicate which of the sensor(s) has

detected the object.

Color Distance to object

Pale yellow 2.3–5 ft (0.7–1.5 m )

Yellow 1.6–2.3 ft (0.5–0.7 m)

Orange 1–1.6 ft (0.3–0.5 m)

Red 0–1 ft (0–0.3 m)

Related information

•Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – operation

(p. 247)

•Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – limitations

(p. 250)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

250

Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) –

limitations

Limitations

Even if a fairly small section of the screen image

appears to be obstructed, this may mean that a

relatively large area behind the vehicle is hidden

and objects there may not be detected until they

are very near the vehicle.

NOTE

Bicycle carriers or other accessories mounted

on the tailgate may obstruct the camera's

field of view.

Keep in mind

•Keep the camera's lens free of dirt, ice and

snow. Remove ice and snow carefully to

avoid scratching the lens.

•Clean the lens regularly with warm water and

a suitable car washing detergent.

Related information

•Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – introduc-

tion (p. 246)

•Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – operation

(p. 247)

•Park assist – introduction (p. 237)

BLIS* – introduction

The Blind Spot Information System (BLIS) is an

information system that indicates the presence

of another vehicle moving in the same direction

as your vehicle on roads with several lanes.

Location of the BLIS indicator light12.

Indicator light

BLIS symbol

BLIS and CTA13 are activated when the engine is

started; this is confirmed when the indicator

lights on the front door panels flash once.

NOTE

The door panel indicator light illuminates on

the side of the vehicle where the system has

detected another vehicle. If your vehicle is

passed on both sides at the same time, both

lights will illuminate.

The system helps provide information about:

•Other vehicles in your door mirrors' "blind

area"

•Vehicles that are about to pass your vehicle

in the left and/or right lanes

•Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) is a supplemen-

tary BLIS function intended to detect vehi-

cles crossing behind your vehicle while you

are backing up.

12 The illustration is generic; certain details may vary from model to model

13 Cross Traffic Alert

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 251

WARNING

•BLIS and CTA are information systems,

NOT warning or safety systems and do

not function in all situations.

•BLIS and CTA do not eliminate the need

for you to visually confirm the conditions

around you, and the need for you to turn

your head and shoulders to make sure

that you can safely change lanes or back

up.

•As the driver, you have full responsibility

for changing lanes/backing up in a safe

manner.

Radar sensor type approval

USA

FCC ID: L2C0055TR

Canada

IC: 3432A-0055TR

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC

Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt

RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions: (1) This device may not

cause harmful interference, and (2) This device

must accept any interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired operation.

The term “IC:” before the radio certification num-

ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical

specifications were met.

WARNING

Changes or modifications not expressively

approved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user's authority to oper-

ate the equipment.

Related information

•BLIS* – function (p. 251)

•BLIS* – operation (p. 252)

•BLIS* – Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) (p. 253)

•BLIS* – limitations (p. 254)

•BLIS* – messages (p. 255)

BLIS* – function

When does BLIS function

The system functions when your vehicle is mov-

ing at speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h).

Zone 1. Blind area, Zone 2. Area for passing vehicles

BLIS is designed to react to:

•Other vehicles in your door mirrors' "blind

area"

•Vehicles that are passing your vehicle

When BLIS detects a vehicle in zone 1 or a pass-

ing vehicle in zone 2, the indicator light in the

door panel will glow steadily. If the driver then

uses the turn signal on the side on which the

warning is given, the indicator light will flash and

become brighter.

||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
252
WARNING
•BLIS does not function in sharp curves.
•BLIS does not function when your vehicle
is backing up.
Related information
•BLIS* – introduction (p. 250)
•BLIS* – operation (p. 252)
•BLIS* – Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) (p. 253)
•BLIS* – limitations (p. 254)
•BLIS* – messages (p. 255)
BLIS* – operation
Activating/deactivating BLIS
Button for activating/deactivating BLIS
BLIS and CTA14 are activated when the engine is
started; this is confirmed when the indicator
lights on the front door panels flash once.
BLIS can be deactivated/reactivated by pressing
the button on the center console.
The number or combinations of options on the
vehicle may not leave a space available on the
center console for the BLIS button. If this is the
case, BLIS can be deactivated/reactivated in the
MY CAR menu system, see My Car – introduction
(p. 77)
•Select Off or On in Settings Car
settings BLIS.
When BLIS is deactivated/reactivated, the indica-
tor lights will go out/illuminate (the indicators will
also flash once when the function is reactivated)
and a message will appear in the instrument
panel.
To erase the message:
•Press the OK button on the left steering
wheel lever
or
•Wait for approx. 5 seconds for the message
to disappear
Related information
•BLIS* – introduction (p. 250)
•BLIS* – function (p. 251)
•BLIS* – Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) (p. 253)
•BLIS* – limitations (p. 254)
•BLIS* – messages (p. 255)
14 Cross Traffic Alert

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 253

BLIS* – Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)

Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) is a supplementary

BLIS15 function intended to detect vehicles

crossing behind your vehicle while you are back-

ing up.

Park assist/CTA button

On vehicles equipped with the optional Park

assist system (p. 237), Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)

can be deactivated/reactivated by pressing the

Park assist button on the center console. The

BLIS indicator lights on the front doors will flash

when CTA is reactivated by pressing the button.

WARNING

•BLIS and CTA are information systems,

NOT warning or safety systems and do

not function in all situations.

•BLIS and CTA do not eliminate the need

for you to visually confirm the conditions

around you, and the need for you to turn

your head and shoulders to make sure

that you can safely change lanes or back

up.

•As the driver, you have full responsibility

for changing lanes/backing up in a safe

manner.

When does CTA function

How CTA works

CTA supplements BLIS by warning the driver of

crossing traffic behind your vehicle, for example,

when backing out of a parking space.

It is primarily designed to detect another vehicle

but in certain cases may also detect pedestrians

or smaller objects such as bicycles.

CTA is only activated when the vehicle is backing

up and is activated automatically when the gear

selector is put in reverse.

•An audible signal indicates that CTA has

detected something that is approaching from

the side. The signal will come from either the

left or right audio system speakers, depend-

ing on which the side of your vehicle the

approaching vehicle/object has been

detected.

•CTA also provides a warning by illuminating

the BLIS indicator lights.

•An icon will also illuminate in the Park assist

graphic on the center console display.

Limitations

CTA has limitations in certain situations, for

example, the CTA sensors cannot "see" through

other parked vehicles or obstructions.

The following are several examples where CTA's

"field of vision" may initially be limited and

approaching vehicles cannot be detected until

they are too close:

15 Blind Spot Information System

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

254

The vehicle is pulled far into a parking space

CTA's blind area

CTA's "field of vision"

In angled parking spaces, CTA may be "blind" on one

side

However, as you back your vehicle out of a park-

ing space, CTA's "field of vision" expands.

Examples of other limitations include:

•Dirt, ice or snow obstructing the sensors may

reduce the system's function or make it

impossible to detect other vehicles or

objects.

•Do not attach tape, decals, etc., on the sur-

face of the sensors (see the illustration in the

following "Maintenance" section).

•BLIS and CTA are deactivated if a trailer's

wiring is connected to the vehicle's electrical

system.

Related information

•BLIS* – introduction (p. 250)

•BLIS* – function (p. 251)

•BLIS* – operation (p. 252)

•BLIS* – limitations (p. 254)

•BLIS* – messages (p. 255)

BLIS* – limitations

Maintenance

Keep the highlighted surface clean (on both sides of the

vehicle)

DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 255
The BLIS/CTA16 sensors are located on the
inside of the rear fenders/bumper.
The surfaces in front of the sensors must be kept
clean for the system to function optimally.
CAUTION
Repairs to the BLIS/CTA systems and/or
repainting the rear bumper should only be
done by a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician.
Related information
•BLIS* – introduction (p. 250)
•BLIS* – function (p. 251)
•BLIS* – operation (p. 252)
•BLIS* – Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) (p. 253)
•BLIS* – messages (p. 255)
BLIS* – messages
If BLIS/CTA17 are not functioning normally, a
symbol will illuminate in the instrument panel and
a text message will be displayed. Follow any
instructions that may be provided.
These messages include:
Message System status
CTA OFF CTA has been switched off
manually. BLIS remains active.
BLIS and
CTA OFF
Trailer
attached
BLIS and CTA are temporarily
deactivated because a trailer's
wiring has been connected to
the vehicle's electrical system.
BLIS and
CTA Service
required
BLIS and CTA are not func-
tioning normally.
•If this message recurs,
the systems should be
inspected by a trained
and qualified Volvo serv-
ice technician.
Messages can be erased by pressing the OK
button on the left steering wheel lever.
Related information
•BLIS* – introduction (p. 250)
•BLIS* – function (p. 251)
•BLIS* – operation (p. 252)
•BLIS* – Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) (p. 253)
•BLIS* – limitations (p. 254)
16 Cross Traffic Alert
17 Cross Traffic Alert

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

258

Starting the engine

The engine can be started/switched off using

the remote key and the START/STOP ENGINE

button.

Ignition slot with remote key inserted (see Ignition

modes (p. 80) for more information on ignition modes)

WARNING

Before starting the engine:

•Fasten the seat belt.

•Check that the seat, steering wheel and

mirrors are adjusted properly.

•Make sure the brake pedal can be

depressed completely. Adjust the seat if

necessary.

WARNING

•Never use more than one floor mat at a

time on the driver's floor. Before driving,

remove the original mat from the driver's

seat floor before using any other type of

floor mat. Any mat used in this position

should be securely and properly anchored

in the attaching pins. An extra mat on the

driver's floor can cause the accelerator

and/or brake pedal to catch. Check that

the movement of these pedals is not

impeded.

•Volvo's floor mats are specially manufac-

tured for your car. They must be firmly

secured in the clips on the floor so that

they cannot slide and become trapped

under the pedals on the driver's side.

1. Press the remote key into the ignition slot as

far as possible, with the metallic key blade

pointing outward (not inserted into the slot)1.

2. Depress the brake pedal2.

3. Press and release the START/STOP

ENGINE button. The autostart function will

operate the starter motor until the engine

starts or until its overheating function stops

it.

The starter motor operates for a maximum of

10 seconds. If the engine has not started,

repeat the procedure.

CAUTION

If the engine does not start after the third try,

wait for approximately 3 minutes before trying

to start it again to give the battery time to

recover its starting capacity.

NOTE

Keyless drive*

To start a vehicle equipped with the keyless

drive feature, one of the remote keys must be

in the passenger compartment. Follow the

instructions in steps 2 and 3 to start the vehi-

cle.

1On vehicles with the optional keyless drive, it is only necessary to have a remote key in the passenger’s compartment.

2If the vehicle is moving, it is only necessary to press the START/STOP ENGINE button to start the vehicle.

STARTING AND DRIVING

259

WARNING

•Always remove the remote key from the

ignition slot when leaving the vehicle and

ensure that the ignition in mode 0 (see

Ignition modes (p. 80) for information

about the ignition modes).

•On vehicles with the optional keyless

drive, never remove the remote key from

the vehicle while it is being driven or

towed.

•Always place the gear selector in Park

and apply the parking brake before leav-

ing the vehicle. Never leave the vehicle

unattended with the engine running.

•Always open garage doors fully before

starting the engine inside a garage to

ensure adequate ventilation. The exhaust

gases contain carbon monoxide, which is

invisible and odorless but very poisonous.

NOTE

•After a cold start, idle speed may be

noticeably higher than normal for a short

period. This is done to help bring compo-

nents in the emission control system to

their normal operating temperature as

quickly as possible, which enables them

to control emissions and help reduce the

vehicle's impact on the environment3.

CAUTION

•When starting in cold weather, the auto-

matic transmission may shift up at slightly

higher engine speeds than normal until

the automatic transmission fluid reaches

normal operating temperature.

•Do not race a cold engine immediately

after starting. Oil flow may not reach

some lubrication points fast enough to

prevent engine damage.

•The engine should be idling when you

move the gear selector. Never accelerate

until after you feel the transmission

engage. Accelerating immediately after

selecting a gear will cause harsh engage-

ment and premature transmission wear.

•Selecting P or N when idling at a stand-

still for prolonged periods of time will help

prevent overheating of the automatic

transmission fluid.

Related information

•Switching off the engine (p. 259)

Switching off the engine

Switch off the engine by pressing the START/

STOP ENGINE button.

If the gear selector is not in the P position or if

the vehicle is moving, press the START/STOP

ENGINE button twice or press and hold it in until

the engine switches off.

Related information

•Ignition modes (p. 80)

3If the gear selector is in the D or R positions and the car is not moving, engine speed (rpm) will be lower and it will take longer for the engine to reach normal operating temperature.

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

260

Engine Remote Start (ERS)* –

introduction

ERS is a feature that makes it possible to

remotely start the engine using the remote key to

cool or heat the passenger compartment before

driving.

The climate system will start using automatic set-

tings.

When the engine is started using ERS, it will run

for a maximum of 15 minutes before automati-

cally switching off again. After 2 ERS starts, the

engine must be started in the normal way before

ERS can be used again.

NOTE

•Always adhere to applicable State, Prov-

ince and/or Local laws regarding engine

idling when using ERS.

•The service life of the remote key's bat-

tery is affected by ERS use. If this feature

is used frequently, the battery should be

replaced once a year, see Remote key –

replacing the battery (p. 157).

WARNING

Keep the following in mind before using ERS:

•The vehicle should be in view.

•The vehicle should be unoccupied.

•The vehicle must not be parked indoors

or in an enclosed area. Exhaust fumes are

harmful to the health.

Related information

•Engine Remote Start (ERS)* – starting the

engine (p. 260)

•Engine Remote Start (ERS)* – switching off

the engine (p. 261)

Engine Remote Start (ERS)* –

starting the engine

Remote key buttons used for remote engine start

Lock

Approach lighting

Starting the engine

The maximum range for ERS is approximately

100 ft (30 meters) if the view of the vehicle is

unobstructed. The vehicle must also be

locked.

To start the engine:

1. Press the lock button (1 ) briefly.

2. Immediately press the approach lighting but-

ton (2) for approximately 2 seconds.

If the requirements for ERS have been met, the

following will occur:

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 261

1. The turn signals will flash several times.

2. The engine will start.

3. The turn signals will illuminate for 3 seconds

to indicate that the engine has started.

After the engine has started, the vehicle remains

locked but the alarm is disarmed.

Active functions

When the engine is started with ERS, the follow-

ing functions are activated:

•The climate control system

•The infotainment system.

•Approach lighting

Deactivated functions

When the engine is started with ERS, the follow-

ing functions are deactivated:

•Headlights

•Parking lights

•License plate lights

•Windshield wipers

Related information

•Engine Remote Start (ERS)* – switching off

the engine (p. 261)

•Engine Remote Start (ERS)* – introduction

(p. 260)

Engine Remote Start (ERS)* –

switching off the engine

Any of the following will switch off the engine if it

has been started with ERS:

•Pressing the lock button (1) or the unlock

button (2) on the remote key

•Unlocking the vehicle

•Opening a door

•Depressing the accelerator or brake pedal

•Moving the gear selector from the P position

•If there are less than approx. 2.5 gallons

(10 liters) of fuel in the tank

•More than 15 minutes have elapsed.

If the engine has been started with ERS and

switches off, the turn signals will illuminate for

3 seconds.

Message in the instrument panel display

If ERS is interrupted, a text message will be dis-

played in the instrument panel.

Related information

•Engine Remote Start (ERS)* – introduction

(p. 260)

•Engine Remote Start (ERS)* – starting the

engine (p. 260)

Jump starting

Follow these instructions to jump start your vehi-

cle's dead battery or to jump start another vehi-

cle's dead battery using your vehicle.

G021347

Connecting the jumper cables

If the 12-volt auxiliary battery to be used is in

another vehicle, check that the vehicles are not

touching to prevent premature completion of a

circuit. Be sure to follow jump starting instruc-

tions provided for the other vehicle.

To jump start your vehicle:

1. Switch off the ignition (set the ignition to

mode 0, see Ignition modes (p. 80)).

2. First connect the red jumper cable to the

auxiliary battery's positive (+) terminal (1).

STARTING AND DRIVING

262

3. Fold back the cover over the positive (+) ter-

minal on your vehicle's battery (2), marked

with a "+" sign, located under a folding cover.

4. Connect the black jumper cable to the auxili-

ary battery's negative (–) terminal (3) and to

the ground point in your vehicle's engine

compartment (right engine mount at the top,

on the outer screw) (4).

5. Start the engine in the assisting vehicle, then

start the engine in the vehicle with dead bat-

tery.

6. After the engine has started, first remove the

negative (–) terminal jumper cable (black).

Then remove the positive (+) terminal jumper

cable (red).

WARNING

PROPOSITION 65 WARNING!

Battery posts, terminals, and related accesso-

ries contain lead and lead compounds, chemi-

cals known to the state of California to cause

cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands

after handling.

CAUTION

Connect the jumper cables carefully to avoid

short circuits with other components in the

engine compartment.

WARNING

•Do not connect the jumper cable to any

part of the fuel system or to any moving

parts. Avoid touching hot manifolds.

•Batteries generate hydrogen gas, which

is flammable and explosive.

•Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not

allow battery fluid to contact eyes, skin,

fabrics or painted surfaces. If contact

occurs, flush the affected area immedi-

ately with water. Obtain medical help

immediately if eyes are affected.

•Never expose the battery to open flame

or electric spark.

•Do not smoke near the battery.

•Failure to follow the instructions for jump

starting can lead to injury.

Related information

•Starting the engine (p. 258)

Transmission – general information

The transmission automatically shifts between

the various forward gears, based on the level of

acceleration and speed.

G021351

Shiftgate positions

Depress the button on the front of the gear

selector knob to move the gear selector between

the R, N, D, and P positions.

The gear selector can be moved freely between

the Geartronic (manual shifting) and Drive (D)

positions while driving.

STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
263
CAUTION
The transmission’s temperature is monitored
to help prevent damage to the transmission
or other drivetrain components. If there is a
risk of overheating, the warning symbol on the
instrument panel will illuminate and a text
message will be displayed. Follow the instruc-
tions provided there.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)4
HSA makes it easier to start or back up on a hill
by retaining pressure on the brake pedal for sev-
eral seconds after the pedal has been released in
order to keep the vehicle at a standstill.
The brakes will be released after several seconds
or when the driver presses the accelerator pedal.
Related information
•Transmission – positions (p. 263)
•Transmission – Geartronic (p. 264)
•Transmission – shiftlock override (p. 267)
•All Wheel Drive (AWD) (p. 275)
•Fuel tank volume – specification and volume
(p. 386)
Transmission – positions
Park: position P
Select the P position when starting or parking.
Shiftlock
When P has been selected, the transmission is
mechanically blocked in this position. The brake
pedal must be depressed and the ignition must
be in at least mode II (see Ignition modes
(p. 80)) before the gear lever can be moved from
the P position.
WARNING
Always apply the parking brake when the
vehicle is parked, particularly when parking on
a hill. The transmission's P mode may not be
able to keep the vehicle stationary if it is
parked on an incline.
Press the control to apply the parking brake, see
Parking brake – general information (p. 280).
CAUTION
The vehicle must be stationary when position
P is selected.
Gear indicator
The gear currently being used
is displayed on the right side of
the instrument panel.
The "S" symbol turns orange if
Sport mode is being used.
Reverse: position R
The vehicle must be stationary when position R is
selected.
4Certain models only

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

264

Neutral: position N

No gear is engaged and the engine can be

started with the gear selector in this position.

Apply the parking brake if the vehicle is stationary

with the gear selector in position N. In order to

move the gear selector from the N position, the

brake pedal must be depressed and the ignition

must be in at least mode II.

Drive: position D

D is the normal driving position. The car automat-

ically shifts between the various forward gears,

based on the level of acceleration and speed.

The car must be at a standstill when shifting from

position R to position D.

Related information

•Transmission – general information (p. 262)

•Transmission – Geartronic (p. 264)

•Transmission – shiftlock override (p. 267)

•Fuel tank volume – specification and volume

(p. 386)

Transmission – Geartronic

Geartronic allows you to manually shift among

your vehicle's forward gears. The manual posi-

tion (+S–) can be selected at any time.

Geartronic: manual shifting (+S–)

To shift gears manually, move the gear

selector to the side from D toward

+S–. The +S– symbol in the instrument

panel will change from white to

orange and the number of the gear currently

being used (1, 2, 3, etc.) will be displayed (see

the following illustration)5.

•To return to automatic shifting mode from

+S–, move the gear selector to the side

toward D.

Gear shift indicator*

Gear shift indicator in a digital instrument panel*6

This option indicates when to shift up or down to

help conserve fuel. A white arrow will appear

above or below the number of the current gear to

prompt the driver to shift up or down.

5If Sport mode is being used, the symbol will change to "S".

6Analog instrument panel: the gear shift indicator is displayed in the center of the speedometer.

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 265

While driving

•If you select the manual shifting position

while driving, the gear that was being used in

the Drive position will also initially be

selected in the manual shifting position.

•Move the gear selector forward (toward +) to

shift to a higher gear or rearward (toward –)

to shift to a lower gear.

•If you hold the gear selector toward "–", the

transmission will downshift one gear at a

time and will utilize the braking power of the

engine. If the current speed is too high for

using a lower gear, the downshift will not

occur until the speed has decreased enough

to allow the lower gear to be used.

•If you slow to a very low speed, the transmis-

sion will automatically shift down.

Shiftlock: Neutral (N)

If the gear selector is in the N position and the

vehicle has been stationary for at least 3 seconds

(irrespective of whether the engine is running)

then the gear selector is locked.

In order to move the gear selector from N to

another gear position, the brake pedal must be

depressed and the ignition must be in at least

position II, see Ignition modes (p. 80).

Geartronic: steering wheel paddles*

In addition to the manual gearshift function using

the gear selector, this option makes it possible to

manually shift gears from the steering wheel.

Steering-wheel mounted gear shift paddles

"–": Shift down to a lower gear.

"+": Shift up to a higher gear.

In order to shift gears with the paddles, they have

to first be activated. The gear selector can be

in either the D or S position.

Activating the paddles:

•Pull either paddle toward the steering wheel

and release it; the D in the instrument panel

will change to the number of the gear cur-

rently being used.

Shifting gears:

•Pull the paddle toward the steering wheel

and release it.

Deactivating the paddles:

•Hold the "+" paddle for approximately

3 seconds.

NOTE

If the gear selector was in D when paddle

shifting was activated (D changed to the

number of the gear being used), the transmis-

sion will automatically revert to D after

approximately 5 seconds if the paddles are

not used to shift gears.

This will not occur:

STARTING AND DRIVING

266

•during active driving (e.g., on a winding

road, while accelerating, etc)

•if the gear selector was in S when the

paddles were activated

If the transmission reverts to D, the paddles

will have to be reactivated (pull either paddle

toward the steering wheel and release it)

before they can be used to shift gears again.

The paddles can also be manually deactivated

by pulling both paddles toward the steering

wheel and holding them until the gear num-

ber shown in the instrument panel changes to

Geartronic: Sport mode (S)7

This transmission mode provides sportier shifting

characteristics and enables a more active driving

style by making it possible to drive at higher rpm

in each gear before shifting up. The engine also

responds faster when the accelerator pedal is

pressed.

To access Sport mode from Drive (D), move the

gear selector to the left. The transmission will not

switch to manual shifting mode until the gear

selector is moved forward or rearward toward +

or –.

Sport mode can be selected any time.

NOTE

•On vehicles equipped with Sport mode,

the transmission symbol in the main

instrument panel will change from D to S

when the gear selector is moved to the

manual shifting mode. If the gear selector

is moved toward "+" or "-", the number of

the gear currently being used will be dis-

played, see Information displays – intro-

duction (p. 69).

•Please be aware that using Sport mode

may result in a slight decrease in fuel

economy. Driving in D can help improve

fuel economy.

Geartronic: starting on slippery surfaces

Selecting 3rd gear in Geartronic’s manual shifting

mode can help provide better traction when star-

ting off on slippery surfaces. To do so:

1. Depress the brake pedal and move the gear

selector to the side from D toward +S–.

2. Press the gear selector forward and release

it (this selects 2nd gear). Press the selector

forward again and release it to select 3rd

gear. The optional steering wheel paddles

can also be used; see the previous section

"Geartronic: steering wheel paddles."

3. Release the brake pedal and press gently on

the accelerator pedal.

Related information

•Transmission – general information (p. 262)

•Transmission – positions (p. 263)

•Transmission – shiftlock override (p. 267)

•Fuel tank volume – specification and volume

(p. 386)

7Certain models only

STARTING AND DRIVING
267
Transmission – shiftlock override
If the vehicle cannot be driven, for example
because of a dead battery, the gear selector
must be moved from the P position before the
vehicle can be moved8.
Shiftlock override
Lift away the rubber mat on the floor of the
storage compartment behind the center con-
sole to expose the small opening for overrid-
ing the shiftlock system.
Insert the key blade into the opening. Press
the key blade down as far as possible and
keep it held down.
Move the gear selector from the P position.
For information on the key blade, see
Detachable key blade – general information
(p. 155).
Related information
•Transmission – general information (p. 262)
•Transmission – positions (p. 263)
•Transmission – Geartronic (p. 264)
•Fuel tank volume – specification and volume
(p. 386)
Start/Stop – Hill Start Assist (HSA)
When starting on steep hills, HSA (see Transmis-
sion – general information (p. 262)) retains pres-
sure on the brake pedal for several seconds after
the pedal has been released in order to keep the
vehicle at a standstill. The brakes will be released
after several seconds or when the driver presses
the accelerator pedal. The pedal will return to its
normal position somewhat slower than normal.
Related information
•Start/Stop – introduction (p. 268)
•Start/Stop – function (p. 268)
•Start/Stop – settings (p. 271)
•Start/Stop – Auto-stop exceptions (p. 269)
•Start/Stop – Auto-start exceptions (p. 270)
•Start/Stop – symbols and messages
(p. 272)
8If the battery is dead, the electric parking brake cannot be applied or released. Connect an auxiliary battery if the battery voltage is too low, see Jump starting (p. 261).

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

268

Start/Stop – introduction

Start/Stop is a function that temporarily switches

off the engine when the vehicle is not moving,

for instance in heavy traffic or at a traffic light to

help reduce fuel consumption.

Start/Stop is available with certain engines/

transmissions.

Related information

•Start/Stop – function (p. 268)

•Start/Stop – settings (p. 271)

•Start/Stop – Auto-stop exceptions (p. 269)

•Start/Stop – Auto-start exceptions (p. 270)

•Start/Stop – Hill Start Assist (HSA) (p. 267)

•Start/Stop – symbols and messages

(p. 272)

Start/Stop – function

Function and use

Start/Stop symbol in the instrument panel

Start/Stop button on the center console

Start/Stop is activated automatically each time

the engine is started9. The symbol in the instru-

ment panel will be displayed for several seconds

when the engine starts and the indicator light in

the On/Off button will remain illuminated while

the function is activated.

All of the vehicle's systems will function while the

engine is auto-stopped, although the function of

certain systems may reduced at this time. For

example, blower speed and high infotainment

system volume may be reduced to help conserve

the battery's capacity.

Auto-stopping the engine

Normally, when Start/Stop is activated and the

brakes are applied until the vehicle comes to a

standstill, the engine will auto-stop automatically

if the driver keeps the brake pedal

depressed.

To remind the driver that the engine

has been auto-stopped, the Start/Stop

symbol will illuminate in the instrument

panel and remain on until the engine

restarts.

If the ECO function* is acti-

vated, the engine may auto-

stop before the vehicle comes

to a complete standstill.

Auto-starting the engine

The engine restarts as soon as the driver relea-

ses the brake pedal.

Deactivating Start/Stop

In certain situations (e.g., driv-

ing in heavy, stop-and-go traf-

fic), it may be preferable to

deactivate Start/Stop.

This is done by pressing the

button in the center console.

The indicator light in the button will go out.

Start/Stop will remain deactivated until the but-

ton is pressed again or until the engine is

switched off and restarted by the driver.

9Not when the engine is started using the optional Engine Remote Start feature, Starting the engine (p. 258)

STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 269
Related information
•Start/Stop – introduction (p. 268)
•Start/Stop – settings (p. 271)
•Start/Stop – Auto-stop exceptions (p. 269)
•Start/Stop – Auto-start exceptions (p. 270)
•Start/Stop – Hill Start Assist (HSA) (p. 267)
•Start/Stop – symbols and messages
(p. 272)
Start/Stop – Auto-stop exceptions
In certain situations or conditions, the engine
may not auto-stop when the vehicle comes to a
standstill, such as if:
Condition/situation
The vehicle's speed has not reached a speed
of approx. 6 mph (10 km/h) after the most
recent auto-start or after the driver has started
the engine.
The driver unbuckles his/her seat belt.
The main battery's charge is below the mini-
mum level.
The engine has not reached its normal operat-
ing temperature.
The ambient temperature is below approx.
25°F (-4°C) or above approx. 85°F (30°C).
The windshield's heating function* is activated.
The climate system cannot keep the desired
settings in the passenger compartment; the
blower will operate at high speed.
The vehicle is backing up.
The main battery's temperature is below freez-
ing or too high.
The driver is turning the steering wheel hard.
Condition/situation
The road's incline is very steep.
A trailer's electrical system is connected to the
vehicle.
The hood has been openedA.
The transmission has not reached its normal
operating temperature.
Atmospheric pressure is below a level equiva-
lent to an altitude of approx. 4,900–8,200 ft
(1500–2500 m) above sea level. The actual
pressure is also affected by current weather
conditions.
The Adaptive Cruise Control's* Queue Assist
feature is activated.
The gear selector is in the SB or "+/–" posi-
tion.
ACertain engines only
BSport mode (where applicable)
Related information
•Start/Stop – introduction (p. 268)
•Start/Stop – function (p. 268)
•Start/Stop – settings (p. 271)
•Start/Stop – Auto-start exceptions (p. 270)
•Start/Stop – Hill Start Assist (HSA) (p. 267)
•Start/Stop – symbols and messages
(p. 272)

STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
270
Start/Stop – Auto-start exceptions
In certain situations or conditions, the engine
may auto-start even though the driver is still
pressing the brake pedal, such as if:
Condition/situation
Condensation forms on the windows.
The climate system cannot keep the desired
settings in the passenger compartment.
Electrical current consumption is temporarily
high or the main battery's charge is below the
minimum level.
The brake pedal is pumped repeatedly.
The hood has been openedA.
The vehicle begins to move or increases speed
slightly (if the engine auto-stopped before the
vehicle was at a standstill (see ECO*
(p. 273))).
The driver unbuckles his/her seat belt while
the gear selector is in the D or N positions.
The steering wheel is turnedA.
Condition/situation
The gear selector is moved from D to SB, R or
"+/–".
The driver's door is opened with the gear
selector in D – an audible signal and a text
message will inform the driver that Start/Stop
is active.
ACertain engines only
BSport mode (where applicable)
WARNING
Do not open the hood if the engine has auto-
stopped. The engine could suddenly auto-
start.
Before opening the hood:
•Switch off the ignition using the START/
STOP ENGINE button.
•Be aware that if the engine has been run-
ning, components in the engine compart-
ment will be very hot.
If the engine does not auto-start, this could
be due to:
•The driver's seat belt is not fastened
•The gear selector is in P and the driver's
door is opened
In these cases, the driver will have to restart the
engine by pressing the START/STOP ENGINE
button.
Related information
•Start/Stop – introduction (p. 268)
•Start/Stop – function (p. 268)
•Start/Stop – settings (p. 271)
•Start/Stop – Auto-stop exceptions (p. 269)
•Start/Stop – Hill Start Assist (HSA) (p. 267)
•Start/Stop – symbols and messages
(p. 272)

STARTING AND DRIVING

271

Start/Stop – settings

Settings for the Start/Stop function can be made

in the MY CAR menu system.

Related information

•Start/Stop – introduction (p. 268)

•Start/Stop – function (p. 268)

•Start/Stop – Auto-stop exceptions (p. 269)

•Start/Stop – Auto-start exceptions (p. 270)

•Start/Stop – Hill Start Assist (HSA) (p. 267)

•Start/Stop – symbols and messages

(p. 272)

STARTING AND DRIVING

272

Start/Stop – symbols and

messages

Text messages

Combined with the information symbol

in the instrument panel, the Start/Stop

function may also display messages in

certain situations. Follow the instructions provi-

ded in the message. The following table gives

several examples.

Symbol Message Information/action

Auto Start/Stop Service

required

Start/Stop is not functioning properly. Contact a Volvo retailer or a trained and qualified Volvo service tech-

nician.

Autostart Engine running + an

audible signal

This is triggered if the driver's door is opened while the engine is auto-stopped.

-Press Start button The engine will not auto-start. Start the engine normally by pressing the START/STOP ENGINE button.

-Select P or N to start Start/Stop has been deactivated. Move the gear selector to N or P and start the engine normally be press-

ing the START/STOP ENGINE button.

-Press Start button The engine will not auto-start. Move the gear selector to N or P and start the engine normally be pressing

the START/STOP ENGINE button.

If the message does not disappear after the sug-

gested action has been taken, contact a Volvo

retailer or a trained and qualified Volvo service

technician.

Related information

•Start/Stop – introduction (p. 268)

•Start/Stop – function (p. 268)

•Start/Stop – settings (p. 271)

•Start/Stop – Auto-stop exceptions (p. 269)

•Start/Stop – Auto-start exceptions (p. 270)

•Start/Stop – Hill Start Assist (HSA) (p. 267)

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 273

ECO*

Eco is a function10 developed by Volvo to give

the driver the opportunity to actively drive more

economically and to help reduce fuel consump-

tion.

Introduction

When Eco is activated, the fol-

lowing functions are modified:

•The automatic transmission's shifting points

•The engine management system and accel-

erator pedal response

•Stop/stop function (Start/Stop – introduction

(p. 268)): the engine can auto-stop before

the vehicle has come to a full stop

•Eco Coast functionality is activated: engine

braking is disabled

•Climate system settings: certain functions

(e.g., air conditioning) will be temporarily

reduced or deactivated

NOTE

When Eco is activated, several climate system

parameters are changed and the function of

certain current-consuming systems will be

reduced.

Some of these functions can be restarted

manually but full functionality will not be

restored until Eco is deactivated.

Function

ECO On/Off button in the center console

ECO symbol in the instrument panel

When the engine is switched off, ECO is deacti-

vated and must be reactivated each time the

engine is started (with the exception of certain

engines).

The ECO symbol will be displayed in the instru-

ment panel and the indicator light in the ECO

button will be on when Eco is activated.

Eco on or off

When ECO is deactivated, the

ECO symbol will not be dis-

played in the instrument panel

and the indicator light in the

ECO button will be off. The

function will remain deactivated

until the button is pressed

again.

Eco Coast

Eco Coast is an integral part of the Eco function

and essentially deactivates engine braking, allow-

ing the vehicle to roll freely.

NOTE

To function optimally, Eco Coast should pri-

marily be used when the vehicle can coast as

far as possible.

When the driver releases the accelerator pedal,

the transmission is automatically disengaged

from the engine and engine rpm will be reduced

to the idle level (approx. 700-800 rpm), which

helps reduce fuel consumption.

10 Option on models equipped with certain 4-cylinder engines

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

274

This feature is primarily intended to be used in

driving situations where a decrease in speed is

expected, such as when entering a zone with a

lower speed limit.

Eco Coast enables proactive driving with as little

braking as possible.

Combinations of On and Off

Depending on the driving situation, Eco can be

used in different ways to help reduce fuel con-

sumption:

•With Eco activated: this enables Eco Coast,

which allows the vehicle to roll freely for as

far as possible when the driver releases the

accelerator pedal (e.g., when approaching a

traffic light or intersection).

•With Eco deactivated: engine braking can

be used when the vehicle will only roll for

a short distance (in heavy traffic, etc.) or

when driving down hills.

To help keep fuel consumption as low as possi-

ble, Eco Coast should not be used in traffic situa-

tions where the brakes have to be used fre-

quently.

Activating Eco Coast

Eco Coast is activated when the accelerator

pedal is released completely if:

•Eco is activated

•The gear selector is in D

•The vehicle's speed is between approxi-

mately 40–85 mph (65–140 km/h). Always

observe posted speed limits

•The gradient of a down-slope is less than

approximately 6%

Deactivating Eco Coast

In certain situations, it may be advisable to switch

off the Eco Coast function, such as:

•When driving down steep hills, in order to uti-

lize engine braking

•Prior to passing another vehicle, in order to

do so as safely as possible

Deactivating Eco Coast (and reactivating engine

braking) can be done in the following ways:

•Press the ECO button on the center console

•Move the gear selector to the manual "S+/–"

position

•Change gears using the steering wheel pad-

dles*

•Press the brake or accelerator pedal

Eco Coast limitations

This function will not be available if:

•Cruise control is activated

•The gradient of a down-slope is more than

approximately 6%

•The steering wheel paddles* are used to

manually change gears

•The engine and/or transmission have not

reached their normal operating temperature

•The gear selector is moved from D to the

manual "S+/–" position

•The vehicle's speed is not within the

40–85 mph (65–140 km/h). interval

Additional information and settings

Other ECO-related settings can be made in the

vehicle's MY CAR menu. See My Car – introduc-

tion (p. 77) for more information.

Related information

•Climate – general information (p. 126)

•Transmission – general information (p. 262)

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

275

All Wheel Drive (AWD)

Your Volvo can be equipped with permanent All

Wheel Drive, which means that power is distrib-

uted automatically between the front and rear

wheels.

Under normal driving conditions, most of the

engine's power is directed to the front wheels.

However, if there is any tendency for the front

wheels to spin, an electronically controlled cou-

pling distributes power to the wheels that have

the best traction.

NOTE

The message AWD disabled Service

required will be appear in the information

display if an electrical fault should occur in

the AWD system. A warning light will also illu-

minate in the instrument panel. If this occurs,

have the system checked by a trained and

qualified Volvo service technician.

Related information

•Transmission – general information (p. 262)

Hill Descent Control (HDC)11 –

introduction

HDC is a type of automatic engine brake and

makes it possible to increase or decrease the

vehicle's speed on downhill gradients using only

the accelerator pedal, without applying the

brakes. The brake system functions automatically

to maintain a low and steady speed.

Introduction

Normally, when the accelerator pedal is released

while driving down hills, the vehicle's speed slows

as the engine runs at lower rpm (the normal

engine braking effect). However, if the downhill

gradient becomes steeper and if the vehicle is

carrying a load, speed increases despite the

engine braking effect. In this situation, the brakes

must be applied to reduce the vehicle's speed.

HDC is particularly useful when driving down

steep hills with rough surfaces, and where the

road may have slippery patches.

WARNING

HDC does not function in all situations, and is

a supplementary braking aid. The driver has

full responsibility for driving in a safe manner.

11 Available on the V60 Cross Country in combination with certain engines only.

STARTING AND DRIVING

276

Related information

•Hill Descent Control (HDC) – operation

(p. 276)

•Brakes – general (p. 277)

Hill Descent Control (HDC)13 –

operation

Function

•HDC can be switched on and off with the

button in the center console. An indicator

light in the button illuminates when HDC is

activated.

•The indicator light in the instrument

panel illuminates and a message is displayed

when the system is controlling the vehicle's

speed.

•HDC only functions when first or reverse

gears are selected (1 will be shown in the

instrument panel display when first gear is

selected).

NOTE

HDC cannot be activated if the gear selector

is the D position.

Using HDC

HDC allows the car to roll forward at a maximum

speed of 6 mph (10 km/h), and 4 mph (7 km/h)

in reverse. However, the accelerator pedal can be

used to select any speed that is possible in first

or reverse gears. When the accelerator pedal is

released, speed is quickly reduced again to

6 mph (10 km/h) or 4 mph (7 km/h), depending

on the gear selected, regardless of the hill's gra-

dient. It is not necessary to apply the brakes.

•The brake lights illuminate automatically

when HDC is controlling the vehicle's speed.

•The driver can slow or stop the vehicle at any

time by applying the brakes.

HDC is deactivated when:

•The button on the center console is pressed

•A gear higher than first gear is selected

•D is selected on vehicles with an automatic

transmission

HDC can be deactivated at any time. If this is

done while driving down a steep hill, the system's

braking effect will decrease gradually.

13 Available on the V60 Cross Country in combination with certain engines only.

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 277

NOTE

Engine response to pressure on the accelera-

tor pedal may be slightly slower than normal

when HDC is activated.

Related information

•Hill Descent Control (HDC) – introduction

(p. 275)

•Brakes – general (p. 277)

Brakes – general

The brake system is a hydraulic system consist-

ing of two separate brake circuits. If a problem

should occur in one of these circuits, it is still

possible to stop the vehicle with the other brake

circuit.

If the brake pedal must be depressed farther

than normal and requires greater foot pressure,

the stopping distance will be longer.

A warning light in the instrument panel will light

up to warn the driver that a fault has occurred.

If this light comes on while driving or braking,

stop immediately and check the brake fluid level

in the reservoir.

NOTE

Press the brake pedal hard and maintain

pressure on the pedal – do not pump the

brakes.

WARNING

If the fluid level is below the MIN mark in the

reservoir or if a brake system message is

shown in the information display: DO NOT

DRIVE. Have the vehicle towed to a trained

and qualified Volvo service technician and

have the brake system inspected.

Brake pad inspection

On vehicles equipped with a jack*, the condition

of the brake pads can be checked by raising the

vehicle (see Changing a wheel – removing wheel

(p. 303) for information about using the jack and

removing a wheel) and performing a visual

inspection of the brake pads.

WARNING

•If the vehicle has been driven immediately

prior to a brake pad inspection, the wheel

hub, brake components, etc., will be very

hot. Allow time for these components to

cool before carrying out the inspection.

•Apply the parking brake and put the gear

selector in the Park (P) position.

•Block the wheels standing on the ground,

use rigid wooden blocks or large stones.

STARTING AND DRIVING

278

WARNING

•Use the jack intended for the vehicle

when changing a tire. For any other job,

use stands to support the vehicle.

•The jack should be kept well-greased and

clean, and should not be damaged.

•Be sure the jack is on a firm, level, non-

slippery surface.

•No objects should be placed between the

base of jack and the ground, or between

the jack and the attachment bar on the

vehicle.

•The jack must correctly engage the jack

attachment.

•Never allow any part of your body to be

extended under a vehicle supported by a

jack.

Power brakes function only when the

engine is running

The power brakes utilize vacuum pressure which

is only created when the engine is running. Never

let the vehicle roll to a stop with the engine

switched off.

If the power brakes are not working, considerably

higher pressure will be required on the brake

pedal to compensate for the lack of power assis-

tance. This can happen for example when towing

your vehicle or if the engine is switched off when

the vehicle is rolling. The brake pedal feels harder

than usual.

Water on brake discs and brake pads

affects braking

Driving in rain and slush or passing through an

automatic car wash can cause water to collect on

the brake discs and pads. This will cause a delay

in braking effect when the pedal is depressed. To

avoid such a delay when the brakes are needed,

depress the pedal occasionally when driving

through rain, slush, etc. This will remove the water

from the brakes. Check that brake application

feels normal. This should also be done after

washing or starting in very damp or cold weather.

Severe strain on the brake system

The brakes will be subject to severe strain when

driving in mountains or hilly areas, or when towing

a trailer. Vehicle speed is usually slower, which

means that the cooling of the brakes is less effi-

cient than when driving on level roads. To reduce

the strain on the brakes, shift into a lower gear

and let the engine help with the braking. Do not

forget that if you are towing a trailer, the brakes

will be subjected to a greater than normal load.

Cleaning the brake discs

Coatings of dirt and water on the brake discs

may result in delayed brake function. This delay is

minimized by cleaning the brake linings.

Cleaning the brake pads is advisable in wet

weather, prior to long-term parking, and after the

vehicle has been washed. Do this by braking gen-

tly for a short period while the vehicle is moving.

Related information

•Parking brake – general information (p. 280)

•Emergency Brake Assistance (EBA) (p. 280)

•Brakes – general (p. 277)

•Anti-lock braking system (ABS) (p. 279)

STARTING AND DRIVING

279

Brakes – symbols

Symbols in the instrument panel

Symbol Specification

Steady glow – Check the brake

fluid level. If the level is low, fill with

brake fluid and check for the cause

of the brake fluid loss.

Automatic function check: steady

glow for two seconds when the

engine is started.

WARNING

If and come on at the same

time and the brake level is below the MIN

mark in the reservoir or if a brake system-rela-

ted message is shown in the information dis-

play: DO NOT DRIVE. Have the vehicle towed

to a trained and qualified Volvo service techni-

cian and have the brake system inspected.

Related information

•Brakes – general (p. 277)

•Parking brake – general information (p. 280)

Anti-lock braking system (ABS)

The ABS system helps to improve vehicle con-

trol (stopping and steering) during severe brak-

ing conditions by limiting brake lockup.

When the system "senses" impending lockup,

braking pressure is automatically modulated in

order to help prevent lockup that could lead to a

skid.

The system performs a brief self-diagnostic test

when the engine has been started and driver

releases the brake pedal. Another automatic test

may be performed when the vehicle first reaches

a speed of approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). The

brake pedal will pulsate several times and a

sound may be audible from the ABS control

module, which is normal.

Related information

•Parking brake – general information (p. 280)

•Emergency Brake Assistance (EBA) (p. 280)

•Brakes – general (p. 277)

Brake lights

The brake lights come on automatically when the

brakes are applied.

Adaptive brake lights

The adaptive brake lights activate in the event of

sudden braking or if the ABS system is activated.

This function causes an additional taillight on

each side of the vehicle to illuminate to help alert

vehicles traveling behind.

The adaptive brake lights activate if:

•The ABS system activates for more than

approximately a half second

•In the event of sudden braking while the

vehicle is moving at speeds above approxi-

mately 6 mph (10 km/h).

When the vehicle has come to a stop, the brake

lights and additional taillights remain on for as

long as the brake pedal is depressed or until

braking force on the vehicle is reduced.

Related information

•Brakes – general (p. 277)

•Parking brake – general information (p. 280)

STARTING AND DRIVING

280

Emergency Brake Assistance (EBA)

EBA is designed to provide full brake effect

immediately in the event of sudden, hard brak-

ing.

Emergency Brake Assistance

The EBA system is activated by the speed with

which the brake pedal is depressed.

When the EBA system is activated, the brake

pedal will go down and pressure in the brake sys-

tem immediately increases to the maximum level.

Maintain full pressure on the brake pedal in order

to utilize the system completely. EBA is automati-

cally deactivated when the brake pedal is

released.

NOTE

•When the EBA system is activated, the

brake pedal will go down and pressure in

the brake system immediately increases

to the maximum level. You must maintain

full pressure on the brake pedal in order

to utilize the system completely. There

will be no braking effect if the pedal is

released. EBA is automatically deacti-

vated when the brake pedal is released.

•When the vehicle has been parked for

some time, the brake pedal may sink

more than usual when the engine is

started. This is normal and the pedal will

return to its usual position when it is

released.

Related information

•Parking brake – general information (p. 280)

•Brakes – general (p. 277)

•Anti-lock braking system (ABS) (p. 279)

Parking brake – general information

The electric parking brake helps to keep the

vehicle stationary when it is parked.

Electric parking brake

Parking brake control

NOTE

•A faint sound from the parking brake's

electric motor can be heard when the

parking brake is being applied. This

sound can also be heard during the auto-

matic function check of the parking

brake.

•The brake pedal will move slightly when

the electric parking brake is applied or

released.

STARTING AND DRIVING
281
Low battery voltage
If the battery voltage is too low, the parking
brake cannot be applied or released. Connect
an auxiliary battery if the battery voltage is too
low, see Jump starting (p. 261).
Parking on a hill
•If the vehicle is pointing uphill, turn the front
wheels so that they point away from the curb.
•If the vehicle is pointing downhill, turn the
front wheels so that they point toward the
curb.
The parking brake should also be applied.
Related information
•Parking brake – applying (p. 281)
•Parking brake – releasing (p. 282)
•Parking brake – symbols and messages
(p. 283)
•Brakes – general (p. 277)
Parking brake – applying
Applying the electric parking brake
Parking brake control
1. Press firmly on the brake pedal.
2. Push the control.
>The   symbol in the instrument
panel flashes while the parking brake is
being applied and glows steadily when the
parking brake has been fully applied.
3. Release the brake pedal and ensure that the
vehicle is at a standstill.
4. When the vehicle is parked, the gear selector
must be in position P.
NOTE
•In an emergency the parking brake can
be applied when the vehicle is moving by
holding in the control. Braking will be
interrupted when the accelerator pedal is
depressed or the control is released.
•An audible signal will sound during this
procedure if the vehicle is moving at
speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h).
Related information
•Parking brake – general information (p. 280)
•Parking brake – releasing (p. 282)
•Parking brake – symbols and messages
(p. 283)
•Brakes – general (p. 277)

STARTING AND DRIVING

282

Parking brake – releasing

Releasing the electric parking brake

Parking brake control

Manual release

1. Fasten the seat belt.

2. Insert the remote key in the ignition slot and

press the START/STOP ENGINE button (or

press the START/STOP ENGINE button

with a valid remote key in the passenger

compartment on vehicles with the optional

keyless drive).

3. Press firmly on the brake pedal.

4. Pull the parking brake control.

Automatic release

1. Start the engine.

NOTE

•For safety reasons, the parking brake is

only released automatically if the engine is

running and the driver is wearing a seat

belt.

•The electric parking brake will be released

immediately when the accelerator pedal is

pressed and the gear selector is in posi-

tion D or R.

2. Fasten the seat belt.

3. Move the gear selector to position D or R

and press the accelerator pedal. The parking

brake will release when the vehicle begins to

move.

Heavy load uphill

A heavy load, such as a trailer, can cause the

vehicle to roll backward when the parking brake

is released automatically on a steep incline. To

help avoid this:

1. Keep the electric parking brake lever pushed

in with the left hand while shifting into Drive

with the right.

2. While pressing the accelerator pedal to pull

away, release the parking brake lever only

after the vehicle begins to move.

Related information

•Parking brake – general information (p. 280)

•Parking brake – applying (p. 281)

•Parking brake – symbols and messages

(p. 283)

•Brakes – general (p. 277)

STARTING AND DRIVING

283

Parking brake – symbols and

messages

A text message can be erased by pressing

briefly on the OK button on the turn signal lever.

Symbol and messages in the instrument panel

Symbol Message Description/action

"Message"Read the message in the information display

A flashing symbol indicates that the parking brake is being applied. If the symbol flashes in any other situation then this

means that a fault has arisen. Read the message on the information display.

-Park brake not fully

released

A fault is preventing the parking brake from being released. Try to apply the parking brake and release it several times. If

the problem persists, contact an authorized Volvo workshop. If you drive off with this error message showing, a warning

signal sounds.

-Parking brake not

applied

A fault is preventing the parking brake from being applied. Try to apply the parking brake and release it several times. If

the problem persists, contact an authorized Volvo workshop. If you drive off with this error message showing, a warning

signal sounds.

-Parking brake

Service required

A fault has occurred. Try to apply and release. Contact a Volvo workshop if the fault remains

WARNING

If the vehicle must be parked before the fault

has been corrected, always put the gear

selector in P and turn the wheels so that they

point away from the curb if the vehicle is

pointing uphill or toward the curb if it is point-

ing downhill.

Related information

•Parking brake – general information (p. 280)

•Parking brake – applying (p. 281)

•Parking brake – releasing (p. 282)

•Brakes – general (p. 277)

STARTING AND DRIVING

284

Driving through water

The vehicle should be driven with extreme cau-

tion if it is necessary to drive through standing

water.

The vehicle can be driven through water up to a

depth of approximately 10 in. (25 cm), (V60

Cross Country: approximately 12 in. (30 cm)) at

walking speed to help prevent water from enter-

ing the differential and the transmission. Water

reduces the oil's lubricating capacity and may

shorten the service life of these components.

•Take particular care when driving through

flowing water.

•Clean the electrical connections for trailer

wiring after driving in mud or water.

•When driving through water, maintain low

speed and do not stop in the water.

WARNING

•Avoid driving through standing or rushing

water. Doing so can be dangerous and it

may also be difficult to determine the

actual depth of the water.

•If water cannot be avoided, after driving

through the water, press lightly on the

brake pedal to ensure that the brakes are

functioning normally. Water or mud can

make the brake linings slippery, resulting

in delayed braking effect.

CAUTION

•Engine damage will occur if water is

drawn into the air cleaner.

•If the vehicle is driven through water

deeper than approximately 10 in.

(25 cm), (V60 Cross Country: approxi-

mately 12 in. (30 cm)), water may enter

the differential and the transmission. This

reduces the oil's lubricating capacity and

may shorten the service life of these

components.

•Damage to any components, the engine,

transmission, turbo-charger, differential or

its internal components caused by flood-

ing, vapor lock or insufficient oil is not

covered under warranty.

•Do not allow the vehicle to stand in water

up to the door sills longer than absolutely

necessary. This could result in electrical

malfunctions.

•If the engine has been stopped while the

vehicle is in water, do not attempt to

restart it. Have the vehicle towed out of

the water.

Related information

•Towing the vehicle (p. 295)

•Towing by tow truck (p. 296)

Engine and cooling system

Under special conditions, for example when driv-

ing in hilly terrain, extreme heat or with heavy

loads, there is a risk that the engine and cooling

system will overheat.

Proceed as follows to avoid overheating the

engine.

•Maintain a low speed when driving with a

trailer up long, steep hills. For information,

see Towing a trailer (p. 292)

•Do not turn the engine off immediately when

stopping after a hard drive.

WARNING

The cooling fan may start or continue to oper-

ate (for up to 6 minutes) after the engine has

been switched off.

•Remove any auxiliary lights from in front of

the grille when driving in hot weather condi-

tions.

•Do not exceed engine speeds of 4500 rpm if

driving with a trailer in hilly terrain. The oil

temperature could become too high.

STARTING AND DRIVING
285
Conserving electrical current
Keep the following in mind to help minimize bat-
tery drain:
•When the engine is not running, avoid using
ignition mode II. Many electrical systems (the
audio system, the optional navigation system,
power windows, etc) will function in ignition
modes 0 and I. These modes reduce drain
on the battery.
•Please keep in mind that using systems,
accessories, etc., that consume a great deal
of current when the engine is not running
could result in the battery being completely
drained. Driving or having the engine running
for approximately 15 minutes will help keep
the battery charged.
•The optional 12-volt socket in the cargo
area (p. 143) area provides electrical current
even with the ignition switched off, which
drains the battery.
Before a long distance trip
It is always worthwhile to have your vehicle
checked by a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician before driving long distances. Your
retailer will also be able to supply you with bulbs,
fuses, spark plugs and wiper blades for your use
in the event that problems occur.
As a minimum, the following items should be
checked before any long trip:
•Check that engine runs smoothly and that
fuel consumption is normal.
•Check for fuel, oil, and fluid leakage.
•Have the transmission oil level checked.
•Check condition of drive belts.
•Check state of the battery's charge.
•Examine tires carefully (the spare tire as
well), and replace those that are
worn (p. 302). Check tire pressure (p. 309).
•The brakes, front wheel alignment, and steer-
ing gear should be checked by a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician only.
•Check all lights, including high beams.
•Reflective warning triangles are legally
required in some states/provinces.
•Have a word with a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician if you intend to drive
in countries where it may be difficult to
obtain the correct fuel.
•Consider your destination. If you will be driv-
ing through an area where snow or ice are
likely to occur, consider snow tires (p. 316).
Related information
•Changing a wheel – removing wheel (p. 303)
•Bulbs – introduction (p. 344)

STARTING AND DRIVING

286

Driving in cold weather

Check your vehicle before the approach of cold

weather.

The following advice is worth noting:

•Make sure that the engine coolant (p. 341)

contains 50 percent antifreeze. Any other

mixture will reduce freeze protection. This

gives protection against freezing down to

–31 °F (–35 °C). The use of "recycled" anti-

freeze is not approved by Volvo. Different

types of antifreeze must not be mixed.

•Volvo recommends using only genuine Volvo

antifreeze in your vehicle's radiator.

•Try to keep the fuel tank well filled – this

helps prevent the formation of condensation

in the tank. In addition, in extremely cold

weather conditions it is worthwhile to add

fuel line de-icer before refueling.

•The viscosity of the engine oil is important.

Oil with low viscosity (thinner oil) improves

cold-weather starting as well as decreasing

fuel consumption while the engine is warm-

ing up. Full synthetic 0W-30 oil is recom-

mended for driving in areas with sustained

low temperatures.

•The load placed on the battery is greater dur-

ing the winter since the windshield wipers,

lighting, etc., are used more often. Moreover,

the capacity of the battery decreases as the

temperature drops. In very cold weather, a

poorly charged battery can freeze and be

damaged. It is therefore advisable to check

the state of charge more frequently and

spray an anti-rust oil on the battery posts.

•Volvo recommends the use of snow tires on

all four wheels for winter driving, see Snow

tires/studded tires (p. 316).

•To prevent the washer fluid (p. 354)reservoir

from freezing, add washer solvents contain-

ing antifreeze. This is important since dirt is

often splashed on the windshield during win-

ter driving, requiring the frequent use of the

washers and wipers. Volvo Washer Solvent

should be diluted as follows: Down to 14 °F

(–10 °C): 1 part washer solvent and 4 parts

water Down to 5 °F (–15 °C): 1 part washer

solvent and 3 parts water Down to 0 °F

(–18 °C): 1 part washer solvent and 2 parts

water Down to –18 °F (–28 °C): 1 part

washer solvent and 1 part water.

•Use Volvo Teflon Lock Spray in the locks.

•Avoid using de-icing sprays as they can

cause damage to the locks.

Refueling – fuel requirements

Volvo recommends the use of detergent gaso-

line to control engine deposits.

Deposit control gasoline (detergent

additives)

Detergent gasoline is effective in keeping injec-

tors and intake valves clean. Consistent use of

deposit control gasolines will help ensure good

drivability and fuel economy. If you are not sure

whether the gasoline contains deposit control

additives, check with the service station operator.

NOTE

Volvo does not recommend the use of exter-

nal fuel injector cleaning systems.

Unleaded fuel

Each Volvo has a three-way catalytic converter

and must use only unleaded gasoline. U.S. and

Canadian regulations require that pumps deliver-

ing unleaded gasoline be labeled "UNLEADED".

Only these pumps have nozzles which fit your

vehicle's filler inlet. It is unlawful to dispense lea-

ded fuel into a vehicle labeled "unleaded gaso-

line only". Leaded gasoline damages the three-

way catalytic converter and the heated oxygen

sensor system. Repeated use of leaded gasoline

will lessen the effectiveness of the emission con-

trol system (p. 290) and could result in loss of

emission warranty coverage. State and local vehi-

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

287

cle inspection programs will make detection of

misfueling easier, possibly resulting in emission

test failure for misfueled vehicles.

NOTE

Some U.S. and Canadian gasolines contain an

octane enhancing additive called methyl-

cyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl

(MMT). If such fuels are used, your Emission

Control System performance may be affected,

and the Check Engine Light (malfunction

indicator light) located on your instrument

panel may light. If this occurs, please return

your vehicle to a trained and qualified Volvo

service technician for service.

Gasoline containing alcohol and ethers,

"Oxygenated fuels"

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing

"oxygenates" which are usually alcohols or

ethers. In some areas, state or local laws require

that the service pump be marked indicating use

of alcohols or ethers. However, there are areas in

which the pumps are unmarked. If you are not

sure whether there is alcohol or ethers in the

gasoline you buy, check with the service station

operator. To meet seasonal air quality standards,

some areas require the use of "oxygenated" fuel.

Volvo allows the use of the following "oxygen-

ated" fuels; however, the octane ratings (p. 287)

listed must still be met.

Alcohol – Ethanol

Fuels containing up to 10% ethanol by volume

may be used. Ethanol may also be referred to as

Ethyl alcohol, or "Gasohol".

Ethers – MTBE: Fuels containing up to

15% MTBE may be used.

Methanol

Do not use gasolines containing methanol

(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). This practice can

result in vehicle performance deterioration and

can damage critical parts in the fuel system. Such

damage may not be covered under the New

Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Refueling – octane rating

Volvo recommends premium fuel for best per-

formance, but using 87 octane15 or above will

not affect engine reliability.

Minimum octane

G028920

Typical pump octane label

NOTE

Vehicles equipped with high performance 4-

cylinder engines require premium fuel. Con-

sult your Volvo retailer if you are unsure about

the fuel requirements for your vehicle.

TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline

Volvo endorses the use of “TOP TIER Detergent

Gasoline” where available to help maintain engine

performance and reliability. TOP TIER Detergent

Gasoline meets a new standard jointly estab-

STARTING AND DRIVING

288

lished by leading automotive manufactures to

meet the needs of today’s advanced engines.

Qualifying gasoline retailers (stations) will, in

most cases, identify their gasoline as having met

the “TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” standards.

NOTE

Information about TOP TIER Detergent Gaso-

line is available at www.toptiergas.com.

Demanding driving

In demanding driving conditions, such as operat-

ing the vehicle in hot weather, towing a trailer, or

driving for extended periods at higher altitudes

than normal, it may be advisable to switch to

higher octane fuel (91 or higher) or to change

gasoline brands to fully utilize your engine's

capacity, and for the smoothest possible opera-

tion.

NOTE

When switching to higher octane fuel or

changing gasoline brands, it may be neces-

sary to fill the tank more than once before a

difference in engine operation is noticeable.

Fuel Formulations

Do not use gasoline that contains lead as a

knock inhibitor, and do not use lead additives.

Besides damaging the exhaust emission control

systems on your vehicle, lead has been strongly

linked to certain forms of cancer.

Many fuels contain benzene as a solvent.

Unburned benzene has been strongly linked to

certain forms of cancer. If you live in an area

where you must fill your own gas tank, take pre-

cautions. These may include:

•standing upwind away from the filler nozzle

while refueling

•refueling only at gas stations with vapor

recovery systems that fully seal the mouth of

the filler neck during refueling

•wearing neoprene gloves while handling a

fuel filler nozzle.

Use of Additives

With the exception of gas line antifreeze during

winter months, do not add solvents, thickeners, or

other store-bought additives to your vehicle's

fuel, cooling, or lubricating systems. Overuse may

damage your engine, and some of these additives

contain organically volatile chemicals. Do not

needlessly expose yourself to these chemicals.

WARNING

Never carry a cell phone that is switched on

while refueling your vehicle. If the phone rings,

this may cause a spark that could ignite gaso-

line fumes, resulting in fire and injury.

WARNING

Carbon monoxide is a poisonous, colorless,

and odorless gas. It is present in all exhaust

gases. If you ever smell exhaust fumes inside

the vehicle, make sure the passenger com-

partment is ventilated, and immediately return

the vehicle to a trained and qualified Volvo

service technician for correction.

Related information

•Refueling – fuel requirements (p. 286)

15 AKI (ANTI KNOCK INDEX) is an average of the Research Octane Number (RON) and the Motor Octane Number (MON), MON+RON/2.

STARTING AND DRIVING

289

Refueling – opening/closing fuel

filler door

The fuel filler door is located on the right rear

fender (indicated by an arrow beside the fuel

tank symbol on the information display )

With the ignition switched off, press and release

the button on the lighting panel to unlock the fuel

filler door. Please note that the fuel filler door will

remain unlocked until the vehicle begins to move

forward. An audible click will be heard when the

fuel filler door relocks.

•If you intend to leave your vehicle while it is

being refueled, this feature enables you to

lock the doors/tailgate while leaving the fuel

filler door unlocked.

•You can also keep the vehicle locked if you

remain inside it during refueling. The central

locking button does not lock the fuel filler

door.

•Be sure the fuel filler door is not obstructed

and is completely closed after refueling.

•Open the fuel filler cap slowly during hot

weather.

Close the fuel filler door by pressing it; a click

indicates that it is closed.

CAUTION

Avoid spilling gasoline during refueling. In

addition to causing damage to the environ-

ment, gasolines containing alcohol can cause

damage to painted surfaces, which may not

be covered under the New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

Manually opening the fuel filler door

1. Open the side hatch in the cargo area (on

the same side as the fuel filler door).

2. Open a perforated section of the insulation

and grasp the handle on the green cord.

3. Gently pull the cord straight rearward until

the fuel filler door clicks open.

Related information

•Refueling – opening/closing fuel cap

(p. 290)

•Refueling – fuel requirements (p. 286)

•Refueling – octane rating (p. 287)

STARTING AND DRIVING

290

Refueling – opening/closing fuel

cap

If necessary, the fuel filler door can be opened

manually.

Opening/closing the fuel cap

Fuel vapor expands in hot weather. Open the filler

cap slowly.

After refueling, close the fuel filler cap by turning

it clockwise until it clicks into place.

CAUTION

•Do not refuel with the engine running16.

Turn the ignition off or to position I. If the

ignition is on, an incorrect reading could

occur in the fuel gauge.

•Avoid overfilling the fuel tank. Do not

press the handle on the filler nozzle more

than one extra time. Too much fuel in the

tank in hot weather conditions can cause

the fuel to overflow. Overfilling could also

cause damage to the emission control

systems.

Related information

•Refueling – fuel requirements (p. 286)

•Refueling – octane rating (p. 287)

Emission controls

Three-way catalytic converter

•Keep your engine properly tuned. Certain

engine malfunctions, particularly involving the

electrical, fuel or distributor ignition systems,

may cause unusually high three-way catalytic

converter temperatures. Do not continue to

operate your vehicle if you detect engine

misfire, noticeable loss of power or other

unusual operating conditions, such as engine

overheating or backfiring. A properly tuned

engine will help avoid malfunctions that

could damage the three-way catalytic con-

verter.

•Do not park your vehicle over combustible

materials, such as grass or leaves, which can

come into contact with the hot exhaust sys-

tem and cause such materials to ignite under

certain wind and weather conditions.

•Excessive starter cranking (in excess of one

minute), or an intermittently firing or flooded

engine can cause three-way catalytic con-

verter or exhaust system overheating.

•Remember that tampering or unauthorized

modifications to the engine, the Engine Con-

trol Module, or the vehicle may be illegal and

can cause three-way catalytic converter or

exhaust system overheating. This includes:

altering fuel injection settings or compo-

16 If the fuel filler cap is not closed tightly or if the engine is running when the vehicle is refueled, the Check Engine Light (malfunction indicator lamp) may indicate a fault. However, your vehicle's performance will

not be affected. Use only Volvo original or approved fuel filler caps.

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 291

nents, altering emission system components

or location or removing components, and/or

repeated use of leaded fuel.

NOTE

Unleaded fuel is required for vehicles with

three-way catalytic converters.

Heated oxygen sensors

The heated oxygen sensors monitor the oxygen

content of the exhaust gases. Readings are fed

into a control module that continuously monitors

engine functions and controls fuel injection. The

ratio of fuel to air into the engine is continuously

adjusted for efficient combustion to help reduce

harmful emissions.

Related information

•Information displays – warning symbols

(p. 75)

•Engine and cooling system (p. 284)

Economical driving

Better driving economy may be obtained by

thinking ahead, avoiding rapid starts and stops

and adjusting the speed of your vehicle to imme-

diate traffic conditions.

Economical driving conserves natural

resources

Observe the following rules:

•Bring the engine to normal operating tem-

perature as soon as possible by driving with

a light foot on the accelerator pedal for the

first few minutes of operation. A cold engine

uses more fuel and is subject to increased

wear.

•Whenever possible, avoid using the vehicle

for driving short distances. This does not

allow the engine to reach normal operating

temperature.

•Drive carefully and avoid rapid acceleration

and hard braking.

•Use the transmission's Drive (D) position as

often as possible and avoid using kick-down.

•Using the engine's optional Eco function can

help improve fuel economy. For additional

information, see ECO* (p. 273).

•Using the transmission's Sport mode may

increase fuel consumption somewhat. Use

the transmission's Drive (D) position as often

as possible. For additional information about

Sport mode, see Transmission – Geartronic

(p. 264).

•Do not exceed posted speed limits.

•Avoid carrying unnecessary items (extra load)

in the vehicle.

•Maintain correct tire pressure. Check tire

pressure regularly (when tires are cold).

•Remove snow tires when threat of snow or

ice has ended.

•Note that roof racks, ski racks, etc, increase

air resistance and also fuel consumption.

•At highway driving speeds, fuel consumption

will be lower with the air conditioning on and

the windows closed than with the air condi-

tioning off and the windows open.

•Using the onboard trip computer's fuel con-

sumption modes can help you learn how to

drive more economically.

Other factors that decrease gas mileage are:

•Dirty air cleaner

•Dirty engine oil and clogged oil filter

•Dragging brakes

•Incorrect front end alignment

Some of the above mentioned items and others

are checked at the standard maintenance inter-

vals.

STARTING AND DRIVING

292

WARNING

Driving with the tailgate open: Driving with

the tailgate open could lead to poisonous

exhaust gases entering the passenger com-

partment. If the tailgate must be kept open for

any reason, proceed as follows:

•Close the windows

•Set the ventilation system control to air

flow to floor, windshield and side windows

and the blower control to its highest set-

ting.

Handling and roadholding

At the specified curb weight your vehicle has a

tendency to understeer, which means that the

steering wheel has to be turned more than might

seem appropriate for the curvature of a bend.

This ensures good stability and reduces the risk

of rear wheel skid. Remember that these proper-

ties can alter with the vehicle load. The heavier

the load in the cargo area, the less the tendency

to understeer.

•Vehicle load, tire design and inflation pres-

sure all affect vehicle handling. Therefore,

check that the tires are inflated to the rec-

ommended pressure according to the vehicle

load. Loads should be distributed so that

capacity weight or maximum permissible axle

loads are not exceeded.

•At the specified curb weight your vehicle has

a tendency to understeer, which means that

the steering wheel has to be turned more

than might seem appropriate for the curva-

ture of a bend. This ensures good stability

and reduces the risk of rear wheel skid.

Remember that these properties can alter

with the vehicle load. The heavier the load in

the cargo compartment, the less the ten-

dency to understeer.

Related information

•Climate – general information (p. 126)

Towing a trailer

When towing a trailer, always observe the legal

requirements of the state/province.

NOTE

For the maximum trailer and tongue weights

recommended by Volvo, see Weights (p. 381)

•All Volvo models are equipped with energy-

absorbing shock-mounted bumpers. Trailer

hitch installation should not interfere with the

proper operation of this bumper system.

Trailer towing does not normally present any par-

ticular problems, but take into consideration:

•Increase tire pressure to recommended full

pressure, see the tire inflation decal on the

driver's door opening.

•When your vehicle is new, avoid towing heavy

trailers during the first 620 miles (1,000 km).

•Maximum speed when towing a trailer:

50 mph (80 km/h).

•Engine and transmission are subject to

increased loads. Therefore, engine coolant

temperature should be closely watched when

driving in hot climates or hilly terrain. Use a

lower gear and turn off the air conditioner if

the temperature gauge needle enters the red

range.

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

293

•If the automatic transmission begins to over-

heat, a message will be displayed in the text

window.

•Avoid overload and other abusive operation.

•Hauling a trailer affects handling, durability,

and economy.

•It is necessary to balance trailer brakes with

the towing vehicle brakes to provide a safe

stop (check and observe state/local regula-

tions).

•Do not connect the trailer's brake system

directly to the vehicle's brake system.

•More frequent vehicle maintenance is

required.

•Remove the ball holder when the hitch is not

being used.

NOTE

•When parking the vehicle with a trailer on

a hill, apply the parking brake before put-

ting the gear selector in P. Always follow

the trailer manufacturer's recommenda-

tions for wheel chocking.

•When starting on a hill, put the gear

selector in D before releasing the parking

brake.

•If you use the manual (Geartronic) shift

positions while towing a trailer, make sure

the gear you select does not put too

much strain on the engine (using too

high a gear).

•The drawbar assembly/trailer hitch may

be rated for trailers heavier than the vehi-

cle is designed to tow. Please adhere to

Volvo's recommended trailer weights.

•Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of

more than 15%.

CAUTION

The maximum trailer weights listed are only

applicable for altitudes up to 3,280 ft

(1000 m) above sea level. With increasing

altitude the engine power and therefore the

car's climbing ability are impaired because of

the reduced air density, so the maximum

trailer weight has to be reduced accordingly.

The weight of the vehicle and trailer must be

reduced by 10% for every further 3,280 ft

(1,000 m) (or part thereof). When towing

5,000 lbs (2,250 kg) hill inclination is restric-

ted to 14%.

STARTING AND DRIVING

294

WARNING

•Bumper-attached trailer hitches must not

be used on Volvos, nor should safety

chains be attached to the bumper.

•Trailer hitches attaching to the vehicle

rear axle must not be used.

•Never connect a trailer's hydraulic brake

system directly to the vehicle brake sys-

tem, nor a trailer's lighting system directly

to the vehicle lighting system. Consult

your nearest authorized Volvo retailer for

correct installation.

•When towing a trailer, the trailer's safety

chains or wire must be correctly fastened

to the attachment points provided in the

trailer hitch on the vehicle. The safety

chain or wire must never be fastened to

or wound around the towing ball.

Trailer cable

An adapter is required if the vehicle's trailer hitch

has a 13-pin connector and the trailer has 7 pins.

Use an adapter cable approved by Volvo. Make

sure the cable does not drag on the ground.

Related information

•Loading – general (p. 144)

Trailer Stability Assist (TSA)

Trailer Stability Assist is a system designed to

help stabilize a vehicle that is towing a trailer

when the vehicle and trailer have begun to sway

and is part of the stability system. For information

on the stability system, see Stability system –

introduction (p. 172)

Function

A vehicle towing a trailer may begin to sway for

various reasons. Normally this only occurs at high

speeds but, for example, if the trailer is overloa-

ded or if the load is unevenly distributed in the

trailer, there is risk of swaying at speeds between

approximately 45-55 mph (70-90 km/h).

Swaying may be caused by factors such as:

•The vehicle and trailer are hit by a sudden,

strong crosswind

•The vehicle and trailer are traveling on an

uneven road surface or drive over a bump

•Sudden movements of the steering wheel

Facts about TSA

•TSA intervenes at speeds above approxi-

mately 40 mph (60 km/h)

•The stability system symbol in the instrument

panel will flash when TSA is working

•If the driver switches off the stability system's

Spin Control function, TSA will also be

switched off (but will be on again the next

time the engine is started)

•TSA may not intervene when the vehicle and

trailer begin to sway if the driver tries to com-

pensate for the swaying motion by moving

the steering wheel rapidly

How TSA works

Once swaying has begun, it can be very difficult

to stop, which makes it difficult to control the

vehicle and trailer.

The TSA system continuously monitors the vehi-

cle's movements, particularly lateral movement. If

the system detects a tendency to sway, the

brakes are applied individually on the front

wheels, which has a stabilizing effect on the vehi-

cle and trailer. This is often enough to enable the

driver to regain control of the vehicle.

If this is not adequate to stop the swaying motion,

the brakes are applied to all of the wheels on the

vehicle and on the trailer if it is equipped with

brakes, and engine power is temporarily reduced.

As the swaying motion begins to decrease and

the vehicle-trailer have once again become sta-

ble, TSA will now stop regulating the brakes/

engine power and the driver regains control of

the vehicle.

Related information

•Towing a trailer (p. 292)

•Loading – general (p. 144)

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

295

Towing the vehicle

Always check with state and local authorities

before attempting to tow another vehicle

because this type of towing is subject to regula-

tions regarding maximum towing speed, length

and type of towing device, lighting, etc.

1. With the remote key fully pressed into the

ignition slot17, press START/STOP ENGINE

for approximately 2 seconds to activate igni-

tion mode II.

2. The remote key must remain in the ignition

slot18 for the entire time that the vehicle is

being towed.

3. Keep the tow rope taut when the towing

vehicle slows down by applying light pressure

on the brake pedal. This will help prevent jar-

ring movements of the vehicle being towed.

4. Be prepared to apply the brakes to stop the

vehicle being towed.

CAUTION

General towing precautions:

•Please check with state and local author-

ities before attempting this type of tow-

ing, as vehicles being towed are subject

to regulations regarding maximum towing

speed, length and type of towing device,

lighting, etc.

•If the vehicle's battery is dead, see Jump

starting (p. 261) to provide current for

releasing the electric parking brake and

to move the gear selector from the P

position to N. If this is not possible, see

Transmission – shiftlock override (p. 267)

for information about manually overriding

the shiftlock system to move the gear

selector from P to N.

•Maximum speed: 50 mph (80 km/h). Do

not exceed the maximum allowable tow-

ing speed.

•Maximum distance with front wheels on

ground: 50 miles (80 km).

•The vehicle should only be towed in the

forward direction.

Related information

•Towing eyelet (p. 295)

•Remote key – functions (p. 153)

Towing eyelet

When used, the towing eyelet should always be

securing attached.

Removing the front/rear covers

17 Not necessary in vehicles with the optional keyless drive.

18 For vehicles with the optional keyless drive, the remote key must be in the vehicle.

STARTING AND DRIVING

296

Attaching the towing eyelet

The towing eyelet is located under the floor

of the cargo area, with the spare tire. This

eyelet must be screwed into the positions

provided on the right sides of either the front

or rear bumper (see illustration).

There are two different types of covers over

the openings for the towing eyelet and they

have to be opened differently.

•If the cover has a notch, insert a coin, etc.,

into the notch and pry open the edge of

the cover. Open the cover completely and

remove it.

•If the cover has a mark along one edge or

in a corner, press the mark while prying

out the opposite side/corner using a coin,

etc. Open the cover and remove it.

Screw the towing eyelet in place, first by hand

and then using the tire iron until it is securely in

place.

After the vehicle has been towed, the eyelet

should be removed and returned to its storage

location.

Press the cover for the attachment point back

into position.

WARNING

•When the vehicle is being towed, the igni-

tion should be in mode II (in mode I, all of

the vehicle's airbags are deactivated). For

more information, see Ignition modes

(p. 80)

•Never remove the remote key from the

ignition slot when the vehicle is being

towed. For vehicles with keyless drive, the

remote key must remain inside the vehi-

cle.

•The power brakes and power steering will

not function when the engine is not run-

ning. Approximately 5 times more pres-

sure will be required on the brake pedal

and the steering wheel will be considera-

bly harder to turn.

•The towing eyelets must not be used for

pulling the vehicle out of a ditch or for

any similar purpose involving severe

strain.

Related information

•Towing the vehicle (p. 295)

•Towing by tow truck (p. 296)

Towing by tow truck

When necessary, call for professional help from

an authorized towing company. Volvo recom-

mends the use of flat bed equipment.

CAUTION

In certain conditions, the towing eyelet

may be used to pull the vehicle onto a

flatbed tow truck.

•The vehicle's position and ground clear-

ance determine if it can be pulled up onto

a flatbed tow truck using the towing eye-

let.

•If the angle of the tow truck’s ramp is too

steep or the ground clearance under the

vehicle is insufficient, damage could

occur by attempting to pull the vehicle

using the towing eyelet.

•If necessary, lift the vehicle using the tow

truck’s lifting device.

WARNING

No person or object should be behind the tow

truck while the vehicle is being pulled up onto

the flatbed.

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 297

CAUTION

•The vehicle should always be towed in

the forward direction.

•Vehicles with All Wheel Drive (AWD)*

that are being towed with the front

wheels off the ground should not be

towed at a speed above approx. 45 mph

(70 km/h) and should not be towed far-

ther than 30 miles (50 km).

Related information

•Towing eyelet (p. 295)

WHEELS AND TIRES

300

Tires – general information

Your vehicle is equipped with tires according to

the vehicle's tire information placard on the B-

pillar (the structural member at the side of the

vehicle, at the rear of the driver's door opening).

Introduction

CAUTION

Some Volvo models are equipped with an

Ultra High Performance tire and wheel com-

bination designed to provide maximum dry

pavement performance with consideration for

hydroplaning resistance. They may be more

susceptible to road hazard damage and,

depending on driving conditions, may achieve

a tread life of less than 20,000 miles (30,000

km). Even if this vehicle is equipped with Vol-

vo’s advanced AWD or stability system, these

tires are not designed for winter driving, and

should be replaced with winter tires when

weather conditions dictate.

The tires have good road holding characteristics

and offer good handling on dry and wet surfaces.

It should be noted however that the tires have

been developed to give these features on snow/

ice-free surfaces.

Most models are equipped with "all-season" tires,

which provide a somewhat higher degree of road

holding on slippery surfaces than tires without

the "all-season" rating. However, for optimum

road holding on icy or snow-covered roads, we

recommend suitable winter tires on all four

wheels.

When replacing tires, be sure that the new tires

are the same size designation, type (radial) and

preferably from the same manufacturer, on all

four wheels. Otherwise there is a risk of altering

the car's roadholding and handling characteris-

tics.

Tire rotation

Your vehicle has no required tire rotation. Tire

wear is affected by a number of factors such as

tire inflation, ambient temperature, driving style,

etc.

NOTE

•If the tires are rotated, they should only

be moved from front to rear or vice versa.

They should never be rotated left to

right/right to left.

•Ideally, tire rotation should be done the

first time after approximately 3,000 miles

(5,000 km) and thereafter at 6,000-mile

(10,000-km) intervals. Some customers

find that tire rotation may help to get

extra mileage from tire life.

•Tire rotation should only be performed if

front/rear tire wear is fairly even and

tread height is above 1/16" (1.6 mm).

Related information

•Tire specifications (p. 310)

•Changing a wheel – direction of rotation

(p. 303)

•Tires – tread wear indicator (p. 302)

WHEELS AND TIRES

301

Tires – storage and age

When storing complete wheels (tires mounted

on rims), they should be suspended off the floor

or placed on their sides on the floor.

New Tires

Remember that tires are perishable goods. As of

2000, the manufacturing week and year (Depart-

ment of Transportation (DOT) stamp) will be indi-

cated with 4 digits (e.g., 1513 means that the tire

illustrated was manufactured during week 15 of

2013).

Tire age

Tires degrade over time, even when they are not

being used. It is recommended that tires gener-

ally be replaced after 6 years of normal service.

Heat caused by hot climates, frequent high load-

ing conditions or Ultra Violet (U.V.) exposure can

accelerate the aging process. The temporary

spare1 should also be replaced at 6-year inter-

vals, even if it has never been used.

A tire's age can be determined by the DOT stamp

on the sidewall (see the illustration).

A tire with e.g., visible cracks or discoloration

should be replaced immediately.

Storing wheels and tires

When storing completes wheels (tires mounted

on rims), they should be suspended off the floor

or placed on their sides on the floor.

Tires not mounted on rims should be stored on

their sides or standing upright, but should not be

suspended.

CAUTION

Tires should preferably be stored in a cool,

dry, dark place, and should never be stored in

close proximity to solvents, gasoline, oils, etc.

WARNING

•The wheel and tire sizes for your Volvo

are specified to meet stringent stability

and handling requirements. Unapproved

wheel/tire size combinations can nega-

tively affect your vehicle's stability and

handling.

•Any damage caused by installation of

unapproved wheel/tire size combinations

will not be covered by your new vehicle

warranty. Volvo assumes no responsibility

for death, injury, or expenses that may

result from such installations.

Related information

•Tire specifications (p. 310)

•Changing a wheel – direction of rotation

(p. 303)

•Tires – tread wear indicator (p. 302)

1Option or accessory on some models

WHEELS AND TIRES

302

Tires – tread wear indicator

The tires have wear indicator strips running

across or parallel to the tread.

G021829

The letters TWI are printed on the side of the tire.

When approximately 1/16" (1.6 mm) is left on

the tread, these strips become visible and indi-

cate that the tire should be replaced. Tires with

less than 1/16" (1.6 mm) tread offer very poor

traction.

When replacing worn tires, it is recommended

that the tire be identical in type (radial) and size

as the one being replaced. Using a tire of the

same make (manufacturer) will prevent alteration

of the driving characteristics of the vehicle.

Related information

•Tire specifications (p. 310)

•Changing a wheel – direction of rotation

(p. 303)

•Tires – storage and age (p. 301) Tires – tire economy

A smooth driving style and correct inflation pres-

sure can help prolong the tires' service life.

•Maintain correct tire pressure. The tire infla-

tion table, see the tire inflation decal on the

driver's door opening.

•Avoid fast starts, hard braking and tire

screeching.

•Tire wear increases with speed.

•Correct front wheel alignment is very impor-

tant.

•Unbalanced wheels impair tire economy and

driving comfort.

•Tires must maintain the same direction of

rotation throughout their lifetime.

•When replacing tires, the tires with the most

tread should be mounted on the rear wheels

to reduce the chance of oversteer during

hard braking.

•Hitting curbs or potholes can damage the

tires and/or wheels permanently.

WHEELS AND TIRES

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 303

Changing a wheel – direction of

rotation

Incorrectly mounted tires impair the car's braking

properties and ability to force aside rain, snow

and slush.

Summer and winter tires

G021778

The arrows shows the direction of rotation of the tire

•The tires with the most tread should always

be on the rear axle (to help reduce the risk of

skidding).

•When switching between summer and winter

tires, mark the tires to indicate where they

were mounted on the car, e.g., LF = left front,

RR = right rear

•Tires with tread designed to roll in only one

direction are marked with an arrow on the

sidewall.

•Contact a Volvo workshop if you are unsure

about the tread depth.

Related information

•Tire specifications (p. 310)

•Tires – storage and age (p. 301)

•Tires – tread wear indicator (p. 302)

Changing a wheel – removing wheel

Wheel changes should always be carried out

correctly.

The jack*, towing eyelet and tools* are stowed

under the floor of the cargo area.

Changing a wheel

1. Apply the parking brake and put the gear

selector in P.

2. Take out the jack*, lug wrench*, the tool for

removing the plastic covers on the wheel

nuts, the towing eyelet and the wheel cover

removal tool (certain models only) stowed

under the floor of the cargo area.

WHEELS AND TIRES

304

Tool for removing the plastic covers on the wheel nuts

Remove the wheel cover (where applicable)

using the removal tool or remove the wheel

cover by hand.

4. Block the wheels that are on the ground with

wooden blocks or large stones.

Lug wrench and towing eyelet

5. Screw the towing eyelet into the lug wrench

as shown in the illustration.

CAUTION

The towing eyelet must be screwed into the

lug wrench as far as possible.

6. With the vehicle still on the ground, remove

the plastic covers on the wheel nuts with the

tool provided and use the lug wrench/towing

eyelet to loosen the wheel nuts ½ – 1 turn by

exerting downward (counterclockwise) pres-

sure.

Jack attachment points

WHEELS AND TIRES

305

7. There are two jack attachment points on

each side of the vehicle. Position the jack

under the attachment point to be used on a

level, firm, non-slippery surface and crank it

up until it is correctly aligned and seated in

the attachment point. Before raising the vehi-

cle, check that the jack is still correctly posi-

tioned in the attachment.

8. Raise the vehicle until the wheel to be

changed is lifted off the ground.

9. Unscrew the wheel nuts completely and

remove the wheel.

WARNING

•The jack must correctly engage the jack

attachment.

•Be sure the jack is on a firm, level, non-

slippery surface.

•Never allow any part of your body to be

extended under a vehicle supported by a

jack.

•Use the jack intended for the vehicle

when changing a tire. For any other job,

use stands to support the vehicle.

•Apply the parking brake and put the gear

selector in the Park (P) position.

•Block the wheels standing on the ground,

use rigid wooden blocks or large stones.

•The jack should be kept well-greased and

clean, and should not be damaged.

•No objects should be placed between the

base of jack and the ground, or between

the jack and the attachment bar on the

vehicle.

NOTE

The jack provided with your vehicle is

intended to be used only in temporary situa-

tions such as changing wheels in the event of

a flat tire. Only the jack that came with your

particular model should be used to lift the

vehicle. If the vehicle needs to be lifted more

frequently or for a prolonged period, using a

garage jack or hoist is recommended. Always

follow this device’s instructions for use.

Related information

•Changing a wheel – installing a wheel

(p. 307)

WHEELS AND TIRES

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

306

Changing a wheel – spare wheel

Wheel changes should always be carried out

correctly.

Spare tire

A spare tire can be purchased for your vehicle as

an accessory. Follow the instructions included

with the spare tire regarding use and stowing in

the vehicle. See also Changing a wheel – remov-

ing wheel (p. 303) for additional information.

Spare wheel

The following instructions only apply if you have

purchased a temporary spare wheel* for your

vehicle.

If there is no temporary spare wheel in your vehi-

cle, please see Tire sealing system* – general

information (p. 324) for instructions on using the

tire sealing system.

The accessory temporary spare wheel is provided

in a bag that must be securely strapped in place

in the cargo area while the vehicle is being

driven.

The spare wheel is only intended for temporary

use. Replace it with a normal wheel as soon as

possible. The vehicle's handling may be altered

by the use of the spare wheel. The correct tire

pressure is stated in the tire pressure table, see

the tire inflation decal on the driver's door open-

ing.

Turn the handle on the spare wheel bag out

toward you. Secure the stitched strap hooks in

the front loading eyelets. Secure the long strap in

one of the front loading eyelets, wrap the strap

diagonally over the spare wheel and through the

upper handle. Secure the short strap on the long

strap. Secure in the rear loading eyelet and

tighten.

WARNING

Current legislation prohibits the use of the

“Temporary Spare” tire other than as a tempo-

rary replacement for a punctured tire. It must

be replaced as soon as possible by a stand-

ard tire. Road holding and handling may be

affected with the “Temporary Spare” in use.

CAUTION

The vehicle must never be driven with more

than one temporary spare wheel.

Related information

•Changing a wheel – installing a wheel

(p. 307)

•Changing a wheel – removing wheel (p. 303)

WHEELS AND TIRES

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 307

Changing a wheel – accessing the

spare wheel

The following procedure explains how to access

the spare wheel (where applicable).

1. Release the bag's retaining straps.

2. Lift the bag out of the vehicle and remove

the spare wheel from the bag.

3. Fold up the floor hatch in the cargo area.

4. Remove the jack* and tools* from the foam

block and change the wheels (see the

instructions in the following section "Chang-

ing a wheel").

5. After changing wheels, return the jack and

tools to the foam block and close the floor

hatch.

6. If possible, place the wheel with the punc-

tured tire in the bag.

7. If there is a wheel in the bag, strap the bag

securely in place in the cargo area.

WARNING

•If there is a wheel in the bag, the bag must

be securely restrained using its straps and

the load anchoring eyelets in the cargo

area. See (p. 306) and carefully follow the

instructions.

•If the wheel with the punctured tire is too

big to fit in the bag, it should be securely

restrained in the cargo area using suitable

straps, a net for anchoring cargo, etc.

Changing a wheel – installing a

wheel

It is important to re-install wheels properly.

Re-installing the wheel

1. Clean the contact surfaces on the wheel and

hub.

2. Lift the wheel and place it on the hub.

Tighten the wheel nuts

3. Install the wheel nuts and tighten hand-tight.

Using the lug wrench, tighten crosswise until

all nuts are snug.

4. Lower the vehicle to the ground and alter-

nately tighten the bolts crosswise to

103 ft. lbs. (140 Nm).

WHEELS AND TIRES

308

5. Press the plastic covers onto the wheel nuts

and Install the wheel cover (where applica-

ble). The opening in the wheel cover for the

tire's inflation valve must be positioned over

the valve.

Related information

•Changing a wheel – spare wheel (p. 306)

•Changing a wheel – removing wheel (p. 303)

Tire inflation – general information

Check tire inflation pressure regularly.

Inflation placard

G032521

Tire inflation placard

Tire inflation

See the tire inflation decal on the driver's door

opening. This decal indicates the designation of

the factory-mounted tires on your vehicle, as well

as load limits and inflation pressure.

NOTE

•The placards shown indicate inflation

pressure for the tires installed on the

vehicle at the factory only.

•A certain amount of air seepage from the

tires occurs naturally and tire pressure

fluctuates with seasonal changes in tem-

perature. Always check tire pressure reg-

ularly.

•Use a tire gauge to check the tire inflation

pressure, including the spare2, at least once

a month and before long trips. You are

strongly urged to buy a reliable tire pressure

gauge, as automatic service station gauges

may be inaccurate.

•Use the recommended cold inflation pres-

sure for optimum tire performance and wear.

•Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause

uneven treadwear patterns.

2Available as an accessory

WHEELS AND TIRES

}}}}

309

WARNING

•Under-inflation is the most common

cause of tire failure and may result in

severe tire cracking, tread separation, or

"blow-out," with unexpected loss of vehi-

cle control and increased risk of injury.

•Under-inflated tires reduce the load car-

rying capacity of your vehicle.

When weather temperature changes occur, tire

inflation pressures also change. A 10-degree

temperature drop causes a corresponding drop

of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check your

tire pressures frequently and adjust them to the

proper pressure, which can be found on the vehi-

cle's tire information placard or certification label.

Related information

•Tire specifications (p. 310)

•Tires – storage and age (p. 301)

•Tires – tread wear indicator (p. 302)

Tire inflation – checking pressure

Inflation pressure should be checked when the

tires are cold.

Cold tires

The tires are considered to be cold when

they have the same temperature as the sur-

rounding (ambient) air.

This temperature is normally reached after the

vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours.

After driving a distance of approximately 1 mile

(1.6 km), the tires are considered to be hot. If you

have to drive farther than this distance to pump

your tire(s), check and record the tire pressure

first and add the appropriate air pressure when

you get to the pump.

If checking tire pressure when the tire is hot,

never "bleed" or reduce air pressure. The tires

are hot from driving and it is normal for pressures

to increase above recommended cold pressures.

A hot tire at or below recommended cold inflation

pressure could be significantly under-inflated.

To check inflation pressure:

1. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire,

then firmly press the tire gauge onto the

valve.

2. Add air to reach the recommended air pres-

sure.

3. Replace the valve cap.

CAUTION

•After inflating the tires, always reinstall the

valve cap to help avoid damage to the

valve from dirt, gravel, etc.

•Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps

could corrode and become difficult to

remove.

4. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there

are no nails or other objects embedded that

could puncture the tire and cause an air leak.

5. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are

no gouges, cuts, bulges or other irregulari-

ties.

6. Repeat this procedure for each tire, including

the spare3.

NOTE

•If you overfill the tire, release air by push-

ing on the metal stem in the center of the

valve. Then recheck the pressure with

your tire gauge.

•Some spare tires (available as an acces-

sory) require higher inflation pressure

than the other tires. Consult the tire infla-

3Available as an accessory

WHEELS AND TIRES

310

tion pressure table or see the inflation

pressure placard.

Related information

•Tire specifications (p. 310)

•Tires – storage and age (p. 301)

•Tires – tread wear indicator (p. 302)

Tire specifications

The following information can be found on a

tire's sidewall.

Tire ratings

Speed ratings

The speed ratings in the table translate as follow:

Speed ratings

M 81 mph (130 km/h)

Q 100 mph (160 km/h)

T 118 mph (190 km/h)

H 130 mph (210 km/h)

V 149 mph (240 km/h)

W 168 mph (270 km/h)

Y 186 mph (300 km/h)

Information on the sidewall

Federal law mandates that tire manufacturers

place standardized information on the sidewall of

all tires (see the illustration).

The following information is listed on the tire

sidewall:

The tire designation:

NOTE

Please be aware that the following tire desig-

nation is an example only and that this par-

ticular tire may not be available on your vehi-

cle.

WHEELS AND TIRES

311

1. 215: the width of the tire (in millimeters)

from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. The

larger the number, the wider the tire.

2. 65: The ratio of the tire's height to its width

in percent.

3. R: Radial tire (the designation RF and the

symbol indicate that the vehicle is

equipped with optional self-supporting run

flat tires4.

4. 15: The diameter of the wheel rim (in

inches).

5. 95: The tire's load index. In this example, a

load index of 95 equals a maximum load of

1521 lbs (690 kg).

6. H: The tire's speed rating, or the maximum

speed at which the tire is designed to be

driven for extended periods of time, carrying

a permissible load for the vehicle, and with

correct inflation pressure. For example, H

indicates a speed rating of 130 mph

(210 km/h).

NOTE

The tire's load index and speed rating may

not appear on the sidewall because they are

not required by law.

7. M+S or M/S = Mud and Snow, AT = All Ter-

rain, AS = All Season

8. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number

(TIN): This begins with the letters "DOT" and

indicates that the tire meets all federal

standards. The next two numbers or letters

are the plant code where it was manufac-

tured, the next two are the tire size code and

the last four numbers represent the week

and year the tire was built. For example,

1510 means that the tire was manufactured

during week 15 of 2010. The numbers in

between are marketing codes used at the

manufacturer's discretion. This information

helps a tire manufacturer identify a tire for

safety recall purposes.

9. Tire Ply Composition and Material

Used: Indicates the number of plies indi-

cates or the number of layers of rubber-

coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall.

Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply

materials in the tire and the sidewall, which

include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.

10. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum

load in pounds and kilograms that can be

carried by the tire. Refer to the vehicle's tire

information placard located on the B-Pillar

for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle.

11. Treadwear, Traction, and Temperature

grades: see Tire specifications – Uniform

Tire Quality Grading (p. 314) for more infor-

mation.

12. Maximum permissible inflation

pressure: the greatest amount of air pres-

sure that should ever be put in the tire. This

limit is set by the tire manufacturer.

4Self-supporting run flat tires may not be available on all models

WHEELS AND TIRES

312

Loading specifications

Properly loading your vehicle will provide maxi-

mum return of vehicle design performance.

Before loading your vehicle, familiarize yourself

with the following terms for determining your

vehicle's weight ratings, with or without a trailer,

from the vehicle's Federal/Canadian Motor Vehi-

cle Safety Standards (FMVSS/CMVSS) label, and

the vehicle's tire information placard:

Curb weight

The weight of the vehicle including a full tank of

fuel and all standard equipment. It does not

include passengers, cargo, or optional equipment.

Capacity weight

All weight added to the curb weight, including

cargo and optional equipment. When towing,

trailer hitch tongue load is also part of cargo

weight.

Permissible axle weight

The maximum allowable weight that can be car-

ried by a single axle (front or rear). These num-

bers are shown on the Federal/Canadian Motor

Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/CMVSS) label.

The total load on each axle must never exceed its

maximum permissible weight.

Gross vehicle weight (GVW)

The vehicle's curb weight + cargo + passengers.

NOTE

•The location of the various labels in your

vehicle, see Label information (p. 376).

•A table listing important weight limits for

your vehicle, see Weights (p. 381).

Loading specifications – load limit

The load limit of your vehicle is the combined

weight of the occupants and cargo.

Steps for Determining Correct Load

Limit

1. Locate the statement "the combined weight

of occupants and cargo should never exceed

XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle's plac-

ard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driver

and passengers that will be riding in your

vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver

and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the available

amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.

For example, if the "XXX" amount equals

1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. pas-

sengers in your vehicle, the amount of availa-

ble cargo and luggage load capacity is

650 lbs. (1400 – 750 (5 × 150) = 650 lbs.)

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage

and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That

weight may not safely exceed the available

cargo and luggage load capacity calculated

in Step 4.

WHEELS AND TIRES

}}

313

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load

from your trailer will be transferred to your

vehicle. Consult this manual to determine

how this reduces the available cargo and lug-

gage load capacity of your vehicle.

WARNING

•Exceeding the permissible axle weight,

gross vehicle weight, or any other weight

rating limits can cause tire overheating

resulting in permanent deformation or

catastrophic failure.

•Do not use replacement tires with lower

load carrying capacities than the tires that

were original equipment on the vehicle

because this will lower the vehicle's GVW

rating. Use only tires with the correct load

carrying capacity. Consult your Volvo

retailer for information.

Tire specifications – terminology

The following is a glossary of tire-related terms.

The tire suppliers may have additional markings,

notes or warnings such as standard load, radial

tubeless, etc.

•Tire information placard: A placard show-

ing the OE (Original Equipment) tire sizes,

recommended inflation pressure, and the

maximum weight the vehicle can carry.

•Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number

on the sidewall of each tire providing infor-

mation about the tire brand and manufactur-

ing plant, tire size and date of manufacturer.

•Inflation pressure: A measure of the

amount of air in a tire.

•Standard load: A class of P-metric or Metric

tires designed to carry a maximum load at

35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires].

Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this

pressure will not increase the tires load car-

rying capability.

•Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric

tires designed to carry a heavier maximum

load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric

tires]. Increasing the inflation pressure

beyond this pressure will not increase the

tire's load carrying capability.

•kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pressure.

•PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard unit

of air pressure.

•B-pillar: The structural member at the side

of the vehicle behind the front door.

•Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next

to the rim.

•Sidewall of the tire: Area between the bead

area and the tread.

•Tread area of the tire: Area of the perime-

ter of the tire that contacts the road when

mounted on the vehicle.

•Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or a

tire and tube assembly upon which the tire

beads are seated.

•Maximum load rating: a figure indicating

the maximum load in pounds and kilograms

that can be carried by the tire. This rating is

established by the tire manufacturer.

•Maximum permissible inflation pressure:

the greatest amount of air pressure that

should ever be put in the tire. This limit is set

by the tire manufacturer.

•Recommended tire inflation pressure:

inflation pressure, established by Volvo,

which is based on the type of tires that are

mounted on a vehicle at the factory. This

information can be found on the tire inflation

placard(s) located on the driver's side B-pillar

and in the tire inflation table in this chapter.

•Cold tires: The tires are considered to be

cold when they have the same temperature

as the surrounding (ambient) air. This tem-

WHEELS AND TIRES

314

perature is normally reached after the vehicle

has been parked for at least 3 hours. Tire specifications – Uniform Tire

Quality Grading

ALL PASSENGER VEHICLE TIRES MUST

CONFORM TO FEDERAL SAFETY REQUIRE-

MENTS IN ADDITION TO THESE GRADES.

Quality grades can be found, where applica-

ble, on the tire sidewall between the tread

shoulder and maximum section width. For

example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

TREADWEAR

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating

based on the wear rate of the tire when tested

under controlled conditions on a specified gov-

ernment test course. For example, a tire graded

150 would wear one and one half (1 ½) times as

well on the government course as a tire graded

100. The relative performance of tires depends

upon the actual conditions of their use, however,

and many depart significantly from the norm due

to variation in driving habits, maintenance practi-

ces and differences in road characteristics and

climate.

TRACTION

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are

AA, A, B, and C, as measured under controlled

conditions on specified government test surfaces

of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may

have poor traction performance. The traction

grade assigned to this tire is based on braking

(straight-ahead) traction tests and is not a meas-

ure of cornering (turning) traction.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tire is

based on braking (straight-ahead) traction

tests and is not a measure of cornering (turn-

ing) traction.

TEMPERATURE

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,

and C, representing the tire's resistance to the

generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat

when tested under controlled conditions on a

specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained

high temperature can cause the material of the

tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and exces-

sive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.

The grade C corresponds to a minimum level of

performance that all passenger vehicle tires must

meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard

No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels

of performance on the laboratory test wheel than

the minimum required by law.

WHEELS AND TIRES

315

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is estab-

lished for a tire that is properly inflated and

not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-infla-

tion, or excessive loading, either separately or

in combination, can cause heat buildup and

tire failure.

Snow chains

Snow chains can be used on your Volvo with the

following restrictions:

•Snow chains should be installed on front

wheels only. Use only Volvo approved snow

chains.

•If accessory, aftermarket or "custom" tires

and wheels are installed and are of a size dif-

ferent than the original tires and wheels,

chains in some cases CANNOT be used.

Sufficient clearances between chains and

brakes, suspension and body components

must be maintained.

•Some strap-on type chains will interfere with

brake components and therefore CANNOT

be used.

•All Wheel Drive models: Snow chains

should only be installed on the front wheels.

•Certain size tires may not allow the assembly

of snow chains/traction devices.

Consult your Volvo retailer for additional snow

chain information.

CAUTION

•Check local regulations regarding the use

of snow chains before installing.

•Use single-sided snow chains only.

•Always follow the chain manufacturer's

installation instructions carefully. Install

chains as tightly as possible and

retighten periodically.

•Never exceed the chain manufacturer's

specified maximum speed limit. (Under

no circumstances should you exceed

31 mph (50 km/h).

•Avoid bumps, holes or sharp turns when

driving with snow chains.

•The handling of the vehicle can be

adversely affected when driving with

chains. Avoid fast or sharp turns as well

as locked wheel braking.

WHEELS AND TIRES

316

Snow tires/studded tires5

Owners who live in or regularly commute

through areas with sustained periods of snow or

icy driving conditions are strongly advised to fit

suitable winter tires to help retain the highest

degree of traction.

Tires for winter use:

•It is important to install winter tires on all four

wheels to help retain traction during corner-

ing, braking, and accelerating. Failure to do

so could reduce traction to an unsafe level or

adversely affect handling.

•Do not mix tires of different design as this

could also negatively affect overall tire road

grip.

•Winter tires wear more quickly on dry roads

in warm weather. They should be removed

when the winter driving season has ended.

•Studded tires should be run-in 300 –

600 miles (500 – 1000 km) during which

the vehicle should be driven as smoothly as

possible to give the studs the opportunity to

seat properly in the tires. The tires should

have the same rotational direction through-

out their entire lifetime.

NOTE

Please consult state or provincial regulations

restricting the use of studded winter tires

before installing such tires.

Tire pressure monitoring - overview

Volvo provides two different systems to monitor

tire pressure: Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) or Tire Monitor.

Determining which tire monitoring

system is in your vehicle

To see which system is installed in your vehicle,

press the MY CAR button on the center console.

Go to Settings Car settings.

•If your vehicle has a menu called Tire

monitoring, see Tire Monitor - introduction

(p. 317).

•If your vehicle has a menu called Tire

pressure, see Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-

tem (TPMS) – general information (p. 320).

Introduction

Each tire, including the spare6 (if provided),

should be checked monthly when cold and infla-

ted to the inflation pressure recommended by the

vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or

tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has

tires of a different size than the size indicated on

the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label,

you should determine the proper tire inflation

pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has

been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring

5Where permitted

6Available as an accessory

WHEELS AND TIRES

}}

317

system that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale

() when one or more of your tires is signifi-

cantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low

tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop

and check your tires as soon as possible, and

inflate them to the proper pressure.

Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire cau-

ses the tire to overheat and can lead to tire fail-

ure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency

and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's

handling and stopping ability. Please note that a

tire pressure monitoring system is not a substi-

tute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driv-

er's responsibility to maintain correct tire pres-

sure, even if under-inflation has not reached the

level to trigger illumination of the system's low

tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a

TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the

system is not operating properly. The monitoring

system's malfunction indicator is combined with

the low tire pressure telltale.

When the system detects a malfunction, the tell-

tale will flash for approximately one minute and

then remain continuously illuminated. This

sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle

start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When

the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-

tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire

pressure as intended.

System malfunctions may occur for a variety of

reasons, including the installation of replacement

or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that

prevent the tire pressure monitoring system from

functioning properly.

Always check the system's malfunction telltale

after replacing one or more tires or wheels on

your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or

alternate tires and wheels allow the system to

continue to function properly.

NOTE

The system indicates low tire pressure but

does not replace normal tire maintenance. For

information on correct tire pressure, please

refer to the tire inflation decal on the driver's

door opening or consult your Volvo retailer.

WARNING

Incorrect inflation pressure could lead to tire

failure, resulting in a loss of control of the

vehicle.

Related information

•Tire Monitor - introduction (p. 317)

•Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) –

general information (p. 320)

Tire Monitor - introduction

Tire Monitor uses the rotational speed of the

tires in combination with signal analysis of the

ABS sensor signals to determine if they are

properly inflated.

When a tire is under-inflated, its diameter (and

consequently also its rotational speed) changes.

By comparing the individual tires with each other

it is possible to determine if one or more tires are

under inflated.

When low inflation pressure is detected or if the

system is not functioning properly, Tire Monitor

will light up the tire pressure warning light

() (also referred to as a telltale) in the

instrument panel and will display one of several

messages in the text window, for example: Tire

pressure low Check tires. Adjust the inflation

pressure and recalibrate if necessary.

NOTE

If a malfunction occurs in the system, the tire

pressure warning light will flash for approxi-

mately 1 minute and then remain illuminated.

Tire press. syst Service required will be

displayed.

WHEELS AND TIRES

318

NOTE

The system indicates low tire pressure but

does not replace normal tire maintenance. For

information on correct tire pressure, please

refer to the tire inflation decal on the driver's

door opening or consult your Volvo retailer.

Related information

•Tire pressure monitoring - overview (p. 316)

•Calibrating Tire Monitor (p. 318)

Calibrating Tire Monitor

In order for Tire Monitor to work correctly, tire

pressure reference values must be set. This

must be done each time wheels or tire pressures

are changed.

Calibration

1. Switch off the engine.

2. Inflate the tires to the desired pressure (con-

sult tire pressure placard located on the driv-

er's side B-pillar (the structural member at

the side of the vehicle) and put the ignition in

mode II, see Ignition modes (p. 80).

3. Press the MY CAR button on the center

console control panel and select Settings

Car settings Tire monitoring.

4. Press OK/MENU, select Calibrate tire

pressure and press OK/MENU again after

all of the tires have been checked and rein-

flated.

5. Drive away.

> The calibration process will be completed

while driving and will be interrupted if the

vehicle is parked and the engine is

switched off. Calibration continues auto-

matically when driving resumes. The sys-

tem will not give any confirmation when

calibration is finished although it will state

if calibration fails.

When driving with heavy loads or at sustained

highway speeds, the tire pressure should be

adjusted to the recommended inflation pressures

according to the tire inflation pressure placard

located on the driver's side B-pillar (the structural

member at the side of the vehicle, at the rear of

the driver's door opening) or to the tire inflation

pressure table in the owner's information.

After adjusting inflation pressure, repeat steps

1-5 above.

NOTE

Always remember to calibrate Tire Monitor

when the wheels have been changed or the

tire pressure has been corrected according to

tire pressure placard or tire pressure table. If

correct reference values have not been set,

the system cannot issue low tire pressure

alerts correctly.

WHEELS AND TIRES

}}

319

Tire Monitor status information

The current status of the system and the tires is

indicated by color-coded graphics.

This status can be displayed by pressing the MY

CAR button on the center console and going to

Settings Car settings Tire monitoring.

The following color-coded graphics indicate:

•All green: the system is operational and all

tire pressures are at or above the recom-

mended levels.

•One yellow wheel: the tire indicated is

under-inflated.

•All wheels yellow: two or more tires are

under-inflated

•All wheels gray: the system is currently

unavailable. It might be necessary to drive at

a speed of at least 20 mph (30 km/h) for

several minutes for the system to become

operational.

•All wheels gray in combination with the

message Tire press. syst Service

required and the telltale in the instru-

ment panel ( ) is illuminated: the sys-

tem is not functioning correctly. Have it

checked by a trained and qualified Volvo

service technician.

•All wheels gray in combination with the

message Tire press. syst currently

unavailable and the telltale in the instru-

ment panel ( ) is illuminated: the sys-

tem is temporarily unavailable. It should

become operational again shortly.

Related information

•Tire Monitor – messages (p. 319)

Tire Monitor – messages

When low tire pressure has been detected, a

message will be displayed and the tire pressure

warning telltale in the instrument panel ( )

will illuminate.

Messages

If the telltale illuminates, one of the following

message will also be displayed:

•Tire pressure low/Check, adjust and

calibrate

•Tire pressure system/Service required

•Tire pressure system/Currently

unavailable

Erasing warning messages

To erase a low tire pressure message and turn

off the telltale:

1. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the infla-

tion pressure of all four tires.

2. Re-inflate the tires to the correct pressure

(consult the tire pressure decal on the driv-

er's door opening.

3. Recalibrate Tire Monitor, see Calibrating Tire

Monitor (p. 318).

||
WHEELS AND TIRES
320
NOTE
To help avoid incorrect tire inflation pressure,
only inflate the tires when they are cold. The
tires are considered to be cold when they
have the same temperature as the surround-
ing (ambient) air. This temperature is normally
reached after the vehicle has been parked for
at least 3 hours. After driving a distance of
approximately 1 mile (1.6 km), the tires are
considered to be hot.
CAUTION
•After inflating the tires, always reinstall
the valve cap to help avoid damage to the
valve from dirt, gravel, etc.
•Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps
could corrode and become difficult to
remove.
WARNING
•Incorrect inflation pressure could lead to
tire failure, resulting in a loss of control of
the vehicle.
•Tire monitoring systems cannot indicate
sudden tire damage caused by external
factors (e.g., a blowout) in advance.
Related information
•Tire inflation – checking pressure (p. 309)
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) – general information
TPMS uses sensors mounted in the tire valves
to check inflation pressure levels. When the
vehicle is moving at a speed of approximately
20 mph (30 km/h) or faster, these sensors
transmit inflation pressure data to a receiver
located in the vehicle.
NOTE
USA – FCC ID: KR5S180052050
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
rules. Operation is subject to the following
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
When low inflation pressure is detected or if a
sensor is not functioning properly, TPMS will light
up the tire pressure warning light ( ) (also
referred to as a telltale) in the instrument panel
and will display one of the following messages:
Tire pressure low, Tire needs air now or Tire
press. syst Service required.
NOTE
If a malfunction occurs in the system, the tire
pressure warning light will flash for approxi-
mately 1 minute and then remain illuminated.
Tire press. syst Service required will be
displayed.
Related information
•Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) –
recalibrating (p. 322)
•Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) –
messages (p. 323)
•Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) –
activating/deactivating (p. 322)
•Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) –
changing wheels (p. 321)

WHEELS AND TIRES
321
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) – changing wheels
Please keep the following in mind when chang-
ing or replacing the factory installed TPMS
wheels/tires on the vehicle:
•Not all aftermarket wheels are equipped with
TPMS sensors in the valves.
•If the vehicle is equipped with a temporary
spare tire, this tire does not have a TPMS
sensor.
•If wheels without TPMS sensors are moun-
ted on the vehicle, a text message will dis-
played in the instrument panel each time the
vehicle is driven above 20 mph (30 km/h) for
10 minutes or more.
•Once TPMS sensors are properly installed,
the warning message should not reappear. If
the message is still displayed, drive the vehi-
cle for several minutes at a speed of 20 mph
(30 km/h) or faster to erase the message.
•Volvo recommends that TPMS sensors be
fitted on all wheels used on the vehicle,
including winter tires. Volvo does not recom-
mend moving sensors back and forth
between sets of wheels.
CAUTION
When inflating tires, press the pump's mouth-
piece straight onto the valve to help avoid
bending or otherwise damaging the valve.
CAUTION
•After inflating the tires, always reinstall
the valve cap to help avoid damage to the
valve from dirt, gravel, etc.
•Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps
could corrode and become difficult to
remove.
NOTE
•If you change to tires with a different
dimension than the factory-installed ones,
the TPMS system must be reconfigured
for these tires. This must be done by a
trained and qualified Volvo service techni-
cian.
•If a tire is changed, or if the TPMS sensor
is moved to another wheel, the sensor's
seal, nut, and valve core should be
replaced.
•When installing TPMS sensors, the vehi-
cle must be parked for at least
15 minutes with the ignition off. If the
vehicle is driven within 15 minutes, a
TPMS error message will be displayed.
Related information
•Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) –
general information (p. 320)
•Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) –
recalibrating (p. 322)
•Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) –
messages (p. 323)
•Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) –
activating/deactivating (p. 322)

WHEELS AND TIRES
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
322
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) – recalibrating
In certain cases, it may be necessary to recali-
brate TPMS to conform to Volvo's recom-
mended tire inflation pressures (see the tire infla-
tion decal on the driver's door opening), for
example, if higher inflation pressure is necessary
when transporting heavy loads.
Recalibrating TPMS (Canadian models
only)*
This is done in the vehicle's menu system.
To recalibrate:
1. Switch off the engine.
2. Inflate the tires to the desired pressure and
put the ignition in mode I or II (see Ignition
modes (p. 80) for additional information).
3. Press the MY CAR key in the center console
control panel and select Settings Car
settings Tire pressure.
4. Press OK/MENU, select Calibrate tire
pressure and press OK/MENU again.
5. Drive the vehicle at a speed above 20 mph
(30 km/h) continuously for at least
10 minutes.
> Calibration is done automatically once ini-
tiated by the driver and the system does
not give any confirmation when calibration
is finished.
After adjusting inflation pressure, repeat steps
1-5 above.
Related information
•Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) –
general information (p. 320)
•Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) –
messages (p. 323)
•Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) –
activating/deactivating (p. 322)
•Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) –
changing wheels (p. 321)
•My Car – introduction (p. 77)
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) – activating/deactivating
Activating/deactivating TPMS
(Canadian models only)
1. Switch off the engine.
2. Put the ignition in mode I or II (see Ignition
modes (p. 80) for additional information).
3. Press the MY CAR key in the center console
control panel and select Settings Car
settings Tire pressure
4. Select Tire monitoring and press OK/
MENU to turn the system on or off.
Related information
•Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) –
general information (p. 320)

WHEELS AND TIRES
323
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) – messages
Erasing warning messages
When a low tire pressure warning message has
been displayed and the tire pressure warning
light in the instrument panell ( ) has come
on:
1. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the infla-
tion pressure of all four tires.
2. Re-inflate the tire(s) to the correct pressure
(consult the tire pressure decal on the driv-
er's door opening).
3. In certain cases, it may be necessary to drive
the vehicle for several minutes at a speed of
20 mph (30 km/h) or faster. This will erase
the warning text and the telltale will go out.
NOTE
•The tire monitoring systems use a tem-
perature compensated pressure value.
This pressure value is dependent on tire
temperature and ambient temperature,
which can differ from the recommended
cold tire pressure in the tire inflation table
and on the tire pressure placard located
on the driver's side B-pillar (the structural
member at the side of the vehicle, at the
rear of the driver's door opening). This
means that it may sometimes be neces-
sary to inflate them slightly above the
recommended cold pressure value
(approx. 3-4 psi or 0.2-0.3 bar) in order
to reset a low tire pressure warning.
•To help avoid incorrect tire inflation pres-
sure, if possible only inflate the tires
when they are cold. The tires are consid-
ered to be cold when they have the same
temperature as the surrounding (ambi-
ent) air. This temperature is normally
reached after the vehicle has been
parked for at least 3 hours. After driving a
distance of approximately 1 mile (1.6 km),
the tires are considered to be hot.
CAUTION
•After inflating the tires, always reinstall
the valve cap to help avoid damage to the
valve from dirt, gravel, etc.
•Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps
could corrode and become difficult to
remove.
WARNING
•Incorrect inflation pressure could lead to
tire failure, resulting in a loss of control of
the vehicle.
•Tire monitoring systems cannot indicate
sudden tire damage caused by external
factors (e.g., a blowout) in advance.
Related information
•Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) –
general information (p. 320)
•Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) –
recalibrating (p. 322)
•Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) –
activating/deactivating (p. 322)
•Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) –
changing wheels (p. 321)
•Tire pressure monitoring - overview (p. 316)

WHEELS AND TIRES

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

324

Tire sealing system* – general

information

The vehicle is equipped with a tire sealing sys-

tem that enables you to temporarily seal a hole in

the tread surface and re-inflate a flat tire, or to

adjust a tire’s inflation pressure.

Introduction

The tire sealing system consists of an air com-

pressor, a container for the sealing compound,

wiring to connect the system to the vehicle’s

electrical system via one of the 12-volt sockets,

and a hose used to connect the system to the

tire’s inflation valve.

NOTE

The tire sealing system's compressor has

been tested and approved by Volvo.

The 12-volt sockets are located in the front tun-

nel console, on the rear side of the center con-

sole in the rear seat and in the cargo area*.

Accessing the tire sealing system

The tire sealing system is stowed under the floor

of the cargo area. To access it:

1. Lift the floor hatch in the cargo area.

2. Lift out the tire sealing system.

NOTE

•The tire sealing system is only intended

to seal holes on the tire’s tread area, not

the sidewall.

•Tires with large holes or tears cannot be

repaired with the tire sealing system.

•After use, stow the tire sealing system

properly to help prevent rattling.

WARNING

•After using the tire sealing system, the

vehicle should not be driven farther than

approximately 120 miles (200 km).

•Have the tire inspected by a trained and

qualified Volvo service technician as soon

as possible to determine if it can be per-

manently repaired or must be replaced.

•The vehicle should not be driven faster

than 50 mph (80 km/h) while using a tire

that has been temporarily repaired with

the tire sealing system.

•After using the tire sealing system, drive

carefully and avoid abrupt steering

maneuvers and sudden stops.

WHEELS AND TIRES
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 325
Tire sealing system–temporarily
repairing a flat tire
Temporarily repairing a flat tire is done in two
stages:
•Stage 1: The hole is sealed by pumping
sealing compound into the tire. The car is
then driven a short distance to distribute the
sealing compound in the tire.
NOTE
Do not remove any foreign objects (nails, etc.)
from the tire before using the sealing system.
•Stage 2: The tire’s inflation pressure is
checked and adjusted if necessary.
WARNING
•Never leave the tire sealing system unat-
tended when it is operating.
•Keep the tire sealing system away from
children.
•Be sure the vehicle is parked safely off
the road and away from moving traffic.
•Apply the parking brake.
Related information
•Tire sealing system* – overview (p. 325)
•Tire sealing system* – inflating tires (p. 329)
•Tire sealing system* – sealing compound
container (p. 330)
•Tire sealing system* – sealing a hole
(p. 327)
•Tire sealing system – checking inflation pres-
sure (p. 329)
•Tunnel console – 12-volt sockets (p. 142)
•12-volt socket in the cargo area* (p. 143)
Tire sealing system* – overview
The vehicle is equipped with a tire sealing sys-
tem that enables you to temporarily seal a hole in
the tread surface and re-inflate a flat tire, or to
adjust a tire’s inflation pressure.
Speed limit sticker (on the rear side of the
compressor)
On/Off switch
Electrical wire
Bottle holder (orange cover)
Protective hose cover
Air release knob
Hose

||
WHEELS AND TIRES
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
326
Bottle with sealing compound
Air pressure gauge
WARNING
Please keep the following points in mind
when using the tire sealing system:
•The sealing compound bottle (no. 8 in the
illustration) contains 1) rubber latex, natu-
ral and 2) ethanediol. These substances
are harmful if swallowed.
•The contents of this bottle may cause
allergic skin reactions or otherwise be
potentially harmful to the respiratory tract,
the skin, the central nervous system, and
the eyes.
Precautions:
•Keep out of reach of children.
•Do not ingest the contents.
•Avoid prolonged or repeated contact with
the skin.
•Wash thoroughly after handling.
First aid:
•Skin: Wash affected areas of skin with
soap and water. Get medical attention if
symptoms occur.
•Eyes: Flush with plenty of water for least
15 minutes, occasionally lifting the upper
and lower eyelids. Get medical attention if
symptoms occur.
•Inhalation: Move the exposed person to
fresh air. If irritation persists, get medical
attention.
•Ingestion: Do NOT induce vomiting
unless directed to do so by medical per-
sonnel. Get medical attention.
•Disposal: Dispose of this material and its
container to a hazardous or special waste
collection point.
NOTE
Do not break the seal on the bottle. This
occurs automatically when the bottle is
screwed into the holder.
Related information
•Tire sealing system* – general information
(p. 324)
•Tire sealing system* – inflating tires (p. 329)
•Tire sealing system – checking inflation pres-
sure (p. 329)
•Tire sealing system* – sealing a hole
(p. 327)
•Tire sealing system* – sealing compound
container (p. 330)

WHEELS AND TIRES

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 327

Tire sealing system* – sealing a

hole

The tire sealing system can be used to tempo-

rarily seal a hole in the tread surface of a tire.

Stage 1: Sealing the hole

1. Peel off the speed limit sticker and affix it to

the steering wheel hub where it will be

clearly visible to the driver.

2. Ensure that the on/off switch is in position 0

(the 0 side of the switch should be pressed

down).

WARNING

Contact with the sealing compound may

cause skin irritation. If contact occurs, wash

the affected area immediately with soap and

water.

3. Unscrew the orange cover over the bottle

holder on the compressor and unscrew the

cap on the bottle of sealing compound.

NOTE

Do not break the seal on the bottle. This

occurs automatically when the bottle is

screwed into the holder.

4. Screw the bottle into the bottle holder as far

as possible.

WARNING

The bottle is equipped with a catch to keep it

securely in place and help prevent sealing

compound leakage. Once in place, the bottle

cannot be unscrewed. This must be done by a

trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

5. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s inflation

valve and screw the tire sealing system’s

hose connector onto the valve as tightly as

possible by hand. Be sure the air release

valve on the hose is completely closed.

6. Connect the electrical wire to the nearest

12-volt socket in the vehicle.

NOTE

Be sure that none of the other 12-volt sock-

ets is being used while the compressor is in

operation.

7. Start the vehicle’s engine.

WARNING

The vehicle´s engine should be running when

the tire sealing system is used to avoid bat-

tery drain. Therefore, be sure the vehicle is

parked in a well ventilated place, or outdoors,

before using the system.

8. Start the tire sealing system’s compressor by

pressing the on/off switch to position I.

WHEELS AND TIRES

328

WARNING

•Never stand next to the tire being inflated

when the compressor is in operation.

•If cracks, bubbles, etc. form on the tire,

switch off the compressor immediately.

•If there is visible damage to the sidewall or

the rim, the tire cannot be repaired. The

vehicle should not be driven if this occurs.

Contact a towing service or Volvo On Call

Roadside Assistance if applicable.

NOTE

The air pressure gauge will temporarily show

an increase in pressure to approximately

88 psi (6 bar) while the sealing compound is

being pumped into the tire. The pressure

should return to a normal level after approxi-

mately 30 seconds.

9. Within seven minutes, inflate the tire to

between 22—44 psi (1.8—3.0 bar). Switch

off the compressor briefly to get a clear

reading from the pressure gauge.

CAUTION

The compressor should not be used for more

than 10 minutes at a time to avoid overheat-

ing.

WARNING

If the pressure remains below 22 psi (1.8 bar)

after approximately seven minutes, turn off

the compressor. In this case, the hole is too

large to be sealed and the vehicle should not

be driven.

10. Switch off the compressor and disconnect

the electrical wire from the 12-volt socket.

11. Unscrew the hose from the tire's inflation

valve and put the cover on the hose back into

place to help prevent seepage of residual

sealing compound in the hose. Reinstall the

valve cap.

CAUTION

•After inflating the tires, always reinstall the

valve cap to help avoid damage to the

valve from dirt, gravel, etc.

•Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps

could corrode and become difficult to

remove.

12. Immediately drive the vehicle for approxi-

mately 2 miles (3 km) at a maximum speed

of 50 mph (80 km/h) to distribute the seal-

ing compound in the tire.

CAUTION

If your vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pres-

sure Monitoring System (TPMS), the use of

the sealing compound may lead to incorrect

tire pressure readings or in rare cases, dam-

age to the tire pressure sensor. Use the tire

sealing system to check and adjust the dam-

aged tire's inflation pressure.

NOTE

•Safely stow the tire sealing system in a

convenient place as it will soon be used

again to check the tire’s inflation pres-

sure.

•The empty bottle of sealing compound

cannot be removed from the bottle

holder. Consult a trained and qualified

Volvo service technician to have the bot-

tle removed and properly disposed of.

WHEELS AND TIRES

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 329

WARNING

If heavy vibrations, unsteady steering behavior,

or noises should occur while driving, reduce

speed and park the vehicle in a safe place.

Recheck the tire for bumps, cracks, or other

visible damage, and recheck its inflation pres-

sure. If the pressure is below 19 psi (1.3 bar),

do not continue driving. Have the vehicle

towed to a trained and qualified Volvo service

technician.

Tire sealing system – checking

inflation pressure

The tire sealing system can also be used to

check the tires' inflation pressure.

Stage 2: Checking inflation pressure

1. Reconnect the tire sealing system's hose to

the tire's inflation valve as described in stage

1, see Tire sealing system* – sealing a hole

(p. 327).

2. Refer to the inflation pressure table in this

chapter for the correct inflation pressure. If

the tire needs to be inflated, start the tire

sealing system’s compressor. If necessary,

release air from the tire by turning the air

release knob counterclockwise.

CAUTION

The compressor should not be used for more

than 10 minutes at a time to avoid overheat-

ing.

WARNING

If you interrupt your trip for more than 1 hour,

check the inflation pressure in the damaged

tire again before continuing.

Tire sealing system* – inflating tires

The tire sealing system can be used to inflate

the tires.

To do so:

1. Park the car in a safe place.

2. The compressor should be switched off.

Ensure that the on/off switch is in position

0 (the 0 side of the switch should be

pressed down).

3. Take out the electrical wire and hose.

4. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s inflation

valve and screw the hose connector onto the

valve as tightly as possible by hand.

5. Connect the electrical wire to the nearest

12-volt socket in the vehicle.

6. Start the vehicle’s engine.

WHEELS AND TIRES

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

330

WARNING

•The vehicle’s engine should be running

when the tire sealing system is used to

avoid battery drain. Therefore, be sure the

vehicle is parked in a well ventilated place,

or outdoors, before using the system. The

parking brake should be securely applied

and the gear selector should be in the P

(park) position.

•Children should never be left unattended

in the vehicle when the engine is running.

7. Check the tire’s inflation pressure on the

gauge. Switch off the compressor briefly to

get a clear reading from the pressure gauge.

8. Refer to the tire inflation table in this chapter

for the correct inflation pressure. If the tire

needs to be inflated, start the tire sealing

system’s compressor (press the on/off

switch to position I). If necessary, release air

from the tire by turning the air release knob

counterclockwise.

CAUTION

The compressor should not be used for more

than 10 minutes at a time to avoid overheat-

ing.

9. Turn off the compressor (press the on/off

switch to position 0) when the correct infla-

tion pressure has been reached.

10. Unscrew the hose from the tire’s inflation

valve and reinstall the valve cap.

CAUTION

•After inflating the tires, always reinstall the

valve cap to help avoid damage to the

valve from dirt, gravel, etc.

•Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps

could corrode and become difficult to

remove.

11. Disconnect the electrical wire from the

12-volt socket.

Tire sealing system* – sealing

compound container

The sealing compound container must be

replaced if the tire sealing system has been

used to repair a tire or if the container’s expira-

tion date has passed (see the date on decal).

Replacing the sealing compound

container

NOTE

•After use, the sealing compound bottle,

the hose, and certain other system com-

ponents must be replaced. Please con-

sult your Volvo retailer for replacement

parts.

•If the sealing compound bottle’s expira-

tion date has passed, please take it to a

Volvo retailer or a recycling station that

can properly dispose of harmful sub-

stances.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

332

Maintenance – introduction

Periodic maintenance will help keep your vehicle

running well.

Introduction

The maintenance services contain several checks

that require special instruments and tools and

therefore must be performed by a qualified tech-

nician. To keep your Volvo in top condition, spec-

ify time-tested and proven Genuine Volvo Parts

and Accessories.

The Federal Clean Air Act – U.S.

The Federal Clean Air Act requires vehicle manu-

facturers to furnish written instructions to the ulti-

mate purchaser to assure the proper servicing

and function of the components that control

emissions. These services, which are listed in the

"Warranty and Service Records Information"

booklet, are not covered by the warranty. You will

be required to pay for labor and material used.

Maintenance

Your Volvo passed several major inspections

before it was delivered to you, in accordance with

Volvo specifications. The maintenance proce-

dures outlined in the Warranty and Service

Records Information booklet, many of which will

positively affect your vehicle's emissions, should

be performed as indicated. It is recommended

that receipts for vehicle emission maintenance be

retained in case questions arise concerning

maintenance. Inspection and maintenance should

also be performed anytime a malfunction is

observed or suspected.

Applicable warranties – U.S./Canada

In accordance with applicable U.S. and Canadian

regulations, the following list of warranties is pro-

vided.

•New Vehicle Limited Warranty

•Parts and Accessories Limited Warranty

•Corrosion Protection Limited Warranty

•Seat Belt and Supplemental Restraint Sys-

tems Limited Warranty

•Emission Design and Defect Warranty

•Emission Performance Warranty

These are the federal warranties; other warran-

ties are provided as required by state/provincial

law. Refer to your separate Warranty and Service

Records Information booklet for detailed informa-

tion concerning each of the warranties.

Periodic maintenance helps minimize

emissions

NOTE

•Refer to your Warranty and Service

Records Information booklet for a com-

prehensive service and maintenance

schedule up to 150,000 miles (240,000

km). This program contains inspections

and services necessary for the proper

function of your vehicle and includes

components that affect vehicle emis-

sions.

•The Warranty and Service Records Infor-

mation booklet also contains detailed

information concerning the warranties

that apply to your vehicle.

Related information

•Climate – general information (p. 126)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
333
Maintenance – owner maintenance
Periodic maintenance requirements and intervals
are described in your vehicle's Warranty and
Service Records Information booklet.
The following points can be carried out between
the normally scheduled maintenance services.
Owner maintenance
Each time the car is refueled:
•Check the engine oil level.
•Clean the windshield, windshield wipers,
headlights, and taillights.
Monthly:
•Check cold tire pressure in all tires. Inspect
the tires for wear.
•Check that engine coolant and other fluid
levels are between the indicated "min" and
"max" markings.
•Clean interior glass surfaces with a glass
cleaner and soft paper towels.
•Wipe driver information displays with a soft
cloth.
•Visually inspect battery terminals for corro-
sion. Corrosion may indicate a loose terminal
connector, or a battery near the end of its
useful service life. Consult your Volvo retailer
for additional information.
As needed:
Wash the car, including the undercarriage, to
reduce wear that can be caused by a buildup of
dirt, and corrosion that can be caused by salt res-
idues.
Clean leaves and twigs from air intake vents at
the base of the windshield, and from other places
where they may collect.
NOTE
Complete service information for qualified
technicians is available online for purchase or
subscription at www.volvotechinfo.com.
Related information
•Maintenance – opening/closing hood
(p. 337)
•Engine compartment – overview (p. 338)
•Engine compartment – coolant (p. 341)
•Engine compartment – engine oil (p. 339)
•Engine compartment – power steering fluid
(p. 343)
•Engine compartment – washer fluid (p. 354)
•Cleaning the interior (p. 371)
•Washing the car (p. 369)
•Tire inflation – checking pressure (p. 309)
•Tires – tread wear indicator (p. 302)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

334

Maintenance – hoisting

When the vehicle is hoisted, the jack or garage

lift must be positioned in the correct lifting

points.

Hoisting the vehicle

If a garage jack is used to lift the vehicle, it

should be placed:

Front: under either of the two reinforced areas

under the front section of the vehicle, not under

to jack attachment points (the outermost

points shown in the illustration).

Rear: Under the jack attachment points.

Ensure that the jack is positioned so that the

vehicle cannot slide off it. Always use axle stands

or similar structures.

Related information

•Changing a wheel – removing wheel (p. 303)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 335

Onboard Diagnostic System

OBD II is part of your vehicle's computerized

engine management system. It stores diagnostic

information about your vehicle's emission con-

trols. It can light the Check Engine light (MIL) if it

detects an emission control "fault." A "fault" is a

component or system that is not performing

within an expected range. A fault may be perma-

nent or temporary. OBD II will store a message

about any fault.

Emission inspection readiness

How do states use OBD II for emission

inspections?

Many states connect a computer directly to a

vehicle's OBD II system. The inspector can then

read "faults." In some states, this type of inspec-

tion has replaced the tailpipe emission test.

How can my vehicle fail OBD II emission

inspection?

Your vehicle can fail OBD II emission inspection

for any of the following reasons.

•If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit, your

vehicle may fail inspection.

•If your vehicle's Check Engine light was lit,

but went out without any action on your part,

OBD II will still have a recorded fault. Your

vehicle may pass or fail, depending on the

inspection practices in your area.

•If you had recent service that required dis-

connecting the battery, OBD II diagnostic

information may be incomplete and "not

ready" for inspection. A vehicle that is not

ready may fail inspection.

How can I prepare for my next OBD II

emission inspection?

•If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit – or was

lit but went out without service, have your

vehicle diagnosed and, if necessary, serviced

by a qualified Volvo technician.

•If you recently had service for a lit Check

Engine light, or if you had service that

required disconnecting the battery, a period

of driving is necessary to bring the OBD II

system to "ready" for inspection. Two half-

hour trips of mixed stop-and-go/highway

driving are typically needed to allow OBD II to

reach readiness. Your Volvo retailer can pro-

vide you with more information on planning a

trip.

•Maintain your vehicle in accordance with your

vehicle's maintenance schedule.

Booking service and repairs

Connected Service Booking (CSB) makes set-

ting up a time for service, maintenance and/or

repairs directly from the vehicle quick and con-

venient.

Prerequisites

•The owner (primary driver) must have a valid

Volvo ID. See Volvo ID (p. 22) for additional

information.

•The vehicle must be connected to the Inter-

net using a paired Bluetooth® cell phone.

See your Sensus Infotainment supplement

for information on pairing a cell phone. On

models equipped with Volvo On Call (VOC)*,

you can connect to the Internet using your

separate VOC data plan. Refer to your sepa-

rate Volvo On Call manual.

•By default, the retailer where you purchased

your vehicle will be your preferred (primary)

retailer/Volvo authorized workshop who will

perform service and repairs on your vehicle.

To change the preferred retailer, go to Dealer

Locator at volvocars.com and select a

retailer, click on Service Scheduler and book

an appointment at the new preferred retailer.

•In order to be guided through the on-screen

steps, the menu alternative Display

notifications must be activated.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

336

CSB menu access

Once the prerequisites have been established, all

CSB-related menus can be accessed in MY CAR

by pressing OK/MENU and then selecting

Maintenance & repair.

Booking information and data from the

vehicle

If you request an appointment from your vehicle,

with your consent, booking information and data

about your vehicle1 will be transmitted to your

preferred retailer.

Using the service

Once the prerequisites have been established, all

CSB-related menus can be accessed in MY CAR

by pressing OK/MENU and then selecting

Maintenance & repair.

If the time for the next regularly scheduled serv-

ice is approaching, if the vehicle requires certain

types of repairs or if a system needs to be

checked, a message will be displayed. You will

then by guided through the steps required to

book service or repairs.

On-screen service messages

On-screen service message

The pop-up service alert menu offers the follow-

ing alternatives:

•Yes: The vehicle will transmit a booking

request as well as vehicle data directly to

your preferred retailer. In return, you will

receive an email from this retailer with a link

to their booking portal. From a smartphone or

a computer, you can select a day and time

that suits you and specify any other service

requests that you may have. When you have

submitted your request, it will be entered into

the retailer's booking portal and you will

receive immediate confirmation online and

via email. The service reminder light in the

vehicle's instrument panel will also be turned

off remotely by Volvo.

•No: No other messages will be displayed on

the Sensus screen but the Service Reminder

Light on the vehicle's instrument panel will

stay on. If you have answered "No", service

can still be booked manually (see the follow-

ing section).

•Postpone: The pop-up menu will be dis-

played that next time the engine is started.

Booking service or repairs manually

Access your Volvo On-Line Service Scheduler

portal from a smartphone or a computer to select

a day and time that suits you and specify any

other service requests that you may have. When

you have submitted your request, it will be

entered into the retailer's booking portal and you

will receive immediate confirmation online and via

email.

My Appointments

This displays booking information.

–Select Maintenance & repair My

Appointments.

Transmitting vehicle data

In order for a retailer to access vehicle data, the

information is initially sent to a central Volvo

database (not directly to your retailer) where any

1This information includes: service requirements, status of various functions, odometer reading and the vehicle's VIN number and software version.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

337

retailer can access or search for this information

using your vehicle's VIN number. This number

can be found in your warranty booklet or on the

dashboard at the lower left corner of the wind-

shield.

–Select Maintenance & repair Send

vehicle data.

Booking information and vehicle data

When you opt to book service from your vehicle,

booking information and vehicle data will be

transmitted. Vehicle data consists of a number of

parameters in the following areas:

•Service requirements

•Function status

•Fluid levels

•Odometer reading (mileage)

•Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

•The vehicle's software version

Related information

•Volvo ID (p. 22)

Maintenance – opening/closing

hood

The hood is opened by first releasing the lock

from the passenger compartment and then

pressing the release control.

Opening and closing the hood

Turn the handle located under the left side of

the dash approximately 20-25 degrees

clockwise to release the hood lock.

Lift the hood slightly. Press the release con-

trol (located under the right front edge of the

hood) to the left, and lift the hood.

WARNING

Check that the hood locks properly when

closed.

Related information

•Maintenance – owner maintenance (p. 333)

•Engine compartment – overview (p. 338)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

338

Engine compartment – overview

The overview shows the main inspection points

in the engine compartment.

Coolant expansion tank

Power steering fluid reservoir

Dipstick-engine oil

Filler cap-engine oil

Cover over brake fluid reservoir

Battery

Relay/fuse box

Washer fluid reservoir

Engine compartment - 4-cylinder engines only

Filler cap-engine oil

Coolant expansion tank

Radiator

Brake fluid reservoir

Battery

Relay/fuse box

Washer fluid reservoir

Air cleaner

The appearance of the engine compartment may

vary depending on engine model.

WARNING

The cooling fan (located at the front of the

engine compartment, behind the radiator) may

start or continue to operate (for up to

6 minutes) after the engine has been

switched off.

WARNING

Before performing any operations in the

engine compartment, the ignition should

always be completely switched off (in mode 0,

see Ignition modes (p. 80)) and there should

be no remote keys in the passenger compart-

ment. The gear selector should be in the P

(park) position. If the engine has been run-

ning, wait until it has cooled before touching

any components in the engine compartment.

The distributor ignition system operates at

very high voltages. Special safety precautions

must be followed to prevent injury. Always

turn the ignition off when:

•Replacing distributor ignition components

e.g. plugs, coil, etc.

•Do not touch any part of the distributor

ignition system while the engine is run-

ning. This may result in unintended move-

ments and body injury.

Related information

•Maintenance – opening/closing hood

(p. 337)

•Maintenance – owner maintenance (p. 333)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

}}

339

Engine compartment – engine oil

The correct oil must be used for the stated oil

change (service) intervals to apply.

The oil level on 4-cylinder engines is checked

electronically and is checked using a dipstick on

5- and 6-cylinder engines.

Checking the engine oil (5- and 6-

cylinder engines)

The oil level should be checked at regular inter-

vals, particularly during the period up to the first

scheduled maintenance service.

•See Oil specifications (p. 383) for oil specifi-

cations.

•Also, refer to the Warranty and Service

Records information booklet for information

on oil change intervals and oil specifications.

CAUTION

•Not checking the oil level regularly can

result in serious engine damage if the oil

level becomes too low.

•Oil that is lower than the specified quality

can damage the engine.

•Volvo does not recommend the use of oil

additives.

•Always add oil of the same type and vis-

cosity as already used.

•Never fill oil above the MAX mark. This

could cause an increase in oil consump-

tion.

•Oil changes should be carried out by a

trained and qualified Volvo service techni-

cian.

Checking and adding oil

G021734

Location of the filler cap and dipstick

NOTE

Before checking the oil:

•The car should be parked on a level sur-

face.

•If the engine is warm, wait for at least

10 – 15 minutes after the engine has

been switched off.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

340

G021737

The oil level must be between the MIN and MAX marks

on the dipstick

Checking the oil

1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a lint-

free rag.

2. Reinsert the dipstick, pull it out, and check

the oil level. The level must be between the

MIN and MAX marks.

3. Add oil if necessary. If the level is close to

the MIN mark, add approximately

0.5 US quarts (0.5 liters) of oil.

4. Recheck the level and add more oil if neces-

sary until the level is near the MAX mark.

WARNING

Do not allow oil to spill onto or come into con-

tact with hot exhaust pipe surfaces.

Electronic oil level sensor (4-cylinder

engines only)

Oil filler cap

No action is necessary until a message is dis-

played, see the following illustration.

Left: digital instrument panel*, Right: analog instrument

panel

Message

Oil level

The oil level can be checked when the engine is

not running by scrolling to the oil level sensor

using the thumb wheel on the left steering wheel

lever.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

}}

341

CAUTION

•If Oil service required is displayed, the

oil level may be too high. Take the vehicle

to an authorized Volvo workshop as soon

as possible.

•If the oil level sensor indicates that the

level is too low, using the correct oil, top

up with the amount of oil indicated as

soon as possible, see oil specifica-

tions (p. 383).

WARNING

Do not allow oil to spill onto or come into con-

tact with hot exhaust pipe surfaces.

Electronically checking the oil level

The oil level should be checked at regular inter-

vals, particularly during the period up to the first

scheduled maintenance service.

To check the oil level:

1. Activate ignition mode II, see Ignition modes

(p. 80).

2. Turn the thumb wheel on the left steering

wheel lever until Oil level is displayed.

> The oil level will be displayed.

NOTE

•The system cannot detect changes in the

oil level immediately. The vehicle must be

driven approximately 20 miles (30 km) or

have been parked on level ground with

the engine off for 5 minutes before the

oil level reading will be correct.

•If the necessary conditions are not met

for checking the oil level electronically

(time interval after the engine was

switched off, if the vehicle is parked on

an incline, etc.), No values available will

be displayed. This does not indicate a

problem with the oil level sensor.

Engine compartment – coolant

Normally, the coolant does not need to be

changed. If the system must be drained, consult

a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

Level check and filling

Location of the coolant reservoir

See Fuel tank volume – specification and volume

(p. 386) for information on cooling system

capacities.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

342

CAUTION

•If necessary, top up the cooling system

with Volvo Genuine Coolant/Antifreeze

only (a 50/50 mix of water and anti-

freeze).

•Different types of antifreeze/coolant may

not be mixed.

•If the cooling system is drained, it should

be flushed with clean water or premixed

anti-freeze before it is refilled with the

correct mixture of water/anti-freeze.

•The cooling system must always be kept

filled to the correct level, and the level

must be between the MIN and MAX

marks. If it is not kept filled, there can be

high local temperatures in the engine

which could result in damage. Check

coolant regularly!

•Do not top up with water only. This

reduces the rust-protective and anti-

freeze qualities of the coolant and has a

lower boiling point. It can also cause

damage to the cooling system if it should

freeze.

•Do not use chlorinated tap water in the

vehicle's cooling system.

WARNING

•Never remove the expansion tank cap

while the engine is warm. Wait until the

engine cools.

•If it is necessary to top off the coolant

when the engine is warm, unscrew the

expansion tank cap slowly so that the

overpressure dissipates.

Engine compartment – brake fluid

The brake fluid should always be between the

MIN and MAX marks on the inside of the reser-

voir.

Location of the brake fluid reservoir

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

}}

343

Checking the level

The fluid reservoir is concealed under the round

cover at the rear of the engine compartment. The

round cover must be removed first before the

reservoir cap can be accessed.

Check, without removing the cap, that there is

sufficient fluid in the reservoir.

Fluid type: DOT 4 boiling point >536 °F

(>280 °C).

Replace: The fluid should be replaced according

to the intervals specified in the Warranty and

Service Records Information booklet.

When driving under extremely hard conditions

(mountain driving, etc), it may be necessary to

replace the fluid more often. Consult a trained

and qualified Volvo service technician.

Always entrust brake fluid changing to a trained

and qualified Volvo service technician.

WARNING

•If the fluid level is below the MIN mark in

the reservoir or if a brake-related mes-

sage is shown in the information display:

DO NOT DRIVE. Have the car towed to a

trained and qualified Volvo service techni-

cian and have the brake system inspec-

ted.

•Dot 4 should never be mixed with any

other type of brake fluid.

Filling

1. Turn and open the cover.

2. Unscrew the reservoir cap and fill the fluid.

The level must be between the MIN and

MAX marks.

Engine compartment – power

steering fluid

The fluid level must be between the MIN and

MAX marks. For capacities and recommended

fluid grade, see Fuel tank volume – specification

and volume (p. 386).

Check the level frequently. It does not normally

require changing.

WARNING

If a problem should occur in the power steer-

ing system or if the vehicle has no electrical

current and must be towed, it is still possible

to steer the vehicle. However, keep in mind

that greater effort will be required to turn the

steering wheel.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

344

CAUTION

Keep the area around the power steering

fluid reservoir clean when checking.

Bulbs – introduction

Certain bulbs can be replaced by the vehicle's

owner. However, the bulbs on the following list

should only be replaced by a trained and quali-

fied Volvo service technician.

All bulb specifications are listed in Bulbs – speci-

fications (p. 351).

•Active Bending Lights

•Front parking lights

•Front side marker lights

•Cornering lights

•Turn signals in the door mirrors

•Approach lighting in the door mirrors

•Interior lighting (except for the front footwell

lighting)

•Rear parking lights/side marker lights

•LED bulbs

NOTE

•For information regarding any bulbs not

mentioned in this section, please contact

your Volvo retailer or a trained and

authorized Volvo service technician.

•Always switch off the ignition before star-

ting to replace a bulb.

•If an error message remains in the dis-

play after a faulty bulb has been replaced,

contact an authorized Volvo workshop.

•Condensation may form temporarily on

the inside of the lenses of exterior lights

such as headlights, fog lights, or taillights.

This is normal and the lights are

designed to withstand moisture. Normally,

condensation will dissipate after the

lights have been on for a short time.

•The optional Active Bending Light bulbs

contain trace amounts of mercury. These

bulbs should always be disposed of by a

trained and qualified Volvo service techni-

cian.

CAUTION

Never touch the glass of bulbs with your fin-

gers. Grease and oils from your fingers vapor-

ize in the heat and will leave a deposit on the

reflector, which will damage it.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 345

WARNING

•The engine should not be running when

changing bulbs.

•If the engine has been running just prior

to replacing bulbs in the headlight hous-

ing, please keep in mind that components

in the engine compartment will be hot.

WARNING

•Active Bending Lights* – due to the high

voltage used by these headlights, these

bulbs should only be replaced by a

trained and qualified Volvo service techni-

cian.

•Turn off the lights and remove the remote

key from the ignition before changing any

bulbs.

Related information

•Bulbs – headlight housing (p. 345)

•Bulbs – taillight housing (p. 349)

•Bulbs – vanity mirror lighting (p. 350)

•Bulbs – cargo area lighting (p. 350)

•Bulbs – license plate lighting (p. 350)

Bulbs – headlight housing

The entire headlight housing must be lifted out

when replacing all front bulbs.

Removing the headlight housing

Pull out the headlight housing's locking pins.

Remove the headlight housing by alterna-

tively pulling the front and rear edges until it

can be lifted out.

CAUTION

When disconnecting the connector, pull on

the connector itself and not on the wiring.

Unplug the wiring connector by holding down

the clip with your thumb.

Pull the connector out with the other hand.

5. Lift out the headlight housing and place it on

a soft surface to avoid scratching the lens.

6. Replace the defective bulb(s).

Reinserting the headlight housing

1. Plug in the connector until it clicks into place.

||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
346
2. Reinstall the headlight housing and locking
pins. The short locking pin should be closest
to the grille. Check that they are correctly
inserted.
The headlight housing must be properly in
place and the wiring connector correctly
reconnected before the lighting is switched
on or the remote key is inserted into the igni-
tion slot.
3. Check that the lights function properly.
Related information
•Bulbs – introduction (p. 344)
•Bulbs – cover (p. 346)
•Bulbs – specifications (p. 351)
Bulbs – cover
The larger cover has to be removed in order to
change the high/low beam headlight bulbs.
Removing the cover to access the
bulbs
NOTE
Before starting to replace a bulb, see Bulbs –
introduction (p. 344).
1. Loosen the cover's four retaining screws
(3-4 turns) with a Torx T20 tool (1). The
screws should not be removed completely.
2. Push the cover to the side.
3. Remove the cover.
Reinstall the cover in the reverse order.
Related information
•Bulbs – headlight housing (p. 345)
•Bulbs – low beam, Halogen (p. 347)
•Bulbs – high beam, Halogen (p. 347)
•Bulbs – extra high beam (p. 348)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

347

Bulbs – low beam, Halogen

The low beam bulb is concealed by the larger

cover.

1. Remove the headlight housing from the vehi-

cle (see Bulbs – headlight housing (p. 345)).

2. Remove the cover over the bulbs (see Bulbs

– cover (p. 346)).

3. Unplug the connector from the bulb.

4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out.

5. The guide lug on the new bulb should be

straight up when the bulb is inserted into the

holder and the bulb should snap into place.

6. Put the cover back into position and reinstall

the headlight housing.

Related information

•Bulbs – specifications (p. 351)

Bulbs – high beam, Halogen

The high beam bulb is concealed behind the

larger cover.

1. Remove the headlight housing from the vehi-

cle (see Bulbs – headlight housing (p. 345)).

2. Remove the cover over the bulbs (see Bulbs

– cover (p. 346)).

3. Remove the bulb by turning it counterclock-

wise and pulling it straight out.

4. Remove the connector from the bulb.

5. Press the new bulb into the socket and turn

it clockwise to put it in place. It can only be

secured in one position.

6. Reinsert the bulb holder into the headlight

housing.

7. Put the cover back into position and reinstall

the headlight housing.

Related information

•Bulbs – specifications (p. 351)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

348

Bulbs – extra high beam

The extra high beam bulb is concealed by the

larger cover.

Extra high beam2

1. Remove the headlight housing from the vehi-

cle (see Bulbs – headlight housing (p. 345)).

2. Remove the cover over the bulbs (see Bulbs

– cover (p. 346)).

3. Remove the bulb by turning it counterclock-

wise and pulling it straight out.

4. Remove the connector from the bulb.

5. Press the new bulb into the socket and turn

it clockwise to put it in place. It can only be

secured in one position.

6. Put the cover back into position and reinstall

the headlight housing.

Related information

•Bulbs – specifications (p. 351)

Bulbs – front turn signals

The turn signal bulb is concealed behind the

smaller cover.

1. Remove the headlight housing from the vehi-

cle (see Bulbs – headlight housing (p. 345)).

2. Remove the cover by pulling it straight out.

3. Pull the holder to access the bulb.

4. Press in the bulb and turn it to remove it

from the holder.

5. Press and turn the new bulb into place.

6. Reinsert the bulb holder into the headlight

housing.

7. Put the cover back into position and reinstall

the headlight housing.

2Models with optional Active Bending Lights only.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

349

Related information

•Bulbs – specifications (p. 351)

Bulbs – taillight housing

The backup lights, fog lights and turn signals are

replaced from inside the cargo area

Brake light (LED)

Parking lights/side marker light (LED)

Turn signal

Brake light (LED)

Backup light

Rear fog light

1. Open the panel.

2. Pull the insulation in front of the bulb holder

straight out.

3. Press down the catch and pull out the bulb

holder.

4. Remove the defective bulb by pressing it in

and turning it counterclockwise.

5. Press a new bulb into place and turn it clock-

wise.

6. Hold down the catch and press the bulb

holder back into place.

7. Put the insulation and panel back in place.

Related information

•Bulbs – introduction (p. 344)

•Bulbs – specifications (p. 351)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

350

Bulbs – license plate lighting

The license plate lighting is located next to the

tailgate handle.

1. Remove the screws with a screwdriver.

2. Carefully detach the entire bulb housing and

pull it out.

3. Replace the bulb.

4. Reinsert the entire bulb housing and tighten

the screws.

Related information

•Bulbs – specifications (p. 351)

Bulbs – cargo area lighting

The cargo area light is located in the ceiling

liner.

G031942

1. Insert a screwdriver and gently turn so that

the bulb housing comes loose.

2. Replace the bulb.

3. Check that the bulb illuminates and press it

back into the bulb housing.

Related information

•Bulbs – specifications (p. 351)

Bulbs – vanity mirror lighting

The vanity mirror bulbs are located behind the

lens.

Removing the lens

1. Insert a screwdriver underneath the side of

the lens and carefully pry up the lug on the

edge.

2. Carefully detach and lift out the lens.

3. Use needle nose pliers to pull the bulb

straight to the side. Replace the bulb. Do not

exert too much pressure on the bulb with the

pliers to help avoid damaging it.

Reinstalling the lens

1. Put the lens back into position.

2. Press it into place.

Related information

•Bulbs – specifications (p. 351)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 351

Bulbs – specifications

The following bulbs can be replaced by the vehi-

cles owner. All other bulbs should only be

replaced by a trained and qualified Volvo service

technician.

Lighting function Wat-

tage

Bulb

Low beam (halo-

gen)

55 H11 LL

High beam (halo-

gen)

65 H9

Extra high beam

(models with

Active Bending

Lights*)

55 H7 LL

Front turn signals 24 PY24W

License plate light-

ing

5 C5W LL

Vanity mirror light-

ing

1.2 W2x4.6d type

Glove compart-

ment lighting

5 SV8.5 (length

43mm)

Rear turn signals 21 PY21W LL

Rear fog light 21 H21W LL

Lighting function Wat-

tage

Bulb

Backup light 21 H21W LL

Brake light 21 P21W LL

Cargo area lighting 5 SV8.5 (length

43mm)

Front footwell

lighting

3 W2, 1x9.5d

type T10

NOTE

Please consult a Volvo retailer’s Parts depart-

ment for the most up-to-date bulb specifica-

tions.

Related information

•Bulbs – introduction (p. 344)

Wiper blades – service position

The windshield wiper blades must be in the verti-

cal (service) position for replacement, washing

or to lift them away from the windshield when

e.g., removing ice or snow.

Wiper blades in service position

CAUTION

Be sure the wiper blades are not frozen in

position before attempting to move them to

the service position.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

352

To put the windshiield wipers in the service posi-

tion:

1. Insert the remote key into the ignition slot3

and press the START/STOP ENGINE but-

ton briefly to put the ignition in mode I (see

Ignition modes (p. 80) for detailed informa-

tion about the ignition modes).

2. Press the START/STOP ENGINE button

again briefly to switch the ignition off.

3. Within 3 seconds, move the right steering

wheel lever up and hold it for at least 1 sec-

ond.

> The wipers will then move to the vertical

(service) position on the windshield.

The wipers can be returned to the normal posi-

tion by pressing the START/STOP ENGINE but-

ton briefly to put the ignition in mode I (or by

starting the engine).

CAUTION

If the wiper arms have been folded out from

the windshield while in the service position,

fold them back against the windshield before

returning the wipers to the normal position to

help avoid scratching the paint on the hood.

Related information

•Engine compartment – washer fluid (p. 354)

Wiper blades – windshield

The wiper blades should be replaced regularly

for best effect.

The windshield wiper blades must be in the verti-

cal (service) position for replacement, washing

or to lift them away from the windshield when

e.g., removing ice or snow.

Replacing the windshield wiper blades

NOTE

The windshield wiper blades are different

lengths. The blade on the driver’s side is

longer than the one on the passenger side.

3Not necessary on vehicles with the optional keyless drive.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

353

With the wipers in the service position, fold

out the wiper arm from the windshield. Press

the button on the wiper blade attachment

and pull the wiper blade straight out, parallel

with the wiper arm.

Slide in the new wiper blade until it clicks

into place.

Check that the blade is securely in place.

4. Press the wipers back against the wind-

shield.

To return the wipers from the service position to

the normal position, fold the wipers back against

the windshield and press the START/STOP

ENGINE button briefly to put the ignition in mode

I (or start the engine).

Cleaning

Keeping the windshield and wiper blades clean

helps improve visibility and prolongs the service

life of the wiper blades. Clean the wiper blades

with a stiff-bristle brush and lukewarm soap solu-

tion or car washing detergent.

Related information

•Engine compartment – washer fluid (p. 354)

•Wiper blades – service position (p. 351)

Wiper blades – tailgate

The wiper blades should be replaced regularly

for best effect.

Replacing the tailgate wiper blade

1. Fold the wiper arm outward.

2. Angle the wiper blade out slightly from the

wiper arm.

3. Grasp around the wiper arm and press the

wiper blade forward (at the arrow) with your

thumb to detach it.

4. Press the new wiper blade into place and

check that it seats securely.

5. Fold the wiper arm back toward the tailgate

window.

Cleaning

Keeping the wiper blade clean helps improve visi-

bility and prolongs its service life. Clean it with a

stiff-bristle brush and lukewarm soap solution or

car washing detergent.

Related information

•Engine compartment – washer fluid (p. 354)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

354

Engine compartment – washer fluid

Washer fluid helps keep the windshield and

headlights clean. During cold weather, the reser-

voir should be filled with windshield washer sol-

vent containing antifreeze. Use Volvo Original

Washer Fluid or the equivalent with a recom-

mended pH value between 6 and 8.

Location of the washer fluid reservoir

The windshield and headlight washers share a

common reservoir.

The washer fluid reservoir is located on the driv-

er's side of the engine compartment. For capaci-

ties, see the printed Owner's Manual.

Specification:Use a washer antifreeze recom-

mended by Volvo, mixed with water.

Volume:

•6.8 US qts (6.5 liters)

•4.7 US qts (4.5 liters4)

Related information

•Wiper blades – service position (p. 351)

Battery – symbols

There are information and warning symbols on

the battery.

Symbols on the battery

Wear protective goggles.

Keep away from children.

Avoid smoking, open

flames, and/or sparks.

See the owner's manual.

4Models without headlight washers

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

}}

355

Contains corrosive acid.

Risk of explosion

Recycle properly

NOTE

A used battery should be disposed of in an

environmentally responsible manner. Consult

your Volvo retailer or take the battery to a

recycling station.

Related information

•Battery – changing (p. 357)

•Battery – handling (p. 355)

•Battery – maintenance (p. 356)

Battery – handling

The battery's service life is affected by the num-

ber of starts, if it has been discharged, driving

style, driving conditions, weather conditions ,etc.

Handling

•Check that the battery cables are correctly

connected and tightened.

•Never disconnect the battery when the

engine is running (for example, when replac-

ing the battery).

•If the battery is fully discharged a number of

times, this may shorten its service life.

•The service life of a battery is affected by

factors such as the number of starts, driving

conditions and climate. Extreme cold may

also further decrease the battery’s starting

capacity.

•Because the battery’s starting capacity

decreases with time, it may be necessary to

recharge it if the vehicle is not driven for an

extended period of time or if the vehicle is

usually only driven short distances.

•Never use a quick charger to charge the bat-

tery. Only traditional types of battery chargers

should be used.

CAUTION

The infotainment system's energy-saving fea-

ture may not function correctly or at all,

and/or a message may be displayed if a bat-

tery charger or jumper cables are not con-

nected properly.

•The negative terminal on the battery must

never be used to connect a jumper cable

or a battery charger. Only the ground

point on the chassis may be used.

See Jump starting (p. 261) for an illustration

and additional information.

WARNING

•Never expose the battery to open flame

or electric spark.

•Do not smoke near the battery.

•Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not

allow battery fluid to contact eyes, skin,

fabrics or painted surfaces. If contact

occurs, flush the affected area immedi-

ately with water. Obtain medical help

immediately if eyes are affected.

NOTE

The life of the battery is shortened if it

becomes discharged repeatedly.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

356

Related information

•Battery – changing (p. 357)

•Battery – maintenance (p. 356)

•Battery – symbols (p. 354)

Battery – maintenance

Proper battery maintenance can help prolong its

service life.

Maintenance

•Use a screw driver to open the caps or cover

and a flashlight to inspect the level.

•If necessary, add distilled water. The level

should never be above the indicator.

•The fluid level should be checked if the bat-

tery has been recharged.

•After inspection, be sure the cap over each

battery cell or the cover is securely in place.

•Check that the battery cables are correctly

connected and properly tightened.

•Never disconnect the battery when the

engine is running, or when the key is in the

ignition. This could damage the vehicle's

electrical system.

•The battery should be disconnected from the

vehicle when a battery charger is used

directly on the battery.

•To help keep the battery in good condition,

the vehicle should be driven for at least 15

minutes a week or connected to a charger

with an automatic charging function.

•If the battery is fully discharged a number of

times, this may shorten its service life. Keep-

ing the battery fully charged helps prolong its

service life.

•The service life of a battery is affected by

factors such as driving conditions and cli-

mate. Extreme cold may also further

decrease the battery’s starting capacity.

•Because the battery’s starting capacity

decreases with time, it may be necessary to

recharge it if the vehicle is not driven for an

extended period of time or if the vehicle is

usually only driven short distances.

CAUTION

•Always use distilled or deionized water

(battery water).

•Never fill above the level mark in the cell.

Related information

•Battery – changing (p. 357)

•Battery – handling (p. 355)

•Battery – symbols (p. 354)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

}}

357

Battery – changing

When changing batteries, be sure to use the

correct battery for your vehicle. Consult a Volvo

retailer or a trained and qualified Volvo service

technician.

Changing

WARNING

Connect and disconnect the positive and neg-

ative cables in the correct sequence.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

358

Removal

Switch off the ignition, remove the remote key

from the ignition slot and wait at least 5 minutes

before disconnecting the battery so that all infor-

mation in the vehicle's electrical system can be

stored in the control modules.

Open the clips on the front cover and remove

the cover.

Release the rubber molding so that the rear

cover is free.

Remove the rear cover by pulling it away.

Detach the black negative cable.

Detach the red positive cable

Detach the ventilation hose from the bat-

tery

Loosen the screw holding the battery

clamp.

Move the battery to the side and lift it up.

WARNING

PROPOSITION 65 WARNING!

Battery posts, terminals, and related accesso-

ries contain lead and lead compounds, chemi-

cals known to the state of California to cause

cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands

after handling.

Rally bar R-Design models*

Rally bar and bulkhead hatch

Vehicles with the optional R-Design package are

equipped with a rally bar in the engine compart-

ment that must be removed before the battery

can be replaced.

1. Remove the hatch in the bulkhead on both

sides of the engine compartment (pry them

up carefully with a plastic knife or similar

object).

2. Remove the screw on each side of the

engine compartment holding the rally bar in

place.

3. Lift out the rally bar.

> The battery can now be removed (see the

instructions in the previous section).

•After a new battery has been installed (see

the following section), reinstall the rally bar in

the reverse order.

NOTE

When reinstalling the rally bar, tighten the

screws to 22 ft lbs (30 Nm).

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

359

Installation

1. Lower the battery into the battery box.

2. Move the battery inward and to the side until

it reaches the rear edge of the box.

3. Tighten the clamp that secures the battery.

4. Connect the ventilation hose.

> Be sure that it is correctly connected to

the battery and the vent in the vehicle's

body.

5. Connect the red positive cable.

6. Connect the black negative cable.

7. Press in the rear cover. (See Removal).

8. Reinstall the molding. (See Removal).

9. Reinstall the front cover and secure it with

the clips. (See Removal).

Related information

•Battery – handling (p. 355)

•Battery – symbols (p. 354)

Fuses – introduction

The fuses help protect the vehicle's electrical

components from overloading.

There are relay/fuseboxes located in the engine

compartment, the passenger compartment and

the cargo area.

If an electrical component fails to function, this

may be due to a blown fuse. The easiest way to

see if a fuse is blown is to remove it.

To do so:

1. Pull the fuse straight out. If a fuse is difficult

to remove, a special fuse removal tool is

located on the inside of the engine com-

partment fusebox cover.

2. From the side, examine the curved metal wire

in the fuse to see if it is intact.

If the wire is broken, insert a new fuse of the

same color and amperage (written on the fuse).

If fuses burn out repeatedly, have the electrical

system inspected by a trained and qualified Volvo

service technician.

WARNING

Never use metal objects or fuses with higher

amperage than those stated on the following

pages. Doing so could seriously damage or

overload the vehicle's electrical system.

Location of the fuseboxes

Engine compartment

Under the glove compartment

Cargo area (under the floor)

Engine compartment cold zone (Start/Stop

only)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

360

Fuses – engine compartment

The fuses in the engine compartment protect

e.g., engine and brake functions.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 361

Engine compartment, upper

Engine compartment, front

Engine compartment, lower

Positions

These fuses are all located in the engine com-

partment box. Fuses in C are located under A.

A decal on the inside of the cover shows the

positions of the fuses.

•Fuses 1 – 15, 34 and 42 – 44 are relays/

circuit breakers and should only be removed

or replaced by a trained and qualified Volvo

service technician.

•Fuses 16 – 33 and 35 – 41 may be changed

at any time when necessary.

There is a special fuse removal tool on the under-

side of the cover.

Pos Function A

Circuit breaker: central

electrical module under

the glove compartmentA

Circuit breaker: central

electrical module under

the glove compartment

Pos Function A

Circuit breaker: central

electrical module in the

cargo compartmentA

Circuit breaker: central

electrical module under

the glove compartmentA

Circuit breaker: central

electrical module under

the glove compartmentA

–

Headed windshield*, driv-

er's side

Windshield wipers 30

–

Climate system blowerA40

Headed windshield*, pas-

senger's side

ABS pump 40

ABS valves 20

Headlight washers 20

Pos Function A

Active Bending Lights-

headlight leveling*

Central electrical module

(under the glove compart-

ment)

ABS 5

Adjustable steering force*5

Engine Control Module

(ECM), transmission, SRS

Heated washer nozzles*10

Lighting panel 5

Relay coils 5

Auxiliary lights*20

Horn 15

Relay coils, Engine Control

Module (ECM)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

362

Pos Function A

Control module - auto-

matic transmission

A/C compressor (not 4-

cyl. engines)

Relay-coils A/C, relay coils

in engine compartment

cold zone for Start/Stop

Starter motor relayA30

Engine control module (4-

cyl. engines)

Ignition coils (5-cyl.

engine)

Engine Control Module (4-

cyl. engines)

Engine Control Module (5-

cyl. engine)

4-cyl. engines: mass air

meter, thermostat, EVAP

valve

5-cyl. engine: Injection

system, engine control

module

Pos Function A

A/C compressor (5-cyl.

engine), engine valves, oil

level sensor (5-cyl. only)

Engine valves/oil pump/

center heated oxygen

sensor (4-cyl. engines)

Front/rear heated oxygen

sensors (4-cyl. engines),

EVAP valve (5-cyl.

engine), heated oxygen

sensors (5-cyl. engine)

Oil pump/crankcase venti-

lation heater/coolant

pump (5-cyl. engines)

Ignition coils (4-cyl.

engines)

Fuel leakage detection (5-

cyl. engine), control mod-

ule for radiator shutter (5-

cyl. engine)

Fuel leakage detection,

A/C solenoid (4-cyl.

engines)

7.5

Coolant pump (4-cyl.

engines)

Pos Function A

Cooling fan 60 or 80

(4-cyl.

engines)

60 (5-cyl.

engines)

Power steering 100

AThis position is not used on vehicles with the optional Start/

Stop function, refer to the table "Engine compartment cold

zone" in Fuses – engine compartment cold zone (Start/Stop

only) (p. 367).

Related information

•Fuses – glove compartment (p. 363)

•Fuses – cargo area/trunk (p. 366)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 363

Fuses – glove compartment

The fuses under the glove compartment protect

components such as the infotainment system

and optional power seat.

Fusebox A: General fuses

Fusebox B: Control module fuses

Fold aside the upholstery covering the fuseboxes.

1. Press the cover's lock and fold it up.

2. The fuses are accessible.

Positions: fusebox A

Pos Function A

Circuit breaker for the infotain-

ment system and for fuses 16-20

Windshield/tailgate washers 25

Pos Function A

Keyless drive* (door handles) 5

Controls in driver's door 20

Controls in front passenger's door 20

Controls in right rear passenger's

door

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

364

Pos Function A

Controls in left rear passenger's

door

Keyless drive*7.5

Power driver's seat*20

Power front passenger's seat*20

Infotainment system display 5

Infotainment system: amplifier, Sir-

iusXM™ satellite radio*

Sensus control module 15

Bluetooth hands-free system 5

Power moonroof*

Courtesy lighting, climate system

sensor

12-volt sockets in tunnel console 15

Heated rear seat* (passenger's

side)

Heated rear seat* (driver's side) 15

Pos Function A

Heated front passenger's seat*15

Heated driver's seat*15

Park assist*

Blind Spot Information System

(BLIS)*, park assist camera*

All Wheel Drive* control module 15

Active chassis system*10

Positions: fusebox B

Pos Function A

Tailgate wiper 15

Front courtesy lighting, driver's

door power window controls,

power seat(s)*,

7.5

Instrument panel 5

Adaptive cruise control/collision

warning*

Pos Function A

Courtesy lighting, rain sensor*,

HomeLInk® Wireless Control Sys-

tem*

7.5

Steering wheel module 7.5

Cental locking: fuel filler door 10

Electrically heated steering wheel*15

Electrically heated windshield*15

Tailgate unlock 10

Electrical folding rear seat out-

board head restraints*

Fuel pump 20

Climate system control panel 5

Alarm, On-board diagnostic sys-

tem

Satellite radio *, audio system

amplifier

Airbag system, occupant weight

sensor

Collision warning system*5

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 365

Pos Function A

Accelerator pedal sensor, auto-

dim mirror function, heated rear

seats*

7.5

Brake lights 5

Power moonroof*20

Immobilizer 5

Related information

•Fuses – engine compartment (p. 360)

•Fuses – cargo area/trunk (p. 366)

•Fuses – engine compartment cold zone

(Start/Stop only) (p. 367)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

366

Fuses – cargo area/trunk

The fuses in the cargo area/trunk protect com-

ponents such as trailer connections, the parking

brake, etc.

Positions

Pos Function A

Electric parking brake (left side) 30

Electric parking brake (right side) 30

Heated rear window 30

Trailer socket 2*15

Pos Function A

12-volt socket in cargo area 15

Pos Function A

Trailer socket 1*40

Related information

•Fuses – engine compartment (p. 360)

•Fuses – glove compartment (p. 363)

•Fuses – engine compartment cold zone

(Start/Stop only) (p. 367)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

}}

367

Fuses – engine compartment cold

zone (Start/Stop only)7

There are fuses in the engine compartment cold

zone on models with the Start/Stop function.

Location of Start/Stop fuses

Positions

•Fuses A1, A2 and 1–11 are relays/circuit

breakers and should only be removed or

replaced by a trained and qualified Volvo

service technician.

•Fuse 12 may be changed at any time when

necessary.

Pos Function A

Circuit breaker: central electrical

module in the engine compart-

ment

175

Circuit breaker: fuseboxes under

the glove compartment, central

electrical module in the cargo

area

175

Pos Function A

Circuit breaker: fusebox B under

the glove compartment (see

Fuses – glove compartment

(p. 363))

7Option on 4-cyl. engines

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

368

Pos Function A

Circuit breaker: fusebox A under

the glove compartment (see

Fuses – glove compartment

(p. 363))

Circuit breaker: fusebox A under

the glove compartment (see

Fuses – glove compartment

(p. 363))

Circuit breaker: central electrical

module in the cargo area

Climate system blower 40

– –

Starter motor relay 30

Internal diode 50

Auxiliary battery 70

Central electrical module: auxili-

ary battery reference voltage,

auxiliary battery charging point

Related information

•Fuses – engine compartment (p. 360)

•Fuses – glove compartment (p. 363)

•Fuses – cargo area/trunk (p. 366)

•Start/Stop – introduction (p. 268)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

}}

369

Washing the car

The vehicle should be washed at regular inter-

vals since dirt, dust, insects and tar spots

adhere to the paint and may cause damage. To

help prevent corrosion, it is particularly important

to wash the car frequently in the wintertime.

The following points should be kept in mind when

washing and cleaning the car:

CAUTION

Avoid using car washing detergents with a pH

value lower than 3.5 or higher than 11.5.

Doing so could result in discoloring of ano-

dized aluminum surfaces on e.g., roof rails or

the frames around the side windows.

•Avoid washing your car in direct sunlight.

Doing so may cause detergents and wax to

dry out and become abrasive. To avoid

scratching, use lukewarm water to soften the

dirt before you wash with a soft sponge, and

plenty of sudsy water.

•Bird droppings: Remove from paintwork as

soon as possible. Otherwise the finish may

be permanently damaged.

•A detergent can be used to facilitate the

softening of dirt and oil.

•Dry the car with a clean chamois and

remember to clean the drain holes in the

doors and rocker panels.

•Tar spots can be removed with tar remover

after the car has been washed.

•A stiff-bristle brush and lukewarm soapy

water can be used to clean the wiper blades.

Frequent cleaning of the windshield and

wiper blades improves visibility considerably

and also helps prolong the service life of the

wiper blades.

•Wash off the dirt from the underside (wheel

housings, fenders, etc).

•In areas of high industrial fallout, more fre-

quent washing is recommended.

NOTE

When washing the car, remember to remove

dirt from the drain holes in the doors and sills.

CAUTION

•During high pressure washing, the spray

mouthpiece must never be closer to the

vehicle than 13" (30 cm). Do not spray

into the locks.

•Dirt, snow, etc., on the headlights can

reduce lighting capacity considerably.

Clean the headlights regularly, for exam-

ple when refueling.

Special moonroof cautions:

•Always close the moonroof and sun

shade before washing your vehicle.

•Never use abrasive cleaning agents on

the moonroof.

•Never use wax on the rubber seals

around the moonroof.

Exterior components

Volvo recommends the use of special cleaning

products, available at your Volvo retailer, for

cleaning colored plastic, rubber, or ornamental

components such as chromed strips on the exte-

rior of your vehicle. The instructions for using

these products should be followed carefully. Sol-

vents or stain removers should not be used.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

370

CAUTION

•Avoid waxing or polishing plastic or rub-

ber components

•Polishing chromed strips can wear away

or damage the surface

•Polishes containing abrasive substances

should not be used

Related information

•Polishing and waxing (p. 371)

•Cleaning the interior (p. 371)

Automatic car wash

The vehicle should be washed at regular inter-

vals since dirt, dust, insects and tar spots

adhere to the paint and may cause damage. To

help prevent corrosion, it is particularly important

to wash the car frequently in the wintertime.

•We do NOT recommend washing your car in

an automatic wash during the first few

months (because the paint will not have

hardened sufficiently).

•An automatic wash is a simple and quick way

to clean your car, but it is worth remembering

that it may not be as thorough as when you

yourself go over the car with sponge and

water. Keeping the underbody clean is most

important, especially in the winter. Some

automatic washers do not have facilities for

washing the underbody.

NOTE

Condensation may form temporarily on the

inside of the lenses of exterior lights such as

headlights, fog lights, or taillights. This is nor-

mal and the lights are designed to withstand

moisture. Normally, condensation will dissi-

pate after the lights have been on for a short

time.

CAUTION

•Before driving into an automatic car

wash, turn off the optional rain sensor to

avoid damaging the windshield wipers.

•Make sure that side view mirrors, auxiliary

lamps, etc, are secure, and that any

antenna(s) are retracted or removed. Oth-

erwise there is risk of the machine dis-

lodging them.

•Chromed wheels: Clean chrome-plated

wheels using the same detergents used

for the body of the vehicle. Aggressive

wheel-cleaning agents can permanently

stain chrome-plated wheels.

WARNING

•When the vehicle is driven immediately

after being washed, apply the brakes,

including the parking brake, several times

in order to remove any moisture from the

brake linings.

•Engine cleaning agents should not be

used when the engine is warm. This con-

stitutes a fire risk.

Related information

•Polishing and waxing (p. 371)

•Cleaning the interior (p. 371)

•Washing the car (p. 369)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

}}

371

Polishing and waxing

Normally, polishing is not required during the

first year after delivery, however, waxing may be

beneficial.

•Before applying polish or wax the vehicle

must be washed and dried. Tar spots can be

removed with kerosene or tar remover. Diffi-

cult spots may require a fine rubbing com-

pound.

•After polishing use liquid or paste wax.

•Several commercially available products con-

tain both polish and wax.

•Waxing alone does not substitute for polish-

ing a dull surface.

•A wide range of polymer-based waxes can

be purchased today. These waxes are easy to

use and produce a long-lasting, high-gloss

finish that protects the bodywork against oxi-

dation, road dirt and fading.

•Do not polish or wax your vehicle in direct

sunlight (the surface of the vehicle should

not be warmer than 113 °F (45 °C).

CAUTION

Volvo does not recommend the use of long-

life or durable paint protection coatings, some

of which may claim to prevent pitting, fading,

oxidation, etc. These coatings have not been

tested by Volvo for compatibility with your

vehicle's clear coat. Some of them may cause

the clear coat to soften, crack, or cloud. Dam-

age caused by application of paint protection

coatings may not be covered under your vehi-

cle's paint warranty.

Do not use metal polishing agents on ano-

dized aluminum surfaces. Doing so could

result in discoloring and damage the surface

finish.

Related information

•Washing the car (p. 369)

Cleaning the interior

Only use cleaning agents and car care products

recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and fol-

low the instructions included with the car care

product.

Cleaning the interior

Upholstery care

Fabric

Clean with soapy water or a detergent. For more

difficult spots caused by oil, ice cream, shoe pol-

ish, grease, etc., use a clothing/fabric stain

remover. Consult your Volvo retailer.

AlcanteraTM suede-like material

Suede-like upholstery can be cleaned with a soft

cloth and mild soap solution.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

372

Leather care

Volvo's leather upholstery is manufactured with a

protectant to repel soiling. Over time, sunlight,

grease and dirt can break down the protection.

Staining, cracking, scuffing, and fading can result.

Volvo offers an easy-to-use, non-greasy leather

care kit formulated to clean and beautify your

vehicle's leather, and to renew the protective

qualities of its finish. The cleaner removes dirt

and oil buildup. The light cream protectant

restores a barrier against soil and sunlight.

Volvo also offers a special leather softener that

should be applied after the cleaner and protec-

tant. It leaves leather soft and smooth, and

reduces friction between leather and other fin-

ishes in the vehicle.

Volvo recommends cleaning, protecting and con-

ditioning your vehicle's leather two to four times a

year. Ask your Volvo retailer about Leather Care

Kit 951 0251 and Leather Softener 943 7429.

Cleaning leather upholstery

1. Pour leather cleaner on a damp sponge and

squeeze it until the cleaner foams.

2. Apply the foam to the stain by moving the

sponge with circular movements.

3. Dampen the stain thoroughly with the

sponge. Let the sponge absorb the stain, do

not rub.

4. Dry the stain with soft paper towels or a

towel, and allow the leather to dry completely.

Protecting leather upholstery

1. Put a small amount of protectant cream on a

cloth and apply a thin coating of cream to the

upholstery with light circular movements.

2. Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes.

This will help the leather resist staining and pro-

tect against sunlight's harmful UV rays.

CAUTION

•Under no circumstances should gasoline,

naphtha or similar cleaning agents be

used on the plastic or the leather since

these can cause damage.

•Take extra care when removing stains

such as ink or lipstick since the coloring

can spread.

•Use solvents sparingly. Too much solvent

can damage the seat padding.

•Start from the outside of the stain and

work toward the center.

•Sharp objects (e.g. pencils or pens in a

pocket) or Velcro fasteners on clothing

may damage the textile upholstery.

•Clothing that is not colorfast, such as

new jeans or suede garments, may stain

the upholstery.

Cleaning a leather-covered steering wheel

•Remove soil, dust, etc., with a damp sponge

and a neutral soap solution.

•Leather should be allowed to breath. Never

cover the steering wheel with a plastic pro-

tector.

•Volvo recommends cleaning, protecting and

conditioning the steering wheel with Volvo's

Leather Care Kit 951 0251 and Leather

Softener 943 7429.

If there are stains on the steering wheel:

Type 1 (ink, wine, coffee, milk, sweat or blood)

–Use a soft cloth or sponge. Wipe the wheel

with a solution with 5% ammonia. For blood

stains, mix approx. 1 cup (2 dl) of water and

one ounce (25g) of salt and wipe the stain.

Type 2 (fat, oil, sauces, or chocolate)

1. Same procedure as for type I stains.

2. Finish by rubbing the wheel with absorbent

paper or a towel.

Type 3 (dry soil or dust)

1. Remove the soil/dust with a soft brush.

2. Same procedure as for type I stains.

CAUTION

Sharp objects, such as rings, could damage

the leather on the steering wheel.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

}}

373

Cleaning the seat belts

Clean only with lukewarm water and a mild soap

solution.

Cleaning floor mats

The floor mats should be vacuumed or brushed

clean regularly, especially during winter when

they should be taken out for drying. Spots on tex-

tile mats can be removed with a mild detergent.

For best protection in winter, Volvo recommends

the use of Volvo rubber floor mats. Consult your

Volvo retailer.

Spots on interior plastic, metal, or wood

surfaces

Cleaning interior plastic components should be

done with a cleaning agent specially designed for

this purpose. Consult your Volvo retailer.

CAUTION

•Do not use cleaning agents with high

alcohol content such as washer fluid to

clean instrument panel glass.

•Never spray cleaning agents or water

directly onto components with electrical

buttons or controls. Clean components of

this type by applying the cleaning agent/

water sparingly to a cloth and wiping the

components so that no liquid penetrates

into these components.

Related information

•Washing the car (p. 369)

Touching up paintwork

Paint damage requires immediate attention to

avoid rusting. Make it a habit to check the finish

regularly, for instance washing the vehicle.

Touch-up if necessary.

Paint repairs require special equipment and skill.

Contact your Volvo retailer for any extensive dam-

age.

Minor scratches can be repaired by using Volvo

touch-up paint.

Color code

Sample color code: US models

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

374

Sample color code: Canadian models

Make sure you have the right color. See Label

information (p. 376) for the location of this label

(label number 4 in the illustration).

Minor stone chips and scratches

Material:

•Primer – can

•Paint – touch-up pen

•Brush

•Masking tape

If the stone chip has not gone down to the bare

metal and an undamaged color coat remains, you

can add paint immediately after removing dirt.

NOTE

When touching up the vehicle, it should be

clean and dry. The surface temperature

should be above 60 °F (15 °C).

Repairing stone chips

G021832

1. Place a strip of masking tape over the dam-

aged surface. Pull the tape off so that any

loose flakes of paint adhere to it.

2. Thoroughly mix the primer and apply it with a

small brush.

3. When the primer surface is dry, the paint can

be applied using a brush. Mix the paint thor-

oughly; apply several thin paint coats and let

dry after each application.

4. If there is a longer scratch, you may want to

protect surrounding paint by masking it off

5. After a few days, polish the touched-up

areas. Use a soft rag and a small amount of

polish.

Related information

•Label information (p. 376)

SPECIFICATIONS

376

Label information

The labels in your vehicle provide information

such as the chassis number, paint code, tire

inflation pressure, etc.

SPECIFICATIONS

}}

377

Location of labels

SPECIFICATIONS

378

List of labels

Vehicle Emission Control Information.

Your Volvo is designed to meet all applicable

emission standards, as evidenced by the cer-

tification label on the underside of the hood.

For further information regarding these regu-

lations, please consult your Volvo retailer.

Engine oil. This label contains the recom-

mended engine oil specifications.

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). The

VIN plate is located on the top left surface of

the dashboard. The Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN) should always be quoted in all

correspondence concerning your vehicle with

the retailer and when ordering parts.

Tire inflation pressures. This label indicates

the correct inflation pressures for the tires

that were on the vehicle when it left the fac-

tory.

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards

(FMVSS) specifications (USA) and Minis-

try of Transport (CMVSS) standards

(Canada). Your Volvo is designed to meet all

applicable safety standards, as evidenced by

the certification label on the driver's side B-

pillar (the structural member at the side of

the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's door

opening). This label also includes codes for

paint color, etc. For further information regar-

ding these regulations, please consult your

Volvo retailer. U.S. models have the upper

decal; Canadian models have the lower one.

Related information

•Weights (p. 381)

•Engine specifications (p. 382)

SPECIFICATIONS

}}

379

Dimensions

This section lists your vehicle's most important

dimensions.

SPECIFICATIONS

380

Dimensions–V60CC

Position Dimension in. (mm)

A Ground clearance

(curb weight + 2

people)A7.5 (191)

B Wheelbase 109.2 (2774)

C Length 182.6 (4637)

D Load length, floor,

seatback down 68.9 (1749)

E Load length, floor 38.5 (978)

F Height 60.8 (1545)

Position Dimension in. (mm)

G Load height 25.9 (658)

H Track, front 63.7 (1619)B/

63.3 (1609)C

I Track, rear 62.1 (1577)B

61.7 (1567)C

J Load width, floor 42.6 (1082)

K Width 73.5 (1866)

Position Dimension in. (mm)

L Width incl. door

mirrors (folded

out) 82.6 (2097)

M Width incl. door

mirrors (folded in) 74.8 (1899)

AVaries slightly depending on tire size, optional sport chassis, etc.

Bwith 50 mm offset

Cwith 55 mm offset

SPECIFICATIONS

381

Weights

The following table lists important weight data

for your vehicle.

Category USA Canada

Gross vehicle weight

4-cyl. AWDA4980 lbs 2260 kg

Capacity weight All models: 990 lbs All models: 450 kg

Permissible axle weights, front

4-cyl. AWD 2650 lbs 1205 kg

Permissible axle weights, rear

4-cyl. AWD 2440 lbs 1105 kg

Curb weight 3870 - 3930 lbs 1760 - 1765 kg

Max. roof load 165 lbs 75 kg

Max. trailer weights

Without brakes

With brakes

1650 lbs

2,000 lbs

750 kg

900 kg

Max. tongue weight 165 lbs 75 kg

AAll Wheel Drive

Related information

•Loading specifications (p. 312)

•Loading specifications – load limit (p. 312)

SPECIFICATIONS

382

Engine specifications

The following table provides technical data for

the respective engines. Engine specifications for

Special Edition vehicles may vary.

Some of the engines listed here may not be

available in all markets.

Engine specifications

Engine T5 AWD

Engine designation B4204T11

Output (kW/rps) 179/93

Output (hp/rpm) 240/5600

Torque (Nm/rps) 350/25-75

Torque (ft. lbs./rpm) 258/1500–4500

No. of cylinders 4

Bore (in/mm) 3.23/82

Stroke (in/mm) 3.67/93.2

Displacement 1.97 liters (120.2 cu. in.)

Compression ratio 10.8:1

Related information

•Coolant – specification and volume (p. 385)

•Oil specifications (p. 383)

•Oil volume (p. 384)

SPECIFICATIONS

383

Oil specifications

Full synthetic engine oil meeting the minimum

ACEA A5/B5 must be used. Lower quality oils

may not offer the same fuel economy, engine

performance, or engine protection.

Volvo recommends:

Refer to the warranty and Service Records infor-

mation booklet for information on oil change

intervals and oil type requirements.

NOTE

This vehicle comes from the factory with syn-

thetic oil.

Oil additives must not be used.

Oil viscosity

Incorrect viscosity oil can shorten engine life

under normal use. SAE 5W-30 will provide good

fuel economy and engine protection. See the vis-

cosity chart.

Viscosity chart

Extreme engine operation

SAE 0W-30 oil meeting ACEA A5/B5 require-

ments is recommended for extreme driving con-

ditions.

Related information

•Oil volume (p. 384)

•Engine compartment – engine oil (p. 339)

SPECIFICATIONS

384

Oil volume

The following table provides technical data for

the respective engines. Some of these engines

may not be available in all markets. Engine spec-

ifications for Special Edition vehicles may vary.

Engine model Approx. volume (incl. filter)

6-cylinder 7.18 US qts (6.8 liters)

5-cylinder 5.8 US qts (5.5 liters)

4-cylinder 6.2 US qts (5.9 liters)

Related information

•Engine compartment – engine oil (p. 339)

•Oil specifications (p. 383)

SPECIFICATIONS

385

Coolant – specification and volume

The table lists coolant volumes and specifica-

tions.

System Volume Specification

B4204T11 8.7 US qts.

(8.3 liters)

Coolant with

corrosion inhibi-

tor mixed with

water (50/50

mix), see pack-

aging.

Related information

•Engine compartment – coolant (p. 341)

Transmission oil – specification and

volumes

The table lists transmission oil1 volumes and

specifications.

Automatic

transmis-

sion

Volume Specifica-

tion

TF-80SD 7.4 US qts

(7 liters)

Transmis-

sion fluid

AW1

TG-81SC 7 US qts ( 6.6

liters)

TF-71SC 7.1 US qts (6.8

liters)

Related information

•Label information (p. 376)

Brake fluid – specification and

volume

Brake fluid transfers braking force when the

brake pedal is depressed to the master cylinder

and to the slave cylinders on each wheel.

Specification: Volvo Original Standard DOT 4 or

equivalent

Volume: 0.63 US qts (0.6 liters)

Related information

•Engine compartment – brake fluid (p. 342)

1Under normal driving conditions the transmission oil does not need changing during its service life. However, it may be necessary under adverse driving conditions.

SPECIFICATIONS

386

Power steering – specification

This fluid is used to help reduce and regulate

steering force.

Specification:Power steering fluid recom-

mended by Volvo.

Related information

•Engine compartment – power steering fluid

(p. 343)

Fuel tank volume – specification

and volume

The table lists the fuel tank volume for your vehi-

cle.

Volume Specification

17.8 US gallons (67.5 liters) –

Related information

•Refueling – opening/closing fuel filler door

(p. 289)

•Refueling – opening/closing fuel cap

(p. 290)

•Refueling – octane rating (p. 287)

•Engine specifications (p. 382)

SPECIFICATIONS

387

Tire inflation – pressure table

The following tire pressures are recommended

by Volvo for your vehicle. Refer to the tire infla-

tion placard (see Tire inflation – general informa-

tion (p. 308) for its location) for information spe-

cific to the tires installed on your vehicle at the

factory.

Some of the tire sizes listed here may not be

available for all models in all markets.

Tire size Cold tire pressure for up to five persons

Front

psi (kPa)

Rear

psi (kPa)

235/50 R18 36 (250) 36 (250)

235/45 R19 39 (270) 39 (270)

Temporary spare tire

T125/80R17

60 (420) 60 (420)

NOTE

Please consult a Volvo retailer’s Parts depart-

ment for the most up-to-date specifications.

SPECIFICATIONS

388

Air conditioning – specification and

volume

The air conditioning system in your vehicle con-

tains the following:

Refrigerant: R134a (HFC134a)

Volume: 1.7 lbs (770 g)

Compressor oil: PAG

SPECIFICATIONS

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 389

Battery specifications

If the battery is replaced, replace it with a battery

of the same cold start capacity as the original

(see the decal on the battery).

General information

WARNING

PROPOSITION 65 WARNING!

Battery posts, terminals, and related accesso-

ries contain lead and lead compounds, chemi-

cals known to the state of California to cause

cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands

after handling.

12 volt system with a voltage-regulated alterna-

tor. Single pole system in which the chassis and

engine block are used as conductors. The nega-

tive terminal is connected to the chassis.

Motor Voltage (V) Cold start capacity

CCA (Cold Cranking Amperes) (A)

Engines with Start/Stop*12 800A

All other engines 12 520–800

AAGM (Absorbed Glass Mat) batteries have to be used on models with Start/Stop

SPECIFICATIONS

390

Symbols – general information

The following tables list the most common warn-

ing and indicator lights and symbols and a refer-

ence to where more detailed information can be

found.

Introduction

The symbols in the vehicle's various displays are

divided into three main categories:

•Warning symbols

•Indicator symbols

•Information symbols

The following tables list the most common sym-

bols, their meaning and the pages in this manual

that provide more detailed information.

NOTE

Not all of the symbols shown in the related

articles are available in all models or on all

markets. Local variations may occur.

Warning symbol

: The red warning symbol illuminates to

indicate a problem related to safety and/or driva-

bility. A message will also appear in the main

instruments panel's display.

Information symbol

: The information symbol illuminates and a

text message is displayed to provide the driver

with necessary information about one of the vehi-

cle's systems.

Related information

•Information displays – indicator symbols

(p. 73)

•Information displays – warning symbols

(p. 75)

•Information display – messages (p. 115)

Warning symbols

The following tables list the most common warn-

ing and indicator lights and symbols and a refer-

ence to where more detailed information can be

found.

: The red warning symbol illuminates to

indicate a problem related to safety and/or driva-

bility. A message will also appear in the main

instruments panel's display.

: The information symbol illuminates and a

text message is displayed to provide the driver

with necessary information about one of the

vehicle's systems.

SPECIFICATIONS
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 391
Symbols in the main instrument panel
Warning symbols in the instrument panel
Symbol Description See
Low oil pressure (p. 75)
Parking brakeA(p. 75)
SRS airbags (p. 75)
Seat belt reminder (p. 75)
Generator not charging (p. 75)
Fault in the brake system (p. 75)
Warning symbol (p. 75)
AThe symbol is Park only on models with the optional digital
instrument panel.
Related information
•Information displays – indicator symbols
(p. 73)
•Information displays – warning symbols
(p. 75)
•Information display – messages (p. 115)
Indicator symbols
The following tables list the most common warn-
ing and indicator lights and symbols and a refer-
ence to where more detailed information can be
found.
: The red warning symbol illuminates to
indicate a problem related to safety and/or driva-
bility. A message will also appear in the main
instruments panel's display.
: The information symbol illuminates and a
text message is displayed to provide the driver
with necessary information about one of the
vehicle's systems.
Indicator symbols in the instrument
panel
Symbol Description See
Fault in the Active Bend-
ing Light (ABL)*system
(p. 73)
Malfunction indicator
light
(p. 73)
Anti-lock brake system
(ABS)
(p. 73)
Rear fog lights on (p. 73)
Stability system, Hill
Descent Control, Trailer
Stability Assist*
(p. 73)
Symbol Description See
Tire pressure monitoring
sensor (TPMS)
(p. 73)
Low fuel level (p. 73)
Information symbol, see
text in information dis-
play
(p. 73)
High beam indicator (p. 73)
Left turn signal indicator (p. 73)
Right turn signal indica-
tor
(p. 73)
Stability system , Sport
mode
(p. 173)
Related information
•Information displays – indicator symbols
(p. 73)
•Information displays – warning symbols
(p. 75)
•Information display – messages (p. 115)

SPECIFICATIONS
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
392
Information symbols
The following tables list the most common warn-
ing and indicator lights and symbols and a refer-
ence to where more detailed information can be
found.
: The red warning symbol illuminates to
indicate a problem related to safety and/or driva-
bility. A message will also appear in the main
instruments panel's display.
: The information symbol illuminates and a
text message is displayed to provide the driver
with necessary information about one of the
vehicle's systems.
Information symbols in the instrument
panel
Symbol Description See
Adaptive Cruise Con-
trol *
(p. 182)
Adaptive Cruise Con-
trol *
(p. 182)
Adaptive Cruise Con-
trol *
(p. 182)
Adaptive Cruise Con-
trol * (Distance alert)
(p. 182)
Radar sensor*(p. 191)
Symbol Description See
Camera sensor, laser
sensor
(p. 214)
(p. 207)
Collision Warning with
Full Auto-brake and
Pedestrian Detection*
(p. 219)
Active Bending Lights
(ABL)*
(p. 93)
Driver Alert System*(p. 221)
Driver Alert System*(p. 221)
Parking brake (p. 280)
Rain sensor*(p. 101)
Active High Beams
(AHB)*
(p. 92)
Windshield sensor*(p. 92)
Symbol Description See
Driver Alert System*
(Lane Departure
Warning/Lane
Keeping Aid)
(p. 227)
Driver Alert System*
(Lane Departure
Warning/Lane
Keeping Aid)
(p. 227)
Driver Alert System*
(Lane Departure
Warning/Lane
Keeping Aid)
(p. 227)
Fuel tank on passeng-
er's side of the vehicle
(p. 289)
Related information
•Information displays – indicator symbols
(p. 73)
•Information displays – warning symbols
(p. 75)
•Information display – messages (p. 115)

SPECIFICATIONS
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 393
Information symbols – ceiling
console
The following tables list the most common warn-
ing and indicator lights and symbols and a refer-
ence to where more detailed information can be
found.
: The red warning symbol illuminates to
indicate a problem related to safety and/or driva-
bility. A message will also appear in the main
instruments panel's display.
: The information symbol illuminates and a
text message is displayed to provide the driver
with necessary information about one of the
vehicle's systems.
Symbol Description See
Seat belt reminder (p. 32)
Occupant Weight Sensor (p. 38)
Related information
•Information displays – indicator symbols
(p. 73)
•Information displays – warning symbols
(p. 75)
•Information display – messages (p. 115)
Information symbols – center
console
The following tables list the most common warn-
ing and indicator lights and symbols and a refer-
ence to where more detailed information can be
found.
: The red warning symbol illuminates to
indicate a problem related to safety and/or driva-
bility. A message will also appear in the main
instruments panel's display.
: The information symbol illuminates and a
text message is displayed to provide the driver
with necessary information about one of the
vehicle's systems.
Symbol Description See
Audio files Sensus Infotain-
ment supple-
ment
CD folder Sensus Infotain-
ment supple-
ment
Video files Sensus Infotain-
ment supple-
ment
Bluetooth-con-
nected cell
phone
Sensus Infotain-
ment supple-
ment
Symbol Description See
BluetoothTM
hands-free
Sensus Infotain-
ment supple-
ment
HD radio Sensus Infotain-
ment supple-
ment
Park Assist*(p. 237)
Related information
•Information displays – indicator symbols
(p. 73)
•Information displays – warning symbols
(p. 75)
•Information display – messages (p. 115)

INDEX
395
A
ABS (anti-lock brake system) 279
Accessory installation warning 24
Active chassis system 172
Active high beams 92
Active yaw control 172, 173
Adaptive brake lights 279
Adaptive cruise control 182
Airbags
disconnecting the front passenger’s
side 38
front 35
inflatable curtain 42
side impact 41
Air conditioning 132, 133
Air distribution 129, 134
Air distribution table 136
Air vents 129
Alarm 168, 169, 170
All Wheel Drive 275
Ambient temperature sensor 78
Anti-freeze 286, 341
Anti-lock brake system
warning light 74
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) 279
Approach lighting 99, 153
Auto-dim rearview mirror 106
Automatic locking retractor 49
Automatic transmission
Eco (driving function) 273
Geartronic 264, 265
general description 262, 265
oil 385
shiftlock override 267
Axle weight 312
B
Battery
maintenance 356, 357
remote key, replacing 158
replacing 357
specifications 389
start/stop 389
warning symbols 354
Blind Spot Information System (BLIS) 250
Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) 253
Booster cushion, integrated 59, 61, 62
Booster cushions 55
Brake lights 279
Brake system
ABS 279
Brake pad inspection 277
checking fluid level 342
emergency brake assistance 280
fluid 385
general information 277
Hill Descent Control 275, 276
Bulbs
cargo area lighting 350
headlights 344, 345, 346, 347, 348
introduction 344
license plate lights 350
specifications 351
C
Camera, Park Assist 246
Capacity weight 312
Cargo area
changing bulbs 350
steel grid 148
Cargo area cover 147
Catalytic converter 290
Central locking system, introduction 150,
151, 152, 154, 157
Chains 315
INDEX

INDEX
396
Check Engine warning light 74
Child restraints
recalls and registration 49
Child restraint systems 49
booster cushions 55
convertible seats 53
infant seats 51
ISOFIX/LATCH anchors 56
top tether anchors 58
Child safety 47
booster cushions 55
child restraint systems 49
convertible seats 53
infant seats 51
Child safety locks 63
City safety 201, 202
Climate system 133
air distribution 129, 134, 136
air vents 129
Interior Air Quality System 127
introduction 126
passenger compartment filter 127
refrigerant 126
Clock, setting 79
Cold weather driving 286
Collision warning system 208, 210, 213,
214, 216, 217
Compass in rearview mirror 107
Connected service booking 335
Conserving electrical current 285
Convertible seats 53
Coolant 341, 385
Cooling system, general information 284
Corner traction control 173
Courtesy lighting 98
Crash event data 19
Crash mode 45, 46, 47
Cruise control 179, 181
adaptive 182
Curb weight 312
Current, conserving 285
Cyclist detection 212, 216
D
Daytime running lights 90
Defroster 133
Detachable key blade 155, 156
Disconnecting the front passenger’s airbag 38
Distance Alert 197
Dome lighting 98
Door mirrors 104, 105
Driver alert 221, 222, 223, 225
Lane Departure Warning 227, 228,
229, 230
Lane Keeping Aid 232, 233, 235, 236
Driver distraction warning 24
Driving economically 291
Driving in cold weather 286
Driving through water 284
E
ECC 131, 132
Eco (driving function) 273
Eco coast 273
Eco guide 72
Economical driving 291
Electrically heated steering wheel 90
Electrical sockets 142
Electric parking brake 280, 281, 282, 283
Electronic Climate Control 130, 132
air distribution table 136
Interior Air Quality System 128
Electronic oil level sensor 340
Electronic stability control 172
Emergency locking retractor 49

INDEX
397
Emergency starting 261
Emergency towing 295, 296
Emission inspection readiness 335
Engine
overheating 76
specifications 382
Start/Stop 267, 268, 269, 270, 271, 272
starting 258
switching off 259, 261
Engine compartment overview 338
Engine Drag Control (EDC) 173
Engine oil 383
checking 339
low pressure warning light 75
volumes 384
Engine remote start (ERS) 260
Environment 23
F
Federal Clean Air Act 332
Flat tires
repairing with tire sealing system 324
Floor mats
cleaning 373
placing correctly 258
Fluid specifications 385, 386
Fog lights 74
rear 96
Four C (active chassis system) 172
Front airbags 35
disconnecting passenger’s side airbag 38
Front park assist 237, 245
Front seats 81
heated 131
Fuel filler cap 290
Fuel filler door, opening 289, 290
Fuel level warning light 74
Fuel requirements 286, 287
Fuel tank volume 386
Fuses 359, 360, 366
G
Garage door opener
HomeLink® Wireless Control Sys-
tem 110, 111
Gasoline requirements 287
Gas tank volume 386
Gauges 69
Geartronic 265
Geartronic automatic transmission 264, 265
Generator warning light 75
Glossary of tire terminology 313
Grocery bag holder 146
Gross vehicle weight 312
H
Hazard warning flashers 96
Headlights
Active Bending Lights 93
active high beams 92
changing bulbs 345, 346, 347, 348
daytime running lights 90
high/low beams 91
high beam flash 91
tunnel detection 93
Headlight washers 101
Head restraints, rear seat 85, 86
Heated front seats 131
Heated oxygen sensors 290
Heated rear seats 131
Heated steering wheel 90
Heated windshield 106, 133
High beams 91
active 92

INDEX
398
Hill Descent Control 275, 276
Hill Start Assist (HSA) 263
Hoisting the vehicle 334
HomeLink® Wireless Control System 110,
111
Home safe lighting 99
Hood, opening/closing 337
Horn 89
I
ID, Volvo 22
Ignition modes 79, 80
Immobilizer 152
Important information 15
Indicator lights 69, 71, 75
Infant seats 51
Inflatable Curtain 42
Inflation pressure 308, 309
Inflation pressure table 387
Information and warning symbols, table of 390
Information lights 69, 71, 75
Inspection readiness 335
Instrument lighting 95
"theater" lighting 95
Instrument overview 66, 69
Instrument panel 69, 114, 115
Integrated two-stage booster cushion 59,
61, 62
Interior Air Quality System 127
Interior lighting 98
Internet connection
booking service 335
ISOFIX/LATCH anchors 56
J
Jack
attaching 303
location of 303
Jump starting 261
K
Key blade 150, 151, 152, 154, 155, 156,
157, 160
private locking 156
Keyless drive 159
general description 161, 162
starting the vehicle 258
Keyless locking/unlocking 159
L
Labels
list of 378
location of 377
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) 227, 228,
229, 230
Lane Keeping Aid 232, 233, 235, 236
LATCH anchors 56
Leather care 372
Lighting panel 90
Loading the vehicle 144, 145, 312
roof loads 144
Locking 163, 164, 166
tailgate 166
Locking the vehicle 153

INDEX
399
Locks, child safety 63
Low beams 91
Low oil pressure warning light 75
M
Main instrument panel 114, 115
Maintenance 332
hoisting the vehicle 334
performed by the owner 333
Malfunction indicator light 74
Messages in the instrument panel 114, 115
Mirrors
defroster 106
power door 104, 105
rearview, auto-dim function 106
retractable 104, 105
vanity 143
Moonroof 108, 109
Motor oil
checking 339
volumes 384
O
Occupant safety 28
Occupant weight sensor 38
Octane recommendations 287
Odometer, trip 79
Oil
checking 339
volumes 384
Oil level sensor 340
Oil quality 383
OK button 114, 115
On Call Roadside Assistance 25
Outside temperature sensor 78
Overhead courtesy lighting 98
Overheating, engine 76
Ownership, changing 19
Oxygen sensors, heated 290
P
Paint, touching up 373
Park assist 237, 245
Park Assist Camera 246
Park Assist Pilot 241
Parking brake
electric, applying/releasing 280, 281,
282, 283
warning light 75
Parking lights 95
Pedestrian detection 213, 216
Polishing 371
Power front seat
memory function 82
Power meter 72
Power mirrors 104, 105
defroster 106
Power moonroof 108, 109
Power steering
adjustable 177
fluid 343
Power steering fluid 386
Power windows 103
Pregnancy, using seat belts during 33
Private locking 156
PROPOSITION 65 WARNING 261, 358, 389
R
Rain sensor 101
Rear fog lights 96

INDEX
400
Rear park assist 237, 245
Rear seat head restraints 86
Rear seats
center head restraint 85
folding 85, 87
heated 131
Rearview mirror
auto-dim function 106
compass 107
Rear window defroster 106
Recalls 28
Recalls, child restraints 49
Refrigerant 388
Refueling 286, 287
fuel filler cap 290
fuel filler door 289, 290
fuel tank volume 386
Registering child restraints 49
Remote control
private locking 156
Remote key 150, 151, 152, 154, 157
approach lighting 153
immobilizer 152
key blade 150, 151, 152, 154, 155,
156, 157
locking the vehicle 153
replacing the battery 158
unlocking the vehicle 153
Reporting safety defects 29
Roadside Assistance 25
Road sign information (RSI) 177
Roof loads 144
S
Safety, occupant 28
Safety defects, reporting 29
Safety mode 45
Seat belt
reminder 32
Seat belts
Automatic locking retractor/Emergency
locking retractor 49
buckling 31
maintenance 31
pretensioners 30
reminder 32
reminder warning light 75
securing child restraint systems 51, 53, 55
unbuckling 31
use during pregnancy 33
using 30
Seats, front 81, 82
Sensus 113
Service
connected service booking 335
Shiftlock 15
override 267
Side door mirrors 104, 105
Side impact airbags 41
Sign information (RSI) 177
Snow chains 315
Snow tires 315, 316
Spare tire 306
Spin control 172, 173
SRS 33
Stability system 172, 173, 175
Corner Traction Control (CTC) 173
Engine Drag Control (EDC) 173
indicator light 74
Start/Stop (engine function) 267, 268,
269, 270, 271, 272
Starting the engine 258
remote start 260
with keyless drive 258
Starting the vehicle
after a crash (crash mode) 45, 46, 47
Start inhibitor (immobilizer) 152
Steel grid in cargo area 148

INDEX
401
Steering wheel
adjusting 89
heated 90
horn 89
keypad 89
Steering wheel paddles 89
Stone chips, touching up 373
Storage spaces 140
Studded tires 315, 316
Sunroof (moonroof) 108, 109
Sun shade 103
Supplemental restraint system 33
warning light 75
Symbols, overview 390
T
Tailgate
locking/unlocking 166
opening manually 167
wiper/washer 102
Tailgate wipers 353
Temperature sensor
ambient 78
Temporary spare tire 306
Three-way catalytic converter 290
Tire designations 310
Tire inflation pressure 387
Tire Monitor 317, 318, 319
Tire Pressure Monitoring System 320, 323
indicator light 74
Tires 300
age 301
changing from summer to winter 303
glossary of terms 313
improving economy 302
inflation pressure 308, 309
inflation pressure table 387
rotation 300
snow 315, 316
spare 306
specifications 310
speed ratings 310
storing 301
studded 315, 316
tire pressure monitoring system 320
tire sealing system 324
tread wear indicator 302
uniform tire quality grading 314
Tire sealing system 324
Top tether anchors (child restraint sys-
tems) 58
Touching up paint 373
Towing a trailer 292, 294
Towing the vehicle 295, 296
Traction control 172, 173
Trailer towing 292, 294
Transmission
general description 262, 265
Hill Start Assist 263
oil 385
shiftlock override 267
Tread wear indicator 302
Trip computer 116
Trip odometers 79
Trips, long distance 285
Tunnel detection 93
Turn signals 97
changing bulbs 348
indicator lights 74
Two-stage booster cushion 59, 61, 62
U
Uniform Tire Quality Grading 314
Unlocking the tailgate 166
Unlocking the vehicle 153, 163, 164, 166

INDEX
402
V
Vanity mirror 143
changing bulbs 350
Vehicle Event Data 19
Vehicle information 21
Vehicle loading 144, 145, 312
roof loads 144
Vehicle maintenance 332
performed by the owner 333
Vehicle weights 381
Volvo and the environment 23
Volvo ID 22
Volvo maintenance 332
Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance 25
Volvo programs 25
Volvo Sensus 113
W
Warning flashers, hazard 96
Warning lights 69, 71, 75
Warning symbol 76
Warning system, collision 208, 210, 216
Warranties 332
Washer fluid 354
Washers
headlight 101
windshield 100
Water, driving through 284
Waxing 371
Weights 381
Wheels 300
changing 303
storing 301
Whiplash Protection System 43
Windows
power 103
sun shade 103
Windshield
heated 106, 133
rain sensor 101
washers 101
wipers/washers 100
Windshield washer fluid 354
Windshield wipers 351
service position 351
Wiper blades
replacing 351, 352
replacing tailgate wiper 353

Volvo 2017 V60CC Owner Manual

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation